2020-11-19 Project Manual SPC V700000-0013 000 00 Part1

Index No.
CS
Page 1 of 2
Issue No. Issued for Construction
Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION

TEXAS
Issued for Construction - June 22, 2020
KNIT Project Number: 190193
Project Manager | Architect: John Sawdon Signature:______________________________

Title: Principal Date: June 22, 2020
_____________
KNIT Revision 1: 10.21.2020
This document has been reviewed and confirmed

to be UNCLASSIFIED and contains no UCNI.
Name: Cole Guyer
COVER SHEET Date: 11/30/2020 CS - 1
CNS eDC/RO ID: 258262
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. TOC

Page 1 of 4
Issue No. Issue for Construction
OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 35 63 SUSTAINABILITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
01 35 66 SUSTAINABILITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
01 42 16 DEFINITIONS
01 57 21 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS
01 61 16 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND_VOC_CONTENT RESTRICTIONS
01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIRMENTS
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
03 05 16 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACESSORIES
03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING
03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 35 11 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
04 05 11 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY
04 43 13 STONE MASONRY VENEER
DIVISION 05 – METALS
05 05 23 STRUCTURAL WELDING
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING
05 31 00 STEEL DECKING
05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION
07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS
07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS – with LEED reflective paint
07 46 19 STEEL SIDING
07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES
07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING
07 92 00 JOINT SEALERS
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. TOC

Page 2 of 4
08 80 00 GLAZING
08 91 00 LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPERATION
09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 30 00 TILING
09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING
09 68 13 TILE CARPETING
09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING – LEED V4/GREEN PRODUCT GUIDE SPEC.
09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 14 00 SIGNAGE
10 21 13.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 22 39 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
10 28 00 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10 56 13 METAL STORAGE SHELVING
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
12 24 00 WINDOW SHADES
12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPREESION

21 11 00 FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING
21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 11 23.21 INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS
22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 13 19.13 SANITARY DRAINS
22 33 00 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER
22 41 00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 42 13.13 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
22 42 13.16 COMMERCIAL URINALS
22 42 16.13 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
22 42 16.16 COMMERCIAL SINKS
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. TOC

Page 3 of 4
22 47 16 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION
23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL
23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 31 13 METAL DUCTS
23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 46 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
23 37 13.13 AIR DIFFUSERS
23 37 13.23 REGISTERS AND GRILLES
23 81 26 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
23 81 29 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW AIR-CONDITIONERS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 48.16 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL
26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
26 09 50 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS TESTING
26 12 19 PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 13 LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 16 PANELBOARDS
26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
26 28 13 FUSES
26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 29 23 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 41 13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
26 51 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 52 13 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING
26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING
27 05 48.16 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. TOC

Page 4 of 4
27 11 00 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS

27 11 16 COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES
27 13 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE CABLING
27 13 23 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
27 15 13 COMMUNCIATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 15 23 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 51 16 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 46 21.11 ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 16 00 SITE PAVEMENT
ATTACHMENT
LEED CREDIT CHECKLIST
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 2020-06-19
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. DIV-01 3563
Page 1 of 12

SECTION 01 3563
SUSTAINABILITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1. Quality Requirements Section 01 40 00
2. Construction Waste Management and Disposal Section 01 74 19
1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

1. AMERICAN Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning (ASHRAE):
1. ASHRAE 0 – 2005 The Commissioning Process
2. ASHRAE 1.1 – 2007 HVAC&R Technical Requirements for the
Commissioning process
3. ASHRAE 55 – 2010 Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human Occupancy
4. ASHRAE 62.1 – 2010 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
2. U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC):
Website: http://www.usgbc.org
1. LEED v4 BD+C LEED v4 for Building Design and Construction: New
Construction and Major Renovation
3. Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI):
Website www.carpet-rug.org
1. CRI Green Label Indoor Air Quality Test Program – Green Label Testing
Program
4. Green Seal Environmental Standards, Website: www.greenseal.org
1. Standard GS-11-version 3.2 2015 Architectural Coatings
5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):
Website: www.aqmd.gov
1. IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007
6. SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District, California State (SCAQMD):
Website: www.aqmd.gov
1. SCAQMD Rule 1113- Architectural Coatings 2011
2. SCAQMD Rule 1168- Adhesives and Sealants Applications 05
7. United States Federal Trade Commission (US Federal Trade Commission):
Website: www.ftc.gov
1. 16 CFR 260.7 Trade Commission Guidelines for the Use of
Environmental Marketing Claims
8. Forest Stewardship Council
Website: www.fsc.org/en
1. FSC-STD-40-004 Chain of Custody
SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01 3563 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 12
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. Definitions as written below are supplementary to all laws, statutes, and regulations effective
in Texas. Where definitions conflict, laws, statutes, and regulations take precedent over the
definitions below.
2. CFC: Chlorofluorocarbon. CFC’s are halogenated substances that have a significant impact
on the Earth’s atmosphere as they are ozone depleting and contribute to global warming
3. Carbon Dioxide Monitoring: A method for determining indoor air quality by using the
concentration of carbon dioxide as an indicator. Although the level of CO2 is a good general
indicator of air quality, it is reliant on the presence of certain conditions and must be applied
accordingly.
4. Commissioning (Building): The process of ensuring installed systems function as specified,
performed by a third-party Commissioning Authority. Elements to be commissioned are
identified, installation is observed, sampling is conducted, test procedures are devised and
executed, staff training is verified, and operations and maintenance manuals are reviewed.
5. Construction and Demolition Waste: Waste building materials, dredging materials, and rubble
resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition of homes, commercial buildings
and other structures and pavements. May contain lead, asbestos, or other hazardous
substances.
6. Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: A systematic plan for addressing
construction practices that can impact air quality during construction and continuing on to
occupation.
7. Construction Site Recycling: The process of diverting waste from the landfill during
construction.
8. Construction Waste Management: General term for strategies employed during construction
and demolition to minimize the amount of waste and maximize reuse and recycling.
Construction waste management is a sustainable building strategy in that it reduces the
disposal of valuable resources, provides materials for reuse and recycling, and can promote
community relationships within construction and recycling.
9. Energy Star: Program administered by the US Environmental Protection Agency that

evaluates products based on energy efficiency.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 12

10. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD): An Environmental Product Declaration is an
independently verified and registered document that communicates transparent and
comparable information about the life-cycle environmental impact of products.
11. Fluorocarbons (FCs): Any of a number of organic compounds analogous to hydrocarbons in
which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by fluorine. Once used in the United States
as a propellant for domestic aerosols, they are now found mainly in coolants and some
industrial processes. FCs containing chlorine are called chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs). They
are believed to be modifying the ozone layer in the stratosphere, thereby allowing more
harmful solar radiation to reach the Earth's surface. 1
12. Flush-Out: A period after finish work and prior to occupation that allows the building’s
materials to cure and release volatile compounds and other toxins. A building flush-out
procedure is normally followed, with specified time periods, ventilation rate, and other criteria.
13. Global Warming: An increase in the near surface temperature of the earth. Global warming has
occurred in the distant past as the result of natural influences, but the term is most often used
to refer to the warming predicted to occur as a result of increased emissions of greenhouse
gases. Scientists generally agree that the earth's surface has warmed by about 1-degree
Fahrenheit in the past 140 years. The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC)
recently concluded that increased concentrations of greenhouse gases are causing an
increase in the earth's surface temperature and that increased concentrations of sulfate
aerosols have led to relative cooling in some regions, generally over and downwind of heavily
industrialized areas.
14. Green Label: A certification program by the Carpet and Rug Institute for carpet and
adhesives meeting specified criteria for release of volatile compounds.
15. Halon: Bromine-containing compounds with long atmospheric lifetimes whose breakdown in
the stratosphere causes depletion of ozone. Halons are used in firefighting.
16. Health Product Declaration (HPD): Created using the Health Product Declaration Open
Standard, sponsored by the Health Product Declaration Collaborative (HPDC), HPD
documents conform to a specific format, contain material content and health information
about products.
17. Heat Island Effect: A "dome" of elevated temperatures over an urban area caused by
structural and pavement heat fluxes, and pollutant emissions.
18. HCFC - Hydrochlorofluorocarbon: HCFCs are generally less environmentally detrimental to

depletion of stratospheric ozone than CFCs (chlorofluorocarbons). HCFCs are generally used
to replace CFC’s where mandates require CFC’s to be eliminated. A total ban on all CFC’s and
HCFCs is scheduled, effective 2030.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 12

19. HVAC: Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning to provide thermal comfort and ventilation to
building.
20. Hydrocarbons (HC): Chemical compounds that consist entirely of carbon and hydrogen.
21. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ): ASHRAE defines acceptable indoor air quality as air in which there
are no known contaminants at harmful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities
and with which 80% or more people exposed do not express dissatisfaction.
22. LEED: Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design. A voluntary, consensus-based,
standard, measurement system designed for rating new and existing buildings based on
accepted energy and environmental principles, striking a balance between knowledge,
established practices, and emerging concepts. A performance-oriented system where points
are earned for satisfying criterion in each of five categories: Sustainable Sites, Water Efficiency,
Energy & Atmosphere, Materials & Resources, and Indoor Environmental Quality. LEED
promotes integrated and sustainable design practices. LEED® is a trademarked name.
23. LEED Accredited Professional (LAP): A professional who has successfully passed the LEED
Accreditation exam and is knowledgeable in green building design practices.
24. Low VOC: Building materials and finishes that exhibit low levels of "off gassing," the process
by which VOCs (Volatile Organic Compounds) are released from the material, impacting
health and comfort indoors and producing smog outdoors. Low (or zero) VOC is an attribute
to look for in an environmentally preferable building material or finish. See "Volatile Organic
Compound (VOC)" for more information.
25. Organic Compound: Vast array of substances typically characterized as principally carbon
and hydrogen, but that may also contain oxygen, nitrogen and a variety of other elements as
structural building blocks.
26. Ozone Depletion: Destruction of the earth's ozone layer, which can be caused by the
photolytic breakdown of certain chlorine- and/or bromine-containing compounds (e.g.,
chlorofluorocarbons), which catalytically decompose ozone molecules.
27. Post-Consumer Recycling: Use of materials generated from residential and consumer waste,
raw material or feedstock, for new product or similar purposes; e.g. converting wastepaper from
offices into corrugated boxes or newsprint.
28. Post-Consumer Recycle Content: A product composition that contains some percentage of
material that has been reclaimed from the same or another end use at the end of its former,
useful life.
29. Post-Industrial Material: Industrial manufacturing process scrap or waste; also called pre-
consumer material.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 12

30. Post-Industrial Recycle Content: A product composition that contains some percentage of
manufacturing waste material that has been reclaimed from a process generating the same or
a similar product. Also called pre-consumer recycle content.
31. Pre-Consumer Materials/Waste: Materials generated in manufacturing and converting
processes such as manufacturing scrap and trimmings and cuttings. Includes print overruns,
over issue publications, and obsolete inventories.
32. Recycled Content - percentage by weight of constituents that have been recovered or
otherwise diverted from solid waste stream, either pre-consumer or post-consumer.
1. Wastes and scraps from manufacturing process that are combined with other materials
after minimal amount of reprocessing for use in further production of same product
are not recycled materials.
2. Discarded materials from one manufacturing process that are used as materials in
another manufacturing process are pre-consumer recycled materials.
33. VOC: (Volatile Organic Compound). Organic substances capable of entering the gas phase
from either a liquid or solid form. VOCs are volatile enough to evaporate from material surfaces
into indoor air at normal room temperatures (referred to as off-gassing). These substances are
generally thought of to be harmful to both humans and the environment. They are common in
and emitted by many building products over time throughout-gassing:
1. Solvents in paints and other coatings
2. Wood preservatives; strippers and household cleaners;
3. Adhesives in particleboard, fiberboard, and some plywood; and foam insulation.
4. When released, VOC’s can contribute to the formation of smog and can cause
respiratory tract problems, headaches, eye irritations, nausea, damage to the liver,
kidneys, and central nervous system, and possibly cancer.
34. Wastewater: The spent or used water from a home, community, farm, or industry that
contains dissolved or suspended matter.
35. Waste Management Plan: See Construction Waste Management
1.4 LEED ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS

1. Submission criteria, and support documentation will be provided by the Consultant and
the Subcontractor and assembled by the Consultant.
2. Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractors shall assist the Consultant, to assemble
complete and accurate information, as part of the contract requirements and as
their portion of work is undertaken.
3. The Consultant has established, with the design team, the general sustainable goals for
design and for construction of the Project. The Subcontractor, Sub-
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 12

subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers shall assist the Consultant by
making the required submissions and performing the required procedures to
realize the Companies sustainable goals.
1.5 PROJECT COORDINATION
1. Provide coordination associated with LEED required Certification.

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS
1. Provide LEED program meetings, Pre-construction and progress meetings, associated

with monitoring the progress of LEED requirements.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
1. Provide schedule of LEED submittals as a sub-schedule in the construction schedule.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Subcontractor shall assign one person responsible (a LEED Accredited
Professional (LEED AP) for sustainable issues compliance
and co-ordination to fulfill the requirements of this section,
1.9 SUBMITTALS
1. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 10 60 00 – Product Requirements
2. Submit shop drawings and product date in accordance with Section 10 60 00 –
Product Requirements
3. Submit required letters, calculations, spreadsheets and templates for submittal to
USGBC.
4. Submit additional LEED submittal requirements included in other sections in
accordance with Section 10 60 00 – Product Requirements
5. Submit Project Materials and Cost Data: provide statement for total cost for building
materials used for Project. Include statement indicating total cost of mechanical
and electrical components.
6. LEED Documentation Submittals:
1. Submit product data for roofing materials for Sustainable Sites Credit: Heat
Island Reduction: Roof – indicating minimum initial reflectance
and minimum 3-year-aged reflectance
2. Submit product data for lighting fixtures for Sustainable Sites Credit: Light
Pollution Reduction. Submit data for interior and exterior lighting fixtures that stop
direct-beam illumination from leaving the building site. Submit photos per credit
requirements.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 12

3. Submit product data for plumbing fixture for Water Efficiency: Prereq: Indoor
Water Use Reduction, WE Prereq: Building –Level Water Metering, Prereq:
Outdoor Water Use Reduction. Submit Data for plumbing fixtures indicating water
consumption.
4. Submit product data for Energy and Atmosphere Credit: Enhanced Refrigerant
Management. Submit product data for new equipment indicating low-impact
refrigerants, or absence of refrigerants.
5. Submit product data for Energy and Atmosphere Prereq: Building-Level Energy
Metering. Submit product data and wiring diagrams for sensors and data collection
systems for metering of building energy consumption performance.
6. Submit waste diversion documentation for Materials and Resources Credit:
Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning. Submit Waste
reduction progress reports in accordance with Section 01 74 19 Waste
Management and Disposal.
7. Submit product data for Materials and Resources Credit: Building Product
Disclosure and Optimization – Environmental Product Declarations. Submit listing
of products and materials that meet credit intent for the project and calculations to
attain the credit point.
8. Submit product data and shop drawings for Indoor Environmental Quality
Prereq: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. Submit product data and shop
drawings for requirements of ASHRAE 62.1-2010.
9. Provide submittals for Indoor Environmental Quality Credit Construction Indoor
Air Quality Management Plan. Include the following:
1. Product data for temporary filtration media
2. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy.
3. Construction documentation submit description of utilized IAQ
measures in accordance with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National
Subcontractors Association (SMACNA), IAQ Guidelines for Occupied
Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008,
Chapter 3.
10. Submit product data for Indoor Environmental Quality Credit: Low-Emitting
Materials: Submit product data for products used for compliance with
Product Category Calculation.
11. Submit product data and shop drawing for Indoor Environmental Quality Credit:
Interior Lighting. Submit product data and shop drawings for lighting
system controls for minimum 90% of the building occupants
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 12

12. Submit product data and narrative from Acoustician for Indoor Environmental
Quality Acoustic Performance
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. MR Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Material Ingredients
a. Provide appropriate documentation to meet the credit intent for Option 1.
Environmental Product Declaration
2.2 LOW EMITTING MATERIALS
1. IEQ Credit: Indoor Environmental Quality; Low Emitting Materials:

1. Provide documentation to meet the option[s] for the credit point[s]:
1. Option 1. Product Category Calculations: Achieve the threshold level of
compliance with emissions and content standards to achieve the credit points
utilizing the seven product categories listed:
1. Interior paints and coatings applied on site.
2. Interior adhesives and sealants applied on site ( including flooring
adhesive).
3. Flooring.
4. Composite Wood
5. Ceilings, walls, thermal, and acoustic insulation.
6. Furniture (include in calculations if part of scope of work).
2. Option 2. Budget Calculation Method: If some products in a category do not
meet the criteria, project teams may use the budget calculation method.
Each layer of the assembly, including paints, coatings, adhesives, and
sealants, must be evaluated for compliance.
The Budget Calculation Method organizes the building interior into six assemblies:
1. Flooring.
2. Ceilings.
3. Walls
4. Thermal and acoustic insulation
5. Furniture (include in calculations if part of scope of work).
2. Emissions and Content Requirements:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 12

1. To demonstrate compliance, a product or layer must meet all of the following
requirements, as applicable:
1. Inherently non-emitting sources. Products that are inherently non-
emitting sources of VOCs (stone, ceramic, powder-coated metals,
plated or anodized metal, glass, concrete, clay brick, and
unfinished or untreated solid wood flooring) are considered fully
compliant without any VOC emissions testing if they do not include
integral organic-based surface coatings, binders, or sealants.
2. General emissions evaluation. Building products must be tested and
determined compliant in accordance with California Department
of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, or the
German AgBB Testing and Evaluation Scheme (2010) using the
applicable exposure scenario.
3. Additional VOC content requirements for wet-applied products. In
addition to meeting the general requirements for VOC emissions
within the General emissions evaluation, on-site wet-applied
products must not contain excessive levels of VOCs, for the health
of the installers and other trades workers who are exposed to
these products. For projects in Alberta, methylene chloride and
perchloroethylene may not be intentionally added in paints,
coatings, adhesives, or sealants. To demonstrate compliance, a
product or layer must meet the following requirements, as
applicable:
1. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of the California Air Resources
Board (CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure (SCM)
for Architectural Coatings, or the South Coast Air Quality
Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective
June 3, 2011.
2. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD
Rule 1168, July 1, 2005, Adhesive and Sealant
Applications, or comply with Canadian VOC
Concentration Limits for Architectural Coatings,
Regulations (SOR/2009-264).
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 12

3. If the applicable regulation requires subtraction of exempt
compounds, any content of intentionally added exempt
compounds larger than 1% weight by mass (total exempt
compounds) must be disclosed.
4. If a product cannot reasonably be tested as specified above,
testing of VOC content must comply with ASTM D2369-
10; ISO 11890, part 1; ASTM D6886-03; or ISO 11890-2.
4. Composite wood evaluation. Composite wood, as defined by the

California Air Resources Board, Airborne Toxic Measure to
Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood
Products Regulation, must be documented to have low
formaldehyde emissions that meet the California Air Resources
Board ATCM for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting
formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde resins.
Salvaged and reused architectural millwork more than one year
old at the time of occupancy is considered compliant, provided it
meets the requirements for any site-applied paints, coatings,
adhesives, and sealants.
5. Furniture evaluation: New furniture and furnishing items must be tested
in accordance with ANSI/BIFMA Standard Method M7.1–2011.
Comply with ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011 Furniture Sustainability
Standard, Sections 7.6.1 (for half credit, by cost) OR 7.6.2 (for full
credit, by cost), using either the concentration modeling approach
or the emissions factor approach. USGBC-approved equivalent
testing methodologies and contaminant thresholds are also
acceptable.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 SITE DISTURBANCE
1. Sustainable Sites Prerequisite: Construction Activity Pollution Prevention:

1. Create and implement an erosion and sedimentation control plan for all construction
activities associated with the project. The plan must conform to the erosion and
sedimentation requirements of the 2012 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) Construction General Permit (CGP) or local equivalent, whichever is more
stringent.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 11 of 12

3.3 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
1. Materials and Resources Credit: Construction and Demolition Waste Management

Planning:
1. Develop and implement a construction and demolition waste management plan.
Provide a final report detailing all major waste streams generated, including
disposal and diversion rates.
2. In accordance with Section 01 74 19 – Waste Management and Disposal.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
1. Indoor Environmental Quality Credit: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan:
1. Develop and implement an indoor air quality (IAQ) management plan for the construction
and preoccupancy phases of the building. The plan must address all of the following
1. During construction, meet or exceed all applicable recommended control
measures of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Subcontractors
Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under
Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008, Chapter 3.
2. Protect absorptive materials stored on-site and installed from moisture damage.
3. Do not operate permanently installed air-handling equipment during
construction unless filtration media with a minimum efficiency reporting
value (MERV) of 8, (or equivalent) are installed at each return air grille and
return or transfer duct inlet opening such that there is no bypass around
the filtration media. Immediately before occupancy, replace all filtration
media with the final design filtration media, installed in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Prohibit the use of tobacco products inside the building and within 25 feet (7.5
meters) of the building entrance during construction.
2. Indoor Environmental Quality Credit: Indoor Air Quality Assessment:
Option 1
1. Path 1. Before occupancy: Install new filtration, media and perform a building flush-out
by supplying a total air volume of 4,267,140 liters of outdoor air per square meter
(14,000 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot) of gross floor area while
maintaining an internal temperature of at least 15°C (60°F) and no higher than
27°C (80°F) and relative humidity no higher than 60%.
2. Path 2. During Occupancy: The space may be occupied only after delivery of a minimum
of 1,066,260 liters of outdoor air per square meter (3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 12 of 12

per square foot) of gross floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at
least 15°C (60°F) and no higher than 27°C (80°F and relative humidity no higher
than 60%.. Once the space is occupied, it must be ventilated at a minimum rate of
1.5 liters per second per square meter of outside air 0 (0.30 cubic foot per minute
(cfm) per square foot of outdoor air) or the design minimum outdoor air rate
determined in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance,
whichever is greater. During each day of the flush-out period, ventilation must
begin at least three hours before occupancy and continue during occupancy.
These conditions must be maintained until a total of 4,267,140 liters of outdoor air
per square meter (14,000 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot) has been
delivered to the space.
Option 2
1. Air quality testing
--END OF SECTION--
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 01 3566
SUSTAINABILITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes requirements and procedures which are additive to and compatible with 01
35 63 SUSTAINABILITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS, and necessary to
contribute to sustainability certification under the LEED v4 for New Construction and Major
Renovations rating system (LEED NC v4).
B. Refer to the ‘Guiding Principles Checklist LEED v4 for New Construction and Major Renovations’
for mandatory credits.
C. A copy of the LEED NC v4 Project Checklist is attached at the end of this section.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 35 63 SUSTAINABILITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD): A compliant EPD is a third-party declaration with
external verification; is product-specific (not industry-wide); conforms to ISO 14025, 14040,
14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930; and has at least a cradle-to-gate scope.
B. Health Product Declaration (HPD): A compliant HPD provides full disclosure of known hazards
and demonstrates chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1 percent (1000 ppm).
C. Extended producer responsibility: An environmental policy approach in which a producer’s
responsibility for a product is extended to the postconsumer stage of the product’s lifecycle. An
extended producer responsibility policy shifts responsibility (physically and/or economically, fully
or partially) upstream toward the producer and away from municipalities; and creates incentives
for producers to take into account environmental considerations when designing their products.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Additional Sustainability Action Plan requirements.
B. Additional inclusions in Sustainable Construction Progress Reports:
1. Inspection report or date-stamped photos confirming compliance with the Erosion and
Sedimentation Control Plan
2. Provide updated information submittal using LEED Online forms and USGBC-provided
spreadsheets for the following LEED Credits sought for Project.
C. Additional Product Submittals to be provided with manufacturer documentation:
1. Environmental Product Declaration.
2. Evidence of manufacturer participation in an extended producer responsibility program.
3. Health Product Declaration.
SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 3566 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
4. Regional Materials: Indicate location and distance from project site of material manufacturer
and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement
indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional.
5. For paints and coatings applied on site within the weatherproofing membrane provide
documentation of compliance with low-emitting materials requirements:
a. The manufacturer or third-party certification must state the exposure scenario used to
determine compliance. Claims of compliance for wet-applied products must state the
amount applied in mass per surface area.
b. VOC content for each product.
6. For adhesives and sealants applied on site within the weatherproofing membrane provide
documentation of compliance with low-emitting material requirements:
a. The manufacturer or third-party certification must state the exposure scenario used to
determine compliance. Claims of compliance for wet-applied products must state the
amount applied in mass per surface area.
b. VOC content for each product.
7. For flooring installed on site within the weatherproofing membrane provide documentation of
compliance with low-emitting material requirements:
a. Manufacturers’ claims or third-party certification of compliance with the California
Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1-2010 which states the
exposure scenario used to determine compliance.
8. Composite wood products: manufacturer documentation which confirms low formaldehyde
emissions that meet the California Air Resources Board Composite Wood Products Airborne
Toxic Control Measures (ATCM) for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting
formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde resins (NAUF).
9. Ceiling, wall, thermal and acoustic insulation products:
a. Manufacturers’ claims or third-party certification of compliance with the California
Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1-2010 which states the
exposure scenario used to determine compliance.
10. New furniture and furnishing products:
a. Manufacturer or third-party documentation of testing in accordance with ANSI/BIFMA
Standard Method M7.1-2011, and compliance with ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011 Furniture
Sustainability Standard, Sections 7.6.1 and 7.6.2 using either concentration modeling
approach or emissions factor approach and using the appropriate modeling scenario.
b. Confirmation of modeling scenario used.
D. Additional Closeout Submittals
a. Construction activity pollution prevention.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
b. Construction and demolition waste management planning.
c. Construction and demolition waste management.
d. Low-emitting materials.
e. Construction indoor air quality management plan.
f. Indoor air quality assessment.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. LEED v4 for New Construction and Major Renovations Rating System.
B. LEED Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, 2013 Edition.
C. 2012 EPA Construction General Permit.
D. California Department of Public Health Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, Version 1.1,
Emission Testing method for California Specification 01350 (CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010).
E. California Air Resources Board Composite Wood Products Airborne Toxic Control Measures
(ATCM).
F. California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007 Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for Architectural
Coatings.
G. ANSI/BIFMA Standard Method M7.1-2011.
H. ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011 Furniture Sustainability Standard, Sections 7.6.1 and 7.6.2.
I. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168, July 1, 2005 and rule
amendment date of January 7, 2005.
J. Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Report.
K. Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) Guidelines for Multinational
Enterprises.
L. U.N. Global Compact: Communication of Progress.
M. ISO 26000: 2010 Guidance on Social Responsibility.
N. Chemical Abstract Service Registration Number (CASRN).
O. Health Product Declaration open Standard.
P. Cradle to Cradle Certified.
Q. GreenScreen v1.2 Benchmark.
R. GreenScreen List Translator.
S. REACH Optimization.
T. EPA's "Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. At least 20 permanently installed products from at least 5 different manufacturers must have one
of the following:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
1. Publicly available, critically reviewed life-cycle assessment conforming to ISO 14044 that has
at least a cradle to gate scope. For credit calculation purposes, this is valued at one quarter
of a product.
2. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD):
a. Industry-wide (generic) EPD – Products with third-party certification (Type III), including
external verification in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by
the program operator are valued as one half of a product for the purposes of credit
achievement calculation.
b. Product-specific Type III EPD – Products with third-party certification (Type III), including
external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as the participant
by the program operator are valued as one whole product for the purposes of credit
achievement calculation. [OR]
B. Products that comply with one of the criteria below account for at least 50 percent by cost of total
value of permanently installed products:
1. Third party certified products that demonstrate impact reduction below industry average in at
least three of the following categories:
a. Global warming potential (greenhouse gases), in CO2e.
b. Depletion of stratospheric ozone layer, in kg CFC-11.
c. Acidification of land and water sources, in moles H+ or kg SO2.
d. Eutrophication, in kg nitrogen or kg phosphate.
e. Formation of tropospheric ozone, in kg NOx, kg O3 eq, or kg ethane.
f. Depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, in MJ.
2. For Credit achievement calculation, these products are valued at 100 percent of their cost for
credit achievement calculations. Products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased)
within 100 miles (160 km) of project site are valued at 200 percent of their base contributing
cost.
3. Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30 percent of value of
compliant building products.
C. Low Pollutant-Emitting Materials additional requirements:
1. Paints and coatings applied on site within the weatherproofing membrane must comply with
the following criteria:
a. 100 percent of products must meet the applicable VOC limits of the California Air
Resources Board (CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for Architectural
Coatings, or the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113,
effective June 3, 2011:
1) Anti-Corrosive/Antirust Paints: 100 g/L.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
2) Clear Wood Finish, Lacquer: 275 g/L.
3) Clear Wood Finish, Sanding Sealer: 275 g/L.
4) Clear Wood Finish, Varnish: 275 g/L.
5) Floor Coating: 50 g/L.
6) Interior Flat Paint, Coating or Primer: 50 g/L.
7) Interior Non-Flat Paint, Coating or Primer: 50 g/L.
8) Shellac, Clear: 730 g/L.
9) Shellac, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
10) Stain: 250 g/L.
11) Concrete Curing Compounds: 100 g/L.
12) Japans/Faux Finishing Coatings: 350 g/L.
13) Magnesite Cement Coatings: 450 g/L.
14) Waterproofing Sealers: 100 g/L.
15) Wood Preservatives: 350 g/L.
16) Low-Solids Coatings: 120 g/L.
2. Each flooring element installed in the building interior which is not inherently non-emitting
(stone, ceramic, powder-coated metals, plated or anodized metal, glass, concrete, clay brick,
and unfinished or untreated solid wood flooring) must be tested and determined compliant in
accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1-2010,
using the applicable exposure scenario.
3. Composite wood products within the weatherproofing membrane must be documented to
have low formaldehyde emissions that meet the California Air Resources Board ATCM for
formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added
formaldehyde resins (NAUF).
4. Ceiling, wall, thermal and acoustic insulation products which are not inherently non-emitting
(stone, ceramic, powder-coated metals, plated or anodized metal, glass, concrete, clay brick,
and unfinished or untreated solid wood flooring) must be tested and determined compliant in
accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1-2010,
using the applicable exposure scenario.
5. Furniture: 90 percent, by cost, of new furniture and furnishing items must be tested in
accordance with ANSI/BIFMA Standard Method M7.1-2011, and comply with ANSI/BIFMA
e3-2011 Furniture Sustainability Standard, Sections 7.6.1 and 7.6.2 using either the
concentration modeling approach or the emissions factor approach, using the appropriate
modeling scenario.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
3.1 ATTACHMENTS
A. LEED NC v4 Project Checklist
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 01 4216
DEFINITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions.
B. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Furnish: To supply, deliver, unload, and inspect for damage.
B. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, start up, and
make ready for use.
C. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work
result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and
not incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re-used
materials or equipment.
D. Project Manual: The book-sized volume that includes the procurement requirements (if any),
the contracting requirements, and the specifications.
E. Provide: To furnish and install.
F. Supply: Same as Furnish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
DEFINITIONS 01 4216 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 01 5721
INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction.
B. Building flush-out after construction and before occupancy.
C. Testing indoor air quality before commencement of construction; existing building areas only.
D. Testing indoor air quality after completion of construction.
E. Testing air change effectiveness after completion of construction.
F. Testing smoking room ventilation and isolation.
G. Testing residential unit air isolation.
1.02 PROJECT GOALS
A. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC
ducts and equipment.
1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract.
2. Subcontractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and
equipment from construction dust.
3. Establish condition of existing ducts and equipment prior to start of alterations.
B. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air
pollutants.
1. Furnish products meeting the specifications.
2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products
leading to indoor air pollution.
C. Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control: NO SMOKING IN BUILDING.
A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services.
B. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
C. Section 23 3300 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices: HVAC filters.
D. Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: Testing HVAC systems for
proper air flow rates, adjustment of dampers and registers, and settings for equipment.
E. Section 23 0130.51 - HVAC Air Duct Cleaning: Cleaning air ducts, equipment, and terminal
units.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASHRAE Std 129 - Measuring Air-Change Effectiveness; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002).
B. ASTM E779 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization;
2010.
C. SMACNA (OCC) - SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 2nd
edition ANSI/SMACNA 008•2008.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile,
fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products.
B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as
specified.
INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS 01 5721 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3

C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter.
D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile
organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe in detail measures to be taken to promote
adequate indoor air quality upon completion; use SMACNA (OCC) as a guide.
1. Will be provided by the LEED Consultant.
C. Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish that either generates odors,
moisture, or vapors or is susceptible to adsorption of odors and vapors, and indicate air
handling zone, sequence of application, and curing times.
D. Duct and Terminal Unit Inspection Report.
E. Ventilation Effectiveness Test Plan: Identify:
1. Testing agency qualifications.
2. Description of test spaces, including locations of air sampling.
3. Test procedures, in detail; state whether tracer gas decay or step-up will be used.
4. Test instruments and apparatus; identify tracer gas to be used.
5. Sampling methods.
F. Ventilation Effectiveness Test Reports: Show:
1. Include preliminary tests of instruments and apparatus and of test spaces.
2. Calculation of ventilation effectiveness, E.
3. Location where each sample was taken, and time.
4. Test values for each air sample.
5. HVAC operating conditions.
6. Other information specified in ASHRAE Std 129.
7. Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results.
A. Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency having minimum of
5 years experience in performing the types of testing specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Low VOC Materials: See Section 01 6116.
B. Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOC
content.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by:
1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until
wet work is completed and dry.
2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging.
3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame.
B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed.
C. If extremely dusty or dirty work must be conducted inside the building, shut down HVAC
systems for the duration; remove dust and dirt completely before restarting systems.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3

D. When working in a portion of an occupied building, prevent movement of air from construction
area to occupied area.
E. Use of HVAC equipment and ductwork for ventilation during construction is not permitted:
1. Provide temporary ventilation equivalent to 1.5 air changes per hour, minimum.
2. Exhaust directly to outside.
3. Seal HVAC air inlets and outlets immediately after duct installation.
F. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms.
G. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris
generated by construction activities.
1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust.
2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of
pipes and conduit.
3. Clean tops of doors and frames.
4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit,
equipment, and supports.
5. Clean return plenums of air handling units.
6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete.
H. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters.
I. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA (OCC) for avoiding unnecessary
contamination due to construction procedures.
3.02 VENTILATION EFFECTIVENESS TESTING
A. Perform ventilation effectiveness testing before occupancy.
B. Do not begin ventilation effectiveness testing until:
1. HVAC testing, adjusting, and balancing has been satisfactorily completed.
2. Building flush-out or air contaminant testing has been completed satisfactorily.
3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed.
C. Test each air handler zone in accordance with ASHRAE Std 129.
D. If calculated air change effectiveness for a particular zone is less than 0.9 due to inadequate
balancing of the system, adjust, and retest at no cost to Contractor.
END OF SECTION

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 01 6116
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for Indoor-Emissions-Restricted products.
B. Requirements for VOC-Content-Restricted products.
C. Requirement for installer certification that they did not use any non-compliant products.
A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
B. Section 01 3329.07 - Prohibited Content Installer Certification: Form for certifying that no non-
compliant products were used.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Indoor-Emissions-Restricted Products: All products in the following product categories,
whether specified or not:
2. Interior adhesives and sealants applied on site, including flooring adhesives.
3. Flooring.
4. Composite wood.
5. Products making up wall and ceiling assemblies.
6. Thermal and acoustical insulation.
7. Other products when specifically stated in the specifications.
B. VOC-Content-Restricted Products: All products in the following product categories, whether
specified or not:
2. Interior adhesives and sealants applied on site, including flooring adhesives.
3. Other products when specifically stated in the specifications.
C. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier.
D. Adhesives: All gunnable, trowelable, liquid-applied, and aerosol adhesives, whether specified
or not; including flooring adhesives, resilient base adhesives, and pipe jointing adhesives.
E. Sealants: All gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied joint sealants and sealant primers,
whether specified or not; including firestopping sealants and duct joint sealers.
F. Inherently Non-Emitting Materials: Products composed wholly of minerals or metals, unless
they include organic-based surface coatings, binders, or sealants; and specifically the following:
1. Concrete.
2. Clay brick.
3. Metals that are plated, anodized, or powder-coated.
4. Glass.
5. Ceramics.
6. Solid wood flooring that is unfinished and untreated.
A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B. ASTM D3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content
of Paints and Related Coatings; 2005 (Reapproved 2013).
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 01 6116 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3

C. CAL (CDPH SM) - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic
Chemical Emissions From Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers; 2017, v1.2.
D. CARB (ATCM) - Airborne Toxic Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from
Composite Wood Products; California Air Resources Board; current edition.
E. CARB (SCM) - Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings; California Air Resources
Board; 2007.
F. CHPS (HPPD) - High Performance Products Database; Current Edition at www.chps.net/.
G. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Testing Program - Certified Products; Current Edition.
H. GreenSeal GS-36 - Adhesives for Commercial Use; 2013.
I. SCAQMD 1113 - Architectural Coatings; 1977 (Amended 2016).
J. SCAQMD 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications; 1989 (Amended 2017).
K. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; Current Edition.
L. UL (GGG) - GREENGUARD Gold Certified Products; Current Edition.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit evidence of
compliance.
C. Installer Certifications Regarding Prohibited Content: Require each installer of any type of
product (not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified) to certify that either 1)
no adhesives, joint sealants, paints, coatings, or composite wood or agrifiber products have
been used in the installation of installer's products, or 2) that such products used comply with
these requirements.
A. Indoor Emissions Standard and Test Method: CAL (CDPH SM), using Standard Private Office
exposure scenario and the allowable concentrations specified in the method, and range of total
VOC's after 14 days.
1. Wet-Applied Products: State amount applied in mass per surface area.
2. Paints and Coatings: Test tinted products, not just tinting bases.
3. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are the following;
a. Current UL (GGG) certification.
b. Current SCS (CPD) Floorscore certification.
c. Current SCS (CPD) Indoor Advantage Gold certification.
d. Current listing in CHPS (HPPD) as a low-emitting product.
e. Current CRI (GLP) certification.
f. Test report showing compliance and stating exposure scenario used.
4. Product data submittal showing VOC content is NOT acceptable evidence.
5. Manufacturer's certification without test report by independent agency is NOT acceptable
evidence.
B. VOC Content Test Method: 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), or ASTM D3960, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:
a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.
C. Composite Wood Emissions Standard: CARB (ATCM) for ultra-low emitting formaldehyde
(ULEF) resins.
1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:
a. Current SCS "No Added Formaldehyde (NAF)" certification; www.scscertified.com.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3

b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.
c. Published product data showing compliance with requirements.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and
inspections of the type specified in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All Products: Comply with the most stringent of federal, State, and local requirements, or these
specifications.
B. Indoor-Emissions-Restricted Products: Comply with Indoor Emissions Standard and Test
Method, except for:
1. Composite Wood, Wood Fiber, and Wood Chip Products: Comply with Composite Wood
Emissions Standard or contain no added formaldehyde resins.
2. Inherently Non-Emitting Materials.
C. VOC-Content-Restricted Products: VOC content not greater than required by the following:
1. Adhesives, Including Flooring Adhesives: SCAQMD 1168 Rule.
2. Aerosol Adhesives: GreenSeal GS-36.
3. Joint Sealants: SCAQMD 1168 Rule.
4. Paints and Coatings: Each color; most stringent of the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
b. SCAQMD 1113 Rule.
c. CARB (SCM).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, and
require their removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Contractor.
B. Additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will be
borne by Sub-contractor.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 11
SECTION 01 9113
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives; this section specifies
the Subcontractor's responsibilities for commissioning:
1. Verify that the work is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the
manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate
operational checkout prior to startup: Startup reports and Prefunctional Checklists
executed by Subcontractor are utilized to achieve this.
2. Verify and document that functional performance is in accordance with the Contract
Documents: Functional Tests executed by Subcontractor and witnessed by the
Commissioning Authority are utilized to achieve this.
3. Verify that operation and maintenance manuals submitted to Contractor are complete:
Detailed operation and maintenance (O&M) data submittals by Subcontractor are utilized
to achieve this.
4. Verify that the Contractor’s operating personnel are adequately trained: Formal training
conducted by Subcontractor is utilized to achieve this.
B. Commissioning, including Functional Tests, O&M documentation review, and training, is to
occur after startup and initial checkout and be completed before Functional Completion.
C. The Commissioning Authority directs and coordinates all commissioning activities; this section
describes some but not all of the Commissioning Authority's responsibilities.
D. The Commissioning Authority is employed by Construction Manager on behalf of Contractor.
1.02 SCOPE OF COMMISSIONING
A. The following are to be commissioned:
B. Building envelope:
1. Air tightness.
C. Fire Protection Systems.
D. Plumbing Systems:
1. Water heaters.
2. Booster pumps.
E. HVAC System, including:
1. Major and minor equipment items including VRF systems, fan coils, condensing units, and
makeup air units.
2. Control system.
F. Special Ventilation:
1. Fume hoods.
2. Laboratory pressurization.
3. Specialty fans.
4. Egress pressurization.
G. Electrical Systems:
1. Power quality.
2. Uninterruptible power systems.
3. Lighting controls other than manual switches.
H. Electronic Safety and Security:
1. Security system, including doors and hardware.
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01 9113 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 11

2. Fire and smoke alarms.
I. Communications:
1. Voice and data systems.
2. Public address/paging.
J. Other equipment and systems explicitly identified elsewhere in Contract Documents as
requiring commissioning.
K. Sound Transmission Class-rated interior partitions.
A. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Scope and procedures for operation and maintenance
manuals and project record documents.
B. Section 22 0800 - Commissioning of Plumbing Systems. Plumbing systems testing; other
requirements.
C. Section 23 0800 - Commissioning of HVAC: HVAC control system testing; other requirements.
D. Section 26 0800 - Commissioning of Electrical. Electrical system testing; other requirments.
A. ANSI/RESNET/ICC 301 - Standard for the Calculation and Labeling of the Energy Performance
of Low-Rise Residential Buildings using an Energy Rating Index; 2014.
B. ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380 - Standard for Testing Airtightness of Building Enclosures, Airtightness
of Heating and Cooling Air Distribution Systems, and Airflow of Mechanical Ventilation
Systems; 2016.
C. ASHRAE Std 202 - Commissioning Process for Buildings and Systems; 2018.
D. ASTM E336 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Attenuation between
Rooms in Buildings; 2017.
E. ASTM E779 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization;
2010 (Reapproved 2018).
F. ASTM E1827 - Standard Test Methods for Determining Airtightness of Buildings Using an
Orifice Blower Door; 2011 (Reapproved 2017).
G. CSI/CSC MF - Masterformat; 2016.
H. NEBB S110 - Whole Building Technical Commissioning Of New Construction; 2018.
I. PECI (Samples) - Sample Forms for Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Performance
Tests; Current Edition.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except:
1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for
commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority, unless they require
review by Architect; in that case, submit to Architect first.
2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned.
3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority.
4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in
preparation of Prefunctional Checklists or Functional Test requirements; submit in editable
electronic format, Microsoft Word 2010 preferred.
5. As soon as possible after submittals made to Architect are approved, submit copy of
approved submittal to the Commissioning Authority.
B. Product Data: If submittals to Architect do not include the following, submit copies as soon as
possible:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 11

1. Manufacturer's product data, cut sheets, and shop drawings.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Startup, operating, and troubleshooting procedures.
4. Fan and pump curves.
5. Factory test reports.
6. Warranty information, including details of Contractor's responsibilities in regard to keeping
warranties in force.
C. Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit copies of all manufacturer-provided instructions that are
shipped with the equipment as soon as the equipment is delivered.
D. Startup Plans and Reports.
E. Completed Prefunctional Checklists.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and
inspections of the type specified in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and
required Functional Testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will NOT become
the property of Contractor.
B. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform building envelope air tightness
testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will NOT become the property of
Contractor.
C. Calibration Tolerances: Provide testing equipment of sufficient quality and accuracy to test
and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified. If not otherwise noted, the
following minimum requirements apply:
1. Temperature Sensors and Digital Thermometers: Certified calibration within past year to
accuracy of 0.5 degree F (0.3 degree C) and resolution of plus/minus 0.1 degree F (0.05
degree C).
2. Pressure Sensors: Accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent of the value range being
measured (not full range of meter), calibrated within the last year.
3. Calibration: According to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped
or damaged; affix calibration tags or keep certificates readily available for inspection.
D. Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instruments are specific
to a piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required in order to
accomplish startup or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as
part of the work at no extra cost to Contractor; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to
become the property of Contractor.
E. Dataloggers: Independent equipment and software for monitoring flows, currents, status,
pressures, etc. of equipment.
1. Dataloggers required to for Functional Tests will be provided by the Commissioning
Authority and will not become the property of Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COMMISSIONING PLAN
A. Commissioning Authority will prepare the Commissioning Plan.
1. Attend meetings called by the Commissioning Authority for purposes of completing the
commissioning plan.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 11

2. Require attendance and participation of relevant sub-subcontractors, installers, suppliers,
and manufacturer representatives.
B. Subcontractor is responsible for compliance with the Commissioning Plan.
C. Commissioning Plan: The commissioning schedule, procedures, and coordination
requirements for all parties in the commissioning process.
1. Commissioning will be phased (by area, for example) to minimize the total construction
time.
D. Basis of Design Documentation (BOD): Detailed documentation of the functional requirements
of the project; descriptions of the systems, components, and methods chosen to meet the
design intent; assumptions underlying the design intent.
1. Basis of Design Documentation is to be prepared by Architect.
E. Commissioning Schedule:
1. Submit anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system to
Commissioning Authority within 60 days after award of Contract.
2. Re-submit anticipated startup dates monthly, but not less than 4 weeks prior to startup.
3. Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Tests are to be performed in sequence from
components, to subsystems, to systems.
4. Provide sufficient notice to Commissioning Authority for delivery of relevant Checklists and
Functional Test procedures, to avoid delay.
3.02 DOCUMENTATION IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
A. Give each submitted form or report a unique identification; use the following scheme.
B. Type of Document: Use the following prefixes:
1. Startup Plan: SP-.
2. Startup Report: SR-.
3. Prefunctional Checklist: PC-.
4. Functional Test Procedure: FTP-.
5. Functional Test Report: FTR-.
C. System Type: Use the first 4 digits from CSI/CSC MF (Master Format), that are applicable to
the system; for example:
1. 2300: HVAC system as a whole.
2. 2320: HVAC Piping and Pumps.
3. 2330: HVAC Air Distribution.
D. Component Number: Assign numbers sequentially, using 1, 2, or 3 digits as required to
accommodate the number of units in the system.
E. Test, Revision, or Submittal Number: Number each successive iteration sequentially, starting
with 1.
F. Example: PC-2320-001.2 would be the Prefunctional Checklist for equipment item 1 in the
HVAC piping system, probably a pump; this is the second, revised submittal of this checklist.
3.03 STARTUP PLANS AND REPORTS
A. Startup Plans: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a
startup plan, submit the plan not less than 8 weeks prior to startup.
B. Startup Reports: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides
a startup checklist (or startup plan or field checkout sheet), document compliance by submitting
the completed startup checklist prior to startup, signed and dated by responsible entity.
C. Submit directly to the Commissioning Authority.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 11

3.04 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS
A. A Prefunctional Checklist is required to be filled out for each item of equipment or other
assembly specified to be commissioned.
1. No sampling of identical or near-identical items is allowed.
2. These checklists do not replace manufacturers' recommended startup checklists,
regardless of apparent redundancy.
3. Prefunctional Checklist forms will not be complete until after award of the contract; the
following types of information will be gathered via the completed Checklist forms:
a. Certification by installing Subcontractor that the unit is properly installed, started up,
and operating and ready for Functional Testing.
b. Confirmation of receipt of each shop drawing and commissioning submittal specified,
itemized by unit.
c. Manufacturer, model number, and relevant capacity information; list information "as
specified," "as submitted," and "as installed."
d. Serial number of installed unit.
e. List of inspections to be conducted to document proper installation prior to startup
and Functional Testing; these will be primarily static inspections and procedures; for
equipment and systems may include normal manufacturer’s start-up checklist items
and minor testing.
f. Sensor and actuator calibration information.
4. All preliminary Prefunctional Checklists are included in the contract documents; the
Commissioning Authority has the authority to modify these and will furnish final versions
as applicable.
5. A preliminary list of Prefunctional Checklists is attached, to indicate anticipated scope.
6. PECI (Samples) found at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm indicate anticipated level
of detail for Prefunctional Checklists.
B. Subcontractor is responsible for filling out Prefunctional Checklists, after completion of
installation and before startup; witnessing by the Commissioning Authority is not required
unless otherwise specified.
1. Each line item without deficiency is to be witnessed, initialed, and dated by the actual
witness; checklists are not complete until all line items are initialed and dated complete
without deficiencies.
2. Checklists with incomplete items may be submitted for approval provided the
Subcontractor attests that incomplete items do not preclude the performance of safe and
reliable Functional Testing; re-submission of the Checklist is required upon completion of
remaining items.
3. Individual Checklists may contain line items that are the responsibility of more than one
installer; Subcontractor shall assign responsibility to appropriate installers or sub-
subcontractors, with identification recorded on the form.
4. If any Checklist line item is not relevant, record reasons on the form.
5. Subcontractor may independently perform startup inspections and/or tests, at
Subcontractor's option.
6. Regardless of these reporting requirements, Subcontractor is responsible for correct
startup and operation.
7. Submit completed Checklists to Commissioning Authority within two days of completion.
8. See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements for additional general
startup requirements.
C. Commissioning Authority is responsible for furnishing the Prefunctional Checklists to
Subcontractor.
1. Initial Drafts: Subcontractor is responsible for initial draft of Prefunctional Checklist where
so indicated in the Contract Documents.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 11

2. Provide all additional information requested by Commissioning Authority to aid in
preparation of checklists, such as shop drawing submittals, manufacturers' startup
checklists, and O&M data.
3. Commissioning Authority may add any relevant items deemed necessary regardless of
whether they are explicitly mentioned in the Contract Documents or not.
4. When asked to review the proposed Checklists, do so in a timely manner.
D. Commissioning Authority Witnessing: Required for:
1. Each piece of primary equipment, unless sampling of multiple similar units is allowed by
the commissioning plan.
2. A sampling of non-primary equipment, as allowed by the commissioning plan.
E. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to
Contractor.
1. If difficulty in correction would delay progress, report deficiency to the Commissioning
Authority immediately.
3.05 FUNCTIONAL TESTS
A. A Functional Test is required for each item of equipment, system, or other assembly specified
to be commissioned, unless sampling of multiple identical or near-identical units is allowed by
the final test procedures.
B. Subcontractor is responsible for execution of required Functional Tests, after completion of
Prefunctional Checklist and before closeout.
C. Commissioning Authority is responsible for witnessing and reporting results of Functional Tests,
including preparation and completion of forms for that purpose.
D. Subcontractor is responsible for correction of deficiencies and re-testing at no extra cost to
Contractor; if a deficiency is not corrected and re-tested immediately, the Commissioning
Authority will document the deficiency and the Subcontractor's stated intentions regarding
correction.
1. Deficiencies are any condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of
equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents or does not
perform properly.
2. Use the standard form provided with copies submitted to Contractor and Subcontractor.
3. When the deficiency has been corrected, the Subcontractor completes the form certifying
that the item is ready to be re-tested and returns the form to the Commissioning Authority;
the Commissioning Authority will reschedule the test and the Subcontractor shall re-test.
4. Identical or Near-Identical Items: If 10 percent, or three, whichever is greater, of identical
or near-identical items fail to perform due to material or manufacturing defect, all items will
be considered defective; provide a proposal for correction within 2 weeks after notification
of defect, including provision for testing sample installations prior to replacement of all
items.
5. Subcontractor shall bear the cost of Contractor and Commissioning Authority personnel
time witnessing re-testing.
6. Subcontractor shall bear the cost of Contractor and Commissioning Authority personnel
time witnessing re-testing if the test failed due to failure to execute the relevant
Prefunctional Checklist correctly; if the test failed for reasons that would not have been
identified in the Prefunctional Checklist process, Subcontractor shall bear the cost of the
second and subsequent re-tests.
E. Functional Test Procedures:
1. Some test procedures are included in the Contract Documents; where Functional Test
procedures are not included in the Contract Documents, test procedures will be
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 11

determined by the Commissioning Authority with input by and coordination with
Subcontractor.
2. Examples of Functional Testing:
a. Test the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems (rather than just
components) using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods under full
operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see
if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint).
b. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating
loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures,
fire alarm, power failure, etc.
c. Systems are run through all the HVAC control system’s sequences of operation and
components are verified to be responding as the sequence's state.
d. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not Functional Testing; spot
checking of TAB by demonstration to the Commissioning Authority is Functional
Testing.
3. Some preliminary Functional Test procedures are included in the contract documents; the
Commissioning Authority has the authority to modify these and will furnish final versions
as applicable.
4. A preliminary list of Functional Tests is attached, to indicate anticipated scope.
5. PECI (Samples) found at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm indicated anticipated level
of detail for Functional Tests.
F. Deferred Functional Tests: Some tests may need to be performed later, after substantial
completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site
conditions; performance of these tests remains the Subcontractor's responsibility regardless of
timing.
G. Factory Tests: Commissioning Authority and Subcontractor are responsible for coordinating
testing of equipment at the factory by factory personnel, to ensure compliance with
commissioning requirements.
H. Field Tests By Others: Where Functional Tests are indicated as to be performed by others not
subject to the Contract Documents, those tests are not subject to these commissioning
requirements.
3.06 SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION
A. Calibrate all field-installed temperature, relative humidity, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide,
and pressure sensors and gauges, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on this piece of
equipment shall be calibrated. Sensors installed in the unit at the factory with calibration
certification provided need not be field calibrated.
B. Calibrate using the methods described below; alternate methods may be used, if approved by
Commissioning Authority and Contractor beforehand. See PART 2 for test instrument
requirements. Record methods used on the relevant Prefunctional Checklist or other suitable
forms, documenting initial, intermediate and final results.
C. All Sensors:
1. Verify that sensor location is appropriate and away from potential causes of erratic
operation.
2. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end.
3. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, for
temperature make sure they are reading within 0.2 degree F (0.1 degree C) of each other,
and for pressure, within tolerance equal to 2 percent of the reading, of each other.
4. Tolerances for critical applications may be tighter.
D. Sensors Without Transmitters - Standard Application:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 11

1. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches (150 mm) of the site
sensor.
2. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gauge or building
automation system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured
value.
3. If not, install offset, calibrate or replace sensor.
E. Sensors With Transmitters - Standard Application.
1. Disconnect sensor.
2. Connect a signal generator in place of sensor.
3. Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and building automation system control
panel.
4. Using manufacturer’s resistance-temperature data, simulate minimum desired
temperature.
5. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until 4 mA is read by the ammeter.
6. Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or
maximum and verify at the building automation system.
7. Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to comply with specified control
ramps, reset schedules, proportional relationship, reset relationship and P/I reaction.
8. Reconnect sensor.
9. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches (150 mm) of the site
sensor.
10. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gauge or building
automation system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured
value.
11. If not, replace sensor and repeat.
12. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitable signal generator.
F. Sensor Tolerances for Standard Applications: Plus/minus the following maximums:
1. Watthour, Voltage, Amperage: 1 percent of design.
2. Pressure, Air, Water, Gas: 3 percent of design.
3. Air Temperatures (Outside Air, Space Air, Duct Air): 0.4 degrees F (0.2 degree C).
4. Relative Humidity: 4 percent of design.
5. Barometric Pressure: 0.1 inch of Hg (340 Pa).
6. Flow Rate, Air: 10 percent of design.
7. Flow Rate, Water: 4 percent of design.
8. Flow Rate, Steam: 3 percent of design.
9. AHU Wet Bulb and Dew Point: 2.0 degrees F (1.1 degrees C).
10. Hot Water Coil and Boiler Water Temperature: 1.5 degrees F (0.8 degrees C).
11. Cooling Coil, Chilled and Condenser Water Temperatures: 0.4 degrees F (0.2 degree C).
12. Combustion Flue Temperature: 5.0 degrees F (2.8 degrees C).
13. Oxygen and CO2 Monitors: 0.1 percentage points.
14. CO Monitor: 0.01 percentage points.
15. Natural Gas and Oil Flow Rate: 1 percent of design.
G. Critical Applications: For some applications more rigorous calibration techniques may be
required for selected sensors. Describe any such methods used on an attached sheet.
H. Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check:
1. For all valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the
control system readout.
2. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode.
3. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and adjust
output zero signal as required.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 11

4. Command valve/damper to open; verify position is full open and adjust output signal as
required.
5. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions.
6. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actuator or add
pilot positioner (for pneumatics).
I. Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not associated with coils.
1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed.
2. Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage.
3.07 TEST PROCEDURES - GENERAL
A. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the Functional
Tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for
sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving.
B. Provide all necessary materials and system modifications required to produce the flows,
pressures, temperatures, and conditions necessary to execute the test according to the
specified conditions. At completion of the test, return all affected equipment and systems to
their pre-test condition.
C. Sampling: Where Functional Testing of fewer than the total number of multiple identical or
near-identical items is explicitly permitted, perform sampling as follows:
1. Identical Units: Defined as units with same application and sequence of operation; only
minor size or capacity difference.
2. Sampling is not allowed for:
a. Major equipment.
b. Life-safety-critical equipment.
c. Prefunctional Checklist execution.
3. XX = the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in each sample;
defined for specific type of equipment.
4. YY = the percent of the sample that if failed will require another sample to be tested;
defined for specific type of equipment.
5. Randomly test at least XX percent of each group of identical equipment, but not less than
three units. This constitutes the "first sample."
6. If YY percent of the units in the first sample fail, test another XX percent of the remaining
identical units.
7. If YY percent of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining identical units.
8. If frequent failures occur, resulting in more troubleshooting than testing, the
Commissioning Authority may stop the testing and require Subcontractor to perform and
document a checkout of the remaining units prior to continuing testing.
D. Manual Testing: Use hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts, or direct
observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to
make the “observation”).
E. Simulating Conditions: Artificially create the necessary condition for the purpose of testing the
response of a system; for example apply hot air to a space sensor using a hair dryer to see the
response in a VAV box.
F. Simulating Signals: Disconnect the sensor and use a signal generator to send an amperage,
resistance or pressure to the transducer and control system to simulate the sensor value.
G. Over-Writing Values: Change the sensor value known to the control system in the control
system to see the response of the system; for example, change the outside air temperature
value from 50 degrees F to 75 degrees F to verify economizer operation.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 11

H. Indirect Indicators: Remote indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a
control system screen reporting a damper to be 100 percent closed, are considered indirect
indicators.
I. Monitoring: Record parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation
using dataloggers or the trending capabilities of the relevant control systems; where monitoring
of specific points is called for in Functional Test Procedures:
1. All points that are monitored by the relevant control system shall be trended by
Subcontractor; at the Commissioning Authority’s request, Subcontractor shall trend up to
20 percent more points than specified at no extra charge.
2. Other points will be monitored by the Commissioning Authority using dataloggers.
3. At the option of the Commissioning Authority, some control system monitoring may be
replaced with datalogger monitoring.
4. Provide hard copies of monitored data in columnar format with time down left column and
at least 5 columns of point values on same page.
5. Graphical output is desirable and is required for all output if the system can produce it.
6. Monitoring may be used to augment manual testing.
3.08 BUILDING ENVELOPE COMMISSIONING
A. General: Comply with the following procedural requirements:
1. NEBB S110 Whole Building Technical Commissioning of New Construction.
2. ASTM E779 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan
Pressurization.
3. ASTM E1827 Standard Test Methods for Determining Airtightness of Buildings Using an
Orifice Blower Door.
4. ANSI/RESNET/ICC 301 Standard for the Calculation and Labeling of the Energy
Performance of Low-Rise Residential Buildings using an Energy Rating Index.
5. ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380 Standard for Testing Airtightness of Building Enclosures,
Airtightness of Heating and Cooling Air Distribution Systems, and Airflow of Mechanical
Ventilation Systems.
B. Verify that the building envelope has been sufficiently completed for testing to commence.
C. Conduct ongoing inspections as construction progresses to document satisfactory installation
conditions. related to thermal and moisture integrity of the building envelope that become
concealed upon completion of construction.
D. Submit a detailed narrative of proposed pressure test procedures prior to the test. Include a
plan view showing proposed installation locations (personnel doors or other similar openings)
for blower doors (or flexible ducts for trailer-mounted fans, if used).
E. Avoid testing on days forecast to experience high winds, rain, or snow.
F. Test the completed building and demonstrate that the air leakage rate of the building envelope
does not exceed the specified requirements.
1. Use equipment and methods necessary to produce indoor/outdoor pressure differential of
0.2 inches w.g. (50 Pascals).
2. Use RESNET accredited software to document salient features of project's building
envelope and to calculate the HERS Index Score.
G. Determine location and nature of undesirable air leakage pathways using methods specified in
ASTM E1186-17 Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and
Air Barrier Systems.
H. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to
Contractor.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 11 of 11

2. Insulation for remedying building envelope deficiencies evidenced as excessive air
leakage is specified in Section 07 2100.
3. Air barriers for remedying building envelope deficiencies evidenced as excessive air
leakage are specified in Section 07 2500.
4. Sealants for remedying building envelope deficiencies evidenced as excessive air leakage
are specified in Section 07 9200.
3.09 FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF PARTITIONS FOR NOISE ISOLATION
A. Conduct testing of partitions requiring a specific STC class indicated on drawings and/or in
various specifications sections. Comply with ASTM E336 for testing methods, including
requirements of Annex A1 for reduction of flanking sound transmission.
B. Confirm that the FSTC values are not less than 67 percent of design STC values.
C. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to
Contractor.
2. Sealants for remedying flanking sound transmission deficiencies evidenced as excessive
air leakage are specified in Section 07 9200.
3.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional requirements.
B. Add design intent documentation furnished by Architect to manuals prior to submission to
Contractor.
C. Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Authority for
review; make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority.
D. Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submission to
Contractor.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 03 0516
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Sheet vapor barrier under concrete slabs on grade.
A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.
B. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Preparation of subgrade, granular fill, placement of
concrete.
A. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water
Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 2018a.
B. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs 2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See DIV-01030 Submittals for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products.
C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor barrier to be used.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required
with adjacent construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Underslab Vapor Barrier:
1. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 0.010 perms ( 0.6 ng/(s m2 Pa) ), maximum.
2. Complying with ASTM E1745 Class A.
3. Thickness: 15 mils ( 0.4 mm ).
4. Manufacture:
a. Poly-America: Husky Yellow Guard 15 mil: www.yellowguard.com
B. Accessory Products: Vapor barrier manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, etc.,
for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surface over which vapor barrier is to be installed is complete and ready before
proceeding with installation of vapor barrier.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643.
B. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade; lap sheet over interior face of footings and
seal to foundation walls.
C. Lap joints minimum 6 inches ( 150 mm ).
D. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and
follow manufacturer's written instructions.
E. No penetration of vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.
F. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering with other materials.
END OF SECTION
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER 03 0516 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 03 1000
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B. Openings for other work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Form stripping.
A. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for masonry.
D. Section 04 2001 - Masonry Veneer: Spacing for veneer anchor reglets recessed in concrete.
E. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates
in cast-in-place concrete.
F. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors, plates and joist
seats in cast-in-place concrete.
G. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Placement of steel anchors in composite decking.
A. ACI 117 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials 2010
(Reapproved 2015).
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete 2016.
C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 2014 (Errata
2018).
D. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete 2014, with Errata (2017).
E. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes 2014.
F. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric) 2013.
G. PS 1 - Structural Plywood 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section DIV-01030 Submittals for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints
and ties.
D. Designer's Qualification Statement.
A. Maintain one copy of each installation standard on site throughout the duration of concrete
work.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.
B. Store prefabricated forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent
deterioration from moisture.
C. Protect plastic foam products from damage and exposure to sunlight.
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 1000 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL
A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in-
place concrete work.
B. Design and construct concrete that complies with design with respect to shape, lines, and
dimensions.
C. Chamfer outside corners of beams, joists, columns, and walls.
D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347R, ACI 301 and ACI 318.
2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.
B. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, C Grade, Group 2.
C. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay, Class I.
D. Plywood: Douglas Fir species; solid one side grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean, true
edges.
2.03 REMOVABLE PREFABRICATED FORMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Molded Fiber Glass Construction Products Co: www.mfgcp.com/#sle.
2. ALabama Metal Industries Corporation: www.amico-online.com/#sle.
3. S-Form; Aluminum Formwork Systems: www.s-form.us/#sle.
4. SureVoid Products, Inc: www.surevoid.com/#sle.
B. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage, 0.0598 inch ( 1.52 mm ) thick, matched, tight
fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and
appearance of finished surfaces.
C. Preformed Aluminum Forms: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6061-T6 alloy, matched, tight fitting,
stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and
appearance of finished surfaces.
D. Preformed Plastic Forms: Thermoplastic polystyrene form liner, tight fitting, stiffened to support
weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished
surfaces.
E. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight
of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete
surfaces.
F. Pan Type: Steel, of size and profile indicated.
2.04 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing
washer, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch ( 25 mm ) in concrete surface.
B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or
discoloring concrete or forming bug holes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete
and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied.
1. Composition: Colorless reactive, mineral oil-based, soy-based, or vegetable-oil based
compound.
2. Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds.
3. VOC Content: In compliance with applicable local, State, and federal regulations.
4. Products:
a. SpecChem, LLC; Bio Strip WB (water-based): www.specchemllc.com/#sle.
b. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Duogard: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
c. Substitutions: See Volume 1.

C. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: Rigid plastic type; 1/4" inch (6.35 mm) size; maximum
possible lengths.
D. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, at least 22 gage, 0.0299 inch ( 0.76 mm ) thick, longest
possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots,
anchors for securing to concrete formwork.
E. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength
and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
F. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05 1200.
G. Waterstops: Rubber, minimum 1,750 psi ( 12 MPa ) tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F (
46 degrees C ) to plus 175 degrees F ( 79 degrees C ) working temperature range, 4" inch
(102mm) wide, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, preformed corner sections, heat
welded jointing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions
agree with drawings.
3.02 EARTH FORMS
A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.
3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete
during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on
drawings.
F. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to
formwork.
G. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over
reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding.
3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied
coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean
water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete
work.
B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets,
recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level,
and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous
without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight.
F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and
inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
G. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly
fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.06 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that
water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing
salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction
proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign
matter.
3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construct permanent insulated foam panel formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI
301.
A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and
items are secure.
B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 2 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view.
Do not patch formwork.
3.09 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own
weight and imposed loads.
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete
surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard
damaged forms.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 03 2000
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.
A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for masonry.
D. Section 04 2001 - Masonry Veneer: Spacing for veneer anchor reglets recessed in concrete.
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete 2016.
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 2014 (Errata
2018).
C. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual 2004.
D. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement 2018, with Editorial Revision.
E. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement 2016.
F. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel 2018.
G. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice 2009.
H. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of
bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this
project meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.
B. Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi) ( 420 MPa ).
1. Plain billet-steel bars.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A706/A706M, deformed low-alloy steel bars.
1. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I.
C. Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Plain billet-steel bars.
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 2000 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 2
3. Provide stainless steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches ( 38 mm ) of

weathering surfaces.
2.02 RE-BAR SPLICING:
A. Coupler Systems: Mechanical devices for splicing reinforcing bars; capable of developing full
steel reinforcing design strength in tension and compression.
B. Dowel Bar Splicer with Dowel-Ins: Mechanical devices for connecting dowels; capable of
developing full steel reinforcing design strength in tension and compression.
C. Grout: Cementitious, non-metallic, non-shrink grout for use with manufacturer's grout sleeve
reinforcing bar coupler system.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of Architect.
C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.
1. Review locations of splices with Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required
position.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:
E. Comply with applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement.
A. An independent testing agency, as specified in DIV-01400 Quality Assurance Requirements for
Construction Projects will inspect installed reinforcement for compliance with contract
documents before concrete placement.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Reinforcement For Superstructure Framing Members: Deformed bars, unfinished.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 2000 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 9
SECTION 03 3000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Floors and slabs on grade.
B. Concrete reinforcement.
C. Joint devices associated with concrete work.
D. Concrete curing.
A. Section 03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and
polishing.
B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw
cut joints and isolation joints in slabs.
C. Section 22 0548: Vibration and Siecmic Comtrols for plumbing piping and equipment
D. Section 23 0548: Vibration and Siecmic Comtrols for HVAC
E. Section 26 0548.16: Seismic controls for electrical systems
F. Section 27 0548.16: Seismic controls for communications and materials.
A. ACI 117 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials 2010
(Reapproved 2015).
B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete 1991 (Reapproved 2009).
C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete 2016.
D. ACI 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction 2015.
E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 2000
(Reapproved 2009).
F. ACI 305R - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting 2010.
G. ACI 306R - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting 2016.
H. ACI 308R - Guide to External Curing of Concrete 2016.
I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 2014 (Errata
2018).
J. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete 2014, with Errata (2017).
K. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement 2018, with Editorial Revision.
L. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 2018.
M. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens 2020.
N. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 2019a.
O. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens) 2020a.
P. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete 2015a.
Q. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement 2019a.
R. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 2019.
S. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete
2016.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 9
T. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink) 2017.
U. ASTM D471 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Effect of Liquids 2016a.
V. ASTM D8139 - Standard Specification for Semi-Rigid, Closed-Cell Polypropylene Foam,
Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction 2017.
W. ASTM D994/D994M - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
(Bituminous Type) 2011 (Reapproved 2016).
X. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor
Levelness Numbers 2014.
Y. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water
Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 2018a.
Z. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs 2017.
AA. ASTM E1993/E1993M - Standard Specification for Bituminous Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 1998, with Editorial Revision (2013).
BB. COE CRD-C 513 - COE Specifications for Rubber Waterstops 1974.
CC. COE CRD-C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop 1974.
DD. ICRI 310.2R - Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings,
Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with
specified requirements and installation instructions.
1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility
with floor covering adhesives.
2. For chemical-resistant waterstops, provide data on ASTM D471 test results.
3. For Recycled Content:
a. Indicate recycled content for each type of product provided under work of this section;
indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of
product.
b. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled
content product in the assembly by weight.
4. For Local/Regional Materials:
a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery;
indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site.
b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate
distance between manufacturing facility and the project site.
C. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design to meet design strength specified in the
structural drawings.
1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 -
Concrete Mixtures.
2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 -
Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing.
3. Indicate proposed mix design complies with fiber reinforcing manufacturer's written
recommendations.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 9
D. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.

E. Samples: Submit two, 12 inch ( 305 mm ) long samples of waterstops and construction joint
devices.
F. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation
procedures and interface required with adjacent construction.
H. Sustainable Design Submittal: Submit environmental assessment report for concrete
mix. Compare concrete mix submitted with a conventional or reference concrete mixture that
meets the specified performance requirements. Include:
1. Energy consumption.
2. Emissions.
3. Potential toxicity.
4. Potential risk.
5. Raw material consumption.
6. Land use.
7. Third-party validation of comparison methodology.
I. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and
components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
J. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See DIV-01800 Construction Completion and Acceptance for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 1000.
B. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347R to provide formwork
that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117.
C. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand
hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.
1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will
provide smooth, stain-free final appearance.
2. Form Coating: Biobased release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere
with application of coatings.
a. Biobased Content:
1) Concrete Release Fluids: Provide minimum 87% Biobased content.
b. Toxicity/IEQ: Low VOC.
3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches ( 38 mm ) of
concrete surface.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 2000.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 9
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi) ( 420 MPa ).

1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars.
2. Finish: Unfinished.
C. Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch ( 1.29 mm ).
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Provided cement and aggregate materials extracted/harvested and manufactured within a 500
mile radius from the project site.
B. Cement: Type I/II - Portland type.
1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source.
C. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M.
1. Acquire aggregates for entire project from same source.
D. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete.
2.04 ADMIXTURES
A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight
of cement.
B. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G.
C. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F.
D. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type E.
E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D.
1. Provide pigmented type, with ASTM C979/C979M inorganic pigments.
F. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type C.
G. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type B.
H. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Sheet material complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by
manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete
slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited.
1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.
2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,
mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.
B. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,
cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.
1. Grout: Comply with ASTM C1107/C1107M.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours, ASTM C109/C109M: 2,000 pounds per
square inch ( 13.7 MPa ).
3. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch ( 13.7 MPa ).
4. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days, ASTM C109/C109M: 7,000 pounds per
square inch ( 48 MPa ).
5. Flowable Products:
a. Euclid Chemical: EUCON1037, High range water reducer - Superplasticizer:
www.euclidchemical.com.
6. Low-Slump, Dry Pack Products:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 9
a. SpecChem, LLC; SC Multipurpose Grout (non-shrink, non-metalic grout):

www.specchemllc.com/#sle.
C. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Moisture-insensitive, two-part; consisting of epoxy resin, non-metallic
aggregate, and activator.
2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M,
Type II.
B. Epoxy Bonding System:
1. Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application.
C. Waterstops: Rubber, complying with COE CRD-C 513.
1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
2. Size: As indicated on drawings.
D. Waterstops: PVC, complying with COE CRD-C 572.
1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
E. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion
during placement.
2. Size: 1/2 inch ( 13 mm ) throat, 1/2 inch ( 13 mm ) deep.
F. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch ( 13 mm ) thick, height equal to slab thickness, with
removable top section that will form 1/2 inch ( 13 mm ) deep sealant pocket after removal.
1. Material: ASTM D8139, semi-rigid, closed-cell polypropylene foam.
G. Slab Contraction Joint Device: Preformed linear strip intended for pressing into wet concrete to
provide straight route for shrinkage cracking.
2.07 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss
caused by high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately
after concrete placement.
B. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming
compound; complying with ASTM C309.
1. Toxicity/IEQ: Low VOC.
2. Product dissipates within 4 to 6 weeks.
3. Provide product containing fugitive red dye.
C. Curing and Sealing Compound, Low Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing
acrylic; complying with ASTM C 1315 Type 1 Class A.
1. Vehicle: Solvent-based.
2. Solids by Mass: 30 percent, minimum.
3. VOC Content: OTC complient.
D. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis
of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 9
C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates

recommended or required by manufacturer.
D. Fly ash is not permitted at Pantex Plant.
E. Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M and ASTM
C109,C109M at 28 days: As indicated on drawings.
2. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 45 percent by weight.
3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches +/- 1 inch.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inch.
2.09 MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
B. Adding Water: If concrete arrives on-site with slump less than suitable for placement, do not
add water that exceeds the maximum water-cement ratio or exceeds the maximum permissible
slump.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all
applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.
B. Verify that forms are clean before applying release agent.
C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of
form accessories.
D. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints
minimum 6 inches ( 150 mm ). Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with
manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair
damaged vapor retarder before covering.
3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and
accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete
coverage required for protection.
B. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are
accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.
3.04 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
D. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and
test samples taken.
E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts and formed construction joint
devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
F. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where
construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing
laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure
water jetting.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 9
G. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.
3.05 SLAB JOINTING
A. Space joints as indicated on the drawings.
B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total
height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.
1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including
columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains.
D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours
after placing; use 3/16 inch ( 5 mm ) thick blade and cut at least 1 inch ( 25 mm ) deep but not
less than one quarter (1/4) the depth of the slab.
E. Contraction Joint Devices: Use preformed joint device, with top set flush with top of slab.
3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES
A. Minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Values:
1. Exposed to View and Foot Traffic: F(F) of 20; F(L) of 15, on-grade only.
2. Under Carpeting: F(F) of 25; F(L) of 20, on-grade only.
3. Under Thin Resilient Flooring and Thinset Tile: F(F) of 35; F(L) of 25, on-grade only.
B. Measure F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness in accordance with ASTM E1155 (ASTM
E1155M), within 48 hours after slab installation; report both composite overall values and local
values for each measured section.
C. Correct the slab surface if composite overall value is less than specified and if local value is
less than two-thirds of specified value or less than F(F) 13/F(L) 10.
D. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas
requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ) or
more in height.
C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch ( 6
mm ) or more in height. Provide finish as follows:
1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive,
not more than 24 hours after form removal.
2. Grout Cleaned Finish: Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or
spray; scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean
burlap, and keep moist for 36 hours.
3. Cork Floated Finish: Immediately after form removal, apply grout with trowel or firm
rubber float; compress grout with low-speed grinder, and apply final texture with cork
float.
D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R;
thick floor coverings include quarry tile, ceramic tile and Portland cement terrazzo with full
bed setting system.
2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thin
floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, resinous matrix
terrazzo, thin set quarry tile and thin set ceramic tile.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 9
3. Decorative Exposed Surfaces: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R; take measures

necessary to avoid black-burnish marks; decorative exposed surfaces include surfaces to
be stained or dyed, pigmented concrete, surfaces to receive liquid hardeners, surfaces to
receive dry-shake hardeners, surfaces to be polished and all other exposed slab surfaces.
a. Steel-Reinforced Plastic Trowel Blade Manufacture: Wagman Metal Products, Inc:
www.wagmanmetal.com/#sle.
4. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing
burnish marks and other appearance defects.
a. Chemical Hardener: See Section 03 3511.
E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as
indicated on drawings.
F. Concrete Polishing: See Section 03 3511.
3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
1. Normal concrete: Not less than seven days.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.
D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other
surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive
manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring
and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to
flooring manufacturer's satisfaction.
2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is
dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water-fog spray.
a. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas, continuously
for 4 days.
b. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet.
3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
a. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches ( 75 mm ) and seal with
waterproof tape or adhesive; secure at edges.
b. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate
recommended by manufacturer.
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in DIV-01400
Quality Assurance Requirements for Construction Projects.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review
prior to commencement of concrete operations.
D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure compliance
with specified requirements.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 9
E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M, for each test, mold and cure three concrete
test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cubic yards ( 76 cu m ) or less of each class
of concrete placed.
F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM
C143/C143M.
3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and
Contractor within 24 hours of test.
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions,
tolerances or specified requirements.
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction
of Architect for each individual area.
3.11 WASTE MANAGMENT
A. As specified in DIV-01500 and DIV-01600.
B. Formwork: Reuse forms to greatest extent possible without damaging structural integrity of
concrete and without damaging aesthetics of exposed concrete.
C. Mixing equipment: Return excess concrete to supplier; minimize water used to wash
equipment.
D. Moisture curing: Prevent water run-off.
E. Hardened, cured waste concrete:
1. Hardened, cured waste concrete may be crushed and reused as fill or as a base course
for pavement.
3.12 SCHEDULE - CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHES
A. Foundation: 4,500 pounds per square inch 28 day concrete.
B. Concrete walls: 4,500 pounds per square inch 28 day concrete.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 03 3511
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs.
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating,
troweling, and similar operations; curing.
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Curing compounds that also function as sealers.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information
on compatibility of different products and limitations.
C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance and renewal of applied finishes.
1.05 MOCK-UP
A. Mock-Up Size: 10 feet ( 3 m ) square.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain light level equivalent to a minimum 200 W light source at 8 feet ( 2.5 m ) above the
floor surface over each 20 foot ( 6 m ) square area of floor being finished.
B. Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F ( 10 degrees C ) minimum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all concrete floors are to be finished using penetrating sealer.
B. Penetrating Clear Sealer:
C. High Gloss Clear Sealer:
D. Slip Resistant Coating: High gloss clear sealer with plastic aggregate.
E. Polished Finish:
2.02 COATINGS
A. Penetrating Sealer: Transparent, non-yellowing, water- or solvent-based coating.
1. Composition: Siliconate.
2. Products:
a. SpecChem, LLC; Cure and Seal WB25: www.specchemllc.com.
B. Plastic Aggregate: Finely ground polymer for addition to coatings for slip resistance.
1. Products:
a. SpecChem, LLC; Surface Grip: www.specchemllc.com/#sle.
2.03 POLISHED CONCRETE SYSTEM
A. Polished Concrete System: Materials, equipment, and procedures designed and furnished by a
single manufacturer to produce dense polished concrete of the specified sheen.
1. Acceptable Systems:
a. SpecChem, LLC; Crystal Rez: www.specchemllc.com.
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 03 3511 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.
B. Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials
suitable for further finishes.
3.02 GENERAL
A. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. For existing floors with existing floor finishes, remove the existing finishes and attachement
methods complete to clean bare concrete free of obstructions.
C. Patch and fill all voids with an epoxy concrete patch compond prior to polishing.
3.03 COATING APPLICATION
A. Verify that surface is free of previous coatings, sealers, curing compounds, water repellents,
laitance, efflorescence, fats, oils, grease, wax, soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents,
and other impediments to adhesion.
B. Verify that water vapor emission from concrete and relative humidity in concrete are within
limits established by coating manufacturer.
C. Protect adjacent non-coated areas from drips, overflow, and overspray; immediately remove
excess material.
D. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, matching approved mock-ups
for color, special effects, sealing and workmanship.
3.04 CONCRETE POLISHING
A. Execute using materials, equipment, and procedures specified by manufacturer, using
manufacturer approved installer.
1. Final Polished Sheen: Satin finish; other sheens are included as comparison to illustrate
required sheen; final sheen is before addition of any sealer or coating, regardless of
whether that is also specified or not.
2. Satin Finish: Reflecting images from side lighting.
B. Protect finished surface as required and as recommended by manufacturer of polishing system.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 03 3511 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 04 0511
MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Mortar for masonry.
B. Grout for masonry.
A. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout.
B. Section 04 4313 - Stone Masonry Veneer: Installation of mortar.
C. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Products and execution for grouting
steel door frames installed in masonry.
A. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures 2016.
B. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement 2018.
C. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 2019a.
D. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 2018.
E. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement 2019a.
F. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 2018.
G. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 2019.
H. ASTM C387/C387M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for
Concrete and High Strength Mortar 2017.
I. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout 2018.
J. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 2019.
K. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of
Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry 2019.
L. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete
2016.
M. ASTM C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout for Masonry 2019.
N. ASTM C1072 - Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength
2019.
O. ASTM C1142 - Standard Specification for Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry 1995
(Reapproved 2013).
P. ASTM C1148 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Drying Shrinkage of Masonry Mortar
1992a (Reapproved 2014).
Q. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms 2018.
R. ASTM E514/E514M - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through
Masonry 2014a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Include design mix and indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification
of ASTM C270 is to be used. Also include required environmental conditions and admixture
limitations.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range.
D. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating compliance of mortar to property requirements of
ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports per ASTM C780.
MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04 0511 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 5
E. Reports: Submit reports on grout indicating compliance of component grout materials to

requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to requirements of ASTM C1019.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit packaged dry mortar manufacturer's installation
instructions.
A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of
Contract Documents.
1.06 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Testing will be conducted by an independent test agency, in accordance with provisions of DIV-
01400 Quality Assurance Requirements for Construction Projects.
B. Mortar Mixes: Test mortars prebatched by weight in accordance with ASTM C780
recommendations for preconstruction testing.
1. Test results will be used to establish optimum mortar proportions and establish quality
control values for construction testing.
C. Grout Mixes: Test grout batches in accordance with ASTM C1019 procedures.
1. Test results will be used to establish optimum grout proportions and establish quality
control values for construction testing.
A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign
matter.
A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or
applicable building code, whichever is more stringent.
B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F ( 5 degrees C )
prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
C. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F ( 32 degrees C )
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT APPLICATIONS
A. At Contractor's option, mortar and grout may be field-mixed from packaged dry materials, made
from factory premixed dry materials with addition of water only or ready-mixed.
B. Mortar Color: Natural gray unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mortar Mix Designs: ASTM C270, Property Specification.
1. Historic Exterior Masonry Pointing Mortar: Type O; color to match existing.
2. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type M.
3. Engineered Masonry: Type M or S.
4. Exterior Repointing Mortar: Type N with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or
calcium stearate per cement weight.
D. Grout Mix Designs:
1. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3,000 psi ( 21 MPa ) strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches ( 200-250
mm ) slump; provide premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
a. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches ( 50 mm ) or
less.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 5
b. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches ( 50
mm ).
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Unit Masonry: Premixed Portland cement, hydrated lime,
and sand; complying with ASTM C387/C387M and capable of producing mortar of the specified
strength in accordance with ASTM C270 with the addition of water only.
1. Type: Type N.
2. Color: Standard gray.
3. Water repellent mortar for use with water repellent masonry units.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Quikrete: www.quikrete.com..
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M.
1. Type: Type II/V - Normal; ASTM C150/C150M.
3. Manufacturers:
a. SpecMix, LLC: www.specmix.com.
C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M.
1. Type: Type N; ASTM C91/C91M.
2. Colored Mortar: Premixed cement as required to match Architect's color sample.
3. Manufacturers:
a. SpecMix, LLC: www.specmix.com.
D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
E. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
F. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
G. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for
mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.
1. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Quikrete: www.quikrete.com..
H. Water: Clean and potable.
I. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather.
J. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity.
K. Integral Water Repellent Admixture: Polymeric liquid admixture added to mortar at the time of
manufacture.
1. Performance of Mortar with Integral Water Repellent:
a. Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514/E514M and for a minimum of 72
hours:
1) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours.
2) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per hour (
0.05 L per hour ) at the end of 24 hours.
3) No more than 25 percent of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test.
b. Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1072; minimum 10 percent increase.
c. Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5 percent decrease.
d. Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5 percent increase in shrinkage.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 5
2. Use only in combination with masonry units produced with integral water repellent
admixture.
2.03 MORTAR MIXING
A. Ready Mixed Mortar: ASTM C1142, Type equivalent to that specified according to ASTM
C270.
B. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM
C270 and in quantities needed for immediate use.
C. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
D. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's
sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio; mix in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions, uniform in coloration.
E. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
F. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
G. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.
2.04 GROUT MIXING
A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with
ASTM C476 for fine and coarse grout.
C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified.
B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches ( 400 mm ) without consolidating grout by
rodding.
D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.
E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.
3.02 GROUTING
A. Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other
limitations of Contract Documents.
B. Low-Lift Grouting:
1. Limit height of pours to 12 inches ( 300 mm ).
2. Limit height of masonry to 16 inches ( 400 mm ) above each pour.
3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is
poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured.
4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt
pours for more than 1-1/2 hours.
C. High-Lift Grouting:
1. Verify that horizontal and vertical reinforcement is in proper position and adequately
secured before beginning pours.
2. Place grout for spanning elements in single, continuous pour.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 5
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Walls: type M or S mortar with Type N pointing mortar. Type M mortar wall is in contact with
earth.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 8
SECTION 04 2000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Concrete block.
B. Ceramic glazed structural clay facing tile.
C. Reinforcement and anchorage.
D. Flashings.
E. Accessories.
A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Dovetail slots for masonry anchors.
B. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.
C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Installation of dovetail slots for masonry anchors.
D. Section 04 0511 - Mortar and Masonry Grout.
E. Section 04 4313 - Stone Masonry Veneer: Stone bonded to masonry back-up.
F. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Nailing strips built into masonry.
G. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation for cavity spaces.
H. Section 07 2123 - Loose-Fill Insulation: Granular insulation for masonry unit cores.
I. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barriers or air barriers applied to the
exterior face of the backing sheathing or masonry.
J. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Through-wall masonry flashings.
K. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated masonry and at top of
fire-rated walls.
L. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.
A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware 2016a.
B. ASTM A580/A580M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire 2018.
C. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units 2016a.
D. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement 2018.
E. ASTM C140/C140M - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry
Units and Related Units 2020.
F. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 2018.
G. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement 2019a.
H. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 2018.
I. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 2019.
J. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout 2018.
K. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 2019.
L. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of
Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry 2019.
M. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms 2018.
N. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures 2016.
O. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 8

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by all relevant installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units and mortar.
1. Recycled Content:
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and postconsumer
recycled content per unit of production.
2. Local/Regional Materials:
a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate
distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site.
b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance
between manufacturing facility and the project site.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of decorative block units to illustrate color, texture, and
extremes of color range.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that water repellent admixture manufacturer has certified
masonry unit manufacturer as an approved user of water repellent admixture in the
manufacture of concrete block.
F. Test Reports: Concrete masonry manufacturer's test reports for units with integral water
repellent admixture.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Volume 1 for additional provisions.
2. Extra Glazed Units: 50 of each type, size, and color combination.
3. Extra Pre-Faced Units: 50 of each type, size, and color combination.
A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of
Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with
at least three years of documented experience.
A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and
contamination by other materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Provide materials extracted/harvested and manufactured within a 500 mile radius from the
project site.
B. MANUFACTURERS
1. Featherlite, burnished and splitface block: http://www.featherlitetexas.com/
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 8
2. Substitutions: See Volume 1.

C. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Recycled Content: Minimum 10 percent post-consumer recycled content, or minimum 40
percent pre-consumer recycled content at contractor's option.
2. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 by 8 inches ( 400 by 200 mm )
and nominal depths as indicated on drawings for specific locations.
3. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners, lintels, headers,
control joint edges and other detailed conditions.
4. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, medium weight, unless otherwise required.
a. Hollow block.
b. Standard Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated.
c. Decorative faces: Color and texture as indicated on drawings.
d. Exposed Faces: Special color and texture where indicated, as follows: .
e. Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
5. Units with Integral Water Repellent: Concrete block units as specified in this section with
polymeric liquid or powder admixture added to concrete masonry units at the time of
manufacture.
a. Performance of Units with Integral Water Repellent:
1) Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514/E514M and for a minimum of
72 hours.
(a) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours.
(b) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per
hour ( 0.05 L per hour ) at the end of 24 hours.
(c) No more than 25 percent of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of
test.
2) Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1072; minimum 10 percent increase.
3) Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5 percent decrease.
4) Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5 percent increase in shrinkage.
b. Use only in combination with mortar that also has integral water repellent admixture.
c. Use water repellent admixtures for masonry units and mortar by a single
manufacturer.
d. Manufacturers:
1) DRY-BLOCK Mortar Admixture an integral water-repellent mortar admixture
manufactured by Grace Construction Products.
2) Substitutions: See Volume 1.
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 0511.
B. Provide materials extracted/harvested and manufactured within a 500 mile radius from the
project site.
C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M, Type S or M. Use Type M where Masonry is in contact
with soil..
D. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type II/V.
1. Fly Ash: Comply with ASTM C593.
a. Recycled Content: Minimum 10 percent post-consumer recycled content, or minimum
40 percent pre-consumer recycled content at contractor's option.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 8
2. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali.

E. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
F. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
G. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
H. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for
mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.
I. Water: Clean and potable.
J. Integral Water Repellent Admixture for Mortar and Grout: Polymeric liquid or powder admixture
added to mortar and grout at the time of manufacture.
1. Performance of Mortar and Grout with Integral Water Repellent:
a. Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514 for a minimum of 72 hours.
1) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours.
2) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per hour (
0.05 L per hour ) at the end of 24 hours.
3) No more than 25% of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test.
b. Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1357; minimum 10% increase.
c. Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5% decrease.
d. Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5% increase in shrinkage.
2. Use only in combination with masonry units manufactured with integral water repellent
admixture.
3. Use only water repellent admixture for mortar from the same manufacturer as water
repellent admixture in masonry units.
4. Meet or exceed performance specified for water repellent admixture used in masonry
units.
5. Manufacturers:
a. DRY-BLOCK Mortar Admixture, an integral water-repellent mortar admixture
manufactured by Grace Construction Products.
b. Addiment Incorporated; Block Plus W-10.
c. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheopel.
d. Substitutions: See Volume 1.
K. Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Unit Masonry: Premixed Portland cement, hydrated lime,
and sand; complying with ASTM C1714/C1714M and capable of producing mortar of the
specified strength in accordance with ASTM C270 with the addition of water only.
1. Type: Type N.
2. Color: Gray at Standard Faces and Mineral pigments added as required to produce
specified colors at Decorative Faces.
3. Water-repellent mortar for use with water repellent masonry units.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Amerimix, an oldcastle brand; AMX 405C; www.amerimix.com.
b. Amerimix, an oldcastle brand; AMX 410; www.amerimix.com.
c. Substitutions: See Volume 1.
L. Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Unit Masonry: Premixed masonry cement and mason's
sand; complying with ASTM C1714/C1714M and capable of producing mortar of the specified
strength in accordance with ASTM C270 with the addition of water only.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 8

2. Water-repellent mortar for use with water-repellent masonry units.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 03 2000; size as indicated on drawings;
galvanized finish.
B. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry
veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch ( 1.91 mm ) thick, designed for fastening to
structural backup through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that
penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide positive anchorage.
2. Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch ( 4.75 mm ) thick.
3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches ( 89 mm ).
4. Seismic Feature: Provide lip, hook, or clip on end of wire ties to engage or enclose not
less than one continuous horizontal joint reinforcement wire of 0.1483 inch ( 3.8 mm )
diameter.
2.04 FLASHINGS
A. Metal Flashing Materials: Copper, as specified in Section 07 6200.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused
joints.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com/#sle.
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com/#sle.
c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: see Volume 1.
B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding;
in maximum lengths available.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com/#sle.
b. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com/#sle.
C. Drainage Fabric: Polyester or polypropylene mesh bonded to a water and vapor-permeable
fabric.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advanced Building Products, Inc;
Mortairvent: www.advancedbuildingproducts.com/#sle.
b. Mortar Net Solutions; DriPlane: www.mortarnet.com/#sle.
c. York Manufacturing, Inc; Weep Armor Weep Vent
Protection: www.yorkmfg.com/#sle.
D. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING
A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.
1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type M.
2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type M or S.
3. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type M or S.
4. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type M or S.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 8
5. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.

B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's
specified colors, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio.
C. Grout: ASTM C476; consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine
grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches ( 50 mm ) or less; coarse grout
for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches ( 50 mm ).
D. Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
E. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is
more stringent.
B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F ( 5 degrees C )
C. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F ( 32 degrees C )
3.04 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: Running, unless otherwise indicated for different locations.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches ( 200 mm ).
3. Mortar Joints: Concave unless otherwise noted..
3.05 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
C. Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids,
sandblasting or high pressure cleaning methods.
D. Interlock intersections and external corners.
E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must
be made, remove mortar and replace.
F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped
edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
G. Cut mortar joints flush where EIF's is scheduled, wall tile is scheduled, resilient base is
scheduled or bitumen damp proofing is applied.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 8
3.06 GROUTED COMPONENTS

A. Reinforced bond beams and lentils as indicated on project plans.
B. All walls shall be fully grouted.
C. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch ( 13
mm ) of dimensioned position.
E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
3.07 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not indicated, 3/4 inch ( 19 mm ) wide and deep.
3.08 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and glazed frames and other items to be
built into the work and furnished under other sections.
B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.
C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid
with grout.
1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches ( 300 mm ) from framed
openings.
D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.
3.09 TOLERANCES
A. Install masonry within the site tolerances found in TMS 402/602.
B. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ).
C. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch ( 1.6 mm ).
D. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft ( 6 mm/3 m ) and 1/2 inch in 20 ft ( 13
mm/6 m ) or more.
E. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ) per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch ( 13 mm )
in two stories or more.
F. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft ( 3 mm/m ) and 1/4 inch in 10 ft ( 6
mm/3 m ); 1/2 inch in 30 ft ( 13 mm/9 m ).
G. Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch ( minus
6.4 mm, plus 9.5 mm ).
H. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ).
3.10 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to
provide correct size, shape, and location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance with
ASTM C140/C140M for compliance with requirements of this specification.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 8
C. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C780, testing with same
frequency as masonry samples.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that
are subject to damage by construction activities.
3.14 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
A. Waste Management: As specified in DIV-01500 and DIV-01600.
1. Mixing equipment: Minimize water used to wash equipment.
2. Broken, waste masonry units: May be used as non-structural fill if approved by
Architect/Engineer.
3. Cured, crushed waste mortar: May be used as non-structural fill if approved by
Architect/Engineer.
3.15 SCHEDULES
A. Walls and lintels: Single wythe reinforced concrete block masonry.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
Issue No. Issued for Construction l
SECTION 04 4313
STONE MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Cut stone veneer at exterior walls.
B. Metal anchors and accessories.
C. Setting mortar.
A. Section 04 0511 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: Setting and pointing mortar.
B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Joint reinforcement, Ties, Anchors and Through-wall flashing.
C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashings.
D. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints indicated to be left open for sealant.
A. ASTM A580/A580M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire 2018.
B. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 2019.
C. ASTM C568/C568M - Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone 2015.
D. ILI (HB) - Indiana Limestone Handbook 2007.
E. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures 2016.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on stone units, mortar, and reinforcement.
C. Samples: Submit two stone samples illustrating minimum and maximum stone sizes, color
range, texture, and markings.
A. Stone Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating cut stone with minimum
ten years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type required by this
section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
A. Protect stone from discoloration during storage on site.
A. Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable
building code, whichever is more stringent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER:
A. Stone Quarriers:
1. Cultured stone by Boral: Pro-Fit Ledgestone: www.culturestone.com/products/pro-fit-
ledgestone#autumn.
2.02 STONE
A. Limestone: Indiana Oolitic Limestone; complying with ASTM C568/C568M Classification I -
Low Density.
1. Grade: ILI Select per ILI Handbook.
2. Color: as indicated in drawings.
STONE MASONRY VENEER 04 4313- 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
2.03 MORTAR
A. Setting Mortar: ASTM C270, Type S, using the Proportion Method.
1. Manufacture Used:
a. The Quikrete companies: www.quikrete.com
B. Pointing Mortar: Type S as specified in Section 04 0511, and using the Property Method in
ASTM C270.
2.04 ACCESSORIES - ANCHORED VENEER
A. Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, at least 3/16" inch ( 76.2 mm ) diameter, stainless steel
complying with ASTM A580/A580M, eye and pintle type, with provision for vertical adjustment
after attachment.
B. Setting Buttons and Shims: Plastic.
C. Flashings: As specified in Section 04 2000.
D. Weep/Cavity Vents: Polyethylene tubing.
E. Cleaning Solution: Type that will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces.
2.05 STONE FABRICATION - ANCHORED VENEER
A. Nominal Thickness: 2" inch ( 50.8 mm ).
B. Nominal Face Size: 8" to 20" by 4" inch ( varies by 101.6 mm ).
C. Pattern and Coursing: random.
D. Fabricate for 3/8 inch ( 10 mm ) beds and joints.
E. Bed and Joint Surfaces:
1. Cut or sawn full square for full thickness of unit.
2. Sawn or cut full square at least two-thirds of unit thickness; from that point back under
square not more than 1 inch ( 25 mm ) in 12 inches ( 305 mm ).
3. Sawn or cut full square 2 inches ( 50 mm ) back from face; from that point back under
square not more than 1 inch ( 25 mm ) in 12 inches ( 305 mm ).
F. Backs: Sawn.
G. Form stone corners to irregular joint profile. Clean jagged corners from stone in preparation for
setting.
H. Slope exposed top surfaces of stone and horizontal sill surfaces for shedding water.
I. Cut drip slot in bottom surface of work projecting more than 1/2 inch ( 13 mm ) over window
frame. Size slot not less than 3/8 inch ( 10 mm ) wide and 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ) deep for full width
of projection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section.
B. Verify that items built-in under other sections are properly located and sized.
3.02 PREPARATION - ANCHORED VENEER
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance.
B. Clean stone prior to installation. Do not use wire brushes or implements that mark or damage
exposed surfaces.
C. Clean sawn surfaces of rust stains and iron particles.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ANCHORED VENEER
A. Install flashings of longest practical length and seal watertight to back-up. Lap end joints
minimum 6 inches ( 150 mm ) and seal watertight.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
B. Size stone units to fit opening dimensions and perimeter conditions.

C. Arrange stone pattern to provide color uniformity and minimize visual variations , and provide a
uniform blend of stone unit sizes.
D. Arrange stone coursing in running bond with consistent joint width.
E. Set stone in full mortar setting bed to fully support stone over bearing surface. Use setting
buttons or shims to maintain correct joint width.
F. Install weep/cavity vents in vertical stone joints at 48 inches ( 1219.2 mm ) on center
horizontally; immediately above horizontal flashings, above shelf angles and supports and at
top of each cavity space; do not permit mortar accumulation in cavity space.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Attach wall ties to back-up to bond veneer to back-up at maximum 16 inches ( 400 mm ) on
center vertically and 36 inches ( 900 mm ) on center horizontally.
B. In addition, place wall ties at maximum 3 inches ( 75 mm ) on center each way around
perimeter of openings, within 12 inches ( 300 mm ) of openings.
3.05 JOINTS - ANCHORED VENEER
A. Leave the following joints open for sealant specified in Section 07 9200:
1. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps.
2. Joints in projecting units.
3. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers.
4. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads.
5. Joints below ledge and relieving angles.
6. Joints labeled "expansion joint".
B. Rake out mortar joints 5/8 to 3/4 inch ( 16 to 19 mm ) and brush joints clean to accommodate
pointing mortar. Fill joints with pointing mortar.
C. Pack mortar into joints and work into voids. Neatly tool surface to concave joint.
D. At joints to be sealed, clean mortar out of joint before it sets. Brush joints clean.
3.06 INSTALLATION - MASONRY FLASHINGS
A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar as work progresses, and upon completion of work.
B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
C. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, and during rainy weather, cover
stone work exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 8
SECTION 05 0523
STRUCTURAL WELDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Welding for materials specified in the following sections, when these sections are included
in the specifications:
a. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing".

b. Section 052100 “Steel Joist Framing”.
c. Section 053100 “Steel Decking”.
d. Section 054000 "Cold-formed Metal Framing".
e. Section 055000 “Metal Fabrications”.
2. Welding for miscellaneous metal fabrications not specified in other sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PQR: Procedure Qualification Record

B. WPQ: Welder Performance Qualification
C. WPS: Welding Procedure Specification
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Welding Initial Submittals: When the work includes shop welding, submit the following for
shop welding prior to performing any shop welding.
1. WPQ records, including evidence of process usage updates.

2. WPSs.
3. PQRs (unless prequalified per AWS D-1.1, AWS D1.2, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.4 or AWS D1.6).
4. Visual examination and nondestructive examination procedures.
5. Certifications of examination personnel.
6. Certified Report of Tests or Certificate of Conformance for welding electrodes and filler
material.
7. Procedures for the control of welding materials.
B. Field Welding Initial Submittals: When the work includes field welding, submit the following for
field welding prior to performing any field welding.
1. WPQ records, including evidence of process usage updates.

2. WPSs.
3. PQRs (unless prequalified per AWS D-1.1, AWS D1.2, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.4 or AWS D1.6).
4. Visual examination and nondestructive examination procedures.
STRUCTURAL WELDING 05 0523- 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 8
5. Certifications of examination personnel.

6. Certified Report of Tests or Certificate of Conformance for welding electrodes and filler
material.
7. Procedures for the control of welding materials.
C. Weekly Weld Reports
1. Submit a weekly weld report that contains at least the information in Attachment 1, “Weekly
Weld Report” for all field welds.
D. Weld Examination Records
1. Submit each NDE report along with two complete sets of the radiographs (when radiographs
are required) when the examinations are completed.
2. For welds that require only visual examination, submit the records that provide evidence that
all welds were examined and accepted as the components are complete.
1.5 GENERAL WELD REQUIREMENTS
A. Notify the STR of upcoming Subcontractor welding activities (including repairs to equipment or
fabrication of temporary construction aids, etc.) through the weekly submittal of Attachment 1,
“Weekly Weld Report”.
B. Subcontractor must follow the requirements of the Pantex Welding Program Manual E-PROC-
0037. If subcontractor wishes to use their own welding program, they must submit it for review
and approval by Pantex prior to any site welding
C. Control base material and the marking of cut material to ensure the material is identifiable and
traceable to applicable documentation.
D. Make groove and butt welds complete joint penetration and continuous unless shown otherwise on
the Contract Drawings. Backwelding of groove welds is acceptable. Weld size and length shall
comply with design tolerances as indicated in the contract documents and referenced codes. Do
not change the location of welds without the approval of Pantex.
E. Do not use aluminum temporary backing without approval.
F. Permanent backing material shall be in accordance with WPS, be of sufficient thickness to prevent
melt-through, shall not be separated by more than 1/16” from the base metal mating surface, and
may remain in place unless design specifies otherwise.
G. GMAW with short circuiting transfer is prohibited for structural welding.
H. For groove welds, the permissible alignment offset shall not exceed 10% of the thickness of the
thinner part and in no case shall be more than 1/8”. When misalignment exceeds the permissible
allowance the parts shall not be drawn to a slope greater than 1/2” in 12”.
A. Qualify welding procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.2, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.4,
AWS D1.6, AWS B2.1, or in accordance with ASME “Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code” Section
IX.
B. Qualify welders in accordance with the code used to qualify the WPS.
C. Perform welding in accordance with:
1. AWS D1.1, AWS D1.2, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.4, AWS D1.6, or AWS B2.1, as applicable.
2. Contract documents.
3. Approved Contractor submittals.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 8
D. Identify welds with the welder’s identification symbol that shall be stenciled, stamped, or marked
next to the weld or recorded on a document that identifies the welder that made the weld.
1.7 WELD EXAMINATION
A. Contractor shall provide qualified personnel to perform all weld examinations.

B. Required Examinations
1. All welds shall be visually examined.

2. The following welds shall be examined by an approved NDE method other than visual:
a. All full penetration shop welds.

b. All full penetration field welds.
C. Qualifications
1. Personnel performing visual examination of welds shall be currently certified either as an

AWS certified welding inspector or as a visual examination Level II or III according to the
employer’s written practice in accordance with SNT-TC-1A.
2. Personnel performing non-destructive examination (NDE) other than visual, if NDE is
required, shall be currently certified in accordance with SNT-TC-1A, Personnel Qualifier
and Certification in Nondestructive Testing (NDT). Only individuals certified as NDT Level
II or III may perform NDE.
D. NDE, if NDE is required, shall be performed by certified personnel in accordance with approved
NDE (RT, VT, LT, PT, MT and UT) procedures reviewed and approved by an ASNT Level III.
E. Acceptance Criteria
1. Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with applicable AWS codes (AWS D1.1, AWS
D1.2, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.4, or AWS D1.6).
F. Examination Records
1. For structural welds that require visual examination only, maintain a log, drawing,
manufacturing plan, examination report, or other means to record the examinations
completed and the repair of rejectable welds.
2. For NDE other than visual, prepare reports documenting the weld, examination type,
examination results and the repair of rejectable welds.
1.8 WELD FILLER MATERIAL
A. Weld filler material shall conform to the requirements in Attachment 2 to this Specification Section,
“WELD FILLER MATERIALS AND PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS”.
B. Verify filler materials delivered are legibly marked in accordance with the General Requirements for
each specification listed in AWS or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sect. II, Part C,
Material Specifications.
C. Verify for electrodes and rods that the applicable classification number is marked on or attached to
each electrode rod, strip, coil, or spool. Label each piece of material with the classification number
when it is separated from the labeled material.
D. Control, handle, and identify welding rods and electrodes at all times to avoid material degradation
or inappropriate usage and to ensure they are identifiable as acceptable material until the material
is consumed in the welding process.
E. Store and handle low-hydrogen electrodes in accordance with AWS D-1.1.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 8
F. Procure welding electrodes and filler material with documentation required by Attachment 2 to this
Specification Section.
G. Prepare procedures that control the purchase, receipt, storage, handling, and use of welding
electrodes and filler materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHOP WELDING
A. Conform to requirements in PART 1 – GENERAL of this specification section.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that examinations indicate does not comply with the Contract
documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD WELDING

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that examinations indicate does not comply with the Contract
documents.
END OF SECTION

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 8
ATTACHMENT 1
PART 1 WEEKLY WELD REPORT

PART 2 WEEK ENDING:
SIT Y-12 Pan-
E: tex
WEL
SIZE/ NDE
WELD SPE D WP WELDE VT- VT- P M R
DRWG THIC DATE REPOR COMMENTS
# C TYP S R ID FU F T T T
K T#
E
TOTAL
END OF ATTACHMENT 1 SECTION 050523

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 8
ATTACHMENT 2 WELD FILLER MATERIALS AND PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The procurement requirements for weld filler materials in this appendix apply to all weld materials
utilized by Seller organizations that procure their own welding materials. The Seller at their discre-
tion may elect to procure and use materials to stricter standards. This attachment lists the most
commonly used filler material classifications for various applications. Other classification weld
electrodes or filler materials are permitted with the approval of Pantex. The level of certification
and testing required for these alternate materials shall be the same as required for the similar
components described below.
B. Subcontractor must follow the requirements of the Pantex Welding Program Manual E-PROC-
0037. If subcontractor wishes to use their own welding program, they must submit it for review
and approval by Pantex prior to any site welding
C. Classification:
1. The following welds are classified as SSC Grade: Safety Class or seismic PC-
3 applications: NONE
2. All other welds are classified as SSC Grade: Safety Significant, Non-safety
related, or Ungraded applications and for seismic performance classifications
PC-1 and PC-2 applications.
D. DEFINITIONS
1. SSC: Systems, structures, and components (SSC). pantex assigns to each SSC a grade Safety
Class (AL 1 or 4), Safety Significant (AL 1 or 4) or Non-safety Related (AL 0) that establishes the
relative importance of the SSC to the safety or mission of the plant. SSC Safety Class/AL-1 is the
highest importance and Non-safety Related/AL-0 the lowest.
2. Structural welds include all items designed to the International Building Code, AISC, or an Ameri-
can Welding Society (AWS) Structural Welding Code (i.e., D1.1, D1.2, D1.3, D1.4, or D1.6).
Welding on handrails, guardrails, floor liner plates, and other items identified as structural items in
the specifications or on the drawings shall also be considered structural welds.
1.02 CERTIFIED REPORT OF TESTS (CRT)

A. A written-signed document, approved by authorized personnel. The authorized person shall be a
representative of the material manufacturer, material supplier, or agency conducting the actual
tests.
B. The report shall include the results of tests specified in Table 1 for each heat of material.
C. The CRTs shall be submitted for approval by the Company prior to the start of welding.
1.03 CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE (COC)

A. A document signed or otherwise authenticated by a representative of the material manufacturer or
material supplier reporting typical properties based on tests of materials performed on the same
classification of material within the past year or providing a statement that the material will meet
the specification requirements if tests specified by the material specification are performed. The
reporting requirements are as specified in Table 2.
B. A CRT may be supplied in place of a COC.
C. The COCs/CRTs shall be submitted for approval by the Company prior to the start of welding.
1.04 STRUCTURAL WELDS

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 8
A. For SSC Grade: Safety Significant, Non-safety Related and Ungraded applications and for seis-
mic performance classifications (PC), PC-1 and PC-2 applications procure weld filler materials
with COCs.
B. For SSC Grade: Safety Class and for seismic PC-3 applications procure weld filler materials with
CRTs.
1.05 WELD MATERIALS FOR WELDING VARIOUS BASE MATERIALS

A. Weld Materials For Carbon Steel Base Materials
1. Use ASME SFA 5.1/AWS A5.1 E6010 only for the weld root of carbon steel piping welds.
2. Use ASME SFA 5.1/AWS A5.1, Classification E70XX for welding carbon steel structural and pip-
ing components.
3. Use ASME SFA 5.18/AWS A5.18 ER70S-X filler materials for welding carbon steel base materi-
als.
4. Use ASME SFA 5.20/AWS A5.20, Classification E7X-TX for welding carbon steel structural com-
ponents.
B. Weld Materials For Stainless Steel Base Materials

1. Use ASME SFA 5.4/AWS A5.4 Classification E308L-XX with a minimum ferrite number of 5 for
welding 304L stainless steel base materials.
2. Use ASME SFA 5.4/AWS A5.4 Classification E309 for welding 304/304L stainless steel to carbon
steel base materials.
3. Use ASME SFA 5.9/AWS A5.9 classification ER308L filler materials for welding 304L stainless
steel base materials. When CRTs are required, the reports shall also record a minimum delta fer-
rite of 5 ferrite number.
4. Use ASME SFA 5./AWS A5.9 Classification ER309 for welding 304/304L stainless steel to carbon
steel base materials.
C. Weld Materials For Aluminum Base Materials

1. Use ASME SFA5.10 or AWS A5.10, Classification ER4043 filler materials for aluminum welds.
Table 1. TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR SSC REQUIRING CERTIFIED REPORT OF TESTS (CRTS)
AWS/ASME SPECIFICATION ASME SFA 5.01/AWS A5.01 TEST REQUIREMENTS
LOT LEVEL CHEM TENSILE SOUNDNES IMPACT
CLASS OF TEST ANAL (WELD) S
(XRAY)
5.1 Carbon Steel Electrodes For C5 I Deposit Yes Yes No
SMAW
5.4 Stainless Steel Electrodes for C5 I Deposit Yes Yes No
SMAW
5.5 Low Alloy Steel Electrodes for C5 I Deposit Yes Yes No
SMAW
5.9 Bare Stainless Steel Welding S4 I Rod/Wire No No No
electrodes and Rods
5.18 Carbon Steel Electrodes and S4 I Rod/Wire Yes Yes No
Rods for GTAW/GMAW
5.20 Carbon Steel Electrodes for T4 I Deposit Yes Yes No
FCAW
5.22 Stainless Steel Electrodes for T4 I Deposit Yes Yes No
FCAW and Stainless Steel Flux
Cored Rods for GTAW

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 8
In addition to tensile testing, bend tests are required.
Table 2. REPORTING REQUIREMENTS FOR SSC REQUIRING CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE

AWS/ASME SPECIFICATION ASME SFA 5.01/AWS A5.01 LOTS/TESTS
LOT CLASS LEVEL OF TEST
5.1 Carbon Steel Electrodes For SMAW C1 G
5.4 Stainless Steel Electrodes for SMAW C1 G
5.5 Low Alloy Steel Electrodes for C1 G
SMAW
5.9 Bare Stainless Steel Welding elec- S1 F
trodes and Rods
5.10 Bare Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy S1 F
Welding Electrodes and Rods
5.18 Carbon Steel Electrodes and Rods S1 F
for GTAW/GMAW
5.20 Carbon Steel Electrodes for FCAW T1 G
5.22 Stainless Steel Electrodes for T1 G
FCAW and Stainless Steel Flux Cored
Rods for GTAW
END OF ATTACHMENT 2 SECTION

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 05 1200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Structural steel framing members.
B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates.
C. Grouting under base plates.
A. Section 05 1250 - Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel.
B. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing.
C. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck.
D. Section 07 8100 - Applied Fireproofing: Fireproof protection to framing and metal deck systems.
A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual 2017.
B. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges 2016.
C. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges 2016.
D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2014.
E. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless 2018.
F. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 2018.
G. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts 2015.
H. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric) 2007
(Reapproved 2013).
I. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes 2011 (Reapproved
2015).
J. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers 2011.
K. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination 2012.
L. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel 2015, with Errata (2016).
M. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel 2018.
N. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer 1999 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments
and fasteners.
2. Connections not detailed.
3. Indicate cambers and loads.
4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test
analysis.
E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within
the previous 12 months.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200- 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
F. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is

accredited under IAS AC172.
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC (MAN) "Steel Construction
Manual."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Angles, Plates, Channels, S Shapes, M Shapes and HP Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M.
B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M.
C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.
D. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.
E. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B, Finish black.
F. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, Grade A.
G. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 or ASTM A325M, Type 1,
medium carbon, plain, with matching compatible ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTM
F436 washers.
H. Welding shall be in accordance with specification section 05 0523 Structural Welding.
I. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; Non-shrink; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic
aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch ( 13.7 MPa ).
2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 pounds per square inch ( 48 MPa ).
J. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.
B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.
C. Develop required camber for members.
2.03 FINISH
A. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field
welded, in contact with concrete or high strength bolted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may
properly proceed.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC 303.
B. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings.
C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.
D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in
contact with concrete.
E. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's
instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45
degrees.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ) per story, non-cumulative.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ).

END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 05 2100
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Open web steel joists, with bridging, attached seats and anchors.
B. Supplementary framing for openings greater than 18 inches ( 450 mm ).
A. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Grouting base plates and bearing plates.
Superstructure framing.
B. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Bearing plates and angles.
A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2014.
B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware 2016a.
C. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength 2014, with Editorial Revision (2017).
D. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel 2015, with Errata (2016).
E. SJI (SPEC) - Catalog of Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel
Joists and Joist Girders 2011.
F. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer 1999 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations, joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings,
cambers, locations of joists, joist leg extensions, bridging, connections and attachments.
A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Joists:
1. Public Steel, INC.: www.publicsteel.com/about-public-steel-inc
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Open Web Joists: Types as indicated on drawings:
1. Finish: Shop primed.
B. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307 hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M
Class C.
C. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Welding shall be in accordance with specification section 05 0523 Structural Welding.
E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
2.03 FINISH
A. Shop prime joists as specified.
1. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed or field welded.
B. Prepare surfaces to be finished and exposed to view in accordance with SSPC-P 2 for utility
and non-public areas and SSPC-P 3 for public areas..
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2100 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 2
3.02 ERECTION
A. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports.
B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb,
and in true alignment.
C. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seats to steel bearing surfaces.
D. Install supplementary framing for any openings greater than 18 inches ( 450 mm ).
E. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced, bridged, and secured or until
completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing.
F. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer.
G. After erection, prime welds, damaged shop primer and surfaces not shop primed , except
surfaces specified not to be primed.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ).
Quality Assurance Requirements for Construction Projects
END OF SECTION
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2100 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 05 3100
STEEL DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Roof deck.
B. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches ( 450 mm ).
A. Option. For areas where steel structure is exposed and higher levels of quality steel work and
detailing is required. These areas should be noted on drawings.
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 2019a.
B. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel 2015, with Errata (2016).
C. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel 2018.
D. ICC-ES AC43 - Acceptance Criteria for Steel Deck Roof and Floor Systems 2016.
E. ICC-ES AC70 - Acceptance Criteria for Fasteners Power Driven into Concrete, Steel and
Masonry Elements 2016.
F. SDI (DM) - Publication No.30, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof
Decks 2007.
G. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer 1999 (Ed. 2004).
H. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic") 2002 (Ed.
2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See DIV-01030 Submittals for submittals procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement,
pertinent details and accessories.
C. Project Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and
finishes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Deck:
1. Public Steel, INC.: www.publicsteel.com/about-public-steel-inc
2.02 STEEL DECK
A. Roof Deck: Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet either galvanized or primed:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with
G90/Z275 galvanized coating.
2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and
phosphatized substrate.
A. Welding shall be in accordance with specification section 05 0523 Structural Welding.
B. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping.
C. Powder Actuated Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; with knurled shank and forged ballistic
point. Comply with applicable requirements of ICC-ES AC70.
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 2
1. Design Requirements: Provide number and type of fasteners that comply with the
applicable requirements of SDI (DM) design method for roof deck and floor deck
applications and ICC-ES AC43.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; hex washer head, self-drilling, self-tapping.
1. Design Requirements for Sidelap Connections: Provide number and type of fasteners that
comply with the applicable requirements of SDI (DM) design method for roof deck and
floor deck applications and ICC-ES AC43.
E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch ( 25 mm ) thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck.
2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops and cover plates, 22
gage, 0.0299 inch ( 0.76 mm ) thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same
as deck.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align
and level.
B. Drive mechanical sidelap connectors completely through adjacent lapped sheets; positively
engage adjacent sheets with minimum three-thread penetration.
C. Welding shall be in accordance with specification section 05 0523 Structural Welding.
D. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam
cell closures.
E. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned
areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.
END OF SECTION
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 05 4000
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Formed steel stud exterior wall framing.
B. Formed steel joist and purlin framing and bridging.
A. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking.
B. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Weather barrier over sheathing.
C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud
framing.
D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.
E. Section 09 2216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing.
F. Section 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling suspension system.
A. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members 2012.
Hardware 2016a.
C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
D. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable 2018.
E. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and
Ultra-High Strength 2018a.
F. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing Members 2018,
with Editorial Revision.
G. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial)
Steel Studs and Related Accessories 2011a (Reapproved 2015).
H. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 2017.
I. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel 2015, with Errata (2016).
J. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel 2018.
K. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer 1999 (Ed. 2004).
L. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic") 2002 (Ed.
2004).
A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing
system, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and
firestopping.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish,
product criteria, limitations.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing
compliance with requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading,
welds and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work.
1. Indicate stud and ceiling joist layout.
2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted and welded framing
connections.
3. Design data:
a. Shop drawings signed and sealed by a professional structural engineer.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring
special attention .
F. Designer's Qualification Statement.
G. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products
specified in this section, and with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Framing:
1. CEMCO: www.cemcosteel.com/#sle.
2. Marino: www.marinoware.com/#sle.
3. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com.
4. ConFab: www.con-fab.com.
B. Framing Connectors and Accessories:
1. Same manufacturer as metal framing.
2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM
A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips,
fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.
B. Design Requirements: Provide completed framing system.
C. Shop fabricate framing system to the greatest extent possible.
D. Deliver to project site in largest practical sections.
2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, C- or Sigma-shaped with punched
web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.
1. Gage and Depth: As indicated on drawings.
2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G90/Z275 coating.
B. Framing Connectors: Factory-made, formed steel sheet.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
1. Material: ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 33 and 40 (minimum), with G90/Z275 hot dipped
galvanized coating for base metal thickness less than 10 gage, 0.1345 inch ( 3.42 mm ),
and factory punched holes and slots.
2. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable
code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12.
3. Wall Stud Bridging Connections: Provide mechanical load-transferring devices that
accommodate wind load torsion and weak axis buckling induced by axial compression
loads. Provide bridging connections where indicated on the drawings.
2.04 FASTENERS
A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM
A153/A153M.
1. Products:
a. Hilti Corporation: www.hilti.com.
b. Substitutions: See Volume 1.
B. Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated.
C. Welding shall be in accordance with specification section 05 0523 Structural Welding.
2.05 WALL SHEATHING
A. Gypsum Board Wall Sheathing: See Section 09 2116.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions
encountered; finish to match framing components.
B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered;
finish to match framing components.
C. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20 Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007
requirements.
B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum
24 inches ( 600 mm ) on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.
C. Place studs at 16 inches ( 400 mm ) on center; not more than 2 inches ( 50 mm ) from abutting
walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method.
D. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door
and window jambs.
E. Splicing of studs is not permitted.
F. Install load-bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design
requirements.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
G. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.
H. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load
bearing framing.
I. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.
J. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent
stud rotation.
K. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF WALL SHEATHING
A. Install wall sheathing with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered, using self-tapping screws.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4" inch ( 6.35 mm ).
B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/16" inch ( 1.588 mm ).
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications - steel items.
B. Downspout boots.
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.
B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.
C. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Structural steel column anchor bolts.
D. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing: Structural joist bearing plates, including anchorage.
E. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Bearing plates for metal deck bearing, including anchorage.
F. Section 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING: Paint finish.
G. Section 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING: Paint finish.
A. ALI A14.3 - Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements 2008.
B. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements 2018.
C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2014.
D. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings 2003 (Reapproved 2016).
E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products 2017.
F. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware 2016a.
G. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength 2014, with Editorial Revision (2017).
H. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 2018.
I. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing 2014.
J. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
K. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
L. ASTM B210/B210M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn
Seamless Tubes 2019a.
M. ASTM B211/B211M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold
Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire 2019.
N. ASTM B26/B26M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings 2018, with
Editorial Revision.
O. ASTM B85/B85M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings 2018, with Editorial
Revision.
P. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 2014.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 5
Q. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(Metric) 2014.
R. ASTM B210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless
Tubes 2012.
S. ASTM B210M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless
Tubes (Metric) 2012.
T. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished
Bar, Rod, and Wire 2012.
U. ASTM B211M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold-
Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire (Metric) 2012.
V. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
W. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts and
Assemblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120 ksi and 150 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength, and Metric Dimensions 830 MPa and 1040 MPa Minimum Tensile
Strength 2019.
X. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination 2012.
Y. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel 2015, with Errata (2016).
Z. AWS D1.2/D1.2M - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum 2014, with Errata.
AA. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel 2018.
BB. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer 1999 (Ed. 2004).
CC. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic") 2002 (Ed.
2004).
DD. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning 2018.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide manufacture's data sheets on each ladder safety system product to be
used, including installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings - Fabricated Items: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments,
reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings,
elevations, and details where applicable.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net
weld lengths.
D. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
E. Designer's Qualification Statement.
F. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is
accredited under IAS AC172.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by IAS AC172.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL
A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 5
C. Plates: ASTM A283/A283M.

D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
E. Slotted Channel Framing: ASTM A653/A653M, Grade 33.
F. Slotted Channel Fittings: ASTM A1011/A1011M.
G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, Grade A, plain.
H. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, plain.
I. Welding shall be in accordance with specification section 05 0523 Structural Welding.
J. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
K. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper.
C. Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210/B210M, 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
D. Aluminum-Alloy Bars: ASTM B211/B211M, 6061 alloy, T6 temper.
E. Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings: ASTM B26/B26M.
F. Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings: ASTM B85/B85M.
G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.
H. Welding shall be in accordance with specification section 05 0523 Structural Welding.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;
consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS
A. Bumper Posts and Guard Rails: As detailed; prime paint finish.
B. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.
C. Joist Hangers: Strap anchors, fabricated with sheet steel, 18 gage, 0.0478 inch ( 1.21 mm )
minimum base metal thickness; galvanized finish.
D. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings, and Wall Openings: Channel sections; prime paint
finish.
E. Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A14.3; with mounting brackets and attachments; prime
paint finish.
1. Side Rails: 3/8 x 2 inches (9 x 50 mm) members spaced at 20 inches (500 mm).
2. Rungs: 1 inch (25mm) diameter soild round bar spaced 12 inches (300 mm) on center.
3. Space rungs 7 inches (175 mm) from wall surface.
F. Recessed Mat Frames : As detailed; steel, galvanized finish.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 5
G. Toilet Partition Suspension Members: Steel channel sections; prime paint finish.
2.05 DOWNSPOUT BOOTS
A. Downspout Boots: Smooth interior without boxed corners or choke points; include integral lug
slots, integral cleanout, cleanout cover and tamper proof fasteners.
1. Configuration: Angular.
2. Material: Cast iron; ASTM A48/A48M; casting thickness 3/8 inch (9.5 mm), minimum.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory applied powder coat finish.
4. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
5. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel fasteners, stainless steel building
wall anchors, integral neoprene gaskets and rubber coupling.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Downspoutboots.com, a division of J. R. Hoe &
Sons: www.downspoutboots.com/#sle.
2.06 FINISHES - STEEL
A. Prime paint steel items.
1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete and items to be embedded in
masonry.
2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is
required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.
B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.
C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
D. Prime Painting: One coat.
E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M
requirements.
F. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M
requirements.
2.07 FINISHES - ALUMINUM
A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized.
B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class II natural anodized.
C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
2.08 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Squareness: 1/8 inch ( 3 mm ) maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch ( 1.5 mm ).
C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch ( 1.5 mm ).
D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch ( 3 mm ) in 48 inches ( 1.2 m ).
E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch ( 1.5 mm ) in 48 inches ( 1.2 m ).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Confirm that the ladder structure to which the ladder safety system is installed is capable of
withstanding the loads applied by the system in the event of a fall.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 5
B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into
concrete or embedded in masonry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Install ladder safety system in accordance with manufacturer's instuctions.
C. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
D. Field weld components as indicated on drawings.
E. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
F. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized , except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
H. Slotted Channel Framing:
1. Set Strut System components into final position true to line, level and plumb, in
accordance with approved drawings.
2. Anchor material firmly in place, and tighten all connections to their recommended torques.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ) per story, non-cumulative.
C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ).
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 06 4100
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B. Hardware.
A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
C. Section 12 3600 - Countertops.
A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards 2014, with Errata (2018).
B. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program Current Edition.
C. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1
2017, with Errata (2019).
D. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware 2015.
E. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details,
and accessories.
1. On casework and countertop elevations show the location of backing required for
attachment within walls.
2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).
C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches (
300 mm ) square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop and shelf unit substrate and finish.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
A. Protect units from moisture damage.
A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions
in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI
(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.
B. Cabinets:
1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: as indicated in the drawings.
2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard interior cabinet liner,
color: white.
3. Casework Construction Type: Type A - Frameless.
4. Interface Style for Cabinet and Door: Style 1 - Overlay; flush overlay.
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 4100 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
5. Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs. per sq. ft.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B. Lumber: In accordance with the Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade specified for the
product being fabricated.
1. Moisture Content: 6% to 12% for boards up to 2" nominal thickness, and not to exceed
19% for thicker pieces.
C. Core: MDF meeting the requirements of Architectural Woodwork Standards.
2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Panolam Industries International, Inc; Nevamar Standard HPL: www.panolam.com/#sle.
B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific
applications.
C. Provide specific types as indicated.
1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch ( 1.22 mm ) nominal thickness, through color,
colors as scheduled, satin finish.
2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch ( 0.71 mm ) nominal thickness, through color, colors
as scheduled, satin finish.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI/AWMAC to suit application.
B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized
or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in
exposed locations.
D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.05 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, for quality grade specified.
B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf
standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish,
for nominal 1 inch ( 25 mm ) spacing adjustments.
C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, aluminum with satin finish, 4 inch centers ( "U"
shaped wire pull, aluminum with satin finish, 100 mm centers ).
D. Catches: Touch type.
E. Drawer Slides:
1. Type: Extension types as indicated.
2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.
F. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finish.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. All materials and methods of construction are to meet the requirements of Architectural
Woodwork Standards for the grade or grades specified.
a. Where locking drawers are indicated, provide dust panels above and below drawer.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
B. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings.
C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly
bevel arises.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements
for grade indicated.
B. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch ( 0.79
mm ). Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads.
B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 07 2100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs and exterior wall behind
gypsum wallboard wall finish.
B. Batt insulation in exterior wall, gypsum board ceilings and roof construction.
C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall
and roof.
A. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus 2017.
B. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications 2013 (Reapproved 2019).
C. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation 2019.
D. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
2014 (Reapproved 2019).
E. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing 2017.
F. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board 2019.
G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
2020.
H. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Assessing Combustibility of Materials Using a Vertical
Tube Furnace at 750°C 2019a.
I. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of
Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components 2019.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics and performance criteria.
C. ABAA Field Quality Control Submittals: Submit third-party reports of testing and inspection
required by ABAA QAP.
D. ABAA Manufacturer Qualification: Submit documentation of current evaluation of proposed
manufacturer and materials.
E. ABAA Installer Qualification: Submit documentation of current contractor accreditation and
current installer certification. Keep copies of contractor accreditation and installer certification
on project site during and after installation. Present on-site documentation upon request.
A. Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP);
www.airbarrier.org/#sle:
1. Installer Qualification: Use accredited contractors, certified installers, evaluated materials,
and third-party field quality control audit.
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
2. Manufacturer Qualification: Use evaluated materials from a single manufacturer regularly

engaged in air barrier material manufacture. Use secondary materials approved in writing
by primary material manufacturer.
A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
successful installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene board, Type VI.
B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene board, Type VI.
C. Insulation on Inside of Concrete and Masonry Exterior Walls: Extruded Polystyrene Board
Insulation, Type X.
D. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.
E. Insulation Above Lay-In Acoustical Ceilings: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.
F. Insulation at Underside of Roof Decks: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.
2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578.
1. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Board Size: 48 inch by 96 inch ( 1220 mm by 2440 mm ).
4. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inch ( 38 mm ).
5. Type and Water Absorption: Type XI, 4.0 percent by volume, maximum, by total
immersion.
6. Thermal Resistance: R-value ( RSI-value ) of 4.0 ( 0.70 ) per 1 inch ( 25.4 mm ) at 75
degrees F ( 24 degrees C ) mean temperature.
B. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578 with either natural
skin or cut cell surfaces.
1. Type: ASTM C578.
2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Type and Thermal Resistance, R-value ( RSI-value ): Type IV, 5.0 (0.88) per 1 inch ( 25.4
mm ) thickness at 75 degrees F ( 24 degrees C ) mean temperature.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Owens Corning Corporation; FOAMULAR Extruded Polystyrene (XPS)
Insulation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.
2.03 FIBERBOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Where fiberboard insulation is indicated, either rock, slag, or glass mineral fiberboard insulation
may be used, at Contractor's option.
B. Mineral Fiberboard Insulation: Rigid mineral fiber, in accordance with ASTM C612.
1. Facing: None, unfaced.
2. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM
E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index: 50 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with
ASTM E84.
4. Board Thickness: 1 inch ( 25.4 mm ).
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
5. Manufacturers:
a. DensGlass: www.buildgp.com/product/densglass-gypsum-wall-sheathing/..
C. Mineral Fiberboard Insulation: Rigid or semi-rigid mineral fiber, ASTM C612 or ASTM C553;
unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
1. Where indicated, provide foil facing on one side; with flame spread index of 25 or less,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Board Size: 16 by 48 inches ( 405 by 1220 mm ).
4. Board Thickness: 1 inch ( 25 mm ).
5. Thermal Resistance: R-value ( RSI-value ) of 4.2 ( 0.74 ) per inch at 75 degrees F ( 24 C )
, minimum, when tested according to ASTM C518.
6. Maximum Density: 8.0 pounds per cubic foot ( 128 kg/cu m ), nominal.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Owens Corning: www.owenscorning.com/insulation..
2.04 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used,
at Contractor's option.
B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;
friction fit.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
4. Facing at Underside of Roof Deck: Poly-Scrim Faced, perm rating less than 0.02, Class A,
flame spread index of 25 or less, color; white], one side.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Owens Corning Corporation; EcoTouch PINK FIBERGLAS
Insulation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.
C. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with
ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
4. Facing: Unfaced, unless noted otherwise.
5. Facing at Underside of Roof Deck: Poly-Scrim Faced, perm rating less than 0.02, Class A,
flame spread index of 25 or less, color; white], one side.
6. Manufacturers:
a. ROCKWOOL (ROXUL, Inc); COMFORTBATT: www.rockwool.com/#sle.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch ( 50 mm ) wide.
B. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer.
1. Length as required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates
are ready to receive insulation.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins or irregularities.
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER
A. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter.
B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS
A. Install boards vertically on walls.
1. Between Furring Strips, Hat-Channels, and Z-Shaped Furring: Install insulation between
furring members; use fastening system recommended by furring strip manufacturer.
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS
A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.
C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing
slab.
3.05 BATT INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within the plane of the insulation.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 07 2500
WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not air
tight or vapor retardant.
B. Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints
between exterior walls and roof and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls.
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Vapor retarder under concrete slabs on grade.
B. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.
C. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt
insulation.
D. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashings installed in conjunction with
weather barriers.
E. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing building expansion joints.
F. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor
retarders.
B. Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor
permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent
surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers are
classified as vapor retarders.
C. Water-Resistive Barrier: Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture resistant, to
the degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams.
A. AATCC Test Method 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test 2018.
B. ASTM D226/D226M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing 2017.
C. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection 2019.
D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
2020.
E. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 2016.
F. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 2013.
G. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers 2016.
H. ICC-ES AC212 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive
Barriers over Exterior Sheathing 2015.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.
C. ABAA Field Quality Control Submittals: Submit third-party reports of testing and inspection
required by ABAA QAP.
D. ABAA Manufacturer Qualification: Submit documentation of current evaluation of proposed
manufacturer and materials.
WEATHER BARRIERS 07 2500 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 5
E. ABAA Installer Qualification: Submit documentation of current contractor accreditation and

current installer certification; keep copies of each contractor accreditation and installer
certification on site during and after installation, and present on-site documentation upon
request.
A. Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP);
www.airbarrier.org/#sle:
1. Installer Qualification: Use accredited contractor, certified installers, evaluated materials,
and third-party field quality control audit.
2. Manufacturer Qualification: Use evaluated materials from a single manufacturer regularly
engaged in air barrier material manufacture, and use secondary materials approved in
writing by primary material manufacturer.
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before,
during and after installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES
A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Provide on exterior walls under exterior cladding.
1. Use building paper unless otherwise indicated.
2. Under siding, use two separate layers of building paper.
B. Air Barrier:
1. On outside surface of inside wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls use air barrier sheet,
mechanically fastened type.
2. On outside surface of single wythe masonry and concrete exterior walls use air barrier
sheet, mechanically fastened type.
3. On outside surface of sheathing of exterior walls use air barrier coating, fluid applied type.
2.02 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER MATERIALS (NEITHER AIR BARRIER OR VAPOR RETARDER)
A. Asphalt Felt: ASTM D226/D226M Type I felt (No.15).
B. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated Kraft building paper complying with requirements of ICC-ES
AC38 Grade D.
1. Water Penetration Resistance: Withstand a water head of 21 inches ( 55 cm ), minimum,
for minimum of five hours, when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127.
C. Plastic Sheet: Polymeric-based sheet complying with requirements of ICC-ES AC38 Grade D
with 60-minute water-resistance; do not use polyethylene sheet.
D. Weather-Resistive Barrier, Composite: Tear-resistant polyester sheet with UV-resistant acrylic
coating.
1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cfm/sq ft ( 0.02 L/(s sq m) ), maximum, when tested in accordance
with ASTM E2178.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: 200 perms ( 11400 ng/(Pa s sq m) ), minimum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M Procedure A (Desiccant Method) at 73.4 degrees F (
23 degrees C ).
3. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for up to 210
days of weather exposure.
4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed
index of 450 or less (Class A), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
5. Seam and Perimeter Tape: As recommended by sheet manufacturer.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 5
2.03 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (AIR AND VAPOR BARRIER)

A. Air and Vapor Barrier Sheet, Self-Adhered:
with ASTM E2178.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perms ( 1.14 ng/(Pa s sq m) ), maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure B.
3. Water Penetration Resistance Around Nails: Pass, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D1970/D1970M (modified).
4. Ultraviolet (UV) and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for up
to 30 days of weather exposure.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; ExoAir
110: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
B. Air and Vapor Barrier Sheet, Fluid-Applied:
with ASTM E2178.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.1 perm ( 5.72 ng/(Pa s sq m) ), maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M Procedure A (Desiccant Method) at 73.4 degrees F (
23 degrees C ).
3. Water Penetration Resistance Around Nails: Pass, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D1970/D1970M.
4. Ultraviolet (UV) and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for up
to 60 days of weather exposure.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; ExoAir
130: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by material manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with
proper installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Water-Resistive Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped
to shed water but with seams not sealed.
C. Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams
and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 5
D. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior:

1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal.
2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches.
3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12
inches ( 305 mm ).
4. For applications specified to be air tight, seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cuts
with self-adhesive tape; use only large-headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by the
manufacturer.
5. Install water-resistive barrier over jamb flashings.
6. Install air barrier and vapor retarder underneath the jamb flashings.
7. Install head flashings under weather barrier.
8. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into
opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing.
E. Coatings:
1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating manufacturer; treat joints in
substrate and between dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Where exterior masonry veneer is to be installed, install masonry anchors before installing
weather barrier over masonry; seal around anchors air tight.
3. Use flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints.
F. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:
1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches (
125 mm ) onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches ( 150 mm ) up jambs; mechanically
fasten stretched edges.
2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges
using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with sealing
tape at least 4 inches ( 100 mm ) wide; do not seal sill flange.
3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to each side of
opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches ( 230 mm ) wide, covering entire depth of
framing.
4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches ( 50
mm ) beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.
5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing,
using joint sealant over backer rod.
6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to
weather barrier surface.
A. See DIV-01400 Quality Assurance Requirements for Construction Projects, for additional
requirements.
B. Coordination of ABAA Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide testing and inspection required by ABAA QAP.
2. Notify ABAA in writing of schedule for air barrier work, and allow adequate time for testing
and inspection.
3. Cooperate with ABAA testing agency.
4. Allow access to air barrier work areas and staging.
5. Do not cover air barrier work until tested, inspected, and accepted.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 5
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.
B. Do not leave paper- or felt-based barriers exposed to weather for longer than one week.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
Issue No. Final
SECTION 07 4113
METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Architectural roofing system of preformed steel panels.
B. Attachment syatem.
C. Finishes.
D. Accessories.
A. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Roof framing and purlins.
B. Section 07 4213 - Metal Wall Panels: Preformed wall panels.
C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between metal roof panel system and adjacent
construction.
A. ASTM A463/A463M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process 2015, with Editorial Revision (2020).
B. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
C. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection 2019.
D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 2016.
E. ASTM E1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and
Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 2005 (Reapproved 2017).
F. ICC-ES AC188 - Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments 2012, with Editorial Revision
(2015).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions,
spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions.
1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.
C. Verification Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit samples of minimum size 12
inches ( 305 mm ) square, representing actual roofing metal, thickness, profile, color, and
texture.
D. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with
at least three years of documented experience.
A. Provide strippable plastic protection on prefinished roofing panels for removal after installation.
B. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to
panels prior to installation.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07 4113 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
Issue No. Final
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See DIV-01800 Construction Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty
requirements.
B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's special warranty covering failure of factory-applied
exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence
of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified
warranty period of five years from Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for weathertightness of roofing
system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within
specified warranty period of five years from Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design is based on PAC-CLAD - TITE-LOC PANEL, manufactured by Peterson Aluminum
Corporation - https://www.pac-clad.com/products/metal-roofing/tite-loc-panels/.
2.02 METAL ROOF PANELS
A. Metal Roof Panels: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified
requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement
of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system.
B. Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish.
1. Steel Panels:
a. Aluminum-coated steel complying with ASTM A463/A463M; minimum Type 2 T2-65 (
T2M-200 ) coating.
b. Steel Thickness: Minimum 24 gage, 0.0299 inch ( 0.76 mm ).
2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 1.0 inch ( 25 mm ) seam height; concealed
fastener system for field seaming with special tool.
3. Texture: Smooth.
4. Length: Full length of roof slope, without lapped horizontal joints.
5. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 16 inches ( 406 mm ).
2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM
2.04 FINISHES
A. Fluoropolymer Coil Coating System: Manufacturer's standard multi-coat aluminum coil coating
system complying with AAMA 2605, including at least 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride
(PVDF) resin, and at least 80 percent of coil coated aluminum surfaces having minimum total
dry film thickness (DFT) of 0.9 mil, 0.0009 inch ( 0.023 mm ); color and gloss to match sample.
B. Solar reflectance index (SRI): 82 min.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, trim, closure strips, caps, and similar
sheet metal items of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels.
Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless steel.
B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of closed-cell
synthetic rubber, neoprene, or PVC or combination steel and closed-cell foam.
C. Sealants:
1. Exposed Sealant: Elastomeric; silicone, polyurethane, or silyl-terminated
polyether/polyurethane.
2. Concealed Sealant: Non-curing butyl sealant or tape sealant.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
Issue No. Final
D. Underlayment – Basis of design: High Temperature (HT) product: Self-adhering rubber-

modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970/D1970M; 40 mil ( 1.02 mm ) total
thickness; with strippable release film and woven polypropylene sheet top surface.
1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with requirements of ICC-ES ESR-3121 for non-self-
adhesive sheet.
2. Self Sealability: Passing nail sealability test specified in ASTM D1970/D1970M.
3. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970/D1970M.
4. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D1970/D1970M.
5. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perm ( 2.9 ng/Pa s sq m ), maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M Procedure A (desiccant method).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properly
prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other
adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks.
B. Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film
carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces.
C. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt
sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer.
D. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal
joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions.
Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and
structural movement.
1. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods
that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited.
B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including
flashings, trim, moldings, closure strips, caps, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof
accessory items.
C. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimizing
transverse joints except at junction with penetrations.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films,
excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and
unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary
walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until
completion of project.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
Issue No. Final
B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before Date of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 07 4619
STEEL SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Steel siding for exterior walls.
B. Trim, flashings, accessories, and fasteners for steel siding.
A. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers.
B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashings and trim associated with
metal siding.
C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between siding and adjacent construction and
fixtures.
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Siding materials, underlayment, flashings, fasteners and accessories.
3. Dimensions, physical properties, and typical details.
4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
5. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, methods of attachment, provisions for movement, flashing,
trim, edge and field conditions, interface with adjacent materials, locations of cutouts or special
shapes, existing construction, and details.
D. Samples: For each finish product specified, provide two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns, including the following:
E. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
F. Installer's Qualification Statement.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
section, with not less than five years of documented experience.
at least five years of documented experience.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section DIV-01800 Construction Completion and Acceptance for additional warranty
requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard lifetime, non-prorated, transferable
warranty, including 50 year hail protection warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Siding:
1. Berridge Manufacturing Co. - www.Berridge.com..
STEEL SIDING 07 4619 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
B. Steel soffits and accessories:

1. Berridge - FW-12 Panels: www.berridge.com/products/fecia-wall-and-soffit-panels/fw-12-
panel/.
2.02 STEEL SIDING
A. Type Masterline 13 , Horizontal Steel Siding:
1. Factory-formed steel siding.
2. Material: Precoated steel sheet, 26 gage, 0.0179 inch ( 0.45 mm ) minimum base metal
thickness.
3. Nailing Hem: Single layer, with 1-1/8 inch ( 28 mm ) elongated nail holes at maximum 1-
5/8 inches ( 41 mm ) on center.
4. Length: 12 feet ( 3.66 m ), minimum.
5. Finish: Shop pre-coated with manufacturer's standard SMP (silicone-modified polyester)
coating system.
6. Color: As indicated on drawings.
7. Texture: Smooth.
B. Steel Siding Accessories:
1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized; non-staining, of size and strength to securely and
rigidly retain the work; prefinished to match siding finish.
2. Flashing: Siding manufacturer's standard, factory-finished flashing accessories.
3. Provide coordinating accessories made of same material as required for complete and
proper installation whether or not specifically shown on drawings.
a. Starter strip.
b. Corner post.
c. J-Channels.
d. Window and door trim.
e. Drip cap.
4. Steel Fascia:
a. Material: Precoated steel sheet, 26 gage, 0.0179 inch ( 0.45 mm ) minimum base
metal thickness.
b. Dimensions: 6 inches ( 152 mm ) wide by 10 feet ( 3.04 m ) long.
c. Finish: Shop pre-coated with manufacturer's standard SMP (silicone-modified
polyester) coating system.
d. Color: Match siding.
e. Texture: Smooth
5. Steel Soffit:
a. Material: Precoated steel sheet, 26 gage, 0.0179 inch ( 0.45 mm ) minimum base
metal thickness.
b. Profile: Solid, flush; style as indicated on drawings.
6. Soffit Accessories: Provide coordinating accessories made of matching material as
required for complete and proper installation.
a. F-Channel Trim
b. Roof Drip Edge, Quick Start.
c. Fascia Corner.
d. Color: Match adjacent siding or soffit panels.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Precoated Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, Structural
Steel (SS) or Forming Steel (FS), with G90/Z275 coating; continuous coil-coated on exposed
surfaces with specified finish coating, and manufacturer's standard panel back coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate conditions before beginning installation.
B. Verify dimensions and acceptable substrate condition.
C. If substrate preparation is responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
conditions before proceeding.
D. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Prepare surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install steel siding, soffit, trim and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Attach siding using manufacturers recommended fasteners, sealants, and adhesives, allowing
for thermal expansion.
C. Horizontal Clapboard: Work from base of installation to top; stagger lap joints in horizontal
siding in uniform pattern as successive courses of siding are installed.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove grease and oil films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and other installation debris
from steel siding, leaving siding clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch
marks, or other damage to material finishes.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 07 6200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters and downspouts.
B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.
C. Precast concrete splash pads.
A. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Metal flashings embedded in masonry.
B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers for sheet metal work.
C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing non-lap joints between sheet metal fabrications and
adjacent construction.
D. Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment: Vibration isolation curbs for mechanical equipment.
A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum 2014 (2015 Errata).
B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 2014.
D. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(Metric) 2014.
E. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction 2012
(Reapproved 2019).
F. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products
2014.
G. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2018.
H. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free 2007
(Reapproved 2018).
I. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) requirementsand standard details, except
as otherwise indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Manufacturers:
1. Petersen Aluminum Corporation: www.pac-clad.com/#sle.
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage,
(0.0239 inch) ( 0.61 mm ) thick base metal.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
B. Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 20 gage, (0.032 inch) ( 0.81 mm ) thick; anodized
finish of color as selected.
1. Clear Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Class I clear anodic coating not less
than 0.7 mils ( 0.018 mm ) thick.
C. Lead Sheet: ASTM B749, 0.047 inch ( 1.19 mm ) minimum thickness; UNS Number L51121.
D. Copper: ASTM B370, cold rolled 16 oz/sq ft (24 gage) (0.0216 inch) ( 0.55 mm ) thick; natural
finish.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch ( 13 mm ); miter and seam corners.
D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated; at moving joints, use
sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch ( 450 mm ) long legs; seam for rigidity,
seal with sealant.
F. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches ( 50 mm ) over roofing material. Return and
brake edges.
2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION
A. Gutters: Basis of design is PAC-CLAD product: SMACNA (ASMM) Rectangular profile.
B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile.
C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size indicated on drawings.
D. Color: As indicated on drawings.
E. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) requirements.
2. Gutter Supports: Brackets.
3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.
4. Metal gutter guards/screens.
F. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi ( 21 MPa
) at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.
G. Downspout Extenders: Same material and finish as downspouts.
H. Seal metal joints.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.
B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.
C. Concealed Sealants: Non-curing butyl sealant.
D. Exposed Sealants: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, with minimum movement capability as
recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; color to match adjacent material.
E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets
in place, and nailing strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 15 mil ( 0.4 mm ).
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to drawing details and SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners, and use exposed fasteners only where
permitted..
C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
D. Fit flashings tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
E. Seal metal joints watertight.
F. Secure gutters and downspouts in place with concealed fasteners.
G. Set splash pads under downspouts.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 07 7200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Snow guards.
A. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking.
B. Section 07 4113 - Metal Roof Panels.
C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Roof accessory items fabricated from sheet
metal.
A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
Hardware 2016a.
C. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation 2018.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
3. Installation methods.
4. Maintenance requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed layout developed for this project and provide dimensioned
location and number for each type of roof accessory.
1. Non-penetrating Rooftop Supports: Submit design calculations for loadings and spacings.
2. Snow Guards: Submit design calculations for loadings and spacings based on
manufacturer testing.
3. Submit shop drawings sealed and signed by a Professional Engineer experienced in
design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
D. Warranty Documentation:
1. Submit manufacturer warranty.
2. Ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with
manufacturer.
3. Submit documentation that roof accessories are acceptable to roofing manufacturer, and
do not limit the roofing warranty.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. See Section DIV-01800 Construction Completion and Acceptance for additional warranty
requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NON-PENETRATING ROOFTOP MAINTENANCE AND LADDER TIE-OFFS
A. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Support/Assemblies: Manufacturer-engineered and factory-
fabricated, with pedestal bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, and not requiring any
attachment to roof structure and not penetrating roofing assembly.
1. Design Loadings and Configurations: As required by applicable codes.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 7200 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
2. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches ( 152 mm ) under supported items to top
of roofing.
3. Support Spacing and Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent
indentation of roofing assembly.
4. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
5. Hardware, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
6. Maintenance tie-off anchors.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Metal Roof Innovations, Ltd. S-5! Attachment Solutions; S-5! Utility System: www.s-
5.com/#sle.
2.02 SNOW GUARDS
A. Unit Snow Guards: Individual projecting polycarbonate shapes, set between roofing
shingles/tiles, and mechanically fastened to roof deck.
1. Projecting Polycarbonate Shapes: Clear polycarbonate plastic with UV stabilizers, semi-
circular design.
2. Placement: As indicated on drawings.
3. Manufacturers:
a. TRA Snow and Sun: www.trasnowandsun.com/#sle.
B. Fence Type Snow Guard: Continuous snow guard; manufacturer's standard pipe, bar, channel,
or solid rod, set in brackets or posts, with optional plates and metal trim to match roof.
1. Brackets: Zinc plated steel.
2. Pipe or Square Tube: Aluminum, mill finish.
a. Outside Diameter, Round: 1 inch ( 25.4 mm ), nominal.
b. Sleeve Couplings: As recommended by manufacturer.
3. Supplemental Plates and Clips: Attached to horizontal component; match finish of pipe,
tube, rod, or channel.
C. Clamps for Standing Seam Roof: Aluminum clamps attached to standing seams of roof panels;
for attachment of fence type snow guard.
1. Seam Profile: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range; match profile of
metal roof.
D. Manufacturers:
1. TRA Snow and Sun; C22Z Clamp-On: www.trasnowandsun.com/#sle.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving acceptable
results for applicable substrate under project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing system
weather-tight integrity.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean installed work to like-new condition.
3.05 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 07 8400
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Firestopping systems.
B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.
A. SCAQMD 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications 1989 (Amended 2017).
B. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, VOC content documentation for all
non-preformed materials., VOC content documentation for all non-preformed materials., fire
rating of the penetrated assembly, firestopping test or design number and VOC content
documentation for all non-preformed materials..
C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings and limitations.
D. Sustainable Design Submittal: Submit VOC content documentation for all non-preformed
materials.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings
when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1. Listing in UL (FRD) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at www.icc-
es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions
during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three days
after installation of materials.
B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Firestopping Manufacturers:
1. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Provide Manufacturers as show on each unique firestopping assembly on the drawings, with
UL (or other) System Number for each. Other acceptable manufacturers products are
acceptable provide equivalent listed firestopping assemblies are submitted as a Substitution
per Section 01 6000 - Prodcut Requirements.
B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Provide products having VOC content lower than
that required by SCAQMD 1168.
C. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of
materials as required for tested firestopping assembly.
FIRESTOPPING 07 8400 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 2
D. Fire Ratings: Refer to drawings for required systems and ratings.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials that could
adversely affect bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, completely closing openings.
B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Install labeling required by code.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
FIRESTOPPING 07 8400 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants.
B. Joint backings and accessories.
A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Additional
requirements for sealants and primers.
B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Setting exterior door thresholds in sealant.
C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing acoustical and sound-rated walls and
ceilings.
D. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Sealant between tile and plumbing fixtures and at junctions with other
materials and changes in plane.
A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by
Means of a Durometer 2015.
B. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2018.
C. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants 2017.
D. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications 2018.
E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2018.
F. ASTM C1087 - Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants
with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems 2016.
G. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 2016.
H. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants 2018.
I. ASTM C1311 - Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants 2014.
J. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness 2015, with
Editorial Revision (2017).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be
used, that includes the following.
1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure
time, and color availability.
2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product.
3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible.
4. Substrates the product should not be used on.
5. Sample product warranty.
6. Certification by manufacturer indicating that product complies with specification
requirements.
C. Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for each
product to be used, including physical characteristics, installation instructions, and
recommended tools.
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 5
D. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color
cards showing standard colors available for selection.
E. Sustainable Design Documentation: For sealants and primers, submit VOC content and
emissions documentation as specified in Section 01 6116.
F. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: Submit at least four weeks prior to start of
installation.
G. Preinstallation Field Adhesion Test Reports: Submit filled out Preinstallation Field Adhesion
Test Reports log within 10 days after completion of tests; include bagged test samples and
photographic records.
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and with at
least three years of documented experience.
B. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Arrange for sealant manufacturer(s) to test each
combination of sealant, substrate, backing, and accessories.
1. Adhesion Testing: In accordance with ASTM C794.
2. Compatibility Testing: In accordance with ASTM C1087.
3. Allow sufficient time for testing to avoid delaying the work.
4. Deliver to manufacturer sufficient samples for testing.
5. Report manufacturer's recommended corrective measures, if any, including primers or
techniques not indicated in product data submittals.
6. Testing is not required if sealant manufacturer provides data showing previous testing, not
older than 24 months, that shows satisfactory adhesion, lack of staining, and compatibility.
1.06 WARRANTY
B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to
achieve watertight seal , exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Non-Sag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging or
slumping.
1. Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com/construction/sle.
2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS
A. Scope:
1. Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on drawings, unless
specifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not
limited to, the following items.
a. Wall expansion and control joints.
b. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.
c. Joints between different exposed materials.
d. Openings below ledge angles in masonry.
e. Other joints indicated below.
2. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior
joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items.
a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 5
b. In sound-rated wall and ceiling assemblies, gaps at electrical outlets, wiring devices,
piping, and other openings; between wall/ceiling and other construction; and other
flanking sound paths.
1) Exception: Through-penetrations in sound-rated assemblies that are also fire-
rated assemblies.
c. Other joints indicated below.
3. Do not seal the following types of joints.
a. Intentional weepholes in masonry.
b. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other
type of sealing device.
c. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be
sealed.
d. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section.
e. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls.
B. Exterior Joints: Use nonsag non-staining silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Lap Joints in Sheet Metal Fabrications: Butyl rubber, non-curing.
2. Lap Joints between Manufactured Metal Panels: Butyl rubber, non-curing.
3. Control and Expansion Joints in Concrete Paving: Self-leveling polyurethane "traffic-
grade" sealant.
C. Interior Joints: Use nonsag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Non-Wet Areas: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant.
2. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Wet Areas: Non-sag polyurethane sealant for continuous liquid
immersion.
3. Floor Joints in Wet Areas: Nonsag polyurethane "nontraffic-grade" sealant suitable for
continuous liquid immersion.
4. Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Joints Where Tamper-Resistance is Required: Nonsag tamper-
resistant silyl-terminated polyurethane sealant.
5. Joints between Fixtures in Wet Areas and Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Mildew-resistant
silicone sealant; clear.
6. In Sound-Rated Assemblies: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant.
D. Interior Wet Areas: restrooms, kitchens and food service areas; fixtures in wet areas include
plumbing fixtures, food service equipment, countertops, cabinets and other similar items.
E. Sound-Rated Assemblies: Walls and ceilings identified as "STC-rated", "sound-rated", or
"acoustical".
F. Areas Where Tamper-Resistance is Required: As indicated on drawings.
2.03 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERAL
A. Sealants and Primers: Provide products with levels of volatile organic compound (VOC)
content as indicated in Section 01 6116.
B. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces unless otherwse indcated on drawings.
2.04 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS
A. Type Vestibule doors and exterior windows - Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920,
Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.
1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus +100/-50% percent, minimum.
2. Non-Staining To Porous Stone: Non-staining to light-colored natural stone when tested in
accordance with ASTM C1248.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 5
3. Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants.

4. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Dow Chemical Company; DOWSIL 790 Silicone Building
Sealant: consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-construction.html/#sle.
B. Type Wet - Polyurethane Sealant for Continuous Water Immersion: ASTM C920, Grade NS,
Uses M and A; single component; explicitly approved by manufacturer for continuous water
immersion; suitable for traffic exposure when recessed below traffic surface .
1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 35 percent, minimum.
2. Hardness Range: 20 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661.
3. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F ( Minus 40 to 82 degrees C ).
C. Type Walls/sound walls - Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single
component, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging; not intended for exterior use.
1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces, Type OP (opaque).
2. Grade: ASTM C834; Grade Minus 18 Degrees C (0 Degrees F).
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to,
compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant
manufacturers for specific application.
B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and
recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application.
C. Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, non-staining, removable without adhesive
residue, and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants.
D. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, type recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
E. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants.
C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant
work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable.
E. Concrete Floor Joints That Will Be Exposed in Completed Work: Test joint filler in
inconspicuous area to verify that it does not stain or discolor slab.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 5
C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.

D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck
dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific
dimensions are indicated.
E. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used.
F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without
getting sealant on adjacent surfaces.
G. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended
temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless
manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed.
H. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape
immediately after tooling sealant surface.
I. Concrete Floor Joint Filler: After full cure, shave joint filler flush with top of concrete slab.
3.04 POST-OCCUPANCY
A. Post-Occupancy Inspection: Perform visual inspection of entire length of project sealant joints
at a time that joints have opened to their greatest width; i.e. at low temperature in thermal
cycle. Report failures immediately and repair.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fire rated, non-fire rated and STC rated hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Hollow metal frames for wood doors.
C. Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames.
D. Hollow metal borrowed lites glazing frames.
E. Accessories, including glazing.
A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
C. Section 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING: Field painting.
D. Section 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING: Field painting.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.
B. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers.
C. HMMA: Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association.
D. NAAMM: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
E. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
F. SDI: Steel Door Institute.
G. UL: Underwriters Laboratories.
A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design 2010.
B. ANSI/SDI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings
for Steel Doors and Frames 2007 (R2011).
C. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors 2011.
D. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors
and Frames 2003 (R2009).
E. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100) 2017.
F. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces
for Steel Doors and Frames 2011.
G. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
H. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable 2018.
I. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
J. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
2020.
K. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation 2016.
L. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and
Steel Frames 2016.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 5
M. FBC TAS 201 - Impact Test Procedures; Testing Application Standard 1994.
N. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2017.
O. NAAMM HMMA 805 - Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames 2012.
P. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2002.
Q. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2011.
R. NAAMM HMMA 860 - Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2018.
S. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
2014.
T. NAAMM HMMA 867 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Laminated Core Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames 2016.
U. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives 2019.
V. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2017.
W. SDI 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames 2013.
X. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory Current Edition.
Y. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and any
indicated finish requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products
specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
1. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
1. Steel Sheet: Comply with one or more of the following requirements; galvannealed steel
complying with ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM
A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel complying with ASTM
A1011/A1011M, commercial steel (CS) Type B, for each.
2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.
3. Exterior Door Top Closures: Flush end closure channel, with top and door faces aligned.
4. Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush.
5. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and
NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance
6. Zinc Coating for Typical Interior and/or Exterior Locations: Provide metal components
zinc-coated (galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip
process in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating
thickness, unless noted otherwise for specific hollow metal doors and frames.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 5
a. Based on NAAMM HMMA Custom Guidelines: Provide at least A25/ZF75

(galvannealed) for interior applications, and at least A60/ZF180 (galvannealed) or
G60/Z180 (galvanized) for corrosive locations.
B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated.
1. Based on NAAMM HMMA Custom Guidelines:
a. Comply with guidelines of {\rs\#1} for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
b. Performance Level 3 - Heavy Duty, in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 805.
c. Physical Performance Level C, 250,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.
d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch ( 1.3 mm ), minimum.
e. Zinc Coating: A60/ZF180 (galvannealed) or G60/Z180 (galvanized).; ASTM
A653/A653M.
2. Door Thermal Resistance: R-Value of 6.0 minimum, for installed thickness of polystyrene.
3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch ( 44.5 mm ), nominal.
4. Top Closures for Outswinging Doors: Flush with top of faces and edges.
5. Door Face Sheets: Flush.
6. Weatherstripping: Refer to Section 08 7100.
7. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire Rated:
1. Based on NAAMM HMMA Custom Guidelines:
a. Comply with guidelines of NAAMM HMMA 867 for Commercial Laminated Core
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
b. Performance Level 3 - Heavy Duty, in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 805.
c. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI
A250.4.
d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch ( 1.3 mm ), minimum.
2. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in compliance
with requirements.
3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch ( 44.5 mm ), nominal.
4. Door STC Rating: 36
5. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in
accordance with applicable door frame requirements.
B. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
C. Exterior Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type.
1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance
with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating.
2. Frame Metal Thickness: 18 gage, 0.042 inch ( 1.0 mm ), minimum.
3. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.
D. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Face welded type.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 5
1. Terminated Stops: Provide at interior doors; closed end stop terminated 6 inch ( 150 mm
), maximum, above floor at 45 degree angle.
2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch ( 1.3 mm ), minimum.
E. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding
door.
F. Mullions for Pairs of Doors: Removable type, with profile similar to jambs.
G. Borrowed Lites Glazing Frames: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and
as indicated on drawings.
H. Transom Bars: Fixed, of profile same as jamb and head.
I. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be
grouted.
J. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inch ( 102 mm )
high to fill opening without cutting masonry units.
K. Frames Wider than 48 inches ( 1219 mm ): Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame
head, flush with top.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
B. Factory Finish: Complying with ANSI/SDI A250.3, manufacturer's standard coating.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed.
B. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout with maximum 4 inch ( 102 mm ) slump for hand
troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited.
C. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door,
three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions.
D. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior
to installation.
B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch ( 1.6 mm ).
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related
requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.
B. Install prefinished frames after painting and wall finishes are complete.
C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that
pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.
E. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100.
1. Comply with recommended practice for hardware placement of doors and frames in
accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.6 or NAAMM HMMA 861.
F. Comply with glazing installation requirements of Section 08 8000.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 5
G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.

H. Touch up damaged factory finishes.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame
standards or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch ( 1.6 mm ) measured with straight edge, corner to
corner.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 08 1416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Flush wood doors; flushand flush glazed configuration; acoustical.
B. Transom panels.
A. Section 08 1213 - Hollow Metal Frames.
B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
D. Section 08 91 00: Metal door louvers.
E. Section 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING: Field finishing of doors.
A. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass
2018.
B. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements 2009 (Reapproved 2016).
C. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation 2016.
D. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards 2014, with Errata (2018).
E. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1
F. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates 2005.
G. WDMA I.S. 1A - Interior Architectural Wood Flush Doors 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling,
blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.
1. Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).
D. Test Reports: Show compliance with specified requirements for the following:
1. Sound-retardant doors and frames; sealed panel tests are not acceptable.
E. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging, and inspect for damage.
C. Protect doors with resilient packaging. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where
sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break
seal on site to permit ventilation.
1.06 WARRANTY
B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials and telegraphing core construction.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
1. Maiman; Thermal Fused Flush Doors: www.maiman.com.
2.02 DOORS AND PANELS
A. Doors:Refer to drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with {\rs\#1} or
AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.
2. Where plastic laminate (P'Lam) is indicated on door schedule, use either high pressure
decorative laminate (HPDL) faced doors in compliance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS),
AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) or WDMA I.S. 1A, or low pressure decorative laminate (LPDL)
faced doors in compliance with WDMA I.S. 1A.
B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches ( 44 mm ) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at each location.
2. Sound-Rated Doors: Minimum STC of 52, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413,
tested in accordance with ASTM E90.
C. Transom Panels: Same construction and finish as door; same performance rating as door.
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and
faces as indicated.
B. Sound-Rated Doors: Equivalent to type, with particleboard core (PC) construction as required
to achieve STC rating specified; plies and faces as indicated above.
2.04 DOOR FACINGS
A. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) Facing for Fire Doors: NEMA LD 3, SGF; laminate
as schedule; satin finish.
2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.
2. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware.
C. Glazed Openings: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as
D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions.
E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge
clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.
F. Provide edgeve clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Pre-Finished Hollow Metal Door Frames: As specified in Section 08 1213.
B. Door Hardware: See Section 08 7100.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or
alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Comply with specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B. Comply with specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closers for full closure.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 08 4313
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.
B. Aluminum doors and frames.
C. Weatherstripping.
D. Door hardware.
A. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Steel attachment members.
B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction.
C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section.
D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.
E. Section 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING: Field painting of interior surface of infill panels.
F. Section 12 2400 - Window Shades: Attachments to framing members.
A. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed
Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems 2015.
B. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum
(Combined Document) 2015.
C. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum 2014 (2015 Errata).
D. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance
of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections 2009.
E. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures
Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.
F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
G. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
H. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
I. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 2014.
J. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 2000 (Reapproved 2016).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,
anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,
affected related work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding
required.
1. Include design engineer's stamp or seal on shop drawings for attachments and anchors.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 4313 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 5
D. Samples: Submit two samples illustrating finished aluminum surface, glass, infill panels,
glazing materials.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
F. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering
calculations, and dimensional limitations.
G. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each
door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents.
H. Field Quality Control Submittals: Report of field testing for water penetration and air leakage.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct
supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and
licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and
with at least three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at
1.06 WARRANTY
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior
finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN -- FRAMING FOR INSULATING GLAZING
A. Center-Set Style, Thermally-Broken:
1. Basis of Design: Arcadia; TC470 Series: www.arcadiainc.com.
2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep ( 51 mm wide by 114
mm deep ).
2.02 BASIS OF DESIGN -- SWINGING DOORS
A. Narrow Stile, Insulating Glazing, Thermally-Broken:
1. Basis of Design: Arcadia: www.arcadiainc.com.
2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches ( 43 mm ).
2.03 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT
A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members
with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch ( 25 mm ) insulating glazing.
2. Finish: Superior performing organic coatings.
a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
b. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in
completed assemblies, including joint edges.
3. Finish Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 5
4. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and
secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments
concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads.
5. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration
harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.
6. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
7. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F ( 95 degrees C ) over a 12 hour
period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other
building elements.
8. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without
damage to components or deterioration of seals.
9. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent
construction while allowing expected movement.
10. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout
assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glazing and inner sheet of infill panel and
heel bead of glazing compound.
11. Preparation for Window Treatments: Provide reinforced interior horizontal head rail.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements
without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M,
using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of applicable code.
b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,
with full recovery of glazing materials.
2. Water Penetration Resistance on Manufactured Assembly: No uncontrolled water on
interior face, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8 psf (
390 Pa ).
3. Air Leakage Laboratory Test: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min sq ft ( 0.3 L/sec sq m ) of wall
area, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 psf ( 300 Pa ) pressure
differential across assembly.
4. Overall U-value Including Glazing: 50 Btu/(hr sq ft deg F) ( 2.8 W/(sq m K) ), maximum.
2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, drainage holes and internal weep
drainage system.
1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken.
2. Glazing Stops: Flush.
3. Cross-Section: As indicated on drawings.
4. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of
structural steel member.
B. Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum.
1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches ( 43 mm ).
2. Top Rail: 4 inches ( 100 mm ) wide.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 5
3. Vertical Stiles: 4-1/2 inches ( 115 mm ) wide.

4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches ( 254 mm ) wide.
5. Glazing Stops: Square.
6. Finish: Same as storefront.
2.05 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
C. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration
requirements.
2.06 FINISHES
A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less
than 0.7 mils ( 0.018 mm ) thick.
2.07 HARDWARE
A. For each door, include sill sweep strip and threshold.
B. Other Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application.
1. Finish on Hand-Contacted Items: Polished chrome.
2. For each door, include butt hinges, pivots, push handle, pull handle, exit device, narrow
stile handle latch and closer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.
G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads
to sill flashing.
H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of
thermal barrier.
I. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure.
J. Install hardware using templates provided.
K. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inch per 3 feet ( 1.5 mm per m ) non-cumulative or 0.06
inch per 10 feet ( 1.5 mm per 3 m ), whichever is less.
B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch ( 0.8 mm ).
A. Provide services of storefront manufacturer's field representative to observe for proper
installation of system and submit report.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 5
B. Water-Spray Test: Provide water spray quality test of installed storefront components in
accordance with AAMA 501.2 during construction process and before installation of interior
finishes.
1. Perform a minimum of two tests in each designated area as indicated on drawings.
2. Conduct tests in each area prior to 10 percent and 50 percent completion of this work.
C. Replace storefront components that have failed field testing and retest until performance is
satisfactory.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths, and take care to remove dirt from corners and to wipe surfaces clean.
C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA
609 & 610.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 23
SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for:
a. Swinging doors.
b. Sliding doors.
c. Gates.
2. Electrified door hardware.

3. Field verification, preparation and modification of existing doors and frames to receive
new door hardware.
4. The intent of the hardware specification is to specify the hardware for interior and exterior
doors, and to establish a type, continuity, and standard of quality. However, it is the door
hardware supplier’s responsibility to thoroughly review existing conditions, schedules,
specifications, drawings, and other Contract Documents to verify the suitability of the
hardware specified.
B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this
section for:
1. Windows
2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets
3. Signage
4. Toilet accessories
5. Overhead doors
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates affecting this section.

2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold
installation specified in this section.
3. Division 09 sections for touchup, finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by
this section.
4. Division 26 sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring.
5. Division 28 sections for coordination with other components of Electrified door hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 23

1.03 REFERENCES
A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories
1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies

2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies
3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies
4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware
B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute
1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule

2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware
3. Key Systems and Nomenclature
C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and
Specialties
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements.

2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from
Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally
affect the Work.
3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and
frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article,
herein.
B. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data: Technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation
instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary
to show compliance with requirements.
2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of
electrified door hardware, indicating:
a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including:
1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and Owner consultant systems.
2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware.
3) Point-to-point wiring.
4) Risers.
3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample

installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full
description for coordination with schedule.
a. Samples will be returned to supplier. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after
final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key
coordination requirements.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 23

4. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as
illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door
and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each
door or opening, include:
a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set
number.
b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each
opening.
c. Quantity, type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
d. Name and manufacturer of each item.
e. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings.
g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
h. Mounting locations for hardware.
i. Door and frame sizes and materials.
j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product.
k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits,
electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches,
magnetic holders or closer/holder units and openers). Operational description should
include operational descriptions for: egress, ingress (access), and fire/smoke alarm
connections.
1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with
submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate
submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other
work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction
schedule.
5. Key Schedule:
a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as
explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled.
b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as
guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying
system.
c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance
with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each
key to unique door designations.
d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross
keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions.
e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic
illustrating system usage and expansion.
1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by
means as directed by Owner.
f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final

keying instructions for locks.
6. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors,
frames and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared for door hardware
installation.
C. Informational Submittals:
1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 23

2. Product data for electrified door hardware:
a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated
doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.
3. Certificates of Compliance:
a. UL listings for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions if requested by

Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction.
b. Installer Training Meeting Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor,
attesting to completion of installer training meeting specified in “QUALITY
ASSURANCE” article, herein.
c. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance,
signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination
conference, specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.
4. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
D. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include:
a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and

replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.
b. Catalog pages for each product.
c. Factory order acknowledgement numbers (for warranty and service)
d. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.
e. Parts list for each product.
f. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed.
g. Final keying schedule
h. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature
i. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage
and 110 volts.
j. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to
identify project.
A. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with

record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity,
type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable
times during the Work for consultation.
1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.

2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including
Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard
units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
4. Coordination Responsibility: Assist in coordinating installation of electrified door hardware
with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to
Architect and other related subcontractors.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 23

a. Upon completion of electronic hardware installation, inspect and verify that all
components are working properly.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing

consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements:
1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).

2. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors.
3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation.
4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams.
5. Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical
engineers.
C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.
D. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with
NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door
hardware that are listed products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing
Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-
rated door and door frame labels.
E. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein.
G. Keying Conference
1. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door
hardware keying system including:
a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of control required,
and plans for future expansion.
b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
c. Requirements for key control system.
d. Requirements for opener.
e. Address for delivery of keys.
H. Pre-installation Conference
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware.
4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware.
5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
I. Coordination Conferences:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 23

1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold
meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of
door hardware.
2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware,
schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with Owner’s consultant,
electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers.
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to
Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware
schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each
item or package.
1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging.
C. Project Conditions:
1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and

installation periods.
2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project. Control handling and
installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware
losses both before and after installation.
D. Protection and Damage:
1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping.

2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or
repair products damaged during Work.
3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical
agent.
E. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction.
Cast anchoring inserts into concrete.
B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory or
shop prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
C. Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and opener with Owner's consultants.
D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware
with connections to power supplies and Owner consultant systems.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 23

E. Existing Openings: Where existing doors, frames and/or hardware are to remain, field verify
existing functions, conditions and preparations and coordinate to suit opening conditions and
to provide proper door operation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: Beginning from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated.
a. Closers:
1) Mechanical: 30 years
2) Electrified: 2 years.
b. Automatic Operators: 2 years

c. Exit Devices:
1) Mechanical: 3 years.
2) Electrified: 1 year.
d. Locksets:
1) Mechanical: 10 years
2) Electrified: 1 year.
e. Continuous Hinges: Lifetime warranty.

f. Key Blanks: Lifetime
2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation,
improper use or abuse.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools: Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and
adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The Owner requires use of certain products for their unique characteristics and project
suitability to insure continuity of existing and future performance and maintenance standards.
After investigating available product offerings, the Awarding Authority has elected to prepare
proprietary specifications. These products are specified with the notation: “No Substitute.”
1. Where “No Substitute” is noted, submittals and substitution requests for other products
will not be considered.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 23

B. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as “Scheduled
Manufacturer” or “Acceptable Manufacturers” in the individual article for the product category
shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein.
C. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is

contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all
requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product.
D. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring
hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject
to Architect's approval.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Fasteners
1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared

for machine screw installation.
2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under
any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work,
to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted
finish.
3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except
when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not
use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other
work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door
specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required.
4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer.
B. Modification and Preparation of Existing Doors: Where existing door hardware is indicated to
be removed and reinstalled.
1. Provide necessary fillers, Dutchmen, reinforcements, and fasteners, compatible with

existing materials, as required for mounting new opening hardware and to cover existing
door and frame preparations.
2. Use materials which match materials of adjacent modified areas.
3. When modifying existing fire-rated openings, provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as
required to maintain fire-rating.
C. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for
hardware installation.
1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material.
2.03 HINGES
A. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Manufacturer and Products Used: Ives 5BB1 Series
B. Requirements:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 23

1. Provide hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1.
2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide:
a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high
b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high
3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide:
a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high
4. 2 inches or thicker doors:
a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high
b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high
5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and
one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.
6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges
of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame.
7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins

b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins
c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins
d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins
e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins
8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches
(127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door,
frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening.
9. Provide hinges with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with
sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.
Locate electric hinge at second hinge from bottom or nearest to electrified locking
component.
10. Provide mortar guard for each electrified hinge specified.
11. Provide spring hinges where specified. Provide two spring hinges and one bearing hinge
per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height. Provide one additional
bearing hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.
2.04 ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER
A. Manufacturer Used:
a. Von Duprin EPT-10.
B. Provide power transfer with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide
with number and gage of wires sufficient enough to accommodate electric function of
specified hardware.
C. Locate electric power transfer per manufacturer’s template and UL requirements, unless
interference with operation of door or other hardware items.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 23

2.05 PIVOT SETS
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide pivot sets complete with oil-impregnated top pivot, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Where offset pivots are specified, Provide one intermediate pivot for doors less than 91
inches (2311 mm) high and one additional intermediate pivot per leaf for each additional
30 inches (762 mm) in height or fraction thereof. Intermediate pivots spaced equally not
less than 25 inches (635 mm) or not more than 35 inches (889 mm) on center, for doors
over 121 inches (3073 mm) high.
3. Provide appropriate model where pivot sets are scheduled at fire rated openings.
4. Provide pivots with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with
sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.
Locate electrified pivot nearest to electrified locking component. If manufacturer of
electrified locking component requires another device for power transfer then provide
recommended power transfer device and appropriate quantity of pivots.
5. Provide mortar guard for each electric pivot specified, unless specified in hollow metal
frame specification.
2.06 FLUSH BOLTS
B. Requirements:
1. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze or
stainless-steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and
strikes. Provide 12 inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches (2286 mm)
in height. For doors over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height increase top rods by 6 inches
(152 mm) for each additional 6 inches (152 mm) of door height. Provide dust-proof strikes
at each bottom flush bolt.
2.07 SURFACE BOLTS
B. Requirements:
1. Surface bolt s to have 1” throw with concealed mounting. Units to be constructed of

heavy duty steel and UL listed up to three (3) hours when used on the inactive door of a
pair up to 8’ in height.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 11 of 23

2.08 COORDINATORS
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ives
B. Requirements:
1. Where pairs of doors are equipped with automatic flush bolts, an astragal, or other
hardware that requires synchronized closing of the doors, provide bar-type coordinating
device, surface applied to underside of stop at frame head.
2. Provide filler bar of correct length for unit to span entire width of opening, and appropriate
brackets for parallel arm door closers, surface vertical rod exit device strikes or other stop
mounted hardware. Factory-prepared coordinators for vertical rod devices as specified.
2.09 MORTISE LOCKS
A. Manufacturers and Products Used:
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage L-Series Mortise Lock
Requirements:
2. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1, and UL
Listed for 3 hour fire doors.
3. Provide locks manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with
a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance.
4. Provide lock case that is multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening
case. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
5. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm)
throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch
(25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel.
6. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.
7. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Where scheduled, provide
switches and sensors integrated into the locks and latches.
8. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with
wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece
spindles.
a. Lever Design: Schlage 06A

b. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction. Provide
on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be
hazardous.
2.10 EXIT DEVICES
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 98 series.
B. Requirements:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 12 of 23

1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 and UL listed for Panic Exit or
Fire Exit Hardware.
2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
3. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or
aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware.
4. Touchpad must extend a minimum of one half of door width. No plastic inserts are
allowed in touchpads.
5. Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for Owner consultant kits and/or other
electrified requirements.
6. Provide flush end caps for exit devices.
7. Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes.
8. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Install exit devices at height
recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and
approved by Architect.
9. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors or provide spacers to fill gaps behind
devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits.
10. Provide cylinder or hex-key dogging as specified at non fire-rated openings.
11. Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly
corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets.
12. Provide electrified options as scheduled.
2.11 ELECTRIC STRIKES
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 6000 Series.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide electric strikes designed for use with type of locks shown at each opening.
2. Provide electric strikes UL Listed as burglary-resistant.
3. Where required, provide electric strikes UL Listed for fire doors and frames.
4. Provide transformers and rectifiers for each strike as required. Verify voltage with
electrical contractor.
2.12 POWER SUPPLIES
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage/Von Duprin PS900 series.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide power supplies approved by manufacturer of supplied electrified hardware.

2. Provide appropriate quantity of power supplies necessary for proper operation of
electrified locking components as recommended by manufacturer of electrified locking
components with consideration for each electrified component using power supply,
location of power supply, and approved wiring diagrams. Locate power supplies as
directed by Architect.
3. Provide regulated and filtered 24 VDC power supply, and UL class 2 listed.
4. Provide power supplies with the following features:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 13 of 23

a. 12/24 VDC Output, field selectable.
b. Class 2 Rated power limited output.
c. Universal 120-240 VAC input.
d. Low voltage DC, regulated and filtered.
e. Polarized connector for distribution boards.
f. Fused primary input.
g. AC input and DC output monitoring circuit w/LED indicators.
h. Cover mounted AC Input indication.
i. Tested and certified to meet UL294.
j. NEMA 1 enclosure.
k. Hinged cover w/lock down screws.
l. High voltage protective cover.
2.13 CYLINDERS
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Schlage SFIC
B. Requirements:
1. Provide SFIC cylinders/cores to match Owner’s existing key system, compliant with
ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision; cylinder face finished to match lockset,
manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. Contractor to
provide 1C7 Best 7 Pin small formate interchangeable cores as required by the user.
Final security hardware shall be provided and installed by the user.
2. Provide the following keyway: Verify with Owner and match existing keyway
C. Construction Keying:
1. Temporary Construction Cylinder Keying.
a. Provide construction cores that permit voiding construction keys without cylinder
removal, furnished in accordance with the following requirements.
1) Keyed temporary cores Construction Keying System.
2) 3 construction control keys, and extractor tools or keys as required to void
construction keying.
3) 12 construction change (day) keys.
b. Owner or Owner’s Representative will void operation of temporary construction keys.
2.14 KEYING
A. Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing factory registered keying system.
B. Comply with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying

conference.
C. Requirements:
1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following

key system.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 14 of 23

a. Master Keying system as directed by the Owner.
2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner.
Failure to comply with forwarding requirements will be cause for replacement of
cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner.
3. Provide keys with the following features:
a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm)
4. Identification:
a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI
publication “Keying Systems and Nomenclature” for identification. Do not provide
blind code marks with actual key cuts.
b. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner.
c. Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as
established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO
NOT DUPLICATE” along with the “PATENTED” or patent number to enforce the
patent protection.
d. Failure to comply with stamping requirements will be cause for replacement of keys
involved at no additional cost to Owner.
e. Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as
directed by Owner.
5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities.
a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core.

b. Permanent Control Keys: 3.
c. Master Keys: 6.
2.15 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Best: www.bestaccess.com
B. Requirements:
1. Provide key control system, including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips,
receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and
standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for
150% of number of locks required for Project.
a. Provide complete cross index system set up by hardware supplier, and place keys on
markers and hooks in cabinet as determined by final key schedule.
b. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.
2.16 DOOR CLOSERS
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 4040XP series.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 15 of 23

B. Requirements:
1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA

certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date
of manufacture code.
2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with high strength cast
iron cylinder, and full complement bearings at shaft.
3. Cylinder Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter with 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter double heat-
treated pinion journal.
4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal
closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.
5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing
reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards.
6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for
latch speed, general speed, and backcheck.
7. Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty
forged forearms for parallel arm closers.
8. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted.
9. Finish for Closer Cylinders, Arms, Adapter Plates, and Metal Covers: Powder coating
finish which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in
ANSI Standard A156.4 and ASTM B117, or has special rust inhibitor (SRI).
10. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as
required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer
mounting.
2.17 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL AUTOMATIC OPERATORS
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN Senior Swing.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide low energy automatic operator units that are electro-mechanical design
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
a. Opening: Powered by DC motor working through reduction gears.

b. Closing: Spring force.
c. Manual, hydraulic, or chain drive closers: Not permitted.
d. Operation: Motor is off when door is in closing mode. Door can be manually operated
with power on or off without damage to operator. Provide variable adjustments,
including opening and closing speed adjustment.
e. Cover: Aluminum.
2. Provide units with manual off/auto/hold-open switch, push and go function to activate
power operator, vestibule interface delay, electric lock delay, hold-open delay adjustable
from 2 to 30 seconds, and logic terminal to interface with accessories, mats, and sensors.
3. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.
4. Provide hard-wired motion sensors and/or actuator switches for operation as specified.
Provide weather-resistant actuators at exterior applications.
5. Provide key switches, with LED’s, recommended and approved by manufacturer of
automatic operator as required for function as described in operation description of
hardware sets. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 16 of 23

6. Provide complete assemblies of controls, switches, power supplies, relays, and
parts/material recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic operator for
each individual leaf. Actuators control both doors simultaneously at pairs. Sequence
operation of exterior and vestibule doors with automatic operators to allow ingress or
egress through both sets of openings as directed by Architect. Locate actuators, key
switches, and other controls as directed by Architect.
7. Provide units with inputs for smoke evacuation doors, where specified, which allow doors
to power open upon fire alarm activation and hold open indefinitely or until fire alarm is
reset, presence detector input, which prevents closed door from opening or door that is
fully opened from closing, hold open toggle input, which allows remote activation for
indefinite hold open and close second time input is activated, vestibule inputs, which
allow sequencing operation of two units, and SPDT relay for interfacing with latching or
locking devices.
2.18 DOOR TRIM
B. Requirements:
1. Provide push plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch
(1 mm) thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches
(102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.
2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Provide push
bars of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required,
mount back to back with pull.
3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required,
mount back to back with push bar.
4. Provide flush pulls as scheduled. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model.
5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required,
mount back to back with push bar.
6. Provide pull plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1
mm) thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use
of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.
7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled.
8. Provide decorative pulls as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with pull.
2.19 PROTECTION PLATES
B. Requirements:
1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick,
beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to
match plates.
2. Sizes of plates:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 17 of 23

a. Kick Plates: 10 inches (254 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on
single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs
b. Mop Plates: 4 inches (102 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single
doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs
c. Armor Plates: 36 inches (914 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on
single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs
2.20 OVERHEAD STOPS AND OVERHEAD STOP/HOLDERS
1. LCN 4040XP series: www.allegion.com/us.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for exterior
and interior vestibule single acting doors.
2. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for double
acting doors.
3. Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or
holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead
stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking
wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and where conditions do not allow
wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard.
4. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without closer and
positive type at doors with closer.
2.21 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Manufacturers Used:
1. Ives; FS444 Floor Stop & Rockwood; US26/626 Wall Stop.
B. Provide door stops at each door leaf:
1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are
used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used.
2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise
options.
3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted
overhead stop.
2.22 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND

GASKETING
1. Zero
B. Requirements:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 18 of 23

1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and
gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural
details. Match finish of other items.
2. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door
assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies
tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
3. Size of thresholds:
a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width
b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door
width
4. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient
or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.
2.23 SILENCERS
B. Requirements:
1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames.

2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for
each pair frame.
3. Omit where gasketing is specified.
2.24 MAGNETIC HOLDERS
1. Sentrol.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide wall or floor mounted electromagnetic door release as specified with minimum of
25 pounds of holding force. Coordinate projection of holder and armature with other
hardware and wall conditions to ensure that door sits parallel to wall when fully open.
Connect magnetic holders on fire-rated doors into the fire control panel for fail-safe
operation.
2.25 MAGNETIC CATCHES
1. Sentrol.
B. Requirements:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 19 of 23

1. Provide magnetic catches with self-aligning magnets that can be surface mounted or
mortised.
2. Provide magnetic catches in an aluminum case 1 inch wide x 3-1/8 inch long. Provide
dual triple pole (Ives 327), where scheduled, with 14 pound load capacity, and dual
double pole catches (Ives 326), where scheduled, with 9 pound load capacity.
2.26 DOOR POSITION SWITCHES
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Schlage.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide recessed or surface mounted type door position switches as specified.

2. Coordinate door and frame preparations with door and frame suppliers. If switches are
being used with magnetic locking device, provide minimum of 4 inches (102 mm)
between switch and magnetic locking device.
2.27 DOOR VIEWERS
A. Manufacturers:

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood.
B. Provide appropriate door viewer for door type and rating with minimum of 180-degree view
area.
2.28 LATCH PROTECTORS
A. Manufacturers:

B. Provide stainless steel latch protectors of type required to function with specified lock.
2.29 COAT HOOKS
A. Manufacturers:

B. Provide coat hooks as specified.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 20 of 23

2.30 FINISHES
A. Finish: BHMA 626/652 (US26D); except:
1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: BHMA 630 (US32D)

2. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 630 (US32D)
3. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 628 (US28)
4. Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: BHMA 630 (US32D)
5. Protection Plates: BHMA 630 (US32D)
6. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA 630 (US32D)
7. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match
8. Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (US32D)
9. Latch Protectors: BHMA 630 (US32D)
10. Weatherstripping: Clear Anodized Aluminum
11. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly
construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions
receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame
preparation and existing conditions.
C. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated
or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer.
C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect
all installed hardware during painting.
D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate
as necessary for proper installation and operation.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 21 of 23

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or
excessive clearance.
G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than
quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30
inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means
of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
H. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset
pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediate
offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches (750
mm) of door height greater than 90 inches (2286 mm).
I. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction
period.
1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section.

2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
J. Wiring: Coordinate with Division 26, ELECTRICAL sections for:
1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls.

2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware.
3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system.
4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or area, as
directed by Architect.
5. Testing and labeling wires with Architect’s opening number.
K. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system
cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.
L. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair
side of stairway doors from corridors. Mount closers so they are not visible in corridors,
lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect.
M. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors,
and stair side of stairway doors.
N. Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible
ceilings or in equipment room, or alternate location as directed by Architect.
O. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
P. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door
hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present
tripping hazard.
Q. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
R. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 22 of 23

S. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
A. Engage qualified manufacturer trained representative to perform inspections and to prepare

inspection reports.
1. Representative will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work
complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly
installed and adjusted.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage
lock bolt.
2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three to six months after date of Substantial

Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant must examine and readjust each
item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function
of doors and door hardware.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.06 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Hardware items are referenced in the following hardware. Refer to the above-specifications
for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.
B. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They
are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule.
Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of
the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in
a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for
proper application and functionality.
C. Hardware sets are listed in the drawings on sheet A11.11.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 23 of 23
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Insulating glass units.
B. Plastic films.
C. Glazing compounds and accessories.
A. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed lites in doors and borrowed lites.
B. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished as part of storefront
assembly.
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials Current Edition.
B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings -
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test 2015.
C. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures
D. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers 2005 (Reapproved 2015).
E. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass
2018.
F. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat
Glass 2015.
G. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings 2016.
H. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation
2010.
I. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors 2017.
J. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and
Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence 2014, with Errata (2017).
K. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and
Systems 2017.
L. UL 972 - Standard for Burglary Resisting Glazing Material Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit and Glazing Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural,
physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation
requirements.
C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and
environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify
available colors.
D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch ( 305 by 305 mm ) in sizeof glass units, showing
coloration.
E. Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.
GLAZING 08 8000 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
F. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
at least three years documented experience.
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F ( 4 degrees C ).
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.07 WARRANTY
B. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for
seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including providing products to replace failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Glass Fabricators:
B. Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com.
C. Plastic Films Manufacturers:
1. 3M Window Film: solutions.3m.com/wps/portal/3M/en_US/Window_Film/Solutions/#sle.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to support assembly dead loads, and
to withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of
glass.
1. Design Pressure: Calculated in accordance with applicable codes.
2. Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions,
and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass.
3. Seismic Loads: Design and size glazing components to withstand seismic loads and
sway displacement in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7
4. Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of
supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load.
5. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum.
B. Vapor Retarder and Air Barrier Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity
of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier.
1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.
2. To maintain a continuous vapor retarder and air barrier throughout the glazed assembly
from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.
C. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide exterior glazing products with performance
properties as indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer's
published data as determined with the following procedures and/or test methods:
1. Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley National
Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program.
GLAZING 08 8000 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
2. Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200 using
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program.
3. Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method.
2.03 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless otherwise indicated.
1. Kind HS - Heat-Strengthened Type: Complies with ASTM C1048.
2. Impact Resistant Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 - Class B, or 16 CFR 1201 -
Category I criteria.
3. Thicknesses: As indicated; provide greater thickness as required for exterior glazing wind
load design.
2.04 INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Vitro, Solarban 60 Solar Control, Low-E Glass: www.vitroglazings.com/en-
US/Glass/Architectural-Glasses/Low-E-Glass/SOLARBAN-Solar-control-low-
e/SOLARBAN-60-Glass.aspx..
B. Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.
2. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat) or
magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated vision
glass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS.
3. Warm-Edge Spacers: Polypropylene and stainless steel.
a. Spacer Width: As required for specified insulating glass unit.
b. Spacer Height: 0.27 inch ( 6.85 mm ).
4. Spacer Color: Black.
5. Edge Seal:
a. Dual-Sealed System: Provide polyisobutylene sealant as primary seal applied
between spacer and glass panes, and silicone, polysulfide or polyurethane sealant as
secondary seal applied around perimeter.
6. Color: Black.
7. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed.
C. Type IG-1 - Insulating Glass Units: Vision glass, double glazed with plastic film F-2.
1. Applications: Exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Space between lites filled with air.
3. Outboard Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Optigray.
b. Coating: Low-E (solar control type), on #2 surface.
4. Inboard Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
5. Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of 31, with special acoustical spacer and edge
seal.
6. Total Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm).
7. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Summer - Center of Glass: 0.29, nominal.
8. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): 70 percent, nominal.
9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.39 percent, nominal.
GLAZING 08 8000 - 3
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
10. Visible Light Reflectance, Outside: [8] percent, nominal.

11. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing.
D. Type IG-2 - Insulating Glass Units: Vision glass, double glazed.
1. Applications: Interior Vestibule Glazing.
3. Outboard Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch ( 6.4 mm ) thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
b. Coating: Self-cleaning type, on #1 surface.
4. Inboard Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch ( 6.4 mm ) thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
b. Coating: Self-cleaning type, on #6 surface.
5. Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of 31, with special acoustical spacer and edge
seal.
6. Total Thickness: 1 inch ( 25.4 mm ).
7. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Summer - Center of Glass: .29, nominal.
8. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): 70 percent, nominal.
9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): .39, nominal.
10. Visible Light Reflectance, Outside: 8 percent, nominal.
E. Type IG-3 - Insulating Glass Units: Exterior Safety glazing with plastic film F-2.
1. Applications:
a. Glazed lites in exterior doors.
b. Glazed sidelites and panels next to doors.
c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
3. Glass Type: Same as Type IG-1 except use fully tempered float glass for both outboard
and inboard lites.
4. Tint: Optigray.
7. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT), Outside: 70 percent, nominal.
F. Type IG-4 - Insulating Glass Units: Safety glazing. Interior vestibule store front.
1. Applications:
a. Glazed lites in interior vestibule doors.
b. Glazed sidelites and panels next to doors.
c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
and inboard lites.
4. Tint: Clear.
GLAZING 08 8000 - 4
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6

G. Type G-5 - Interior Glass Units: Safety glazing. Interior doors sidelite glazing.
1. Applications:
a. Glazed sidelites and panels next to doors.
b. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
and inboard lites.
4. Tint: Clear.
2.05 PLASTIC FILMS
A. Type F-2 - Safety and Security Plastic Film: Polyester type.
1. Application: Locations as indicated on drawings at glazing types IG-1 and IG-3.
2. Impact Resistance: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 impact test requirements
when applied to 1/8 inch ( 3.2 mm ) thick annealed glass.
3. Color: Clear.
4. Thickness Without Liner: 0.002 inch ( 0.051 mm ).
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option
II. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot ( 25 mm for each square meter ) of glazing or
minimum 4 inch ( 100 mm ) by width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch ( 1.5 mm ) by
height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option
II. Minimum 3 inch ( 75 mm ) long by one half the height of the glazing stop by thickness to suit
application, self adhesive on one face.
C. Glazing Splines: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM
C864 Option II; color black.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for
size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing
system.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours
before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
GLAZING 08 8000 - 5
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing
material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
glazing referenced standards.
B. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
C. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated.
D. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of
construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing,
plastering, mortar droppings, etc.
3.04 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)
A. Application - Exterior and/or Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from either the exterior or the
interior of the building.
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch ( 152 mm ) from corners.
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to
attain full contact.
D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
3.05 INSTALLATION - PLASTIC FILM
A. Install plastic film with adhesive, applied in accordance with film manufacturer's instructions.
B. Place without air bubbles, creases or visible distortion.
C. Install film tight to perimeter of glass and carefully trim film with razor sharp knife. Provide 1/16
inch ( 1.6 mm ) to 1/8 inch ( 3.2 mm ) gap at perimeter of glazed panel unless otherwise
required. Do not score the glass.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using
solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.
B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured.
D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial
Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
GLAZING 08 8000 - 6
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 08 9100
LOUVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Louvers, frames, and accessories.
A. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Sealing frames to weather barrier installed on adjacent
construction.
B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction.
D. Section 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING: Field painting.
E. Section 23 31 13: Metal Ducts.
A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum 2014 (2015 Errata).
B. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating
Appendix) 2017a.
C. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating 2015.
D. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices 2010.
E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 2014.
G. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
H. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
I. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air
velocity, design free area, materials and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions,
and tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blank-off areas
required, and frames.
D. Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inches ( 50 by 50 mm ) in size illustrating finish and color
of exterior and interior surfaces.
E. Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performance
criteria.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Maintenance Data: Include lubrication schedules, adjustment requirements.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
LOUVERS 08 9100 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at
1.06 WARRANTY
B. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and connection
failures of louver components.
1. Finish: Include twenty year coverage against degradation of exterior finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Louvers:
1. Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com.
2.02 LOUVERS
A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories;
AMCA Certified in accordance with AMCA 511.
1. Intake Louvers: Design to allow maximum of 0.01 oz/sq ft ( 3.1 g/sq m ) water penetration
at calculated intake design velocity based on design air flow and actual free area, when
tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
2. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter
recessed into both jambs of frame.
B. Stationary Louvers, Type L-1 and L-2: Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction, with
intermediate mullions matching frame.
1. Proformance: Refer to schedule on drawings.
2. Pressure Drop: .05 inches of water gauge ( 12.442 Pa ) maximum per square foot (
square meter ) of free area at velocity of 2000 cfm, when tested in accordance with AMCA
500-L, test unit size 48 inch by 48 inch ( 1.22 m by 1.22 m ).
3. Blades: Drainable.
4. Frame: 4 inches deep ( 100 mm deep ), channel profile; corner joints mitered and , with
continuous recessed caulking channel each side.
5. Aluminum Thickness: Frame 12 gage, 0.0808 inch ( 2.05 mm ) minimum; blades 12 gage,
0.0808 inch ( 2.05 mm ) minimum.
6. Aluminum Finish: High performance organic coatings; finished after fabrication.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
2.04 FINISHES
A. Superior Performing Organic Coatings: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured
polyvinylidene fluoride system.
1. Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) multi-coat thermoplastic fluoropolymer coating system,
including minimum 70 percent PVDF color topcoat and minimum total dry film thickness of
0.9 mil ( 0.023 mm ); color and gloss as scheduled.
B. Color: As indicated on drawings.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 14 gage, 0.0641 inch ( 1.63 mm ) diameter wire,
1/2 inch ( 13 mm ) open weave, diagonal design.
B. Insect Screen: aluminum mesh.
LOUVERS 08 9100 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
C. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in one
piece per location.
D. Sealant for Setting Sills and Sill Flashing: Non-curing butyl type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive this work and opening
dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install louvers level and plumb.
C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and
diversion of moisture to exterior.
D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement of control mechanism. Lubricate operating
joints.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Strip protective finish coverings.
B. Clean surfaces and components.
END OF SECTION
LOUVERS 08 9100 - 3
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 09 0561
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This section applies to floors identified in Contract Documents that are receiving the following
types of floor coverings:
1. Carpet tile.
2. Thin-set ceramic tile and stone tile.
B. Preparation of existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings.
C. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and alkalinity (pH).
D. Patching compound.
E. Remedial floor coatings.
F. Remedial floor sheet membrane.
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Moisture emission reducing curing and sealing
compound for slabs to receive adhered flooring, to prevent moisture content-related flooring
failures; to remain in place, not to be removed.
B. Section 03 3511 - concrete floor finishes
A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens) 2020a.
B. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and
Gypsum Concrete 1999 (Reapproved 2014).
C. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring
2019, with Editorial Revision (2020).
D. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete
Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride 2016a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination
of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing:
1. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) limits and test methods.
2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure.
B. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report.
A. Contractor may perform adhesive and bond test with Contractor's own personnel or hire a
testing agency.
A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at
least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F ( 18 degrees C ) or more than 85
degrees F ( 30 degrees C ).
B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least
48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 09 0561 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for
conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any
recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following
characteristics:
1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor,
floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at
edges.
2. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with
ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate.
B. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for
the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation
from flooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as
suitable for substrate and floor covering and for conditions present.
C. Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended
by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring
manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of alkalinity (pH) found, and suitable for
adhesion of flooring without further treatment.
1. Thickness: 1/8 inch ( 3.2 mm ), maximum.
2. Use product recommended by testing agency.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION
A. Perform following operations in the order indicated:
1. Existing concrete slabs (on-grade and elevated) with existing floor coverings:
a. Visual observation of existing floor covering, for adhesion, water damage, alkaline
deposits, and other defects.
b. Removal of existing floor covering.
2. Preliminary cleaning.
3. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet ( 100 square meters )
and one test in each additional 1000 square feet ( 100 square meters ), unless otherwise
indicated or required by flooring manufacturer.
4. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless
5. Alkalinity (pH) tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise
indicated.
6. Specified remediation, if required.
7. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required.
8. Other preparation specified.
9. Adhesive bond and compatibility test.
10. Protection.
B. Remediations:
1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this
condition before doing any other remediation; re-test after correction.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the

level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that
adhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating or remedial
sheet membrane over entire suspect floor area.
3. Excessive Alkalinity (pH): If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive
moisture, no additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the
level present is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive
for installation of the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound
over entire suspect floor area.
3.02 PRELIMINARY CLEANING
A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive
removers, film-forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive
laitance, mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond.
B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements.
B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
C. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving
joints, and other irregularities with patching compound.
D. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints.
3.04 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
3.05 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 7
SECTION 09 2116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B. Metal stud wall framing.
C. Metal channel ceiling framing.
D. Acoustic insulation.
E. Gypsum sheathing.
F. Gypsum wallboard.
G. Joint treatment and accessories.
H. Textured finish system.
I. Water-resistive barrier over exterior wall sheathing.
B. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Structural steel stud framing.
C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
D. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation.
E. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.
F. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire-resistance-rated walls.
G. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing acoustical gaps in construction other than gypsum
board or plaster work.
A. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members 2012.
B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board 2017.
D. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members 2018.
E. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing 2017.
F. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products 2018.
G. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 2019b.
H. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84
mm) in Thickness 2018.
I. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs 2018.
J. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum
Veneer Base 2019.
K. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum
Backing Panel 2018.
L. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 2017.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 7
M. ASTM C1629/C1629M - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior

Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels 2019.
N. ASTM C1658/C1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels 2019.
O. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber 2016.
P. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Q. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation 2016.
R. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products 2016.
S. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual 2015.
T. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
U. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition.
V. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition.
W. UL 752 - Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, glass mat faced gypsum board and joint
finishing system.
1. For gypsum wallboard, submit documentation of recycled content.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer
recycled content per unit of product.
2. VOC data: Submit manufacturer's product data for joint compounds. Indicate VOC limits of
the product. Submit MSDS highlighting VOC limits.
D. Test Reports: Bullet resistant sheathing and wallboard.
E. Samples: Submit two samples of gypsum board finished with proposed texture application, 12
by 12 inches ( 300 by 300 mm ) in size, illustrating finish color and texture.
A. Provide all accessories including, but not limited to, tracks, clips, web stiffeners, anchors,
fastening devices, resilient clips, and other accessories required for a complete and proper
installation, and as recommended by the manufacturer for the steel members used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies with all accessories including, but not limited to, tracks, clips,
web stiffeners, anchors, fastening devices, resilient clips, and other accessories required for a
complete and proper installation, complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC as indicated calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based
on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 7
C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies complying with applicable

code.
1. ICC IBC Item Numbers: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC IBC for the particular
assembly.
2. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the
particular assembly.
3. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular
assembly in the current UL (FRD).
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1. CONFAB: WWW.CONFABBPD.COM/..
2. Any current member approved and listed by the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association
(SSMA): www.ssma.com.
3. Any current member approved and listed by the Certified Steel Stud Association
(CSSA): certifiedsteelstud.com.
B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size
and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum
deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf ( L/240 at 240 Pa ).
1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs.
2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
3. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped.
4. Furring Members: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch ( 22 mm ).
C. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
D. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that
accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws, and anti-friction bushings, preventing
rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition.
1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity
required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12.
2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot-dipped
galvanized coating.
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
B. General:
1. Recycled Content: Minimum [10] percent post-consumer recycled content, or minimum
[40] percent pre-consumer recycled content at contractor's option.
C. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Glass mat faced gypsum panels, as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M, suitable for paint
finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board.
3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
a. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building
is enclosed and conditioned.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 7
b. Mold resistant board is required Mold resistant board is required at plumbing walls
and wet locations such as toilet rooms, utility rooms, janitor rooms, and other wet
rooms or locations.
4. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Resistance Rating: Use type required by indicated
tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
5. Thickness:
a. Ceilings: 5/8 inch ( 16 mm ).
6. Mold Resistant Paper Faced Products:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; M2Tech Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum Board.
b. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCO Mold Curb Gypsum Wallboard.
c. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels..
7. Glass Mat Faced Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus.
D. Impact Resistant Wallboard:
1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated.
3. Type: Fire-resistance-rated Type X, UL or WH listed.
4. Thickness: 5/8 inch ( 16 mm ).
5. Edges: Tapered.
E. Backing Board For Wet Areas:
1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and
shower ceilings.
3. Glass Mat Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as
defined in ASTM C1178/C1178M.
a. Standard Type: Thickness 1/2 inch ( 12.7 mm ) minimum.
b. Fire-Resistance-Rated Type: Type X core, thickness 5/8 inch ( 16 mm ).
c. Products:
1) CertainTeed Corporation; Diamondback 5/8" Type X Tile Backer.
F. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in
ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas.
3. Regular Board Thickness: 1/2 inch ( 13 mm ), minimum.
4. Edges: Tapered.
5. Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus.
G. Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;
sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch ( 13 mm ).
3. Edges: Tapered.
4. Products:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; Interior Ceiling Drywall.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 7
2.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 2
inch ( 51 mm ).
B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use
solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant.
1. Products:
a. Franklin International, Inc; Titebond GREENchoice Professional Acoustical Smoke
and Sound Sealant: www.titebond.com/#sle.
C. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500.
D. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.
1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.
2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional corner bead and control joints, provide L-
bead at exposed panel edges.
E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for
project conditions.
1. Tape: 2 inch ( 50 mm ) wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners.
2. Tape: 2 inch ( 50 mm ) wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners.
3. Products:
a. Continental Building Products: www.continental-bp.com/#sle.
4. Joint Compound: Drying type, vinyl-based, ready-mixed.
a. Products:
1) CertainTeed Corporation; Extreme All-Purpose Joint Compound:
www.certainteed.com/#sle.
5. Joint Compound: Setting type, field-mixed.
F. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; plain.
1. Products:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; Extreme Texture Coat/Acrylic Texture with
M2Tech: www.certainteed.com/#sle.
G. Abuse Resistant Finishes:
1. Acrylic, water-based, non-textured, high build, tintable primer and surfacer.
2. Acrylic, integrally colored textured coating.
3. Lime-based tintable veneer finish plaster.
H. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033
inches ( 0.84 mm ) in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping
screws, corrosion-resistant.
I. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (
0.84 to 2.84 mm ) in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion-resistant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 INDOOR AIR QUALITY
A. Temporary ventilation: Provide temporary ventilation for work of this Section.
3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as permitted by standard.
1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 7
2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift.
C. Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard.
1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and brace to structure for walls
terminating above ceiling as indicated on drawings.
2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance
between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical
devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of
stud connections; do not leave studs unattached to track.
D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not
less than double studs at jambs.
E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more
than 4 inches ( 100 mm ) from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on
alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches ( 600 mm ) on center.
1. Orientation: Horizontal.
2. Spacing: At 24 inches on center ( At 600 mm on center ).
F. Blocking: Install mechanically fastened steel sheet or steel channel blocking for support of:
1. Wall-mounted cabinets.
2. Plumbing fixtures.
3. Toilet partitions.
4. Toilet accessories.
5. Wall-mounted door hardware.
6. Other Secialties or Equipment
3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with listing, manufactueres instructions or the following
minimums
1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing
members.
2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
3. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, rough-in boxes and other wall
membrane penetrating items, except where firestopping is provided.
3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end
joints, especially in highly visible locations.
B. Single-Layer Nonrated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and
edges occurring over firm bearing.
C. Fire-rated construction: Install gypsum board in strict complaince with requirments of assembly
listing.
D. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints, cut edges, and holes with water-
resistant sealant.
E. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as follows:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 7
1. Not more than 30 feet ( 10 meters ) apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet ( 16 meters )
long.
B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
3.07 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint
tape, embed and finish with setting type joint compound.
B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise
indicated. Ceilings to receive a flat finish.
2. Level 2: Backing board to receive tile finish.
3. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed
construction.
C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch ( 0.8 mm ).
2. Taping, filling, and sanding are not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic
tile and fixed cabinetry.
3. Taping, filling, and sanding are not required at base layer of double-layer applications.
3.08 TEXTURE FINISH
A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Texture Required: Light Orange Peel.
1. Select panel sizes and layout panels to minimize waste; reuse cutoffs to the greatest
extent possible.
3.10 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
( 3 mm in 3 m ) in any direction.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 09 3000
TILING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Tile for floor applications.
B. Tile for wall applications.
C. Coated glass mat backer board as tile substrate.
D. Ceramic accessories.
E. Ceramic trim.
F. Non-ceramic trim.
A. ANSI A108/A118/A136 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of
Ceramic Tile (Compendium) 2019.
B. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in
the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar 2017.
C. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).
D. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).
E. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework
2017.
F. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of
Cementitious Backer Units 2018.
G. ANSI A108.11> ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard for Interior of
Cementitious Backer Units 2010 (Revised).
H. ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts for Tile
Installation 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016).
I. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded,
Waterproof Membranes For Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installation 2014.
J. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for
Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation 2014.
K. ANSI A136.1 - American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic
Tile 2008 (Reaffirmed 2013).
L. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile 2019.
M. ASTM C373 - Standard Test Methods for Determination of Water Absorption and Associated
Properties by Vacuum Method for Pressed Ceramic Tiles and Glass Tiles and Boil Method for
Extruded Ceramic Tiles and Non-tile Fired Ceramic Whiteware Products 2018.
N. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum
Backing Panel 2018.
O. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation 2019.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.
Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
TILING 09 3000 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6

recycled.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and
expansion joints and setting details.
D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches ( 457
by 457 mm ) in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain
removal methods.
G. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See DIV-01400 Quality Assurance Requirements for Construction Projects for additional
provisions.
2. Extra Tile: 2 percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of five years of
documented experience.
A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
A. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature above 50 degrees F ( 10 degrees C ) and below
100 degrees F ( 38 degrees C ) during installation and curing of setting materials.
1.07 WARRANTY
B. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for labor and materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Florida Tile: www.floridatile.com.
2. Atlas Concorde: https://www.atlasconcorde.com/en-us/.
B. Glazed Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.
1. Moisture Absorption: 7.0 to 20.0 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.
2. Edges: Cushioned.
3. Surface Finish: High gloss.
4. Trim Units: Matching bead, bullnose, cove and base shapes in sizes coordinated with
field tile.
C. Porcelain Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.
1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.
2. Size: 12 by 24 inch ( 304.8 by 609.6 mm ), nominal.
3. Thickness: 3/8 inch ( 9.5 mm ).
4. Edges: Cushioned.
5. Surface Finish: Non-slip.
TILING 09 3000 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6

7. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base and cove shapes in sizes
coordinated with field tile.
2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same
manufacturer as tile.
B. Pre-Formed Accessories To Be Covered with Tile: High density expanded polystyrene with
ANSI A118.10 waterproofing finish or membrane.
1. Products:
a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Pre-Sloped Shower
Pan: www.laticrete.com/#sle.
C. Trim: Matching bullnose, cove base and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field
tile.
1. Applications:
a. Open Edges: Bullnose.
b. Inside Corners: Jointed.
c. Floor to Wall Joints: Coved at sanitary and wet locations, straight at other locations
base.
2. Manufacturers: Same as for tile.
D. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin brass anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suit
application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive.
1. Applications:
a. Open edges of wall tile.
b. Open edges of floor tile.
c. Wall corners, outside and inside.
d. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.
e. Thresholds at door openings.
f. Expansion and control joints, floor and wall.
g. Floor to wall joints.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com/#sle.
2.03 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com.
B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset mastic type.
1. Products:
a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 15 Premium
Mastic: www.laticrete.com/#sle.
C. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.1.
D. Mortar Bed Materials: Pre-packaged mix of Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water.
1. Products:
a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 3701 Fortified Mortar
Bed: www.laticrete.com/#sle.
2.04 GROUTS
A. Standard Grout: ANSI A118.6 standard cement grout.
TILING 09 3000 - 3
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is
indicated.
2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch ( 3.2 mm ) wide and larger; use unsanded grout for
joints less than 1/8 inch ( 3.2 mm ) wide.
4. Products:
a. Custom Building Products; Polyblend Non-Sanded
Grout: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle.
2.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Tile Sealant: Gunnable, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and mildew
resistant type.
1. Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures.
2. Products:
a. Custom Building Products; Commercial 100% Silicone
Caulk: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle.
B. Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement
grout.
1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone.
2. Products:
a. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Grout Sealer: www.merkrete.com/#sle.
C. Grout Release: Temporary, water-soluble pre-grout coating.
1. Products:
a. Custom Building Products; Aqua Mix Grout
Release: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle.
A. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12; not
intended as waterproofing.
1. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/8 inch ( 3.2 mm ) gap, minimum.
2. Fluid or Trowel Applied Type:
a. Thickness: 20 mils ( 0.5 mm ), maximum.
b. Products:
1) LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture
Membrane: www.laticrete.com/#sle.
B. Cleavage Membrane Under Thick Mortar Bed:
1. Material: 4 mil ( 0.1 mm ) thick polyethylene film.
C. Backer Board: Coated glass mat type complying with ASTM C1178/C1178M; inorganic
fiberglass mat on both surfaces and integral acrylic coating vapor retarder.
D. Mesh Tape: 2 inch ( 50 mm ) wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subfloor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive tile.
B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
C. Verify that subfloor surfaces are dust free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
setting materials to subfloor surfaces.
TILING 09 3000 - 4
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
D. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for tiling installation by testing
for moisture and alkalinity (pH).
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tiling
material manufacturer and setting material manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable
flatness tolerances.
D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's
instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
B. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make
grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.
C. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
D. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.
E. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
G. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.
H. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
I. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either
bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.
3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS
A. Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with {\rs\#1} Method F102, with
Polymer Modified Grout grout.
B. Over interior concrete substrates with no movement, bending stressess and/or deflection, install
in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F116, organic adhesive, with latex-Portland cement
grout.
1. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment or waterproof
mebrane is indicated.
2. Over elevated concrete substrates subject to movement, bending stressess, and/or
deflection install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113A, dry-set or latex-Portland
cement bond coat as recommended by manufacturer, with latex-Portland cement grout.
3. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated and installed over interior concrete
substrates with no movement, bending stressess and/or deflection, install in accordance
with TCNA (HB) Method F122, with latex-Portland cement grout.
4. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated and installed over elevated concrete
substrates subject to movement, bending stressess, and/or deflection install in
accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F122A, with latex-Portland cement grout.
C. Install tile-to-tile floor movement joints in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method EJ171F.
3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE
A. On interior walls over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with TCNA
(HB) Method W245, thin-set with dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with latex-portland
cement grout.
TILING 09 3000 - 5
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
1. At public lobbies, toilet rooms, utility rooms, or other similar areas install in accordance
with TCNA (HB) Method W245, dry-set or latex-Protland cement bond coat, with epoxy
grout.
B. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method
W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat.
C. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W202, thin-
set with dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with latex-portland cement grout.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum lippage per ANSI A108.02, Section 4.3.7
3.07 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.
END OF SECTION
TILING 09 3000 - 6
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. DIV-09-5100
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 09 5100
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B. Acoustical units.
B. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustical insulation.
C. Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.
D. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.
E. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
F. Section 28 4600 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling system.
A. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of
Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings 2017.
B. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions 2017.
C. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products 2019.
D. CHPS (HPPD) - High Performance Products Database Current Edition at www.chps.net/.
E. UL (GGG) - GREENGUARD Gold Certified Products Current Edition.
A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,
sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is
completed, tested, and approved.
B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.
C. Samples: Submit two samples 4 by 4 inch ( 102 by 102 mm ) in size illustrating material and
finish of acoustical units.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
provisions.
2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F ( 16 degrees C ), and maximum
humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acoustic Tiles/Panels:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrongceilings.com/#sle.
B. Suspension Systems:
1. Same as for acoustical units.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 5100 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Recycled Content: Minimum 10 percent post-consumer recycled content, or minimum [40]
percent pre-consumer recycled content.
B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.
1. Units for installation in fire-rated suspension system: listed and classified for the fire-
resistive assembly as part of suspension system.
2. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following:
a. Product listing in UL (GGG).
b. Product listing in CHPS (HPPD).
C. Acoustical Panels: Painted mineral fiber, with the following characteristics:
1. Classification: ASTM E1264 Type III.
2. Size: 24 by 24 inches ( 610 by 610 mm ).
3. Thickness: 5/8 inches ( 16 mm ).
4. Composition: Wet felted.
5. Light Reflectance: 85 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.
6. NRC Range: .65 to .75, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.
7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 40, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.
8. Panel Edge: Reveal.
9. Color: White.
10. Surface Pattern: Fine Texture.
2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) - HEAVY DUTY
A. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and
interlocking components, with hold down clips, stabilizer bars, clips and splices as required.
1. Recycled Content: Minimum 10 percent post-consumer recycled content, or minimum [40]
B. Exposed Suspension System: Hot-dipped galvanized steel, commercial quality cold rolled;
intermediate-duty.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C635/C635M.
2. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch ( 24 mm ) face width.
3. Cinstruction: Double web.
4. Finish: Baked enamel.
5. Color: White.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic
requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
B. Perimeter Moldings: Same metal and finish as grid.
1. At exposed grid: Provide Angle Molding: L-shaped, for mounting at same elevation as face
of grid.
C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM E580/E580M and manufacturer's
instructions and as supplemented in this section.
B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum
deflection of 1:360.
C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.
D. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with
other interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
2. Overlap and rivet corners.
E. Where structural support is not spaced sufficiently to accomodate hangers provide related
carring channels, angles, slotted channel framing system or blocking to span between
structural supports.
F. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other
work.
G. Do not hang suspension system from metal roof decks.
H. Suspension System, Non-Seismic: Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns,
ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of
face plane of adjacent members.
I. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load
to exceed deflection capability.
J. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches ( 152 mm ) of each
corner, or support components independently.
K. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other
work.
E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F. Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.
2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges.
G. Where round obstructions, bullnose concrete block corners and other radius surfaces occur,
provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet ( 3 mm in 3 m ).
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 09 6500
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Resilient tile flooring.
B. Installation accessories.
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete
slabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied resilient flooring.
C. Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Concrete slab moisture and
alkalinity testing and remediation procedures.
A. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2019a, with Editorial Revision (2020).
B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring
C. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile 2004 (Reapproved
2018).
D. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2019.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, illustrating color and pattern for each resilient
flooring product specified.
D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
provisions.
2. Extra Flooring Material: 10 square feet ( 1 square meters ) of each type and color.
3. Extra Wall Base: 10 linear feet ( 1 linear meters ) of each type and color.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum three
years documented experience.
A. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space.
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
B. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.

A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a
temperature of 70 degrees F ( 21 degrees C ) to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter,
maintain conditions above 55 degrees F ( 13 degrees C ).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE FLOORING
A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Armstrong Flooring, Inc; Excelon SDT: www.armstrongflooring.com/#sle.
b. Shaw: https://shawfloors.com/flooring/vinyl
c. Mihawk: https://www.mohawkflooring.com/luxury-vinyl-tile
2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class 2.
3. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.
4. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 6116.
5. Recycled Content: Minimum [5] percent post-consumer recycled content, or minimum [35]
6. Thickness: 0.125 inch ( 3.2 mm ).
7. Average Weight: 1.4 lbs. per tile (0.6 kg per tile).
8. Static Load Resistance: 125 psi (860 kPa) minimum, when tested as specified in ASTM
F970.
9. Pattern: as indicated on drawings..
2.02 RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Base: Type TS rubber vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B Cove.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.
2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.
3. Height: 4 inch ( 100 mm ).
4. Length: Roll.
5. Color: As indicated on drawings.
6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and internal corners.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
B. Primers, Adhesives and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
1. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 6116.
C. Adhesive for Vinyl Flooring:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Stauf USA, LLC; D737 High-Tack: www.staufusa.com/#sle.
D. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks
that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface
hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for resilient flooring
installation by testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH).
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other
defects with subfloor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.
B. Prohibit traffic until filler is fully cured.
C. Clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.04 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING
A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless
otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Install tile to quarter turn pattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area
perimeter.
3.05 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE
A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches ( 45 mm )
between joints.
B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use
premolded units.
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
A. Temporary ventilation: Provide temporary ventilation as specified in Section 01 5721 - Indoor
Air Quality Controls, and as follows.
1. Ventilate products prior to installation. Remove from packaging and ventilate in a secure,
dry, well-ventilated space free from strong contaminant sources and residues. Provide a
temperature range of 60 degrees F minimum to 90 degree F maximum continuously for
minimum 72 hours. Do not ventilate within limits of Work unless otherwise approved by
Architect.
A. Waste Management: As specified in DIV-01500 and DIV-01600.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 09 6813
TILE CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Carpet tile, fully adhered.
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete
slabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied flooring.
C. Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Removal of existing floor
coverings, cleaning, and preparation.
D. Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Concrete slab moisture and
alkalinity testing and remediation procedures.
A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor
Covering Materials 2016.
B. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2019a, with Editorial Revision (2020).
C. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring
D. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Testing Program - Certified Products Current Edition.
E. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2019.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
c. Salvaged/Refurbished: Indicate percentage of salvaged/refurbished content per unit
of product.
2. VOC data:
a. Adhesives:
1) Submit manufacturer's product data for adhesives. Indicate VOC limits of the
product. Submit MSDS highlighting VOC limits.
3. Documentation of manufacturer's take-back programfor carpet. Include the following:
a. Appropriate contact information.
b. Overview of procedures.
1) Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or
reuse.
c. Limitations and conditions, if any, applicable to the project.
C. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color
selected.
TILE CARPETING 09 6813 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,

and suggested schedule for cleaning.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
provisions.
2. Extra Carpet Tiles: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed of each color and pattern
installed.
1.05 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Operational Service: Provide manufacturer's take-back program service for carpet installed in
project. Service shall reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse. Service shall not landfill or
burn reclaimed materials.
1.06 WEAR WARRANTY
A. Ten-Year Commercial Warranty against excessive wear, delamination, edge ravel, zippering,
resiliency loss, and static.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum three years
documented experience and approved by carpet tile manufacturer.
A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Tile Carpeting:
1. Shaw: www.shaw.com.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Carpet Tile General:
1. Salvaged/refurbished: Carpet system fabricated from minimum 90 percent salvaged
carpet or carpet tile.
2. Nylon Carpet Face Fiber:
a. Recycled Content: Minimum 10 percent post-consumer recycled content, or
minimum 40 percent pre-consumer recycled content at contractor's option.
B. Tile Carpeting: CPT-1, 100% soltion died, manufactured in one color dye lot.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.
2. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test").
3. VOC Content: Provide CRI (GLP) certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent test
report showing compliance is acceptable.
4. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity.
5. Gage: 1/12 inch.
6. Stitches: 12 per inch.
7. Finish pile thickness: .100 inch.
8. Pile Weight: 22.0 oz.
9. Primary Backing Material: [100% synthetic].
10. Secondary Backing Material: [Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Polymer].
C. Tile Carpeting: CTP-2, CTP-3 and CTP-5 - Graphic Loop, manufactured in one color dye lot.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
5. Gage: 1/12 inch.
8. Pile Weight: 22 oz.
9. Primary Backing Material: 100% synthetic.
10. Secondary Backing Material: Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Polymer.
D. Tile Carpeting: CTP-4, 100% soltion died, manufactured in one color dye lot.
5. Gage: 1/12 inch.
8. Pile Weight: 50.5 oz.
9. Primary Backing Material: [100% synthetic].
10. Secondary Backing Material: [Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Polymer].
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
B. Edge Strips: Embossed aluminum, color as selected by Architect.
C. Adhesives:
1. Compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC content of 50 g/L; CRI (GLP)
certified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subfloor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work
and are ready to receive carpet tile.
B. Verify that subfloor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
adhesive materials to subfloor surfaces.
C. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for flooring installation by
testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH).
1. Test as Follows:
a. Alkalinity (pH): ASTM F710.
2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
B. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and
other defects with subfloor filler.
C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is
cured.
D. Vacuum clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions.
B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
E. Lay carpet tile in square pattern as indicated on drawings.
F. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.
G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
A. Temporary ventilation: Provide temporary ventilation as specified in Section 015721 - Indoor
Air Quality Controls, and as follows:
1. Ventilate products prior to installation. Remove from packaging and ventilate in a secure,
dry, well-ventilated space free from strong contaminant sources and residues. Provide a
temperature range of 60 degrees F minimum to 90 degree F maximum continuously for
minimum 72 hours.
B. Immediately after installation, clean carpet thoroughly with a high-efficiency particulate air
(HEPA) filtration vacuum or certified CRI Green Label vacuum cleaner.
B. Coordinate with manufacturer for take-back program. Set aside scrap to be returned to
manufacturer for recycling into new product.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 7

SECTION 09 9000
PAINTING AND COATING - LEED V4/GREEN PRODUCT GUIDE SPEC
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces.
B. Surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior items and surfaces.
C. Painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed steel and iron
supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-
applied final finish.
A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications.
B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at
an 85 degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured
at a 60 degree meter.
3. Semi-Gloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60 degree meter.
4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a
60 degree meter.
B. Environments: The following terms distinguish between different corrosive exposures:
1. "Severe environments" are highly corrosive industrial atmospheres with sustained
exposure to high humidity and condensation and with frequent cleaning using strong
chemicals. Environments with heavy concentrations of strong chemical fumes and
frequent splashing and spilling of harsh chemical products are severe environments.
2. "Moderate environments" are corrosive industrial atmospheres with intermittent exposure
to high humidity and condensation, occasional mold and mildew development, and regular
cleaning with strong chemicals. Environments with exposure to heavy concentrations of
chemical fumes and occasional splashing and spilling of chemical products are moderate
environments.
3. "Mild environments" are industrial atmospheres with normal exposure to moderate
humidity and condensation, occasional mold and mildew development, and infrequent
cleaning with strong chemicals. Environments with low levels of mild chemical fumes and
occasional splashing and spilling of chemical products are mild environments. Normal
outdoor weathering is also considered a mild environment.
A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
2016.
B. CAL (CDPH SM) - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic
Chemical Emissions From Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers; 2017, v1.2.
C. CARB (SCM) - Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings; California Air Resources
Board; 2007.
D. ISO 14025 - Environmental labels and declarations -- Type III environmental declarations --
Principles and procedures; 2006.
PAINTING AND COATING – LEED V4/GREEN PRODUCT GUIDE SPEC 09 9000 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 7

E. ISO 21930 - Sustainability in buildings and civil engineering works -- Core rules for
environmental product declarations of construction products and services; 2017.
F. SCAQMD 1113 - Architectural Coatings; 1977 (Amended 2016).
G. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: For each paint system indicated, including:
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
3. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar
in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in
applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the
finish coats.
C. Paint exposed surfaces. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or
surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated,
Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.
D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
and labels.
E. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
1. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
2. Finish areas designated by Architect.
3. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by
Architect.
4. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). Maintain storage containers in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).
C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F (35 degrees C).
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 7

D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
B. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional three percent, but not less than 1 gallon (3.8 l) or 1
case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER USED
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.
2.02 PAINT MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Classification: Provide high-performance coating materials, including primers,
undercoats, and finish-coat materials, that meet the applicable local, state or federal VOC
requirements.
C. LEED v4 EQ Credit: Low Emitting Materials, VOC Limits:
1. Interior Applications: For LEED v4 Compliance, 100 percent of paint and coatings
products by volume applied to the interior must comply with the wet applied VOC content
limits.
a. CARB (SCM): The California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007 Suggested Control
Measure (SCM).
Table of Commonly Used Coatings VOC Limits

Coating Category CARB 2007 SCM VOC Limit SCAQMD R1113, 6/3/11 VOC
Limit
Flats 50 g/L 50 g/L
Non-Flats 100 g/L 50 g/L
Non-Flat, high Gloss 150 g/L 50 g/L
Primers, Sealers & 100 g/L 100 g/L
Undercoaters
Floor Coatings 100 g/L 50 g/L
Industrial Maintenance 250 g/L 100 g/L
Coatings
Rust Preventive Coatings 250 g/L 100 g/L
Stains, Exterior 250 g/L 100 g/L
D. LEED v4 EQ Credit: Low Emitting Materials, Emissions Requirement:

1. Interior Applications: For LEED v4 compliance, 90 percent of paint and coatings products
by volume applied to the interior must comply with emissions requirements.
2. To demonstrate compliance, a product or layer containing paint must meet the following
requirement, as applicable, with regard to emissions:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 7

a. General Emissions Evaluation: Building products must be tested and determined
compliant in accordance with CAL (CDPH SM) , using the applicable exposure
scenario. The default scenario is the private office scenario. The manufacturers or
third-party certification must state the exposure scenario used to determine
compliance. Claims of compliance for wet-applied products must state the amount
applied in mass per surface area.
b. Manufacturers’ claims of compliance with the above requirements must also state the
range of total VOCs after 14 days (336 hours), measured as specified in CAL (CDPH
SM):
1) 0.5 mg/m3 or less.
2) Between 0.5 and 5.0 mg/m3.
3) 5.0 mg/m3 or more.
E. LEED v4 MR Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental Product
Declarations.
1. Option 1. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) (1 point): Use at least 20 different
permanently installed products sourced from at least five different manufacturers that
meet one of the disclosure criteria below:
Product-specific declaration.
Products with a publicly available, critically reviewed life-cycle assessment conforming to ISO
14044 that have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as one quarter (1/4) of a product for
the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
Environmental Product Declarations which conform to ISO 14025, 14040, 14044, and EN
15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope.
Industry-wide (generic) EPD – Products with third-party certification (Type III), including
external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the
program operator are valued as one half (1/2) of a product for purposes of credit achievement
calculation.
Product-specific Type III EPD – Products with third-party certification (Type III), including
external verification in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as the participant by the
program operator are valued as one whole product for purposes of credit achievement
calculation.
USGBC approved program – Products that comply with other USGBC approved environmental
product declaration frameworks.
2.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT BLOCK FILLER
A. Concrete Masonry Unit Block Filler: Factory formulated high-performance latex block fillers.
1. PPG Paints; 6-15XI SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Masonry Block Filler (48 g/L VOC).
a. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 mils (0.178 mm).
2.04 INTERIOR PRIMERS
A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.
1. PPG Paints; 12-900XI SpeedHide Pro-EV Zero Interior Latex Primer (0 g/L VOC).
B. Interior Ferrous, Non-Ferrous, Galvanized Metal, and Aluminum Primer: Factory-formulated
acrylic water-based rust-inhibitive metal primer.
1. PPG Paints; 90-912 Series Pitt-Tech Plus Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Primer (90 g/L
VOC).
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 7

2.05 EXTERIOR PRIMERS
A. Exterior Ferrous, Non-Ferrous, Galvanized Metal, and Aluminum Primer: Factory-formulated
acrylic water-based rust-inhibitive metal primer.
1. PPG Paints; 90-912 Series Pitt-Tech Plus Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Primer (90 g/L
VOC).
2.06 INTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Interior Flat Latex: Factory-formulated flat acrylic latex-based interior paint.
1. PPG Paints; 12-110XI SpeedHide Pro-EV Zero Interior Wall & Ceiling Latex Flat (0 g/L
VOC).
B. Interior Eggshell Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel.
1. PPG Paints; 12-310XI SpeedHide Pro-EV Zero Interior Wall & Ceiling Latex Eggshell (0
g/L VOC).
C. Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated satin acrylic-latex interior enamel.
1. PPG Paints; 1433-0100G Series Ultra-Hide 150 Interior Latex Low Lustre (less than 50
g/L VOC).
D. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss acrylic-latex interior enamel.
E. Interior Eggshell Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy:
F. Interior Semi-Gloss Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy:
G. Interior Flat Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fog:
H. Interior Semi-Gloss Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fog:
I. Interior/Exterior High Performance Satin Polysiloxane:
2.07 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior
application.
1. PPG Paints; 2210-0100G Series Ultra-Hide 150 Exterior 100 percent Acrylic Latex Flat
Paint (less than 50 g/L VOC).
B. Exterior Satin Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated satin acrylic-latex paint for exterior application.
C. Exterior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated semi-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex
enamel for exterior application.
D. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex
enamel for exterior application.
E. Exterior High Performance Satin Polysiloxane:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
C. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 7

1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
2. If a potential incompatibility of primers applied by others exists, obtain the following from
the primer applicator before proceeding:
a. Confirmation of primer's suitability for expected service conditions.
b. Confirmation of primer's ability to be top coated with materials specified.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Ferrous Metal Substrates: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been
shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC recommendations.
a. Blast-clean steel surfaces as recommended by coating manufacturer and according
to SSPC-SP 6.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire
brush, solvent clean, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.
3. Non-Ferrous Metal Substrates: Clean non-ferrous and galvanized surfaces according to
manufacturer's written instructions for the type of service, metal substrate, and application
required.
a. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by
mechanical methods.
D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film and, if necessary,
strain coating material before using.
3. Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommended
limits.
4. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when
multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the
finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each
separate coat.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 7

B. General: Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material being applied.
2. Do not apply high-performance coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed
surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film.
3. Coating surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the coating system descriptions.
4. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used.
5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
convector covers, grilles, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
C. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application
method.
2. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.
3.04 CLEANING
A. After completing painting, clean glass and paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by
washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
C. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 09 9113
EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless
otherwise indicated, including the following:
1. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.
2. Mechanical and Electrical:
a. On the roof and outdoors, paint equipment that is exposed to weather or to view,
including factory-finished materials.
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory-
applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
B. Section 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING.
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency current edition.
B. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating 2005
(Reapproved 2017).
C. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual Current
Edition.
D. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).
E. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning 2018.
F. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning 2007.
G. SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete 1997 (Reaffirmed 2003).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for
each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category
(e.g. "alkyd enamel").
2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 5
3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description

of each system.
C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches ( 216 by 279 mm ) in
size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified.
1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.
2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before preparing
samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required.
D. Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limits specified.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each
product/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets
(MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finished
surfaces and color samples of each color and finish used.
provisions.
2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon ( 4 L ) of each color; from the same product run,
store where directed.
3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F ( 7 degrees C ) and a
maximum of 90 degrees F ( 32 degrees C ), in ventilated area, and as required by
manufacturer's instructions.
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles ( 860 lx ) measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
B. Paints:
1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.
C. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats.
2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL
A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 5
1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in
the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Colors: As indicated on drawings.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A. Exterior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including concrete and primed
metal.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Exterior Latex; MPI #214, MPI #119.
a. Products:
1) Sherwin-Williams Company: SW6074 (MPI #10)
3. Top Coat Sheen:
a. Velvet: MPI gloss level 2; use this sheen at exterior wall surfaces including concrete..
b. Gloss: MPI gloss level 6; use this sheen at doors and door frames, and exposed steel
structural members.
4. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate.
A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially effect proper application.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 5
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing.
D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F. Concrete:
1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat
surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Clean concrete according to ASTM D4258. Allow to dry.
3. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP
13.
G. Masonry:
1. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of
surfaces or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions. Allow to dry.
2. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer.
H. Galvanized Surfaces:
1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Prepare surface according to SSPC-SP 2.
I. Ferrous Metal:
1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges
to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel
surfaces.
3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP
6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.
J. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
E. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply additional
coats until complete hide is achieved.
F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 5
H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 09 9123
INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless
1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before
installing equipment.
2. Mechanical and Electrical:
a. In finished areas, paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and
exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment and
electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory-
applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and
operating parts of equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
B. Section 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING.
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency current edition.
B. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating 2005
(Reapproved 2017).
C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Based Materials 2016.
D. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual Current
Edition.
E. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).
F. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning 2007.
G. SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete 1997 (Reaffirmed 2003).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for
each:
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123- 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 5
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category
(e.g. "alkyd enamel").
2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).
3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description
of each system.
C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches ( 216 by 279 mm ) in
size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified.
1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.
2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before preparing
samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required.
D. Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limits specified.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each
product/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets
(MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finished
surfaces and color samples of each color and finish used.
provisions.
2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon ( 4 L ) of each color; from the same product run,
store where directed.
3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F ( 7 degrees C ) and a
maximum of 90 degrees F ( 32 degrees C ), in ventilated area, and as required by
manufacturer's instructions.
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles ( 860 lx ) measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
B. Paints:
1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.
C. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 5
2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL

A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint.
1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in
the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Colors: As indicated on drawings.
1. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the
wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A. Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board, concrete,
concrete masonry units, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel and aluminum.
1. Top Coat(s): Interior Latex; MPI #52, 53, 54.
a. Products:
1) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex, Flat.
2) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss. (MPI #43)
3) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex, Low Sheen. (MPI #44)
4) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex, Eg-Shel. (MPI #52)
2. Top Coat Sheen:
a. Flat: MPI gloss level 1; use this sheen for ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
b. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations.
c. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at toilet rooms, mechanical rooms,
electrical rooms, utility rooms, janitor rooms and similar high abuse areas.
B. Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by occupants, including
metals and wood:
1. Medium duty applications include doors, door frames, railings, handrails, guardrails and
balustrades.
2. Top Coat(s): Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex; MPI #115 or 215.
a. Products:
1) Sherwin-Williams Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss.
2) Sherwin-Williams Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, Gloss.
3. Top Coat Sheen:
a. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 5

C. Medium Duty Vertical and Overhead: Including gypsum board, plaster, concrete, concrete
masonry units, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel and aluminum.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): High Performance Architectural Interior Latex; MPI #139, 141.
3. Top Coat Sheen:
a. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations.
b. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at toilet rooms, mechanical rooms,
electrical rooms, utility rooms, janitor rooms and similar high abuse areas.
D. Dry Fall: Metals; exposed structure and overhead-mounted servicesin utilitarian spaces,
including shop primed steel deck, structural steel, metal fabrications, galvanized ducts,
galvanized conduit and galvanized piping.
1. Shop primer by others.
2. One top coatwhite.
3. Top Coat: Latex Dry Fall; MPI #155, 226.
4. Top Coat Sheen:
a. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations.
A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially effect proper application.
E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units: 12 percent.
3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 5
E. Concrete:
1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat
surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in
2. Clean concrete according to ASTM D4258. Allow to dry.
3. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP
13.
F. Masonry:
1. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of
surfaces or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions. Allow to dry.
2. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer.
G. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.
H. Aluminum: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-
SP 1.
I. Galvanized Surfaces:
J. Ferrous Metal:
1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare
steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP
6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.
K. Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots,
pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried;
sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
L. Wood Doors to be Field-Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clear
sealer.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer.
E. Sand metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 10 1400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Room and door signs.
B. Interior directional and informational signs.
C. Luminous egress path marking and other "glow-in-the-dark" signs.
D. Emergency evacuation maps.
E. Building identification signs.
F. Other informational and code related signage.
G. Plaque.
B. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2017.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign
styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.
C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,
including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and
colors.
1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on drawings, include the
drawing room number on schedule.
2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from
Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request,
submit preliminary schedule.
3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication.
D. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or
chips.
A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.
B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.
C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.
A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Flat Signs:
1. Hartauer Signs: www.harlauersigns.com.
B. Dimensional Letter Signs:
C. Plaques:
1. Hartauer Signs: www.harlauersigns.com
2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not
including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas.
SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
1. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch ( 0.8 mm ) and Grade II
braille.
2. Room Number Character Height: 1 inch ( 25 mm ).
3. Room Name Character Height: 3/4 inch (18.5 mm).
4. Symbol Height: 4" (100 mm).
5. Room / Office Sign Height: 4 1/2 inches ( 112.5 mm ) minimum x length required, unless
otherwise required.
6. Room / Office Doors: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not
those shown on the drawings.
7. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not
the numbers shown on the drawings.
8. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those
9. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN", room numbers
to be determined later, and braille.
B. Interior Directional and Informational Signs:
1. Sign Type: Same as room and door signs.
2. Allow for 20 signs 4 inches high by 16 inches long.
3. Wording and Symbols on signs to be determined later.
C. Luminous Egress Path Marking and Other "Glow-in-the-Dark" Signs: Photoluminescent media.
D. Emergency Evacuation Maps:
1. Allow for 12 map(s).
2. Map content to be provided by Owner.
3. Use clear plastic panel, designed for printed 8 1/2 x 11 inch paper insert, "Evacuation
Map" silk-screened on reverse, frameless, adhesive strip mounted.
E. Other Signs:
1. Raised Character and Braille Exit Signs: At each door to an area of refuge, exterior area
for assisted rescue, exit stair way, exit ramp, exit passageway and the exit discharges to
be identified by a sign. Text, "EXIT". Same type as room and door signs.
2. Fire Protection Equipment: Rooms containing controls for air-conditioning systems,
sprinkler risers and valves, or other fire detection, suppression or control elements shall
be identified for the use of the fire department. Coated digitally printed plastic or metal
signs. Text to identify equipment. Red border and text on white background.
3. Fire Department Connections: To be mounted near all building fire department
connections. Coated digitally printed plastic or metal signs. Text to identify
equipment. Red border and text on white background. Coated, digitally printed metal
signs.
4. Electrical Control: Doors into electrical panel rooms are to be marked with a plainly visible
and legible sign. Text, "ELECTRICAL ROOM".
a. At exterior electrical rooms: Coated, digitally printed plastic or metal signs.
b. At interior electrical rooms: Same type as room and door signs.
F. Building Identification Signs:
1. Use individual metal letters.
2. Mount on outside wall in location indicated on drawings.
G. Plaque: See Allowance for details.
2.03 SIGN TYPES
A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.
SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
1. Edges: Square.
2. Corners: Square.
B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:
1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.
2. Character Case: Upper case only.
3. Background Color: As selected from manufacture's full range of colors..
4. Character Color: Contrasting color.
2.04 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA
A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as
background color:
1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch ( 1.6 mm ).
2.05 PLAQUES
A. Metal Plaques:
1. See Part 1 for allowances related to Plaques.
2. General:
a. Size: 16x24 inches.
b. Material:
1) Aluminum Castings: Alloy-Temper 5052-H32, complying with the requirements
of ASTM B209.
(a) Color: Oxide.
(b) Color: Black Chrome.
c. Texture: Leather.
d. Border: Single.
e. Mounting Method: Flat head bolt and expansion sleeve
2.06 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS
A. Metal Letters:
1. Metal: Aluminum casting.
2. Finish: Brushed, satin.
3. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font, unless noted otherwise.
4. Mounting: Tape adhesive.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.
C. Locate signs and mount at heights indicated on drawings and in accordance with ADA
Standards and ICC A117.1.
D. Protect from damage until Date of Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items.
END OF SECTION
SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 3
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. DIV-10 2113.19
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 10 2113.19
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Solid plastic toilet compartments.
B. Urinal screens.
A. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling
Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth 2019.
A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls and
ceilings, if applicable.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports,
door swings.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 4 by 4 inch ( 10.2 by 10.2 mm ) in size
illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments:
1. Scranton Products; Eclipse Partitions - stle HDPE - charcoal grey:
www.scrantonproducts.com/#sle.
2.02 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
A. Toilet Compartments: Factory fabricated doors, pilasters, and divider panels made of solid
molded high density polyethylene (HDPE), tested in accordance with 1, floor-mounted headrail-
braced.
1. Color: single color as indicated..
B. Doors:
1. Thickness: 1 inch ( 25 mm ).
2. Width: 24 inch ( 610 mm ).
3. Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch ( 915 mm ), out-swinging.
4. Height: 55 inch ( 1397 mm ).
C. Panels:
2. Height: 55 inch ( 1397 mm ).
3. Depth: As indicated on drawings.
D. Pilasters:
2. Width: As required to fit space; minimum 3 inch ( 76 mm ).
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed 1, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch ( 76 mm ) high,
concealing floor fastenings.
1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with
pilaster.
B. Head Rails: Extruded aluminum, anti-grip profile.
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2113 19 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. DIV-10 2113.19
Page 2 of 2
C. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel , tamper proof type.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.
C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Maintain 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch ( 9 mm to 13 mm ) space between wall and panels and between
wall and end pilasters.
C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.
D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines.
E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or
scratched materials with new materials.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ).
B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch ( 3 mm ).
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16
inch ( 5 mm ).
B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swinging
doors to closed position.
C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.
END OF SECTION
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2113 19 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 10 2239
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Top-supported folding panel partitions, horizontal opening.
A. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
B. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
C. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 2017.
D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
2020.
E. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
F. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation 2016.
G. ASTM E557 - Standard Guide for Architectural Design and Installation Practices for Sound
Isolation between Spaces Separated by Operable Partitions 2012.
H. ASTM E596 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Noise Reduction of
Sound-Isolating Enclosures 1996 (Reapproved 2016).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on partition materials, operation, hardware and accessories,
electric operating components, track switching components and colors and finishes available.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, track layout, details of track and required supports,
static and dynamic loads, location and details of pass door and frame, adjacent construction
and finish trim and stacking depth.
D. Samples for Review: Submit two samples of surface finish, 12 by 12 inches ( 300 by 300 mm )
size, illustrating quality, colors selected, texture and weight.
E. Certificates: Certify that partition system meets or exceeds specified acoustic requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain
removal methods. Describe cleaning materials detrimental to finish surfaces and hardware
finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Folding Panel Partitions - Horizontal Opening:
1. Hufcor, Inc; Series 600: www.hufcor.com/#sle.
B. Design is based on Hufcor, Inc.; Product 600 Series: www.hufcor.com.
2.02 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS - HORIZONTAL OPENING
A. Folding Panel Partitions: Center opening; paired panels; side stacking; motor operated.
B. Panel Construction:
1. Frame: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch ( 1.52 mm ) thick formed sheet steel frame top, bottom,
jambs, and intermediates; welded construction, with acoustical insulation fill.
2. Substrate: Gypsum board.
3. Panel Substrate Facing: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness.
4. Panel Properties:
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 10 2239 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
a. Thickness With Finish: 4 inches ( 100 mm ).

C. Panel Finishes:
1. Facing: Design Tex - Mojave II - 111873-545: www.designtex.com.
D. Panel Seals:
1. Panel to Panel Seals: Grooved and gasketed astragals, with continuous flexible ribbed
vinyl seal fitted to panel edge construction; color to match panel finish.
2. Acoustic Seals: Flexible acoustic seals at jambs, meeting mullions, ceilings, retractable
floor and ceiling seals, and above track to structure acoustic seal.
E. Suspension System:
1. Track: Formed steel; 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 inch ( 32 by 32 mm ) size; thickness and profile
designed to support loads, steel sub-channel and track connectors, and track switches.
2. Carriers: Nylon wheels on trolley carrier at top of every second panel, sized to carry
imposed loads, with threaded pendant bolt for vertical adjustment.
F. Performance:
1. Acoustic Performance:
a. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM E596, NRC of 0.65 minimum.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics of Panel Finish: Flame spread/smoke developed index of
25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Installed partition system track capable of supporting imposed loads, with maximum
deflection of 1/360 of span.
G. Accessories:
1. Ceiling Closure: White enameled ceiling closure; aluminum jamb and head molding,
fittings and attachments, and intermediate meeting posts.
2. Pocket Enclosures: Door, frame, and trim to match adjacent walls.
3. Acoustic Sealant: As recommended by partition manufacturer.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
B. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M, 3/8 inch ( 9.5 mm ) thick, maximum
permissible length; ends square cut, square edges.
C. Acoustic Insulation:
1. Type: As required for acoustic performance indicated.
2. Thickness: As required for acoustic performance indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify track supports are laterally braced and will permit track to be level within 1/4 inch ( 6.4
mm ) of required position and parallel to the floor surface.
C. Verify floor flatness of 1/8 inch in 10 feet ( 3 mm in 3 m ), non-cumulative.
D. Verify wall plumbness of 1/8 inch in 10 feet ( 3 mm in 3 m ), non-cumulative.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install partition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E557.
B. Fit and align partition assembly and pocket doors level and plumb.
C. Install acoustic sealant to achieve required acoustic performance.
D. Coordinate electrical connections.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust partition assembly to provide smooth operation from stacked to full open position. Do
not over-compress acoustic seals.
B. Visually inspect partition in full extended position for light leaks to identify a potential acoustical
leak.
C. Adjust partition assembly to achieve lightproof seal.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean finish surfaces and partition accessories.
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstrate operation of partition and identify potential operational problems.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 10 2600
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Corner guards.
A. ASTM D256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of
Plastics 2010 (Reapproved 2018).
B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
2020.
C. ASTM F476 - Standard Test Methods for Security of Swinging Door Assemblies 2014.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, wall mounting brackets with mounted
measurements, anchorage details and rough-in measurements.
C. Samples: Submit samples illustrating component design, configurations, joinery, color and
finish.
1. Submit two sections of corner guards, bumper rails and protective corridor handrails, 24
inches ( 610 mm ) long.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project:
provisions.
2. Extra Stock Materials: Onepackage(s) of minimum 96 inches ( 2438 mm ) long unitof
each kind of covers for corner guards and bumper rails.
E. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions for care and cleaning of each type of
product. Include information about both recommended and potentially detrimental cleaning
materials and methods.
A. Deliver wall and door protection items in original, undamaged protective packaging. Label
items to designate installation locations.
B. Protect work from moisture damage.
C. Protect work from UV light damage.
D. Do not deliver products to project site until areas for storage and installation are fully enclosed,
and interior temperature and humidity are in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations
for each type of item.
E. Store products in either horizontal or vertical position, in compliance with manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Protective Wall Covering:
1. Inpro: www.inprocorp.com/#sle.
2.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Impact Strength: Unless otherwise noted, provide protection products and assemblies that
have been successfully tested for compliance with applicable provisions of ASTM D256 and/or
ASTM F476.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 10 2600 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 2
2.03 PRODUCT TYPES

A. Corner Guards - Surface Mounted:
1. Material: High impact vinyl with full height extruded aluminum retainer.
2. Material: Polyethylene terephthalate (PET or PETG); PVC-free with full height extruded
aluminum retainer.
3. Material: Rubber, UV-resistant, black, uniform in color, smooth texture.
4. Performance: Resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs ( 445 N ) at any point without damage
or permanent set.
5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide assemblies with flame spread index of 25 or
less and smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E84.
6. Width of Wings: 2 inches ( 51 mm ).
7. Corner: Square.
8. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
9. Length: One piece.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that rough openings, concealed blocking, and anchors are correctly sized and located.
B. Verify that substrate surfaces for adhered items are clean and smooth.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured
rigidly in position to supporting construction.
B. Position corner guard 4 inches ( 102 mm ) above finished floor to 50 inches high ( 1270 mm
high ).
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ).
B. Maximum Variation From Level or Plane For Visible Length: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ).
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean wall and door protection items of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.
END OF SECTION
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 10 2600 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 10 2800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Commercial toilet accessories.
B. Commercial shower and bath accessories.
C. Under-lavatory pipe supply covers.
D. Diaper changing stations.
E. Utility room accessories.
A. Section 08 8300 - Mirrors: Other mirrors.
B. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Ceramic washroom accessories.
C. Section 10 2113.19 - Plastic Toilet Compartments.
D. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Under-lavatory pipe and supply covers.
B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
C. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubing for General Service 2015a (Reapproved 2019).
D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
E. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar 2015.
F. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus
Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium 2017.
G. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass 2016.
H. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass
2018.
I. ASTM C1822 - Standard Specification for Insulating Covers on Accessible Lavatory Piping
2015.
J. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
2020.
K. ASTM F2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing
Tables for Commercial Use 2004, with Editorial Revision (2016).
L. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to
Fungi 2015.
M. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and
attachment methods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Commercial Toilet, Shower, and Bath Accessories:
1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, inc: www.bobrick.com.
B. Under-Lavatory Pipe Supply Covers:
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 2800 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc: www.plumberex.com/#sle.

C. Diaper Changing Stations:
1. Koala Kare Products: www.koalabear.com/#sle.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete
with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
B. Keys: Provide 4 keys for each accessory to Architect; master key lockable accessories.
C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666.
D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Grade TP304 or TP316.
E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with
G90/Z275 coating.
F. Mirror Glass: Tempered safety glass, ASTM C1048; and ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality
Q2, with silvering as required.
G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type.
H. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 Brushed finish.
B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, satin finish.
C. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123/A123M; galvanize ferrous
metal and fastening devices.
D. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
E. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
2.04 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. See acessories schedule on drawings.
B. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Double roll, surface mounted, for coreless type rolls.
C. Paper Towel Dispenser: Electric, roll paper type.
1. Cover: Stainless steel.
2. Paper Discharge: Touchless automatic.
3. Capacity: 6 inch diameter roll.
4. Mounting: Semi recessed.
5. Power: Battery operated.
6. Refill Indicator: Illuminated refill indicator.
D. Waste Receptacle: Recessed, stainless steel, seamless lower door for access to container,
with tumbler lock, reinforced panel full height of door, push-in self-closing top door,
continuously welded bottom pan and seamless exposed flanges.
1. Liner: Removable seamless stainless steel receptacle.
E. Automated Soap Dispenser: Foam soap dispenser, deck-mounted on vanity, with container
concealed below deck; chrome-plated brass with bright polished finish; chrome-plated deck
escutcheon.
1. Minimum Capacity: 27 ounces ( 0.80 liters ).
F. Air Freshener Dispenser: Wall-mounted, battery operated.
G. Mirrors: frameless, 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ) thick tempered safety glass; ASTM C1048.
1. Size: full length of sink vanity, frameless..
2. Backing: Full-mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch ( 0.8 mm ) galvanized steel sheet and
nonabsorptive filler material.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
H. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, reloading by concealed opening at

base, tumbler lock.
1. Minimum capacity: 250 seat covers.
I. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface finish.
1. Standard Duty Grab Bars:
a. Push/Pull Point Load: 250 pound-force ( 1112 N ), minimum.
b. Dimensions: 1-1/4 inch ( 32 mm ) outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch ( 1.3 mm )
wall thickness, exposed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch ( 38 mm ) clearance between
wall and inside of grab bar.
c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
d. Products:
1) B-5806.99, Bobrick.
J. Combination Sanitary Napkin/Tampon Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface-mounted.
1. Door: Seamless 0.05 inch ( 1.3 mm ) door with returned edges and tumbler lock.
2. Cabinet: Fully welded, 0.03 inch ( 0.8 mm ) thick sheet.
3. Operation: 25 cent coin required to operate dispenser. Provide locked coin box,
separately keyed.
4. Identify dispensers slots without using brand names.
5. Minimum capacity: 15 napkins and 20 tampons.
K. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, self-closing door, locking
bottom panel with full-length stainless steel piano-type hinge, removable receptacle.
2.05 UNDER-LAVATORY PIPE AND SUPPLY COVERS
A. Under-Lavatory Pipe and Supply Covers:
1. Insulate exposed drainage piping, including hot, cold, and tempered water supplies under
lavatories or sinks to comply with ADA Standards.
2. Exterior Surfaces: Smooth non-absorbent, non-abrasive surfaces.
3. Construction: 1/8 inch ( 3.2 mm ) flexible PVC.
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke
developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. Comply with ASTM C1822, type indicated.
c. Comply with ICC A117.1.
d. Microbial and Fungal Resistance: Comply with ASTM G21.
4. Color: White.
5. Fasteners: Reusable, snap-locking fasteners with no sharp or abrasive external surfaces.
2.06 DIAPER CHANGING STATIONS
A. Diaper Changing Station: Wall-mounted folding diaper changing station for use in commercial
toilet facilities, meeting or exceeding ASTM F2285.
1. Material: Polyethylene.
2. Mounting: Surface.
3. Color: Gray.
4. Minimum Rated Load: 250 pounds ( 113.4 kg ).
2.07 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch ( 1.3 mm ) thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped
channel.
1. Holders: Three spring-loaded rubber cam holders.
2. Length: 36 inches ( 900 mm ).
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
C. See Section 09 2116 for installation of blocking and backing in walls.
D. Verify blocking and backing in walls is installed in accordance with manufactures instructions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on
drawings.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 10 4400
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
C. Accessories.
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
B. Section 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING: Field paint finish.
C. Section 21 1200 - Fire-Suppression Standpipes: Cabinet enclosure for extinguishers.
A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers 2017, with Errata (2018).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: model 419 or 441
1. Amerex: https://www.amerex-fire.com/
B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:
1. Uline: https://www.uline.com/BL_3927/Fire-Extinguisher-Cabinets.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10, UL 299 listed and
applicable codes, whichever is more stringent.
B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, brass valve with
pressure gauge.
1. Class: A:B:C type.
2. Size: 5 pound ( 2.27 kg ).
3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, red color.
4. Temperature range: Minus 40 degrees F ( Minus 40 degrees C ) to 120 degrees F ( 48
degrees C ).
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Fire Rated Cabinet Construction: One-hour fire rated.
1. Steel; double wall or outer and inner boxes with 5/8 inch ( 15.9 mm ) thick fire barrier
material.
B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type.
1. Size to accommodate accessories.
2. Trim: Flat square edge, with 1-1/2 inch ( 38 mm ) wide face.
C. Door: 0.036 inch ( 0.9 mm ) metal thickness, reinforced for flatness and rigidity with nylon
catch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge.
D. Door Glazing: Acrylic plastic, clear, 1/8 inch ( 3 mm ) thick, flat shape and set in resilient
channel glazing gasket.
E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet, with pre-drilled holes for placement of
anchors.
F. Door Style: Vertical Duo.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 2
G. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.

H. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Clear anodized.
I. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White colored enamel.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.
B. Graphic Identification: "FIRE EXTINQUISHER", vertical orientation on cabinet door..
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Install cabinets plumb and level, such that the top of the fire extinquisher is no more than 40
inches ( 1,016 mm ) from finished floor to top of the fire extinquisher.
C. Secure rigidly in place.
D. Place extinguishers in cabinets.
END OF SECTION
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 10 5613
METAL STORAGE SHELVING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Four post shelving.
B. Cantilevered shelving.
C. Shelving accessories.
A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Rated uniform shelf loads.
2. Details of shelving assemblies, including reinforcement.
3. Accessories.
C. Test Reports: Provide independent agency test reports documenting compliance with specified
structural requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, type, and layout of shelving, including lengths, heights, and
aisle layout, and relationship to adjacent construction.
1. Indicate methods of achieving specified anchoring requirements.
E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's
full range of available colors and finishes.
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Shelves: Two of each size with shelf brackets.
A. Inspect for dents, scratches, or other damage. Replace damaged units.
B. Store in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
C. Store under cover and elevated above grade.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Four Post Shelving:
1. SpaceSaver Corporation: www.spacesaver.com.
2.02 SHELVING - GENERAL
A. See drawings for layout and sizes.
B. Seismic Design: Seismic Design Category B, in accordance with ASCE 7-16.
C. Anchors: Provide anchoring hardware to secure each shelving unit to floor and wall.
1. Provide hardware of type recommended by manufacturer for substrate.
2.03 FOUR POST SHELVING
A. Four Post Shelving: Steel post-and-beam type with sway bracing, shelving brackets, shelving
surfaces, and accessories as specified.
1. Unit Width: 24 inches ( 610 mm ), center to center of posts.
2. Shelf Capacity: Uniform distributed load of 50 psf ( 2.4 kPa ), minimum.
3. Shelf Deflection: L/140, maximum, under specified uniform load.
4. Adjustability of Shelving: At intervals of 6 inches ( 150 mm ) on center, minimum.
5. Shelf Depth: 14-1/2 inches ( 368 mm ), minimum.
METAL STORAGE SHELVING 10 5613 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 3
6. Shelves per Unit: As indicated on drawings.

7. Finish: Baked enamel, medium gloss.
8. Color: Manufacturer’s standard gray.
B. Posts and Beams: Formed sheet members; perforations exposed on face of members are not
acceptable.
1. Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch ( 1.52 mm ).
2. Post Shape: Tee intermediate posts, angle end posts forming corners.
3. Post Face Width: 2 inches ( 51 mm ), maximum.
4. Connecting Hardware: Manufacturer's standard.
C. Bracing: Formed sheet members.
1. Back Sway Bracing: Either strap or panel; at back of each unit.
2. Side Sway Bracing: Either strap or panel; at each side of each unit.
3. Strap Sway Bracing: One strap installed diagonally, 16 gage, 0.0598 inch ( 1.52 mm );
welded, riveted, or bolted to uprights.
4. Panel Sway Bracing: Formed sheet metal panels, 20 gage, 0.0359 inch ( 0.91 mm );
welded, riveted, or bolted to uprights.
D. Shelves: Formed sheet, finished on all surfaces .
1. Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch ( 1.52 mm ).
2. Shelf Edge Profile: Extending 3/4 inch ( 19 mm ), maximum, below top surface of shelf.
3. Shelf Connection to Posts: Manufacturer's standard.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Kick Plates: Formed sheet metal; enclose open space between bottom shelf and floor on all
front sides and open ends; finished to match.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate is level and that clearances are as specified.
B. Verify that walls are suitable for shelving attachment.
C. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
B. Anchor and reinforce as specified, as indicated on drawings, and as recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Install shelving with shelf surfaces level and vertical supports plumb; adjust feet and bases as
required.
D. Out-Of-Square Tolerance - Four Post Shelving: Maximum of 1/8 inch ( 3 mm ) difference in
distance between bottom shelf and canopy top, measured along any post in any direction.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean shelving and surrounding area after installation.
3.05 PROTECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 3

END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 1 of 5
SECTION 12 2400
WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Window shades and accessories.
B. Interior motorized roller shades.
C. Motor controls.
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail
brackets.
B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Substrate for window shade systems.
C. Section 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings: Shade Pocket closures and accessories.
D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Finish requirements for wall controls specified in this
section.
A. ASTM D4674-89(1997) - Standard Test Method For Accelerated Testing For Color Stability Of
Plastics Exposed To Indoor Fluorescent Lighting And Window-Filtered Daylight
B. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films 2019.
C. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems
Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
A. Coordination:
1. Where motorized shades are to be controlled by control systems provided under other
sections, coordinate the work with other trades to provide compatible products.
2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide rough-in of electrical wiring as required
for installation of hardwired motorized shades.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not fabricate shades until field dimensions for each opening have been taken with field
conditions in place.
2. Do not install shades until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets, including
materials, finishes, fabrication details, dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements, and
accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Include shade schedule indicating size, location and keys to details.
D. Certificates: Manufacturer's documentation that line voltage components are UL listed or UL
recognized.
E. Verification Samples: Minimum size 6 inches ( 150 mm ) square, representing actual materials,
color and pattern.
section, with not less than five years of documented experience.
WINDOW SHADES 12 2400 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 2 of 5

A. Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging, labeled to identify each shade for each
opening.
B. Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manually Ooperated Roller Shades:
1. MechoShade Systems, inc. - www.mechoshades.com
B. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a
single supplier.
2.02 ROLLER SHADES
A. General:
1. Provide shade system components that are easy to remove or adjust without removal of
mounted shade brackets.
2. Provide shade system that operates smoothly when shades are raised or lowered.
B. Roller Shades Type Fabric roller shades complete with mounting brackets, roller tubes,
hembars, hardware and accessories.:
1. Size: To fit openings where indicated on drawings.
C. Fabric: Non-flammable, color-fast, impervious to heat and moisture, and able to retain its shape
under normal operation.
1. Translucent Shades: Soften the light and reveal only shadow-like outlines to the outside;
substantial privacy; Openness Factor less than 1 percent.
2. Blackout Shade: Block virtually all the light; Openness Factor equal to zero (0).
3. Flammability: Pass NFPA 701 large and small tests.
D. Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting indicated
and to accommodate shade fabric roll-up size and weight.
E. Roller Tubes: As required for type of shade operation.
1. Size: As recommended by manufacturer; selected for suitability for installation conditions,
span, and weight of shades.
F. Hembars: Designed for weight requirments and adaption to uneven surfaces, to maintain
bottom of shade straight and flat.
1. Style: Half wrap fabric covered bottom bar, flat profile with heat sealed closed ends.
2.03 MOTOR CONTROLS
A. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes,
wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as
necessary for a complete operating system that provides the control intent indicated.
B. Provide all components and connections necessary to interface with other systems as
indicated.
C. Digital Network Controls:
1. Intelligent Motors and Devices: Identifiable over network without separate interface.
2. Provide suitable interface modules as indicated or as required for connection to standard
(nonintelligent) motors and devices.
3. Capable of reprogrammed control without requiring wiring modifications.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 3 of 5
4. Capable of assigning shade motors to shade groups/sub-groups.

5. Capable of storing programmable open and close limits and minimum of three
intermediate preset stop positions for each shade.
6. Capable of aligning adjacent shades within accuracy of plus/minus 0.25 inch ( 6.4 mm ).
7. Provide 10 year nonvolatile power failure memory for system configuration settings.
8. Basis of Design: MechoShade Systems LLC; MechoNet: www.mechoshade.com/#sle.
a. Low-voltage network utilizes standard Category 5/6 UTP cable; maximum of 4,000
feet ( 1,219 m ), 250 nodes.
D. Manual Controls:
1. Control Functions:
a. Open: Automatically open controlled shade(s) to fully open position when button is
pressed.
b. Close: Automatically close controlled shade(s) to fully closed position when button is
pressed.
c. Raise: Raise controlled shade(s) only while button is pressed.
d. Lower: Lower controlled shade(s) only while button is pressed.
e. Presets: For selection of predetermined shade positions.
f. Multiple Shade Groups: Provide individual controls for each shade group as
indicated.
2. Wall Controls: Provided by shade manufacturer.
a. Finish: As specified in Section 26 2726.
b. Button Engraving: Manufacturer's standard engraving, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Handheld Remote Controls: Battery-powered; wireless (radio frequency) or infrared;
provided by shade manufacturer.
a. Wireless (Radio Frequency) Range: 30 feet ( 9 m ).
E. Automatic Solar-Tracking Controls:
1. Calculates the sun's position in the sky relative to the building and then calculates when
shade movement is necessary by facade/control zone.
2. Calculates the position of the shade to limit direct sunlight penetration to a predetermined
limit.
3. Shades along same facade/control zone to align and start, stop, and track in unison to
maintain a consistent aesthetic.
4. Algorithms to include consideration of:
a. Building location.
b. Facade orientation.
c. Window dimensions.
d. Allowable solar depth of penetration.
5. Override Capability:
a. Capable of automatic override of shade positions for:
1) Dark conditions (e.g., cloudy), based on input from photosensor(s); shades to go
to predetermined position to maximize occupant view and available daylight.
2) User-defined programmable schedule.
b. Capable of manual temporary override of shade positions using:
1) Wall controls.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 4 of 5
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Facias: Size as required to conceal shade mounting.
1. Style: As selected by Architect from shade manufacture's full selection.
B. Brackets and Mounting Hareware: As recommended by manufacture for mounting configuration
and span indicated.
C. Interior Side Channels: As required for light sealing blackout shade application.
D. Fasteners: Non-corrosive, and as recommended by manufacturer.
2.05 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.
B. Dimensional Tolerances: Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances.
1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/2 inch ( 13 mm ) space between
bottom bar and window sill.
2. Horizontal Dimensions - Inside Mounting: Fill openings from jamb to jamb.
3. Horizontal Dimensions - Outside Mounting: Cover window frames, trim, and casings
completely.
C. Dimensional Tolerances: As recommended in writing by manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation.
C. Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for
substrate under the project conditions.
B. Coordinate with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support shades.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, using
mounting devices as indicated.
B. Replace shades that exceed specified dimensional tolerances at no extra cost to Owner.
C. Adjust level, projection, and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is no
telescoping of shade fabric. Ensure smooth shade operation.
3.04 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Motorized Shade System: Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to
perform system startup.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to "like new" condition.
3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See DIV-01800 Construction Completion and Acceptance for closeout submittals.
B. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation and maintenance of window shade system to Owner's
personnel.
C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 5 of 5
2. Provide minimum of two hours training by manufacturer's authorized personnel at location

designated by the Owner.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.
B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 12 3600
COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Countertops for manufactured casework.
B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.
C. Sinks molded into countertops.
A. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework.
B. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Tile for countertops.
C. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Sinks.
A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard 2016.
B. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use
2016.
C. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards 2014, with Errata (2018).
D. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1
E. IAPMO Z124 - Plastic Plumbing Fixtures 2017.
F. ISFA 2-01 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material 2013.
G. ISFA 3-01 - Classification and Standards for Quartz Surfacing Material 2013.
H. MIA (DSDM) - Dimensional Stone Design Manual, Version VIII 2016.
I. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates 2005.
J. PS 1 - Structural Plywood 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
3. Specimen warranty.
C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation ; combine with shop drawings of
cabinets and casework specified in other sections.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches ( 150 mm )
square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.
F. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality
control programs.
G. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and
repair of countertop surfaces.
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Quality Certification:
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or grades
specified.
2. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program.
COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
3. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program.

4. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI
(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.
B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) sheet bonded to
substrate.
1. Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS, 0.048 inch ( 1.2 mm ) nominal thickness.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Nevamar: www.panolam.com/product/serene-stardom/..
b. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.
c. Surface Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square, substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch ( 32 mm )
thick; covered with matching laminate.
3. Exposed Edge Treatment: Molded rubber edge with T-spline, sized to completely cover
edge of panel.
a. Color: As indicated on drawings.
4. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.
5. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section
11 - Countertops, Custom Grade.
C. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plastic
resin over continuous substrate.
1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1-1/4 inch ( 32 mm ), minimum.
2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: Complying with ISFA
3-01 and NEMA LD 3; orthophthalic polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments;
homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard
woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.
a. Factory fabricate components to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes
indicated; comply with the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual.
b. Sinks: Integral castings; minimum 3/4 inch ( 19 mm ) wall thickness; comply with
IAPMO Z124.
c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Polished.
d. Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
3. Other Components Thickness: 3/4 inch ( 19 mm ), minimum.
4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch ( 32 mm ) thick; radiused edge;
use marine edge at sinks.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches ( 102 mm )
high.
6. Skirts: As indicated on drawings.
7. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section
11 - Countertops, Premium Grade.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply;
minimum 3/4 inch ( 19 mm ) thick; join lengths using metal splines.
B. Particleboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.1 Grade 2-M-2, 45 pcf ( 20 kg/cu m )
minimum density; minimum 3/4 inch ( 19 mm ) thick; join lengths using metal splines.
C. Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2.
D. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
materials being joined.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch ( 25 mm ) except where top butts
against cabinet or wall.
3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or
unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.
B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof
glue.
2. Height: 4 inches ( 102 mm ), unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets
are installed in proper locations.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;
shim where required.
B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate
board of 5/8 inch ( 16 mm ).
C. Install tile as specified in Section 09 3000.
D. Attach epoxy resin countertops using compatible adhesive.
E. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet ( 3 mm in 3 m ), maximum.
B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch ( 3 mm ) maximum; 1/16 inch ( 1.5 mm ) minimum.
C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch ( 3 mm ) wide, maximum.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
3.05 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. DIV-211100
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 211100
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire-suppression water-service piping and related components outside the
building and service entrance piping through floor into the building and the following:
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying the water. Include tapping of
water mains and backflow prevention.
2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service
piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with 2016 NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, and flushing
for fire-suppression water-service piping.
A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor when storing inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping: Do not interrupt service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner'swritten permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. HDPE, Fire-Service Pipe: FM Global approved, with minimum thickness equivalent to
Class 200.
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 211100 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
B. Molded HDPE Fittings: FM Global approved; PE butt-fusion type, made to match PE pipe
dimensions and class.
2.02 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least
equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.
B. Install HDPE pipe according to ASTM D2774 and ASTM F645.
C. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 48 inches and according to the following:
1. Under Driveways: With at least 48 inches of cover over top.
2. In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 12 inches of additional cover.
D. Extend fire-suppression water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building
fire-suppression water-service piping systems at locations and pipe sizes indicated.
1. Terminate fire-suppression water-service piping within the building at the floor slab until
building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges
as required for piping material. Make connections to building's fire-suppression water-
service piping systems when those systems are installed.
E. Comply with requirements for fire-suppression water-service piping inside the building in the
following Sections:
1. Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
3.02 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that
have finish and pressure rating same as or higher than systems pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in tubing NPS 2 and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adaptors, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of tubes and remove burrs.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside and inside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
F. HDPE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Join according to ASTM F2620-19.
G. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD,
and with system working pressure.
H. Do not use unions for underground piping.
A. Use test procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed
by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described below.
B. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing
and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.
C. Hydrostatic Tests: Perform testing in accordance with ASTM F2164-18.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for
underground fire-suppression water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over
piping.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect fire-suppression water-service piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before use.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in
2016 NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until
dirty water does not appear at points of outlet.
a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm
of chlorine; isolate and allow it to stand for 24 hours.
b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine
solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow it to stand for
three hours.
c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine
remains in water coming from system.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
3.06 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Underground fire-suppression water-service piping NPS 6 to NPS 12 shall be the following:
1. HDPE, Class 200, fire-service pipe; molded PE fittings; and heat-fusion joints.
END OF SECTION 211100
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 12
SECTION 211313
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
2. Cover system for sprinkler piping.
3. Specialty valves.
4. Sprinklers.
5. Alarm devices.
6. Manual control stations.
7. Control panels.
8. Pressure gages.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping listed for 175 psig, minimum working
pressure.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
1. Include piping and reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, support details, seismic
bracing details (based on Amarillo, TX area), and hydraulic calculation information.
2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Information contained in the Design Documents illustrate design
intent. Design of the fire protection system is delegated to the design-build subcontractor and
their qualified fire protection system designer. For wet-pipe sprinkler systems indicated to
comply with performance requirements and design criteria, include analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, coordinated with other trades to
eliminate conflicts, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Sprinkler drops.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
C. Design Data:
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 12
1. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13,
that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic
calculations if applicable.
D. Field Test Reports:
1. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as
described in 2016 NFPA 13 and 2016 NFPA 24 section 10.10.2. Include "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
2. Fire-hydrant flow test report shall be completed within 12 months and included with
design drawings/hydraulic calculations.
E. Field quality-control reports.
1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include
asbuilts, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinet: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with
space for minimum of six spare sprinklers, two of each type and temperature rating, plus
sprinkler wrench required for each type of sprinkler. Include number of sprinklers required
per 2016 NFPA 13.
A. Fire Protection Contractor and Fire Protection Designer must be registered in the State of
Texas.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems
and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field
test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2016 ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, 2016 NFPA 13 section 6.5.2.5 and 2016 NFPA 13 section 6.5.2.6.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with
the following:
1. NFPA 13.
B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.
C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design wet-pipe sprinkler systems. System designer must be
registered in the State of Texas.
1. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: Hydraulically designed
sprinkler systems are required to be designed for a supply pressure of at least 10
percent, but not less than 10 pounds per square inch below the water supply curve
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 12
to provide a pressure margin to accommodate minor system modifications or

degradation over time.
b. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
1) Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
2) Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
3) General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.
4) Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
5) Office and Public Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design (design areas are not allowed to
be reduced):
a. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
c. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.
2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard-Weight, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends must be roll
grooved. Cut groove is not acceptable.
B. Schedule 40, Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A135/A135M; ASTM A795/A795M,
Type E; or ASME B36.10M wrought steel. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match
joining method.
C. Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M, standard-
weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
D. Galvanized- and Uncoated-Steel Couplings: ASTM A865/A865M, threaded.
E. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern.
F. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASME/ANSI 16.1, Class 125
G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free or EPDM rubber gasket.
a. Class 125 and Class 250, Cast-Iron, Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.
b. Class 150 and Class 300, Ductile-Iron or -Steel, Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type
gaskets.
2. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
I. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M and ASME B16.9.
1. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
J. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 12
b. Smith-Cooper International.
c. Tyco Fire Products LP.
d. Victaulic Company.
e. Or Equal.
2. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum.
3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and AWWA C-110,C-153
rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
following:
a. Victaulic Company.
b. Or Equal.
Note: All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of
a single manufacturer.
2.03 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."
B. Pressure Rating:
1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175-psig minimum.
C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
D. Size: Same as connected piping.
E. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
F. Butterfly and Check Valves:
following:
a. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).
e. Viking Corporation.
f. Or Equal.
2. For check valve: Include trim, with drain valve and pressure gauges.
3. Standard: UL 193.
G. Double Check Backflow Assembly on Fire Riser.

1. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.
2. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure
gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.
3. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping.
4. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
H. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves for Fire Department Connection:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 12

following:
a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).
b. Tyco Fire Products LP.
c. Or Equal.
4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
5. Size: NPS 3/4.
6. End Connections: Threaded.
2.04 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Branch Outlet Fittings:
following:
a. Anvil International.
b. Smith Cooper
e. Or Equal.
4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
5. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings.
6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.
7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to
match connected branch piping.
8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, or threaded.
B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:
following:
a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc.
b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).
e. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.
f. Or Equal.
2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."
4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test
valve.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 12
5. Size: Same as connected piping.

6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded or grooved.
C. Branch Line Testers:
following:
a. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
b. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.
c. Potter Roemer LLC.
d. Or Equal.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
4. Body Material: Brass.
6. Inlet: Threaded.
7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:
following:
a. Triple R Specialty.
c. Victaulic Company.
d. Viking Corporation.
e. Or Equal.
2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."
4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
E. Adjustable Drop Nipples:
following:
a. Aegis Technologies, Inc.
b. CECA, LLC.
c. Corcoran Piping System Co.
d. Merit Manufacturing.
e. Or Equal.
4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 12

6. Length: Adjustable.
7. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
2.05 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).
3. Tyco Fire Products LP.
4. Victaulic Company.
5. Viking Corporation.
6. Or Equal.
B. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."
C. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig minimum.
D. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for
"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by
application.
E. Sprinkler Finishes at exposed areas: Brass/Bronze.
1. At Ceilings: White Concealed.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
F. Sprinkler Guards:
following:
a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).
c. Victaulic Company.
e. Or Equal.
3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
2.06 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Waterflow Pressure Switches:
following:
a. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.
c. United Electric Controls Co.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 12
e. Or Equal.
3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
C. Valve Supervisory Switches:
following:
a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company.
b. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
c. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.
d. Or Equal.
3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
application.
2.07 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS
A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide" for
hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve.
B. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION," with operating instructions
and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
2.08 CONTROL PANELS
A. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL CONTROL
STATION," with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent
accidental opening.
B. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronze ball
valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION," with operating
instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
C. Panels Components:
1. Power supply.
2. Battery charger.
3. Standby batteries.
4. Field-wiring terminal strip.
5. Electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm bell.
6. Lamp test facility.
7. Single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts.
8. Rectifier.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 12
2.09 PRESSURE GAGES

following:
1. AGF Manufacturing, Inc.
2. AMETEK, Inc.
3. Ashcroft Inc.
4. Brecco Corporation.
5. Or Equal.
B. Standard: UL 393.
C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.
D. Pressure Gage Range: 0- to 250-psig minimum.
E. Label: Include "WATER" label on dial face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.02 UNDERGOUND PIPING
A. Connect underground sprinkler piping to water distribution supply main at site boundary for
service to building.
B. Install post indicator shutoff valve, indicated at connection to water-service piping.
3.03 ABOVEGROUND PIPING
A. Connect aboveground sprinkler piping for building's interior to underground piping after the
underground piping has been flushed and tested.
B. Install fire riser with shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gages, drain, and other
accessories with main, and branch lines for fire sprinklers.
C. Install fire department connection as located by the local Owner’s Fire Department.
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from Owner.
2. Coordinate piping layout and location of sprinklers with other construction trades.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for seismic-restraint
device materials and installation.
D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, and equipment
having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 12
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when
sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to
drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and
spill over floor drain or to outside building.
J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with
requirements for support materials in NFPA 13.
L. Install pressure gages on riser. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4
and with soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve.
Install gages to permit removal, and install where they are not subject to freezing.
M. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
N. Install firestop for piping penetrations of rated walls.
O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
P. Install mastic at annular space around underground piping through floor.
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that
have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, and equipment
having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
C. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
D. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water
service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for
galvanized-steel pipe.
H. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and
grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
I. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 11 of 12
3.06 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and
specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Pipe drains from backflow preventors to exterior of building.
C. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating
portion of system controlled by each valve.
D. Install double backflow preventer instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
E. Specialty Valves:
1. Install valves in approved position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system.
2. Install backflow preventer assembly with pressure gauges and outlet off fire riser with
control valve for forward flushing.
3.07 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling
panels and minimum of 12 inches off T-Bar Grid.
B. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings, and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid
if designed.
3.08 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13.
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.
C. Exposed fire protection piping shall be painted red.
A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
4. Provide certification of inspection test of double check backflow assembly after
installation.
5. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any
sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 12 of 12
3.11 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.
3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight
steel pipe with grooved ends, grooved-end fittings, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and grooved
joints. Cut-groove joints are not acceptable.
B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified
fittings.
C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded
fittings; and threaded joints.
2. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings
for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded
joints.
D. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the
following:
joints.
E. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and larger, shall be one of the following:
joints.
3.13 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Sidewall, dry sprinklers.
B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.
1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.
2. Upright Sprinklers: Rough Brass/Bronze in exposed spaces without ceilings.
3. Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in
unfinished spaces not exposed to view.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 220529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Equipment supports.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for
vibration isolation devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following. Any anchorage of
mechanical equipment directly to concrete foundations will need to be provided by the
contractor for review by the architect, mechanical engineer, and structural engineer after Bid
and prior to construction
A. Welding certificates.
A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2019 ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated or epoxy powder coated.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
B. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.
2.02 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from
structural-carbon-steel shapes, with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and
U-bolts.
2.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-carbon-
steel shapes.
2.04 MATERIALS
A. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
C. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping
materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum
static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus
200 lb.
3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and
attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of
parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size, or
install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
E. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
H. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and
larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms, and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
K. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger-shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
3. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of
length at least as long as protective shield.
4. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation.
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.04 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finishes.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.
F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.
G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
H. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 8
SECTION 220548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Elastomeric isolation pads.
2. Elastomeric isolation mounts.
3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
4. Pipe-riser resilient supports.
5. Resilient pipe guides.
6. Elastomeric hangers.
7. Snubbers.
8. Restraint channel bracings.
9. Restraint cables.
10. Seismic-restraint accessories.
11. Mechanical anchor bolts.
1. Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for devices for HVAC
equipment and systems.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic-restraint component required.
a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with
requirements.
3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including
anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 220548 - 1

FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 8

A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation and seismic
bracing for plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity,
including other supports and restraints, if any.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Field quality-control reports.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that
is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: C.
2. Seismic Design Category: B.
a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.
b. Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5.
c. Component Amplification Factor: 1.0.
3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second).
4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period.
5. Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they
are subjected.
2.02 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS
A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:
following:
a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
b. California Dynamics Corporation.
c. Isolation Technology, Inc.
d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
e. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
f. Vibration Isolation.
g. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading
over pad area.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 8
3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.

4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.
5. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern.
6. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
7. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.
8. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.
a. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern.
b. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
2.03 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
following:
b. Isolation Technology, Inc.
c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
d. Mason Industries, Inc.
2. Mounting Plates:
a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and
threaded with threaded studs or bolts.
b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to
support structure.
3. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material.
2.04 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
following:
2. Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two separate and
opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment
hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 8
b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.
2.05 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES
A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement
separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- thick neoprene.
1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable
to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet
location requirements.
2.06 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS
A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:
following:
e. Novia; A Division of C&P.
f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an
opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-
rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel
contact.
2.07 SNUBBERS
following:
1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
2. Mason Industries, Inc.
3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B. Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts,
and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or
female-wedge type.
2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- thick resilient cushion.
2.08 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
following:
1. B-line, an Eaton business.
2. Hilti, Inc.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 8
4. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels
with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the
other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension,
compression, and torsion forces.
2.09 RESTRAINT CABLES
following:
1. CADDY; a brand of nVent.
2. Gripple Inc.
5. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables. End connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with
a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
2.10 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
following:
2. CADDY; a brand of nVent.
5. TOLCO.
B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
connections to hanger rod.
C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to
rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.
D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and
size of attachment devices used.
F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
2.11 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS
following:
2. Hilti, Inc.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 8
B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel
for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application
by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings
to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within
specified loading limits.
3.03 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment
attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and
formwork specified in Division 03.
B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or
ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.
C. Comply with requirements in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs,
equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
D. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate
snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and
supporting structure.
2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.
E. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum
of 80 feet o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
F. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
G. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 8
H. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
I. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
J. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
K. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full
design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
3.04 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or
branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate
with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one
supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in
Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to
restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at
least seven days' advance notice.
3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary
load-spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
Architect.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 8
7. Measure isolator deflection.

8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 1 of 18
SECTION 220719
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1. Domestic cold-water piping.
2. Domestic hot-water piping.
3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.
4. Roof drains and rainwater leaders.
5. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 2 of 18
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before
preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation
of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.08 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
E. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
following:
a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply
with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.
following:
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.
b. Armacell LLC.
c. K-Flex USA.
G. Phenolic:
following:
a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
b. Resolco Inc.
2. Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with
ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 3 of 18
3. Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126,
Type II, Grade 1.
4. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
5. Factory-Applied Jacket: None. Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
H. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or
ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. Armacell LLC.
2.02 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no
flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.
following:
a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
following:
b. Armacell LLC.
c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
d. K-Flex USA.
D. Phenolic Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75
to plus 300 deg F.
following:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
following:
c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.
F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 4 of 18
a. Dow Consumer Solutions.

b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.
d. Speedline Corporation.
2.03 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
following:
c. Knauf Insulation.
d. Vimasco Corporation.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
following:
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
5. Color: White.
D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.
following:
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.
5. Color: White.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 5 of 18
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
following:
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.
e. Vimasco Corporation.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.04 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
following:
c. Vimasco Corporation.
3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-
resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.
4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.
5. Color: White.
2.05 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass and Phenolic Products:
following:
d. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Color: White or gray.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 6 of 18

following:
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
following:
5. Color: White.
2.06 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.07 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.
following:
B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.
following:
a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b. Vimasco Corporation.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 7 of 18
2.08 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a
minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
following:
a. Alpha Associates, Inc.
2.09 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
following:
a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.
c. Proto Corporation.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap
and supply covers for lavatories.
C. Metal Jacket:
following:
b. RPR Products, Inc.
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005,
Temper H-14.
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene
and kraft paper.
d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene
and kraft paper.
e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius
elbows.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 8 of 18
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not
available.
2.10 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
following:
a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division.
b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company.
d. Knauf Insulation.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
following:
2. Width: 3 inches.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;
suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 9 of 18

following:
b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 6 mils.
D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
following:
2. Width: 2 inches.
2.11 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2
inch wide with closed seal.
2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with closed seal.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.
2.12 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:
following:
a. Just Manufacturing.
b. McGuire Manufacturing.
c. Truebro.
d. Zurn Industries, LLC.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 10 of 18
2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water
supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
requirements.
B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:
following:
a. Truebro.
b. Zurn Industries, LLC.
2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-
water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an
epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F.
Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods
for operating temperature range.
2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300
deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating
materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements
for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 11 of 18
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps
with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and
at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 12 of 18
3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Cleanouts.
3.04 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with
sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least
2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division
07.
3.05 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2.Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 13 of 18
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve
stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape
insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 14 of 18
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except
divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in
two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of
same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at
least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 15 of 18
3.07 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness
as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF PHENOLIC INSULATION
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure
inner layer with 0.062-inch wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with
stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals.
B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below-ambient
services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 16 of 18
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and
flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and
thickness as pipe insulation.
D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.09 INSTALLATION OF POLYOLEFIN INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated.
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
1. Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation.
1. Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 17 of 18
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's
3.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end
joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-barrier mastic.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12
inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.11 FINISHES
A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint
system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and
Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material
and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection
of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.12 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is contractor's option.
B. Items not insulated: unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 18 of 18
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.13 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Cold Water:
1. NPS 1 And Smaller: Insulation Shall Be The Following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 Inch Thick.
2. NPS 1-1/4 And Larger: Insulation Shall Be The Following:
B. Domestic Hot And Recirculated Hot Water:
1. NPS 1-1/4 And Smaller: Insulation Shall Be The Following:
2. NPS 1-1/2 And Larger: Insulation Shall Be The Following:
C. Roof Drain And Overflow Drain Bodies:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation Shall Be One Of The Following:
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 Inches Thick.
b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 Inch Thick.
c. Phenolic: 1 Inch Thick.
d. Polyolefin: 1 Inch Thick.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 220800
COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 22.
B. This project will have selected building systems commissioned. The complete list of equipment
and systems to be commissioned are specified in Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING
REQUIREMENTS. The commissioning process, which the Contractor is responsible to execute,
is defined in Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B. Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.
C. Section 013323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
1.03 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning plumbing systems, subsystems and
equipment. This Section supplements the general requirements specified in Section 019113
General Commissioning Requirements.
B. Refer to Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for more specifics
regarding processes and procedures as well as roles and responsibilities for all Commissioning
Team members.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for definitions.
1.05 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS
A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in Division 22 is part of the construction
process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the CNS’s Operation
and Maintenance personnel in accordance with the requirements of Section 019113 and of
Division 22, is required in cooperation with the CNS and the Commissioning Agent.
B. The Plumbing systems commissioning will include the systems listed in Section 019113 General
Commissioning Requirements.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. The commissioning process requires review of selected Submittals. The Commissioning Agent
will provide a list of submittals that will be reviewed by the Commissioning Agent. This list will be
COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS 220800 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
reviewed and approved by the CNS prior to forwarding to the Contractor. Refer to Section
013323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES for further details.
B. The commissioning process requires Submittal review simultaneously with engineering review.
Specific submittal requirements related to the commissioning process are specified in Section
019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTIONS
A. Commissioning of the Building Plumbing Systems will require inspection of individual elements of
the Plumbing construction throughout the construction period. The Contractor shall coordinate
with the Commissioning Agent in accordance with Section 019113 and the Commissioning Plan
to schedule inspections as required to support the commissioning process.
3.02 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS
A. The Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to verify systems, subsystems, and
equipment installation is complete and systems are ready for Systems Functional Performance
Testing. The Commissioning Agent will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists to be used to
document equipment installation. The Contractor shall complete the checklists. Completed
checklists shall be submitted to the CNS and to the Commissioning Agent for review. The
Commissioning Agent may spot check a sample of completed checklists. If the Commissioning
Agent determines that the information provided on the checklist is not accurate, the
Commissioning Agent will return the marked-up checklist to the Contractor for correction and
resubmission. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of completed
checklists for similar equipment are not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will select a broader
sample of checklists for review. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number
of the broader sample of checklists is also inaccurate, all the checklists for the type of equipment
will be returned to the Contractor for correction and resubmission. Refer to SECTION 019113
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for submittal requirements for Pre-Functional
Checklists, Equipment Startup Reports, and other commissioning documents.
3.03 CONTRACTORS TESTS
A. Contractor tests as required by other sections of Division 22 shall be scheduled and documented
in accordance with Section 010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. All testing shall be
incorporated into the project schedule. Contractor shall provide no less than 7 calendar days’
notice of testing. The Commissioning Agent will witness selected Contractor tests at the sole
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
discretion of the Commissioning Agent. Contractor tests shall be completed prior to scheduling
Systems Functional Performance Testing.
3.04 SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING:
A. The Commissioning Process includes Systems Functional Performance Testing that is intended
to test systems functional performance under steady state conditions, to test system reaction to
changes in operating conditions, and system performance under emergency conditions. The
Commissioning Agent will prepare detailed Systems Functional Performance Test procedures for
review and approval by the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall review and comment on the
tests prior to approval. The Contractor shall provide the required labor, materials, and test
equipment identified in the test procedure to perform the tests. The Commissioning Agent will
witness and document the testing. The Contractor shall sign the test reports to verify tests were
performed. See Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS, for additional
details.
3.05 TRAINING OF CNS PERSONNEL
A. Training of the CNS operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the
Resident Engineer and Commissioning Agent. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel
to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation,
and troubleshooting of the installed systems. Contractor shall submit training agendas and
trainer resumes in accordance with the requirements of Section 019113. The instruction shall be
scheduled in coordination with the Resident Engineer after submission and approval of formal
training plans. Refer to Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS and
Division 22 Sections for additional Contractor training requirements.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Copper tube and fittings.
A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.
A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.
A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water
service.
2. Do not interrupt water service without Architect's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61, and NSF 372. Include
marking "NSF-pw" on piping.
2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.
B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
E. Copper Unions:
1. MSS SP-123.
2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.
3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.
4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and
backfilling.
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or
AWWA C105/A21.5.
D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve
inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance.
E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with
requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
G. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
I. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in
Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
J. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
K. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
L. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
M. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
N. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
O. Install piping free of sags and bends.
P. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Q. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
R. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged
booster pump.
S. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater.
T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints"
chapter.
E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join
copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
G. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of
both piping systems.
3.04 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.
2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal
transition fittings or unions.
3.05 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.
D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529
"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.07 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and
maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to
the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than that required by plumbing code.
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
3.08 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and
installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Piping Inspections:
a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction:
1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing
or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.
2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests
specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance
with requirements.
c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Piping Tests:
a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered
or concealed before it was tested.
d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure
constitute defects that must be repaired.
e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to

provide hot-water flow in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are
not prescribed, follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-
sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 221119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Balancing valves.
2. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.
3. Strainers.
4. Outlet boxes.
5. Wall hydrants.
6. Water-hammer arresters.
7. Trap-seal primer valves.
8. Trap-seal primer systems.
9. Flexible connectors.
10. Water meters.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61.
B. Comply with NSF 372 for low lead.
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise
indicated.
2.03 BALANCING VALVES
A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:
following or approved equal:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.

2. Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory-setting indicator.
3. Body: Brass.
4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2.
5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
2.04 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:
a. Leonard Valve Company.
2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
5. Temperature Control: Adjustable.
6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.
7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.
2.05 OUTLET BOXES
A. Icemaker Outlet Boxes:
following:
a. Acorn Engineering Company.
b. Oatey.
c. Plastic Oddities.
d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
2. Mounting: Recessed.
3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate.
4. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 or smaller
copper tube outlet.
5. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water
tubing.
2.06 WALL HYDRANTS
A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:
following:
a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
b. Josam Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. WATTS.
e. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
f. Zurn Industries, LLC.
2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
4. Operation: Loose key.
5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall
clamp.
6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
8. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.
9. Box and Cover Finish: Chrome plated.
10. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
11. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
12. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.
2.07 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water-Hammer Arresters:
a. Zurn Industries, LLC.
2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
3. Type: Copper tube with piston.
4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
2.08 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE
A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:
2. Standard: ASSE 1018.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome
finished.
2.09 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS
A. Trap-Seal Primer Systems:
3. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper, water tubing.
4. Cabinet: Surface-mounted steel box with stainless-steel cover.
5. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac power.
a. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
application.
6. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
7. Number Outlets: See drawings.

8. Size Outlets: See drawings.
2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
following:
1. Flex Pression Ltd.
2. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
3. Flexicraft Industries.
4. Flex-Weld, Inc.
5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
6. Mercer Gasket & Shim, Inc.
7. Metraflex Company (The).
8. Proco Products, Inc.
9. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
10. Tozen Corporation.
11. Unaflex.
12. Universal Metal Hose.
B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering
and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.
2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel
wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.
2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
2.11 WATER METERS
A. Displacement-Type Water Meters:
following:
a. AALIANT.
b. ABB.
c. Carlon Meter.
d. Mueller Co.
e. Schlumberger Limited.
f. Sensus.
2. Standard: AWWA C700.
3. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure.
4. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
5. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company.

6. Case: Bronze.
B. Compound-Type Water Meters:
following:
a. ABB.
b. Badger Industries, Inc.
c. Master Meter, Inc.
d. Mueller Co.
e. Schlumberger Limited.
f. Sensus.
2. Standard: AWWA C702.
3. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure.
4. Body Design: With integral mainline and bypass meters; totalization meter.
5. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company.
6. Case: Bronze.
7. Pipe Connections: Flanged.
C. Remote Registration System: Encoder type complying with AWWA C707; modified with signal-
transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly as required
by utility company.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Balancing Valves: Install in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
B. Temperature-Actuated, Water Mixing Valves: Install with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
C. Water-Hammer Arresters: Install in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
D. Air Vents: Install vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto
floor drain.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
B. When installing piping specialties adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service
and maintenance.
C. Comply with requirements for grounding equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding
for Electrical Systems."
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on
or near each of the following:
1. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
2. Primary water tempering valves.
3. Outlet boxes.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. DIV-221123.21
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 221123.21
INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. In-line, sealless centrifugal pumps.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction materials, rated capacities,
certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics,
electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
A. Coordination Drawings: Detail pumps and adjacent equipment. Show support locations, type of
support, weight on each support, required clearances, and other details, drawn to scale, on
which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers
of the items involved:
1. Structural members to which pumps will be attached.
2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For inline, domestic-water pumps to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written instructions for handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. UL Compliance: UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
C. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components -
Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.
D. Seismic Performance: Inline, domestic-water pumps shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after
the seismic event."
2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.
INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS 221123.21 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
2.02 IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless,
overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following or
approved equal:
1. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.
C. Capacities and Characteristics: See schedule on drawings.
D. Pump Construction:
1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor
and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft
horizontal.
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.
3. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 220 deg F.
4. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections.
5. Impeller: stainless steel.
2.03 CONTROLS
A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.
1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.
2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F.
3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.
4. Operation of Pump: On or off.
5. Transformer: Provide if required.
6. Power Requirement: 120 V ac.
7. Settings: See schedule on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before pump installation.
3.02 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Mount pumps in orientation complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation of size required to support pump
weight.
1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 220548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets
or supports as required.
2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 220529
"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
D. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.
3.03 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
B. Where installing piping adjacent to inline, domestic-water pumps, allow space for service and
maintenance.
C. Connect domestic-water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or
greater than size of pump nozzles.
1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the
following pumps:
a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.
D. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling
valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping.
3.04 CONTROL CONNECTIONS
A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.
B. Connect control wiring between temperature controllers and devices.
C. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and
time-delay relay.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
E. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
equipment.
F. Inline, domestic-water pump will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.06 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Set thermostats, for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps.
5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication.
b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
7. Start motor.
8. Open discharge valve slowly.
9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.
10. Adjust timer settings.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust inline, domestic-water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Adjust initial temperature set points.
C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
END OF SECTION 221123.21

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 10
SECTION 221316
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
3. PVC pipe and fittings.
4. Specialty pipe fittings.
5. Encasement for underground metal piping.
B. Shop Drawings: For hubless, single-stack drainage system. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and details.
A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by
provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary
waste service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Architect's written
permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
2. Waste, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig.
B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand
the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
2.02 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.03 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra Heavy class(es).
B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 10
2.04 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. Single-Stack Aerator Fittings: ASME B16.45, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage
fittings.
following:
a. Conine Manufacturing Co., Inc.
b. SE Sovent.
C. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
following:
a. ANACO-Husky.
b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.
c. Josam Company.
d. MIFAB, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.
2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.
3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening
devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
D. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
following:
a. ANACO-Husky.
b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.
e. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.
2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540.
3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and
ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
E. Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
following:
a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.
b. MG Piping Products Company.
2. Standard: ASTM C 1277.
3. Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and
nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
2.05 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping
and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 10
B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns
and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
2.06 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Transition Couplings:
1. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping
system fitting.
2. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
2) Fernco Inc.
3) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.
4) Plastic Oddities.
b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.
c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear
ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each
end.
d. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.
e. Sleeve Materials:
1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with
pipe materials being joined.
3. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
of the following:
1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
2) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.
b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.
c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer
shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on
each end.
d. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.
4. Pressure Transition Couplings:
of the following:
1) Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc.
2) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
3) Dresser, Inc.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 10
4) Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.

5) Viking Johnson.
b. Standard: AWWA C219.
c. Description: Metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to,
and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.
d. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.
e. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
B. Dielectric Fittings:
1. Dielectric Unions:
of the following:
1) WATTS.
2) Wilkins.
3) Zurn Industries, LLC.
b. Description:
1) Standard: ASSE 1079.
2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.
3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
2. Dielectric Flanges:
of the following:
1) WATTS.
2) Wilkins.
3) Zurn Industries, LLC.
b. Description:
1) Standard: ASSE 1079.
2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.
4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded
solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
of the following:
1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2) Calpico, Inc.
3) Central Plastics Company.
4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
b. Description:
1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 10
2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
4. Dielectric Nipples:
of the following:
1) Grinnell Mechanical Products.
2) Josam Company.
3) Precision Plumbing Products.
4) Victaulic Company.
b. Description:
1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
2) Electroplated steel nipple.
3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EARTH MOVING
A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000
"Earth Moving."
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems.
1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.
2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination
drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices
specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 10
K. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.
1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in
direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.
2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to
back or side by side with common drain pipe.
a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.
3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.
4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are
connected.
a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
L. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system.
1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place
hub ends of piping upstream.
2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
M. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Waste: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Waste Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or
AWWA C105/A 21.5.
O. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code.
P. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.
Q. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
R. Install engineered soil and waste and vent piping systems as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Hubless, Single-Stack Drainage System: Comply with ASME B16.45 and hubless, single-
stack aerator fitting manufacturer's written installation instructions.
3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
S. Plumbing Specialties:
1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.
a. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage
force-main piping.
b. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary
Waste Piping Specialties."
2. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 10
a. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste
Piping Specialties."
T. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.
B. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
2. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and
valves as follows:
a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged.
c. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
C. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes.
3.04 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Transition Couplings:
1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs.
2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
B. Dielectric Fittings:
1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.
4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.05 ANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.
2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.
3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 10
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-58 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.06 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required
by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code.
4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover
flush with floor.
5. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor.
6. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary
Waste Piping Specialties."
7. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.
a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection.
b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of
equipment.
E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 10
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or,
in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired.
a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete
with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved.
a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside
leaders on completion of roughing-in.
a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less
than 10-foot head of water.
b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level
must not drop.
c. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight.
a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building.
Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg.
b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this
pressure.
c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout
period of inspection.
d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging
with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based
latex paint.
E. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 10

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 221319
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Roof flashing assemblies.
4. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.
B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.
C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sanitary waste piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS
A. Sanitary waste piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary waste piping specialty components.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing, and marked for intended location and application.
2.02 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves:
following:
b. Josam Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
d. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.

e. WATTS.
2. Standard: ASME A112.14.1.
4. Body: Cast iron.
5. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve.
6. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless.
7. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified
to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition.
8. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-
installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.
A. Horizontal, Plastic Backwater Valves:
following:
a. Canplas LLC.
b. IPS Corporation.
c. NDS Inc.
d. Oatey.
e. Plastic Oddities.
f. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
g. Zurn Industries, LLC.
3. Body: PVC.
4. Cover: Same material as body with threaded access to check valve.
5. Check Valve: Removable swing check.
6. End Connections: Socket type.
2.03 CLEANOUTS
A. Cast-Iron Exposed Cleanouts:
following:
b. Josam Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.
e. WATTS.
2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M.
3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match
connected piping.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
5. Closure: Countersunk, plug.

6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
2.04 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:
following:
a. Acorn Engineering Company.
b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.
c. Zurn Industries, LLC.
2. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead
flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot
reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.
a. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.
b. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
c. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
2.05 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:
following:
a. ProSet Systems Inc.
2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve-and-stack fitting with firestopping plug.
3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
4. Sleeve: Molded-PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern wye branch with neoprene
O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap
for plug.
6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Open Drains:
1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-
iron soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required,
increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564 rubber gaskets.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.
B. Deep-Seal Traps:
1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping
and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.
a. NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal.
b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.
C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.
D. Air-Gap Fittings:
1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between
installed inlet and outlet piping.
2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.
3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.
4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.
5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect
waste piping.
E. Sleeve Flashing Device:
1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for
pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top
of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in
bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.
2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
F. Stack Flashing Fittings:
1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof
membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
G. Vent Caps:
1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include
vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
H. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals:
1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-
coated copper, or galvanized steel.
2. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of
flashing collar extension, with counterflashing.
I. Expansion Joints:
2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.
4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting:
1. Comply with requirements for vibration-isolation and seismic-control devices specified in
Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
1. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over
backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.
C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
G. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. Comply
with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
H. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor
penetrations.
1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
I. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.
J. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
K. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
L. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping
discharge into sanitary drainage system.
M. Install sleeve and sleeve seals with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
N. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
O. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch
clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
P. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
Q. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance
between vent pipe and roof substrate.
R. Install blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
S. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping
installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.03 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
B. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required.
C. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and
skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around
sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
D. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
E. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
F. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
G. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
A. Perform tests and inspections, and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
equipment.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 221319.13
SANITARY DRAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Floor drains.
2. Floor sinks.
3. Trench drains.
4. Channel drainage systems.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene styrene.
B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.
D. PE: Polyethylene.
E. PP: Polypropylene.
F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DRAIN ASSEMBLIES
A. Sanitary drains shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.
2.02 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains: See schedule on drawings.
3. Pattern: Floor drain.
4. Body Material: Gray iron.
5. Seepage Flange: Not required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required.
8. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
9. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
10. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.
SANITARY DRAINS 221319.13 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 2
2.03 FLOOR SINKS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Sinks: See schedule on drawings.
a. Kohler Co.
3. Pattern: Floor drain.
4. Body Material: Cast iron.
5. Anchor Flange: Not required.
6. Outlet: Bottom, no-hub connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
3. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-
inch total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-
inch total depression.
4. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange, so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring.
a. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
5. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping
installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
SANITARY DRAINS 221319.13 - 2

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 223300
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Commercial, light-duty, storage, electric, domestic-water heaters.
2. Domestic-water heater accessories.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include emergency,
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric, domestic-
water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.
a. Commercial, Light-Duty, Storage, Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1) Storage Tank: Three years.
2) Controls and Other Components: Two years.
b. Expansion Tanks: Five years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and use.
B. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label
commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable
water to comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
2.02 COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Light-Duty, Storage, Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters:
a. A.O. Smith
3. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel, vertical arrangement.
a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-
water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
4. Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.
c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal with hose-end connection.
d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish or high-impact composite material.
f. Heat-Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water outlet.
g. Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in immersion type.
h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
i. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
j. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-pressure
relief valves. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include
pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of domestic-water heater.
Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
5. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction with legs for off-floor installation.
B. Capacity and Characteristics: Refer to Drawings.
2.03 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Domestic-Water Expansion Tanks:
a. AMTROL, Inc.
2. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water expansion tanks from single source from
single manufacturer.
3. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-
installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating
pressure at tank.
4. Construction:
a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-
water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and
outlets.
c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
5. Capacity and Characteristics: Refer to Drawings.
B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base
of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1
pipe threads.
C. Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASSE 1003 for water. Set at 25-psig-maximum outlet pressure
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include
relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-
pressure rating of domestic-water heater. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends
into storage tank.
E. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include pressure setting less than working-
pressure rating of domestic-water heater.
F. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
G. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.
H. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for
wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code
construction, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Hydrostatically test domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times pressure
rating before shipment.
C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Commercial, Electric, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting:
1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.
3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
4. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
6. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
7. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.
B. Install commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters with seismic-restraint devices.
C. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend domestic-water heater relief-

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch,
and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
D. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric,
domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains.
E. Install pressure-reducing valve with integral bypass relief valve in electric, domestic-water
booster-heater inlet piping and water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping. Set
pressure-reducing valve for outlet pressure of 25 psig.
F. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.
G. Charge domestic-water expansion tanks with air to required system pressure.
H. Install dielectric fittings in all locations where piping of dissimilar metals is to be joined. The
wetted surface of the dielectric fitting contacted by potable water shall contain less than 0.25
percent of lead by weight.
3.02 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and
maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.
D. Tests and Inspections:
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper operation.
equipment.
E. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 224100
COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Faucets.
2. Kitchen sinks.
3. Disposers.
4. Supply fittings.
5. Waste fittings.
1. Section 224213.13 "Commercial Water Closets."
2. Section 224213.16 "Commercial Urinals."
3. Section 224216.13 "Commercial Lavatories."
4. Section 224216.16 "Commercial Sinks."
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.
B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted plumbing
fixtures.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures and faucets to include in emergency,
operation, and operation and maintenance manuals.
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 KITCHEN SINKS
A. Kitchen Sinks S-1: One bowl, under counter mounted, stainless steel.
1. Stainless-Steel Kitchen Sinks:
of the following:
1) American Standard.
2) Elkay Manufacturing Co.
3) Just Manufacturing.
4) Kohler Co.
2. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 for stainless-steel kitchen sinks.
b. Overall Dimensions: See schedule on drawings.
c. Bowl:
1) Dimensions: See schedule on drawings.
2) Drain: 3-1/2-inch grid.
3. Faucet: S-1.
4. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.
5. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article, except include
continuous waste for multibowl sinks.
a. Disposer: GDU-1.
2.02 SINK FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Sink Faucets: Solid brass, kitchen sink.
1. General-Duty, Solid-Brass Faucets:
of the following:
2) BrassTech Inc.
3) Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company.
5) Fisher Manufacturing Co.
6) GROHE America, Inc.
7) Just Manufacturing.
8) Kohler Co.
9) Moen Incorporated.
10) Price Pfister, Inc.
11) Speakman Company.
12) T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and
fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
4. Kitchen Sink Option: Separate hand spray complying with ASSE 1025.
5. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
6. Maximum Flow Rate: 1.0 gallons per cycle unless otherwise indicated.
7. Mixing Valve: Two-lever handle.
8. Centers: 4 inches.
9. Mounting: Deck.
10. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches.
11. Spout Type: Swing, round tubular Rigid gooseneck.
12. Spout Outlet: Aerator.
2.03 DISPOSERS
A. Disposers GDU-1: Batch-feed household, food waste.
1. Batch-Feed Disposers:
of the following:
1) Franke Consumer Products, Inc.
2) InSinkErator; a division of Emerson Electric Co.
3) KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.
4) Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.
2. Standards: ASSE 1008 and UL 430, and listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
3. General: Include reset button; wall switch; corrosion-resistant chamber with jam-resistant,
cutlery- or stainless-steel grinder or shredder; NPS 1-1/2 outlet; quick-mounting,
stainless-steel sink flange; antisplash guard; and combination cover/stopper.
4. Model: Sound-insulated chamber and stainless-steel outer shell.
5. Motor: 115-V ac, 1725 rpm, 1/2 hp with overload protection.
2.04 SUPPLY FITTINGS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
C. Kitchen Sink Supply Fittings:
1. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching water-
supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.
2. Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with inlet
connection matching water-supply piping type and size.
a. Operation: Loose key.
3. Risers:
a. Size: NPS 3/8 for kitchen sinks.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
b. Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible hose

riser.
2.05 WASTE FITTINGS
A. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset tailpiece for accessible kitchen sinks.
B. Trap:
1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 for kitchen sinks.
2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and ground-joint swivel elbow with
0.032-inch- thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated-brass or -steel wall flange.
3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch- thick stainless-
steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.
2.06 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing-fixture installation.
B. Examine walls, floors, cabinets, and counters for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
B. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.
C. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets
are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
D. Install traps on fixture outlets.
E. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of
accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."
F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
G. Seal joints between plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant
requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste
and Vent Piping."
D. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of
accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust plumbing fixtures and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
A. After completing installation of plumbing fixtures, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials.
C. Provide protective covering for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings.
D. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 224213.13
COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Water closets.
2. Flushometer valves and tanks.
3. Toilet seats.
4. Supports.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Effective Flush Volume: Average of two reduced flushes and one full flush per fixture.
B. Remote Water Closet: Located more than 30 feet from other drain line connections or fixture
and where less than 1.28 drainage fixture units are upstream of the drain line connection.
and profiles, and finishes for water closets.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified
with labels describing contents.
1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but
no fewer than six of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOOR-MOUNTED, BOTTOM-OUTLET WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets WC-1, WC-2: Refer to Drawings.
a. Kohler Co.
2. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.
b. Material: Vitreous china.
c. Type: Siphon jet.
COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS 224213.13 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
d. Style: Flushometer valve.

e. Rim Contour: Elongated.
f. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush.
g. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top.
h. Color: White.
3. Bowl-to-Drain Connecting Fitting: ASTM A 1045.
4. Flushometer Valve: See schedule on drawings.
5. Toilet Seat: See schedule on drawings.
2.02 FLUSHOMETER VALVES
A. Hard-Wired, Solenoid-Actuator, Piston Flushometer Valves WC-1, WC-2. :
a. Kohler Co.
3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.
5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.
6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.
7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.
8. Style: Exposed.
9. Actuator: Solenoid complying with UL 1951, and listed and labeled as defined in
application.
10. Trip Mechanism: Hard-wired electronic sensor complying with UL 1951, and listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
11. Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush.
12. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1.
13. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.
2.03 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats:
following:
a. American Standard.
b. Bemis Manufacturing Company.
c. Church Seats; Bemis Manufacturing Company.
2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.
3. Material: Plastic.
4. Type: Commercial (Standard).
5. Shape: Elongated rim, open front.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
6. Hinge: Self-sustaining, check.

7. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.
8. Seat Cover: Not required.
9. Color: White.
2.04 SUPPORTS
A. Water Closet Carrier:
2. Description: Waste-fitting assembly, as required to match drainage piping material and
arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and feet; bolts and hardware matching
fixture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.
B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Water-Closet Installation:
1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to
piping or building substrate.
3. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for
handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
B. Support Installation:
1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets.
2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.
3. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate, onto
waste-fitting seals; and attach to support.
C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:
1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.
2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted
on open side of water closet.
4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.
5. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
D. Install toilet seats on water closets.
E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:
1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished
locations and within cabinets and millwork.
2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 0518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."
F. Joint Sealing:
1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant.
2. Match sealant color to water-closet color.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings
required to match water closets.
B. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water
closets, fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.
A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.
C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 224213.16
COMMERCIAL URINALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Urinals.
2. Flushometer valves.
3. Supports.
and profiles, and finishes for urinals.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified
with labels describing contents.
1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but
no fewer than six of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL-HUNG URINALS
A. Urinals: Wall hung, back outlet, blowout.
a. Kohler Co.
2. Fixture:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.
b. Material: Vitreous china.
c. Strainer or Trapway: Manufacturer's standard strainer with integral trap.
d. Water Consumption: Water saving.
e. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/4; top.
f. Outlet Size and Location: NPS 2; back.
g. Color: White.
3. Flushometer Valve: See schedule on drawings.
COMMERCIAL URINALS 224213.16 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
4. Waste Fitting:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2 for coupling.
b. Size: NPS 2.
5. Support: Type I Urinal Carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and
fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include rectangular, steel uprights..
2.02 URINAL FLUSHOMETER VALVES
A. Hard-Wired, Solenoid-Actuator, Piston Flushometer Valves U-1, U-2:
a. Kohler Co.
3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.
5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.
6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.
7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.
8. Style: Exposed.
9. Actuator: Solenoid complying with UL 1951; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended location and application.
10. Trip Mechanism: Hard-wired electronic sensor complying with UL 1951; listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended
location and application.
11. Consumption: 0.5 gal per flush.
12. Minimum Inlet: NPS 3/4.
13. Minimum Outlet: NPS 3/4.
2.03 SUPPORTS
A. Type I Urinal Carrier:
following:
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. WATTS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation.
B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Urinal Installation:
1. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
2. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to supports.
3. Install wall-hung, bottom-outlet urinals with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
4. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the handicapped/elderly,
according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
5. Install trap-seal liquid in waterless urinals.
B. Support Installation:
1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals.
2. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals.
3. Use carriers without waste fitting for urinals with tubular waste piping.
4. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible urinals.
C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:
1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal.
2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on
open side of compartment.
4. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:
1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished
locations.
2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for
Plumbing Piping."
E. Joint Sealing:
1. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-
resistant silicone sealant.
2. Match sealant color to urinal color.
3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required
to match urinals.
B. Where installing piping adjacent to urinals, allow space for service and maintenance.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings,
and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.
C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
A. Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
B. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of urinals for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 224216.13
COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Lavatories.
and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.
B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic faucets.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 UNDER COUNTER-MOUNTED LAVATORIES
A. Lavatory: Refer to Drawings.
2.02 SOLID-BRASS, MANUALLY OPERATED FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable
water.
B. Lavatory Faucets L-2: Manual-type, commercial, solid-brass valve.
fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
3. Body Type: Centerset.
4. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.
2.03 SOLID-BRASS, AUTOMATICALLY OPERATED LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable
water.
B. Lavatory Faucets L-1: Automatic-type, hard-wired, electronic-sensor-operated, solid-brass
valve. See schedule on drawings.
following:
a. American Standard.
b. Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company.
c. Kohler Co.
COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 224216.13 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
d. Moen Incorporated.
e. Sloan Valve Company.
f. Speakman Company.
g. T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
h. Zurn Industries, LLC.
2. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951.
application.
fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
7. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.25 gallons per cycle.
8. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed.
2.04 SUPPLY FITTINGS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with
potable water.
B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply
piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.
D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet
connection matching supply piping.
E. Operation: Loose key.
F. Risers:
1. NPS 3/8.
2. ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel, flexible hose riser.
2.05 WASTE FITTINGS
A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.
C. Trap:
1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4.
2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-
thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.
3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch- thick stainless-
steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.
2.06 SUPPORTS
A. Type II Lavatory Carrier:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.
B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.
C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people
with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-
resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements
specified in Division 07.
F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of
accessible lavatories.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories,
fittings, and controls.
C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials.
C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.
D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 224216.16
COMMERCIAL SINKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Service basins.
2. Sink faucets.
and profiles, and finishes for sinks.
A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.
A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SERVICE BASINS
A. Service Basins, SS-1: Terrazzo, floor mounted.
a. Stern-Williams Co., Inc
b. Kohler Co.
2. Fixture:
a. Standard: IAPMO PS 99.
b. Shape: Square.
c. Nominal Size: 24 by 24 inches.
d. Height: 10 inches.
3. Mounting: On floor and flush to wall.
4. Faucet: SS-1.
2.02 SINK FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with
potable water.
B. Sink Faucets: Manual type, two lever handle mixing valve.
1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets SS-1:
COMMERCIAL SINKS 224216.16 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4

of the following:
2) Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company.
4) Moen Incorporated.
5) Sloan Valve Company.
fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.
4. Body Type: Widespread.
7. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 gpm.
8. Handle(s): Lever.
9. Mounting Type: Back/wall, exposed.
10. Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass with wall brace .
11. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet.
12. Spout Outlet: Hose thread according to ASME B1.20.7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.
B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
B. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.
C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.
D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
E. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-
resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of
accessible sinks.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and
controls.
A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials.
C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.
D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 224716
PRESSURE WATER COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pressure water coolers and related components.
A. Product Data: For each type of pressure water cooler.
and profiles, and finishes.
A. Maintenance Data: For pressure water coolers to include in maintenance manuals.
1. Filter Cartridges: Equal to10 percent of quantity installed for each type and size indicated,
but no fewer than5 of each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS
A. Pressure Water Coolers: Wall mounted, wheelchair accessible.
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
2. Standards:
a. Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
b. Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants,"
for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant unless
3. Cabinet: Bi-level with two attached cabinets, all stainless steel] vinyl-covered steel with
stainless-steel top.
4. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on each cabinet deck.
5. Control: Push bar.
6. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 tailpiece.
7. Supply: NPS 3/8 with shutoff valve.
8. Waste Fitting: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2, NPS 1-1/4 brass P-trap.
PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 224716 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
9. Filter: One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for cyst and lead
reduction to below EPA standards; with capacity sized for unit peak flow rate.
10. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-cooled
condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion-resistant-metal storage
tank, and adjustable thermostat.
application.
11. Capacities and Characteristics:
a. Cooled Water: 8 gph.
b. Ambient-Air Temperature: 90 deg F.
c. Inlet-Water Temperature: 80 deg F.
d. Cooled-Water Temperature: 50 deg F.
e. Electrical Characteristics:
1) Motor Horsepower: 1/5.
2) Volts: 120-V ac.
3) Phase: Single.
4) Hertz: 60.
12. Support: Type I Water Cooler Carrier.
13. Water Cooler Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1.
B. Pressure Water Coolers EWC-1: Recessed, wheelchair accessible.
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
2. Standards:
a. Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
b. Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants,"
for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant unless
3. Cabinet: All stainless steel.
4. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on deck.
5. Control: Push bar.
6. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 tailpiece.
7. Supply: NPS 3/8 with shutoff valve.
8. Waste Fitting: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2, NPS 1-1/4 brass P-trap.
9. Filter: One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for cyst and lead
reduction to below EPA standards; with capacity sized for unit peak flow rate.
10. Cooling System: Electric, hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-cooled
condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion-resistant-metal storage
tank, and adjustable thermostat.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4

application.
11. Capacities and Characteristics:
a. Cooled Water: 8 gph.
b. Ambient-Air Temperature: 90 deg F.
c. Inlet-Water Temperature: 80 deg F
d. Cooled-Water Temperature: 50 deg F.
e. Electrical Characteristics:
1) Motor Horsepower: 1/6.
2) Volts: 120-V ac.
3) Phase: Single.
4) Hertz: 60.
12. Ventilation Grille: Stainless steel, located below water cooler.
13. Support: Mounting frame for attaching to substrate.
2.02 SUPPORTS
A. Type I Water Cooler Carrier:
following:
b. Josam Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Wade Drains.
e. WATTS.
B. Type II Water Cooler Carrier:
following:
b. Josam Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Wade Drains.
e. WATTS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for
children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.
C. Install mounting frames, affixed to building construction, and attach recessed, pressure water
coolers, and in-wall bottle filling stations to mounting frames.
D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to
domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball or gate valve. Install valves in locations where they
can be easily reached for operation.
E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage
system.
F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
B. Adjust pressure water-cooler temperature settings.
3.05 CLEANING
A. After installing fixture, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.
D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 230529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
3. Fastener systems.
4. Pipe stands.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following; include Product Data
for components. Any anchorage of mechanical equipment directly to concrete foundations will
need to be provided by the contractor for review by the architect, mechanical engineer, and
structural engineer after Bid and prior to construction:
2. Pipe stands.
A. Welding certificates.
A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according
to ASCE/SEI 7.
2.02 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated, or epoxy powder-coated.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
2.03 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-
bolts.
2.04 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors for use in hardened portland
cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials where used.
following:
a. B-line, an Eaton business.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
2. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-
steel shapes.
2.06 MATERIALS
A. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.
C. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated or galvanized steel for indoor applications
and stainless steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of similar materials as
rods.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
200 lb.
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and
attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of
parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
E. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
H. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and
larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of

length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.04 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.06 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
3.07 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.
F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
J. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 230548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Elastomeric isolation pads.
2. Restrained-spring isolators.
3. Elastomeric hangers.
4. Spring hangers.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic-restraint component required.
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to
requirements.
3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including
anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable
motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments
to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and
frames for equipment mounting.

A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B. Field quality-control reports.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 5

conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that
is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
more stringent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Seismic Design Category: B.
2. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): Refer to
Structural Drawings.
3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: Refer to Structural
Drawings.
4. Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency
a. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they
are subjected.
2.02 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS
A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:
1. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading
over pad area.
2. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.
3. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.
4. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern.
5. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
6. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.
2.03 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:
1. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight
being removed.
a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to
the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
b. Top plate with elastomeric pad.
c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 5
2.04 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods: Insert drawing
designation.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an
opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-
rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel
contact.
2.05 SPRING HANGERS
A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression:
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
8. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
A. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables. End connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with
a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
A. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel
B. Concrete Base: welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place
concrete.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases
shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 5
4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and

anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from
supported equipment manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to every trapeze member with clamps approved for
application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within
specified loading limits.
3.03 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

attachment and mounting points. and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and
formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or
ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.
C. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate
snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and
supporting structure.
2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.
D. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
of 80 feet o.c.
E. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
F. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.
G. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
H. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 5

4. Test at least two of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
Architect.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 12
SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
b. Variable-air-volume systems.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. BAS: Building automation systems.
C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.
G. TDH: Total dynamic head.
1.04 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site after
approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the
details. Provide a minimum of 14 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Minimum Agenda Items:
a. The Contract Documents examination report.
b. The TAB plan.
c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.
A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that
the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in
"Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system
readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.
E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in
"Examination" Article.
F. Certified TAB reports.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 12
G. Sample report forms.

H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1. Instrument type and make.
2. Serial number.
3. Application.
4. Dates of use.
5. Dates of calibration.
A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB
technician.
B. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB as a
TAB technician.
C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."
D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 -
"System Balancing."
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TAB SPECIALISTS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, engage one of the following:
1. To be determined.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are
accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 12
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to
verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum
walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all
or part of a system.
2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight,
filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
K. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
L. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:
1. Equipment and systems to be tested.
2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.
3. Instrumentation to be used.
4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.
B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness
for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:
1. Airside:
a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.
c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional.
d. Clean filters are installed.
e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.
f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.
g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
h. Ceilings are installed.
i. Windows and doors are installed.
j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 12
3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.05 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-
air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
3.06 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates
minimum outdoor-air conditions.
b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary,
perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.
c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil
traverse may be acceptable.
d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at
terminals and calculate the total airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:
a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 12
c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling
system.
d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.
3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus
actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments
to accommodate actual conditions.
4. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated
speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment
of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.
5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling,
full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum
required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow.
3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.
1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow.
3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow.
4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.
D. Verify final system conditions.
1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within
design. Readjust to design if necessary.
2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.
3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.
4. Mark all final settings.
5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.
6. Measure and record all operating data.
7. Record final fan-performance data.
3.07 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Phase and hertz.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 12
8. Service factor and frame size.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove
proper operation.
3.08 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C. Record fan and motor operating data.
3.09 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
3.10 CONTROLS VERIFICATION
A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:
1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.
2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.
4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.
5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems.
6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.
7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller.
8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller:
open, closed, or modulating.
9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended
temperature, humidity, or pressure.
B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations
from indicated conditions.
3.11 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified
above.
3.12 PROGRESS REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 12
B. Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and
each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.13 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
Product Data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 12
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
j. Number, make, and size of belts.
k. Number, type, and size of filters.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 12
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.

f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
i. Outdoor airflow in cfm.
j. Return airflow in cfm.
k. Outdoor-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft..
h. Tube size in NPS.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Airflow rate in cfm.
b. Average face velocity in fpm.
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
h. Entering-water temperature in deg F.
i. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
j. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
k. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
l. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 12
e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
g. Number, make, and size of belts.
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
H. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
c. Apparatus used for test.
d. Area served.
e. Make.
f. Number from system diagram.
g. Type and model number.
h. Size.
i. Effective area in sq. ft.
a. Airflow rate in cfm.
b. Air velocity in fpm.
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
e. Final airflow rate in cfm.
f. Final velocity in fpm.
g. Space temperature in deg F.
I. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 11 of 12
a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.14 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT
A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of
Owner.
B. Owner shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked.
Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the
extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.
C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final
report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."
D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements
checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete
and shall be rejected.
E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:
1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final
report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and
request a second final inspection.
2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB
specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the
cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.
3. If the second verification also fails, Owner may contact AABC Headquarters regarding
the AABC National Performance Guaranty.
3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are
being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 12 of 12

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 12
SECTION 230713
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before
preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for
installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for
maintenance.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply
with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.
following:
b. Armacell LLC.
c. K-Flex USA.
D. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type II with factory-applied vinyl jacket.
Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.
e. Owens Corning.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
following:
b. Armacell LLC.
d. K-Flex USA.
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
following:
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.
D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 12

following:
E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.
2.3 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
following:
d. Vimasco Corporation.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
following:
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.
f. Vimasco Corporation.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 12
2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation
materials, jackets, and substrates.
following:
c. Vimasco Corporation.
2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-
resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
5. Color: Aluminum.
B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
the following:
5. Color: White.
2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 12
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;
5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to
ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 5 strands by 5
strands/sq. in. for covering ducts.
B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for ducts.
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a
minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
following:
a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.
c. Proto Corporation.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
D. Metal Jacket:
the following:
b. RPR Products, Inc.
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005,
Temper H-14.
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene
and kraft paper.
d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene
and kraft paper.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 12
E. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a
rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white
aluminum-foil facing.
2.10 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
1. Width: 3 inches.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
1. Width: 3 inches.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;
suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 6 mils.
D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2.11 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 12
1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated.
2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully
annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit
depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.
3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-
diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened
to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely
in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
b. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is
capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when
self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-
diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-
thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 12
2.12 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 12
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and
at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least
2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves
to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 12
3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of
vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c.
each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to
hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch
o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-
barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the
insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At
end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 11 of 12
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end
joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-barrier mastic.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks
and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
3.8 FINISHES
A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint
system identified below and as specified in Division 09.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material
and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 12 of 12

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 230800
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
and systems to be commissioned is specified in Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING
is defined in Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIRMENTS.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 0100 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
1.03 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the Facility exterior closure, related
subsystems and related equipment. This Section supplements the general requirements
specified in Section 019113 General Commissioning Requirements.
B. Refer to Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for more details
Team members.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
B. The Facility exterior closure systems commissioning will include the systems listed in Section
019113 General Commissioning Requirements.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. The commissioning process requires review of selected Submittals that pertain to the systems to
be commissioned. The Commissioning Agent will provide a list of submittals that will be reviewed
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 230800 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
by the Commissioning Agent. This list will be reviewed and approved by the CNS prior to
forwarding to the Contractor. Refer to Section 013323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
and SAMPLES for further details.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Commissioning of HVAC systems will require inspection of individual elements of the HVAC
systems construction throughout the construction period. The Contractor shall coordinate with
the Commissioning Agent in accordance with Section 019113 and the Commissioning plan to
schedule HVAC systems inspections as required to support the Commissioning Process.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
details.
scheduled in coordination with the CNS Resident Engineer after submission and approval of
formal training plans. Refer to Section 019100 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
and Division 23 Sections for additional Contractor training requirements.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 9
SECTION 230923
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. DDC system for monitoring and controlling of HVAC systems.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A prescribed set of
well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number of steps.
B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature.
C. BACnet Specific Definitions:
1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A
communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services over a
network.
2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of BACnet
functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are combined to build the
BACnet functional requirements for a device.
3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet
messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP
subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number.
4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products for
compliance with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet International.
5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that
identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device.
D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition and a
low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED" condition. "Digital" is sometimes used
interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal.
E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller residing on
a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are indicated: Network
Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-Specific Controller.
F. Control System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system and
support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise system.
G. COV: Changes of value.
H. DDC System Provider: Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer
and responsible for execution of DDC system Work indicated.
I. Distributed Control: Processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions are made
at subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to remote
subsystems and status is reported back. On loss of communication, subsystems shall be
capable of operating in a standalone mode using the last best available data.
J. DOCSIS: Data-Over Cable Service Interface Specifications.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 9
K. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different
communication protocols.
L. HLC: Heavy load conditions.
M. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input
(AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary output (BO). Analog signals are
continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, pressure, and
temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values) and generally
represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is sometimes used
interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively.
N. I/P: Current to pneumatic.
O. LAN: Local area network.
P. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
Q. Mobile Device: A data-enabled phone or tablet computer capable of connecting to a cellular
data network and running a native control application or accessing a web interface.
R. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data.
S. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing, IEE 8802-3. Datalink protocol LAN option that uses
twisted-pair wire for low-speed communication.
T. MTBF: Mean time between failures.
U. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports a family of programmable application
controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-to-peer network for
transmission of global data.
V. Network Repeater: Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts it to
another network. No routing information is added to protocol.
W. Peer to Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners.
X. POT: Portable operator's terminal.
Y. PUE: Performance usage effectiveness.
Z. RAM: Random access memory.
AA. RF: Radio frequency.
BB. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer.
CC. Server: Computer used to maintain system configuration, historical and programming database.
DD. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol.
EE. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
FF. USB: Universal Serial Bus.
GG. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This protocol assumes that the IP is used as the underlying
protocol.
HH. VAV: Variable air volume.
II. WLED: White light emitting diode.
A. Multiple Submissions:
1. If multiple submissions are required to execute work within schedule, first submit a
coordinated schedule clearly defining intent of multiple submissions. Include a proposed
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 9
date of each submission with a detailed description of submittal content to be included in

each submission.
2. Clearly identify each submittal requirement indicated and in which submission the
information will be provided.
3. Include an updated schedule in each subsequent submission with changes highlighted to
easily track the changes made to previous submitted schedule.
B. Product Data: For each type of product include the following:
1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and finishes.
2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating
process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control
signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical
power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including
temperature and humidity.
3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product
specification sheets.
4. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions including factors effecting
performance.
5. Bill of materials of indicating quantity, manufacturer, and extended model number for
each unique product.
6. When manufacturer's product datasheets apply to a product series rather than a specific
product model, clearly indicate and highlight only applicable information.
7. Each submitted piece of product literature shall clearly cross reference specification and
drawings that submittal is to cover.
C. Software Submittal:
1. Description and technical data of all software provided, and cross-referenced to products
in which software will be installed.
2. Operating system software, operator interface and programming software, color graphic
software, DDC controller software, maintenance management software, and third-party
software.
3. Include a flow diagram and an outline of each subroutine that indicates each program
variable name and units of measure.
4. Listing and description of each engineering equation used with reference source.
5. Listing and description of each constant used in engineering equations and a reference
source to prove origin of each constant.
6. Description of operator interface to alphanumeric and graphic programming.
7. Description of each network communication protocol.
8. Description of system database, including all data included in database, database
capacity and limitations to expand database.
9. Description of each application program and device drivers to be generated, including
specific information on data acquisition and control strategies showing their relationship
to system timing, speed, processing burden and system throughout.
10. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence
of operation including schematic diagram.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 9
D. Shop Drawings:
1. General Requirements:
a. Include cover drawing with Project name, location, Owner, Architect, Contractor
and issue date with each Shop Drawings submission.
b. Include a drawing index sheet listing each drawing number and title that matches
information in each title block.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details where applicable.
3. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
4. Detail means of vibration isolation and show attachments to rotating equipment.
5. Plan Drawings indicating the following:
a. Screened backgrounds of walls, structural grid lines, HVAC equipment, ductwork
and piping.
b. Room names and numbers with coordinated placement to avoid interference with
control products indicated.
c. Each desktop workstation, server, gateway, router, DDC controller, control panel
instrument connecting to DDC controller, and damper and valve connecting to
DDC controller, if included in Project.
d. Exact placement of products in rooms, ducts, and piping to reflect proposed
installed condition.
e. Network communication cable and raceway routing.
f. Proposed routing of wiring, cabling, conduit, and tubing, coordinated with building
services for review before installation.
6. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following:
a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal
operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper
and valve, if included in Project.
b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model
number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number.
c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system.
d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating
labels for all wiring terminals.
e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different
drawings showing same point.
f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits
including interlocks, switches, relays and interface to DDC controllers.
g. Narrative sequence of operation.
h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks.
7. Control panel drawings indicating the following:
a. Panel dimensions, materials, size, and location of field cable, raceways, and tubing
connections.
b. Interior subpanel layout, drawn to scale and showing all internal components,
cabling and wiring raceways, nameplates and allocated spare space.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 9
c. Front, rear, and side elevations and nameplate legend.

d. Unique drawing for each panel.
8. DDC system network riser diagram indicating the following:
a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each.
b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system.
c. For each network, indicate communication protocol, speed and physical means of
interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or optical fiber cable
type. Indicate raceway type and size for each.
d. Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of
operator interface with unique identification for each.
9. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating the following:
a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements
(volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.
b. Each control power supply including, as applicable, transformers, power-line
conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power
supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each.
c. Each product requiring power with requirements
(volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.
d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each.
10. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following:
a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O.
b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product.
c. Control signal tubing to sensors, switches and transmitters.
d. Process signal tubing to sensors, switches and transmitters.
11. Color graphics indicating the following:
a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided.
b. For each display screen to be provided, a true color copy showing layout of
pictures, graphics and data displayed.
c. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens.
E. System Description:
1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network configuration, operator interfaces
and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other
network devices, and power supplies.
2. Complete listing and description of each report, log and trend for format and timing and
events which initiate generation.
3. Complete bibliography of documentation and media to be delivered to Owner.
4. Description of testing plans and procedures.
5. Description of Owner training.
A. Coordination Drawings:
1. Plan drawings and corresponding product installation details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers
of the items involved:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 9
a. Product installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, pipe and

equipment.
b. Structural members to which products will be attached.
c. Wall-mounted instruments located in finished space showing relationship to light
switches, fire-alarm devices and other installed devices.
d. Size and location of wall access panels for products installed behind walls and
requiring access.
B. Product Certificates:
1. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certifying that each proposed DDC system
component complies with ASHRAE 135.
A. Furnish extra materials and parts that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace products that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in
service to Owner.
2. Include updates or upgrades to software and firmware if necessary to resolve
deficiencies.
a. Install updates only after receiving Owner's written authorization.
3. Warranty service shall occur during normal business hours and commence within 24
hours of Owner's warranty service request.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DDC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. ASHRAE 135-compliant microprocessor-based monitoring and control including analog/digital
conversion and program logic. A control loop or subsystem in which digital and analog
information is received and processed by a microprocessor, and digital control signals are
generated based on control algorithms and transmitted to field devices to achieve a set of
predefined conditions.
1. System shall interface with the Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) system, and shall provide
control/monitoring of the other HVAC equipment including split systems, makeup air
units, and fans.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for products to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where product will be installed.
3.02 DDC SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH OTHER SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Communication Interface to Equipment with Integral Controls:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 9
1. DDC system shall have communication interface with equipment having integral controls
and having a communication interface for remote monitoring and control.
2. Equipment to Be Connected:
a. Variable Refrigerant Flow systems.
b. Make-up Air systems.
c. Split Systems.
d. Domestic Water Meter.
e. Electric Meter.
3.03 DDC SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Interface with Existing Systems:
1. DDC systems shall comply with ASRHAE 135 and shall interface with existing systems to
achieve integration.
2. Monitoring and Control of DDC System by Existing Control System:
a. DDC system performance requirements shall be satisfied when monitoring and
controlling DDC system by existing control system.
b. Operator of existing system shall be able to upload, download, monitor, trend,
control and program every input and output point in DDC system from existing
control system using existing control system software and operator workstations.
c. Remote monitoring and control from existing control system shall not require
operators of existing control system to learn new software.
3.04 CONTROL DEVICES FOR INSTALLATION BY INSTALLERS
A. Deliver selected control devices, specified in indicated HVAC instrumentation and control device
Sections, to identified equipment and systems manufacturers for factory installation and to
identified installers for field installation.
A. Install products to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated.
B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.
C. If codes and referenced standards are more stringent than requirements indicated, comply with
requirements in codes and referenced standards.
D. Fabricate openings and install sleeves in ceilings, floors, roof, and walls required by installation
of products. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, and cutting, check for concealed work to
avoid damage. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition.
E. Fastening Hardware:
1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that damage surfaces of rods, nuts, and other
parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening fasteners.
2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force
or by oversized wrenches.
3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.
F. If product locations are not indicated, install products in locations that are accessible and that
will permit service and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks without
removal of permanently installed furniture and equipment.
3.06 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
A. Install controllers in enclosures to comply with indicated requirements.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 9
B. Install controller with latest version of applicable software and configure to execute
requirements indicated.
C. Test and adjust controllers to verify operation of connected I/O to achieve performance
indicated requirements while executing sequences of operation.
3.07 ELECTRIC POWER CONNECTIONS
A. Connect electrical power to DDC system products requiring electrical power connections.
B. Design of electrical power to products not indicated with electric power is delegated to DDC
system provider and installing trade. Work shall comply with NFPA 70 and other requirements
indicated.
3.08 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install self-adhesive labels with unique identification on face for each component.
B. Install unique instrument identification on face of each instrument connected to a DDC
controller.
3.09 CONTROL WIRE, CABLE AND RACEWAYS INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Wire and Cable Installation:
1. Install cables with protective sheathing that is waterproof and capable of withstanding
continuous temperatures of 90 deg C with no measurable effect on physical and electrical
properties of cable.
a. Provide shielding to prevent interference and distortion from adjacent cables and
equipment.
2. Terminate wiring in a junction box.
a. Clamp cable over jacket in junction box.
b. Individual conductors in the stripped section of the cable shall be slack between
the clamping point and terminal block.
3. Terminate field wiring and cable not directly connected to instruments and control devices
having integral wiring terminals using terminal blocks.
4. Install signal transmission components according to IEEE C2, REA Form 511a, NFPA 70,
and as indicated.
5. Use shielded cable to transmitters.
6. Use shielded cable to temperature sensors.
7. Perform continuity and meager testing on wire and cable after installation.
C. Conduit Installation:
1. Comply with Section "260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for control-
voltage conductors.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections.
3.11 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative with complete knowledge of Project-specific
system installed to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain DDC
system.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 8
SECTION 232300
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Refrigerant pipes and fittings.
2. Refrigerant piping valves and specialties.
3. Refrigerants.
A. Product Data: For each type of valve, refrigerant piping, and piping specialty.
1. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
a. Thermostatic expansion valves.
b. Solenoid valves.
c. Hot-gas bypass valves.
d. Filter dryers.
e. Strainers.
f. Pressure-regulating valves.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 2010 ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
1.06 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-134a:
1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 115 psig.
2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 225 psig.
3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 225 psig.
B. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-407C:
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 8

C. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:
2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, Type K for underground use only.
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket
fittings on copper pipe.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
2.03 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or
angle pattern.
2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.
3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.
4. Seat: Nylon.
5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
B. Packed-Angle Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.
3. Operator: Rising stem.
4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.
5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
C. Check Valves:
1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.
2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.
3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.
4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.
5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 8

D. Service Valves:
1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Copper spring.
E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with AHRI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by a National
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).
1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location
with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil.
F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and
labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.
2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with AHRI 750.
1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.
5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.
6. Superheat: Adjustable.
7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).
8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.
H. Straight-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.
3. End Connections: Socket or flare.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 8

I. Angle-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.
3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.
J. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:
1. Body: Forged brass.
2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by
filter screen.
3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in parts per million (ppm).
4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.
K. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730.
1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and
neoprene gaskets.
2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.
3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina.
4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).
5. End Connections: Socket.
6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential
measurement.
7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.
L. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730.
1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.
2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.
3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina.
4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).
5. End Connections: Socket.
6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential
measurement.
7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 8
2.04 REFRIGERANTS
A. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-407C: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane.
C. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.
B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if
they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.
C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor
suction connection.
D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter
dryers.
E. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
F. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.
1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do
not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line
pressure at bulb location.
G. Install safety relief valves where required by 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.
H. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or
at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.
I. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an
integral assembly for the device being protected:
1. Solenoid valves.
2. Thermostatic expansion valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Compressor.
J. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve.
K. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.
L. Install flexible connectors at compressors.
systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 8
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
K. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical
injury.
L. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
M. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve
stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near expansion-valve bulb.
N. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the following
procedures:
1. Shot blast the interior of piping.
2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing
by means of a wire or electrician's tape.
3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe.
Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.
4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the
tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and
lint.
5. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.
6. Safety-relief-valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be
open to allow unrestricted flow.
O. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation.
3.03 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to
prevent scale formation.
D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 8
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
1. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper
pipe.
2. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper
pipe.
1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test
pressure.
3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the
pressures indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of
test.
c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount
of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
B. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.06 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum
holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design
temperature.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 8
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow
rates and pressures are established.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 10
SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.
3. Sheet metal materials.
4. Duct liner.
5. Sealants and gaskets.
6. Hangers and supports.
7. Seismic-restraint devices.
A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1. Liners and adhesives.
2. Sealants and gaskets.
3. Seismic-restraint devices.
A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items
described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
2. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction,
reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the
effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7.
C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup."
E. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 -
"HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 10
F. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are
inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness.
2.02 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-
pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and
other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with
Figure 2-1.
2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T-
24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be
used if submitted and approved by engineer of record.
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal
Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-
support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible."
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types
and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.03 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated
static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal
Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-
support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible."
1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal
seams.
2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-
welded longitudinal seams.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 10
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.04 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction
methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed
ducts.
D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black
and galvanized.
1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum
ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch- minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch-
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.05 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with
NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:
a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.
b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.
2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the
interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating.
Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the
EPA for use in HVAC systems.
3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with
ASTM C 916.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials complying with
ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an
NRTL.
2. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with
NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
C. Fiberglass-Free Duct Liner: Made from partially recycled cotton or polyester products and
containing no fiberglass. Airstream surface overlaid with fire-resistant facing to prevent surface
erosion by airstream, complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. Treat natural-fiber products with
antimicrobial coating.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 10
1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84; certified by an
NRTL.
3. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with
NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
D. Insulation Pins and Washers:
1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully
annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit
depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.
2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick
galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place,
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
E. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers
of duct liner is prohibited.
2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal
nosing.
3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-
edge overlapping.
5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.
6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpmor
greater.
7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that
have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
a. Fan discharges.
b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than
2500 fpm or where indicated.
9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as
specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform
distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.
a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area
of 23 percent.
10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning
vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 10
buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts,
screws, rivets, or welds.
2.06 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone
activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.
2. Tape Width: 3 inches.
3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10 inch wg, positive and negative.
7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.
8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum.
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10 inch wg, positive and negative.
8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
2. Type: S.
3. Grade: NS.
4. Class: 25.
5. Use: O.
E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be
rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.
2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 10
3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.
2.07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts.
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods
with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts
designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2.08 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications
shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
B. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel
channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment
to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching
components and corrosion-resistant coating.
C. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of
galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable
service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.
D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
E. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts
with strength required for anchor and as tested in accordance with ASTM E 488/E 488M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings
and coordination drawings.
B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints.
D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 10
E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed
to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches.
J. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct-mounted accessories in
air ducts where indicated on Drawings.
K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials
both before and after installation. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied
Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction
Guidelines."
L. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit.
1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes.
2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and
smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger.
M. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,
and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5,
"Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 10
5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports
within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Approved by Architect.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16
feet.
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,
tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
3.04 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against
seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with ASCE/SEI 7.
of 80 feet o.c.
B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and
seismic loads.
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.
E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities
F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to
structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.
G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify
Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.
Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and
gas lines.
design strength.
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for
applications exposed to weather.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch,
outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 10
3.06 STARTUP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for
HVAC."

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 10

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 233300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Manual volume dampers.
2. Turning vanes.
3. Duct-mounted access doors.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Duct accessory hardware.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.
2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.03 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
3. Frames:
a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
b. Mitered and welded corners.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
4. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
6. Bearings:
a. Molded synthetic.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
2.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to
two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick
aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
2.05 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and
gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit
duct-insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts.
C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat
channel.
1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters.
3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
4. At drain pans and seals.
5. Control devices requiring inspection.
6. Elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
H. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 24-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not
use flexible ducts to change directions.
J. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
K. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
L. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust
limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and
stop of fans.
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 233346
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Insulated flexible ducts.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted
access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
C. Comply with the Air Diffusion Council's "ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1."
D. Comply with ASTM E 96/E 96M, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials."
2.02 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, two-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.
4. Insulation R-Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS
A. Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install flexible ducts according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install in indoor applications only. Flexible ductwork should not be exposed to UV lighting.
C. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 24-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not
use flexible ducts to change directions.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 2
D. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
E. Installation:
1. Install ducts fully extended.
2. Do not bend ducts across sharp corners.
3. Bends of flexible ducting shall not exceed a minimum of one duct diameter.
4. Avoid contact with metal fixtures, water lines, pipes, or conduits.
5. Install flexible ducts in a direct line, without sags, twists, or turns.
F. Supporting Flexible Ducts:
1. Suspend flexible ducts with bands 1-1/2 inches wide or wider and spaced a maximum of
48 inches apart. Maximum centerline sag between supports shall not exceed 1/2 inch per
12 inches.
2. Install extra supports at bends placed approximately one duct diameter from center line
of the bend.
3. Ducts may rest on ceiling joists or truss supports. Spacing between supports shall not
exceed the maximum spacing per manufacturer's written installation instructions.
4. Vertically installed ducts shall be stabilized by support straps at a maximum of 72 inches
o.c.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - 2

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 233713.13
AIR DIFFUSERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Ceiling diffusers.
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, quantity, model number, size, and
accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DIFFUSERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following or
approved equal:
1. Titus.
B. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.
C. Material: Steel.
D. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
E. Face Style: Four cone.
F. Mounting: Duct connection.
G. Pattern: Fully adjustable.
H. Dampers: Radial opposed blade.
I. Accessories:
1. Square to round neck adaptor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers are installed for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final
locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
AIR DIFFUSERS 233713.13 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 2
locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of
dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air
balancing.
AIR DIFFUSERS 233713.13 - 2

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 233713.23
REGISTERS AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Adjustable blade face registers and grilles.
2. Fixed face registers and grilles.
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Register and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, quantity, model number,
size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 REGISTERS
A. Adjustable Blade Face Register: Refer to Drawings.
a. Titus.
B. Fixed Face Register: Refer to Drawings:
a. Titus.
2.02 GRILLES
A. Adjustable Blade Face Grille: Refer to Drawings.
a. Titus.
B. Fixed Face Grille : Refer to Drawings.
a. Titus.
A. Verification of Performance: Rate registers and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of
Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713.23 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where registers and grilles are installed for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install registers and grilles level and plumb.
B. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and
accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements
for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations
where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in
the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify
Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before
starting air balancing.
REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713.23 - 2

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 238126
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of
capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
and electrical characteristics.
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for
Refrigeration Systems."
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor
Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and
Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
C. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period:
a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
b. For Parts: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
c. For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
following:
1. Carrier.
2. Daikin.
3. Trane.
4. York.
5. Mitsubishi.
B. Buy America Act: Manufacturer shall comply with the Buy America Act, or be issued an
Exception in cases where no manufacturer of the system can comply.
2.02 INDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)
A. Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components:
1. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-
expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110.
4. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory
ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors,
manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box
for overcurrent protection.
5. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
6. Fan Motors:
a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type,
and efficiency requirements specified in Division 26.
b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.
c. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
7. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
8. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
9. Condensate Drain Pans:
a. Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from
cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and
humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.
1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with
ASHRAE 62.1.
2) Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.
b. Single-wall, stainless-steel sheet.
c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.
Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.
1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.

e. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate
from top coil.
B. Wall-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:
1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by
Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.
2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-
expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110.
3. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory
ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors,
manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box
for overcurrent protection.
4. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.
5. Fan Motors:
a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type,
and efficiency requirements specified in Division 26.
b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.
c. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
d. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.
e. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.
f. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on interior of unit.
6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
7. Condensate Drain Pans:
a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from
cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and
humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.
1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with
ASHRAE 62.1.
2) Depth: A minimum of 1 inch deep.
b. Single-wall, galvanized-steel sheet.
c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.
Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.
1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.
d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.
2.03 OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)
A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:
1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable
panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in
base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration
isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
a. Compressor Type: Scroll.

b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and
automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
c. Refrigerant: R-410A.
d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid
subcooler. Comply with ARI 206/110.
3. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat.
4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.
7. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 23 09 23 "Direct Digital
Control (DDC) System”.
B. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
E. Drain Hose: For condensate.
F. Monitoring:
1. Monitor constant and variable motor loads.
2. Monitor variable-frequency-drive operation.
3. Monitor cooling load.
4. Monitor air distribution static pressure and ventilation air volumes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install
tubing to allow access to unit.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

A. Perform startup service.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 24
SECTION 238129
VARIABLE-REFRIGERANT-FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes complete VRF HVAC system(s) including, but not limited to the following
components to make a complete operating system(s) according to requirements indicated:
1. Indoor, concealed, ceiling-mounted units for ducting.
2. Indoor, recessed, ceiling-mounted units.
3. Indoor, energy recovery ventilator.
4. Outdoor, air-source heat recovery units.
5. Heat recovery control units.
6. System controls.
7. System refrigerant and oil.
8. System refrigerant piping.
9. Piping and tubing insulation.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Air-Conditioning System Operation: System capable of operation with all zones in cooling only.
B. Heat-Pump System Operation: System capable of operation with all zones in either heating or
cooling, but not with simultaneous heating and cooling zones that transfer heat between zones.
C. Heat Recovery System Operation: System capable of operation with simultaneous heating and
cooling zones that transfer heat between zones.
D. HRCU: Heat Recovery Control Unit. HRCUs are used in heat recovery VRF HVAC systems to
manage and control refrigerant between indoor units to provide simultaneous heating and
cooling zones. "Heat Recovery Control Unit" is the term used by ASHRAE for what different
manufacturers term as branch circuit controller, branch selector box, changeover box, flow
selector unit, mode change unit, and other such terms.
E. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
F. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are
connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from
heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.
G. Three-Pipe System Design: One high pressure refrigerant vapor line, one low pressure
refrigerant vapor line, and one refrigerant liquid line connect a single outdoor unit or multiple
manifold outdoor units in a single system to associated system HRCUs. One liquid line and
refrigerant vapor line connect HRCUs to associated indoor units.
H. Two-Pipe System Design: One refrigerant vapor line and one refrigerant liquid line connect a
single outdoor unit or multiple manifold outdoor units in a single system to associated system
HRCUs. One refrigerant liquid line and refrigerant vapor line connect HRCUs to associated
indoor units. HRCUs used in two pipe systems act as an intermediate heat exchanger and
VARIABLE-REFRIGERANT-FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS 238129 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 24
include diverting valves and gas/liquid separators to move high and low pressure refrigerant
between indoor units.
I. VRF: Variable refrigerant flow.
and profiles, and finishes for indoor and outdoor units and for HRCUs.
3. Include operating performance at design conditions and at extreme maximum and
minimum outdoor ambient conditions.
4. Include description of system controllers, dimensions, features, control interfaces and
connections, power requirements, and connections.
5. Include system operating sequence of operation in narrative form for each unique indoor-
and outdoor-unit and HRCU control.
6. Include description of control software features.
7. Include total refrigerant required and a comprehensive breakdown of refrigerant required
by each system installed.
8. Include refrigerant type and data sheets showing compliance with requirements
indicated.
9. Indicate location and type of service access.
B. Shop Drawings: For VRF HVAC systems.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.
2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
connection.
3. Include diagrams and details of refrigerant piping and tubing showing installation
requirements for manufacturer-furnished divided flow fittings.
5. Include Vendor’s detailed system drawings with corresponding diagram of refrigerant
piping and tubing sizing for each system installed. Include details showing that system
travel distance for refrigerant piping and controls cabling are within horizontal and vertical
travel distances set by manufacturer. Provide a comparison table for each system
installed.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VRF HVAC systems to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On CD or DVD, USB media, or approved cloud storage
platform, complete with data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 24

A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Nationally recognized manufacturer of VRF HVAC systems and products.
2. Having complete published catalog literature, installation, and operation and maintenance
manuals for all products intended for use.
3. Having full-time in-house employees for the following:
a. Product research and development.
b. Product and application engineering.
c. Product manufacturing, testing, and quality control.
d. Technical support for system installation training, startup, commissioning, and
troubleshooting of installations.
e. Owner training.
B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by VRF HVAC system manufacturer.
1. Each employee shall be certified by manufacturer for proper installation of systems,
including, but not limited to, equipment, piping, controls, and accessories indicated and
furnished for installation.
2. Installer certification shall be valid and current for duration of Project.
3. Retain copies of Installer certificates on-site and make available on request.
C. ISO Compliance: System equipment and components furnished by VRF HVAC system
manufacturer shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility.
A. Deliver and store products in a clean and dry place.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading and
moving to final installed location.
C. Handle products carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting, and scoring. Do not install
damaged products.
D. Protect products from weather, dirt, dust, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
1. Retain factory-applied coverings on equipment to protect finishes during construction and
remove just prior to operating unit.
2. Cover unit openings before installation to prevent dirt and dust from entering inside of
units. If required to remover coverings during unit installation, reapply coverings over
openings after unit installation and remove just prior to operating unit.
E. Replace installed products damaged during construction.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace equipment and components
that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 24
a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

b. For Parts, Including Controls: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
c. For Labor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following or
approved equal:
1. Greenheck (For Energy Recovery Ventilators)
2. Delta Controls, Inc. (For site Direct Digital Controls).
3. Mitsubishi. (For VRF systems).
B. Source Limitations: Obtain products from single source from single manufacturer including, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Indoor and outdoor units, including accessories.
2. Controls and software.
3. HRCUs.
4. Refrigerant isolation valves.
5. Specialty refrigerant pipe fittings.
C. Buy America Act: Manufacturer shall comply with the Buy America Act, or be issued an
Exception in cases where no manufacturer of the system can comply.
2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Direct-expansion (DX) VRF HVAC system(s) with variable capacity in response to varying
cooling and heating loads. System shall consist of multiple indoor units, HRCUs, outdoor
unit(s), piping, controls, and electrical power to make complete operating system(s) complying
with requirements indicated. System shall allow simultaneous heating and cooling of individual
zones.
1. Two-pipe or three-pipe system design.
2. System(s) operation, heat recovery as indicated on Drawings.
3. Each system with one refrigerant circuit shared by all indoor units connected to system.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
C. AHRI Compliance: System and equipment performance certified according to AHRI 1230 and
products listed in AHRI directory.
D. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. ASHRAE 15: For safety code for mechanical refrigeration.
2. ASHRAE 62.1: For indoor air quality.
3. ASHRAE 135: For control network protocol with remote communication.
4. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: For system and component energy efficiency.
E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.
A. Provide a complete and operational VRF HVAC system(s) complying with requirements
indicated.
1. Provide system refrigerant calculations.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 24
a. Refrigerant concentration limits shall be within allowable limits of ASHRAE 15 and

governing codes.
b. Indicate compliance with manufacturer's maximum vertical and horizontal travel
distances. Prepare a comparison table for each system showing calculated
distances compared to manufacturer's maximum allowed distances.
2. System Refrigerant Piping and Tubing:
a. Arrangement: Arrange piping to interconnect indoor units, HRCUs, and outdoor
unit(s) in compliance with manufacturer requirements and requirements indicated.
b. Routing: Conceal piping above ceilings and behind walls to maximum extent
possible.
c. Sizing: Size piping system, using a software program acceptable to manufacturer,
to provide performance requirements indicated.
3. System Controls:
a. Network arrangement.
b. Network interface with other building systems.
c. Product selection.
d. Sizing.
B. Service Access:
1. Provide and document service access requirements.
2. Locate equipment, system isolation valves, and other system components that require
service and inspection in easily accessible locations. Avoid locations that are difficult to
access if possible.
3. Where serviceable components are installed behind walls and above inaccessible
ceilings, provide finished assembly with access doors or panels to gain access. Properly
size the openings to allow for service, removal, and replacement.
4. If less than full and unrestricted access is provided, locate components within an 18-inch
reach of the finished assembly.
5. Where ladder access is required to service elevated components, provide an installation
that provides for sufficient access within ladder manufacturer's written instructions for
use.
6. Comply with OSHA regulations.
C. System Installation Requirements:
1. Install systems indicated according to manufacturer's recommendations and written
instructions.
2. Where manufacturer's requirements differ from requirements indicated, contact Architect
for direction. The most stringent requirements should apply unless otherwise directed in
writing by Architect.
D. Isolation of Equipment: Provide isolation valves to isolate each HRCU, indoor unit and outdoor
unit for service, removal, and replacement without interrupting system operation.
E. System Turndown: Stable operation down to 20 percent of outdoor-unit capacity.
F. System Auto Refrigerant Charge: Each system shall have an automatic refrigerant charge
function to ensure the proper amount of refrigerant is installed in system.
G. Outdoor Conditions:
1. Suitable for outdoor ambient conditions encountered.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 24
a. Design equipment and supports to withstand wind loads of governing code and
ASCE/SEI 7.
H. Seismic Performance: VRF HVAC system(s) shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any
parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
I. Thermal Movements: Allow for controlled thermal movements from ambient, surface, and
system temperature changes.
J. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on Drawings.
2.04 INDOOR, CONCEALED, CEILING-MOUNTED UNITS FOR DUCTING
A. Description: Factory-assembled complete unit with components, piping, wiring, and controls
required for mating to ductwork, piping, power, and controls field connections.
B. Cabinet:
1. Material: Galvanized or painted steel.
2. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard internal insulation, complying with ASHRAE 62.1, to
provide thermal resistance and prevent condensation.
3. Duct Connections: Extended collar or flange, or designated exterior cabinet surface,
designed for attaching field-installed ductwork.
4. Mounting: Manufacturer-designed provisions for field installation.
5. Internal Access: Removable panels or hinged doors of adequate size for field access to
internal components for inspection, cleaning, service, and replacement.
C. DX Coil Assembly:
1. Coil Casing: Aluminum, galvanized, or stainless steel.
2. Coil Fins: Aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes, with arrangement required by
performance.
3. Coil Tubes: Copper, of diameter and thickness required by performance.
4. Expansion Valve: Electronic modulating type with linear or proportional characteristics.
5. Unit Internal Tubing: Copper tubing with brazed joints.
6. Unit Internal Tubing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard insulation, of thickness to
prevent condensation.
7. Field Piping Connections: Manufacturer's standard.
8. Factory Charge: Dehydrated air or nitrogen.
9. Testing: Factory pressure tested and verified to be without leaks.
D. Drain Assembly:
1. Pan: Non-ferrous material, with bottom sloped to low point drain connection.
2. Condensate Removal: Unit-mounted pump or other integral lifting mechanism, capable of
lifting drain water to an elevation above top of cabinet.
3. Field Piping Connection: Non-ferrous material.
E. Fan and Motor Assembly:
1. Fan(s):
a. Direct-drive arrangement.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 24
b. Single or multiple fans connected to a common motor shaft and driven by a single
motor.
c. Fabricated from non-ferrous components or ferrous components with corrosion-
resistant finish.
d. Wheels statically and dynamically balanced.
2. Motor: Brushless dc or electronically commutated with permanently lubricated bearings.
3. Motor Protection: Integral protection against thermal, overload, and voltage fluctuations.
4. Speed Settings and Control: Two (low, high), three (low, medium, high), or more than
three speed settings or variable speed with a speed range of least 50 percent.
5. Vibration Control: Integral isolation to dampen vibration transmission.
F. Filter Assembly:
1. Access: Bottom, side, or rear to accommodate field installation without removing
ductwork and to accommodate filter replacement without need for tools.
2. Efficiency: ASHRAE 52.2, MERV 7.
G. Unit Accessories:
1. Remote Room Temperature Sensor Kit: Wall-mounted, hardwired room temperature
sensor kit for use in rooms that do not have room temperature measurement.
H. Unit Controls:
1. Enclosure: Metal, suitable for indoor locations.
2. Factory-Installed Controller: Configurable digital control.
3. Factory-Installed Sensors:
a. Unit inlet air temperature.
b. Coil entering refrigerant temperature.
c. Coil leaving refrigerant temperature.
4. Field-Customizable I/O Capability:
a. Analog Inputs: Two for use in customizable control strategies.
b. Digital Inputs: Two for use in customizable control strategies.
c. Digital Outputs: Two for use in customizable control strategies.
5. Features and Functions:
a. Self-diagnostics.
b. Time delay.
c. Auto-restart.
d. External static pressure control.
e. Auto operation mode.
f. Manual operation mode.
g. Filter service notification.
h. Power consumption display.
i. Drain assembly high water level safety shutdown and notification.
j. Run test switch.
6. Communication: Network communication with other indoor and outdoor units.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 24
7. Cable and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and
corresponding to a unit-mounted wiring diagram.
8. Field Connection: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and
I. Unit Electrical:
1. Enclosure: Metal, suitable for indoor locations.
2. Field Connection: Single point connection to power unit and integral controls.
3. Disconnecting Means: Factory-mounted circuit breaker or switch.
4. Control Transformer: Manufacturer's standard. Coordinate requirements with field power
supply.
5. Wiring: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and corresponding to a
unit-mounted wiring diagram.
2.05 INDOOR, RECESSED, CEILING-MOUNTED UNITS
A. Description: Factory-assembled complete unit with components, piping, wiring, and controls
required for mating to ductwork, piping, power, and controls field connections.
B. Cabinet:
1. Material: Painted steel, or coated steel frame covered by a plastic cabinet, with an
architectural acceptable finish suitable for tenant occupancy on exposed surfaces.
2. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard internal insulation, complying with ASHRAE 62.1, to
provide thermal resistance and prevent condensation.
4. Internal Access: Removable panels of adequate size for field access to internal
components for inspection, cleaning, service, and replacement.
C. DX Coil Assembly:
1. Coil Casing: Aluminum, galvanized, or stainless steel.
2. Coil Fins: Aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes, with arrangement required by
performance.
3. Coil Tubes: Copper, of diameter and thickness required by performance.
4. Expansion Valve: Electronic modulating type with linear or proportional characteristics.
5. Internal Tubing: Copper tubing with brazed joints.
6. Internal Tubing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard insulation, of thickness to prevent
condensation.
D. Drain Assembly:
1. Pan: Non-ferrous material, with bottom sloped to low point drain connection.
2. Condensate Removal: Unit-mounted pump or other integral lifting mechanism, capable of
lifting drain water to an elevation above top of cabinet.
3. Field Piping Connection: Non-ferrous material.
E. Fan and Motor Assembly:
1. Fan(s):

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 24
b. Single or multiple fans connected to a common motor shaft and driven by a single
motor.
c. Fabricated from non-ferrous components or ferrous components with corrosion
protection finish.
d. Wheels statically and dynamically balanced.
4. Speed Settings and Control: Two (low, high), three (low, medium, high), or more than
three speed settings or variable speed with a speed range of least 50 percent.
F. Filter Assembly:
1. Access: Bottom, to accommodate filter replacement without the need for tools.
G. Discharge-Air Grille Assembly: Mounted in bottom of unit cabinet.
1. Discharge Pattern: One-, two-, three-, or four-way throw as indicated on Drawings.
a. Discharge Pattern Adjustment: Field-adjustable limits for up and down range of
motion.
b. Discharge Pattern Closure: Ability to close individual discharges of units with
multiple patterns.
2. Motorized Vanes: Modulating up and down flow pattern for uniform room air distribution.
3. Additional Branch Supply Duct Connection: Sheet metal knockout for optional connection
to one additional supply branch duct.
H. Return-Air Grille Assembly: Manufacturer's standard grille mounted in bottom of unit cabinet.
I. Outdoor Air Ventilation Connection: Sheet metal knockout for optional connection to outdoor air
ventilation duct.
J. Unit Accessories:
1. Remote Room Temperature Sensor Kit: Wall-mounted, hardwired room temperature
sensor kit for use in rooms that do not have room temperature measurement.
K. Unit Controls:
1. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard, and suitable for indoor locations.
3. Factory-Installed Sensors: Unit inlet air temperature.
4. Field-Customizable I/O Capability:
a. Analog Inputs: Two for use in customizable control strategies.
b. Digital Inputs: Two for use in customizable control strategies.
c. Digital Outputs: Two for use in customizable control strategies.
5. Communication: Network communication with other indoor units and outdoor unit(s).

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 24
L. Unit Electrical:
2. Field Connection: Single point connection to power entire unit and integral controls.
3. Disconnecting Means: Factory-mounted circuit breaker or switch, complying with
NFPA 70.
supply.
2.06 INDOOR, ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR
A. Description: Factory-assembled complete unit with components, wiring, and controls required
for mating to ductwork, power, and controls field connections.
B. Cabinet:
1. Material: Galvanized steel.
2. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard internal insulation, complying with ASHRAE 62.1.
3. Duct Connections: Extended collar or flange, or designated exterior cabinet surface,
designed for attaching field-installed ductwork.
C. Damper Assemblies:
1. Outdoor Air Intake and Exhaust Air Discharge:
a. Low-leakage damper with spring return electric actuator to fail closed on loss of
power.
b. Damper controlled by unit to open when unit is operating and close when unit off.
D. Fan and Motor Assemblies: Separate fan and motor assemblies for supply and exhaust
airstreams with control for equal airflow.
1. Fan(s):
b. Fabricated from non-ferrous components or ferrous components with corrosion
protection finish.
c. Wheels statically and dynamically balanced.
E. Filter Assemblies: Separate filter assemblies for outdoor air and exhaust airstreams entering
energy recovery heat exchanger.
1. Access: To accommodate filter replacement without the need for tools.
3. Replaceable Media: Extended surface, panel, or cartridge with antimicrobial treatment
fiber media.
F. Energy Recovery Heat Exchanger:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 11 of 24
1. Total (sensible and latent) energy exchange between outdoor air and exhaust airstreams
with performance indicated on Drawings.
2. AHRI 1060 certified and bearing the AHRI labe1.
G. Unit Controls:
1. Enclosure: Metal, similar to enclosure, and suitable for indoor locations.
a. Unit entering outdoor air temperature.
b. Unit leaving supply air temperature.
c. Unit entering exhaust air temperature.
d. Unit leaving exhaust air temperature.
e. Unit entering outdoor air relative humidity.
f. Unit leaving supply air relative humidity.
g. Unit entering exhaust air relative humidity.
h. Unit leaving exhaust air relative humidity.
4. Communication: Network communication with other indoor units and outdoor unit(s).
H. Unit Electrical:
NFPA 70.
supply.
2.07 OUTDOOR, AIR-SOURCE HEAT RECOVERY UNITS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested complete unit with components, piping, wiring, and
controls required for mating to piping, power, and controls field connections.
1. Specially designed for use in systems with simultaneous heating and cooling.
2. Systems shall consist of one unit, or multiple unit modules that are designed by variable
refrigerant system manufacturer for field interconnection to make a single refrigeration
circuit that connects multiple indoor units.
3. All units installed shall be from the same product development generation.
B. Cabinet:
1. Galvanized steel and coated with a corrosion-resistant finish.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 12 of 24
C. Compressor and Motor Assembly:

1. One or more positive-displacement, direct-drive and hermetically sealed scroll
compressor(s) with inverter drive and turndown to 15 percent of rated capacity.
2. Protection: Integral protection against the following:
a. High refrigerant pressure.
b. Low oil level.
c. High oil temperature.
d. Thermal and overload.
e. Voltage fluctuations.
f. Phase failure and phase reversal.
g. Short cycling.
3. Speed Control: Variable to automatically maintain refrigerant suction and condensing
pressures while varying refrigerant flow to satisfy system cooling and heating loads.
5. Oil management system to ensure safe and proper lubrication over entire operating
range.
6. Crankcase heaters with integral control to maintain safe operating temperature.
7. Fusible plug.
D. Condenser Coil Assembly:
1. Plate Fin Coils:
a. Casing: Aluminum, galvanized, or stainless steel.
b. Fins: Aluminum or copper, mechanically bonded to tubes, with arrangement
required by performance.
c. Tubes: Copper, of diameter and thickness required by performance.
2. Aluminum Microchannel Coils:
a. Series of flat tubes containing a series of multiple, parallel-flow microchannels
layered between refrigerant header manifolds.
b. Single- or multiple-pass arrangement.
c. Construct fins, tubes, and header manifolds of aluminum alloy.
3. Coating: None.
4. Hail Protection: Provide condenser coils with louvers, baffles, or hoods to protect against
hail damage.
E. Condenser Fan and Motor Assembly:
1. Fan(s): Propeller type.
b. Fabricated from non-ferrous components or ferrous components with corrosion
protection finish to match performance indicated for condenser coil.
c. Statically and dynamically balanced.
2. Fan Guards: Removable safety guards complying with OSHA regulations. If using metal
materials, coat with corrosion-resistant coating to match performance indicated for
condenser coil.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 13 of 24
3. Motor(s): Brushless dc or electronically commutated with permanently lubricated bearings

and rated for outdoor duty.
5. Speed Settings and Control: Variable speed with a speed range of least 75 percent.
F. Drain Pan: If required by manufacturer's design, provide unit with non-ferrous drain pan with
bottom sloped to a low point drain connection.
G. Unit Controls:
1. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard, and suitable for unprotected outdoor locations.
a. Refrigerant suction temperature.
b. Refrigerant discharge temperature.
c. Outdoor air temperature.
d. Refrigerant high pressure.
e. Refrigerant low pressure.
f. Oil level.
4. Communication: Network communication with indoor units and other outdoor unit(s).
H. Unit Electrical:
1. Enclosure: Metal, similar to enclosure, and suitable for unprotected outdoor locations.
NFPA 70.
supply.
I. Unit Hardware: Zinc-plated steel, or stainless steel.
J. Unit Piping:
1. Unit Tubing: Copper tubing with brazed joints.
2. Unit Tubing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard insulation, of thickness to prevent
condensation.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 14 of 24
2.08 HEAT RECOVERY CONTROL UNITS (HRCUs)

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested complete unit with components, piping, wiring, and
controls required for mating to piping, power, and controls field connections.
1. Specially designed for use in systems with simultaneous heating and cooling.
2. Systems shall consist of one unit, or multiple unit that are designed by variable refrigerant
system manufacturer for field interconnection to make a single refrigeration circuit that
connects multiple indoor units.
B. Cabinet:
1. Galvanized-steel construction.
2. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard internal insulation to provide thermal resistance and
prevent condensation.
C. Drain Pan: If required by manufacturer's design, provide unit with non-ferrous drain pan with
bottom sloped to a low point drain connection.
D. Refrigeration Assemblies and Specialties:
1. Specially designed by manufacturer for type of VRF HVAC system being installed, either
two or three pipe.
2. Each refrigerant branch circuit shall have refrigerant control valve(s) to control refrigerant
flow.
3. Spares: Each heat recovery control unit shall include branch circuit port(s) for future use
as indicated on the drawings.
4. Each system piping connection upstream of heat recovery unit shall be fitted with an
isolation valve to allow for service to any heat recovery control unit in the system without
interrupting operation of the system.
5. Each branch circuit connection shall be fitted with an isolation valve and capped service
port to allow for service to any individual branch circuit without interrupting operation of
the system.
a. If not available as an integral part of the heat recovery control unit, isolation valves
shall be field installed adjacent to the unit pipe connection.
E. Unit Controls:
3. Features and Functions: Self-diagnostics, fuse protection,.
4. Communication: Network communication with indoor units and outdoor unit(s).
F. Unit Electrical:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 15 of 24

NFPA 70.
supply.
G. Unit Piping:
1. Unit Tubing: Copper tubing with brazed joints.
2. Unit Tubing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard insulation, of thickness to prevent
condensation.
2.09 SYSTEM CONTROLS
A. General Requirements:
1. Network: Indoor units, HRCUs, and outdoor units shall include integral controls and
connect through a manufacturer-selected control network.
2. Network Communication Protocol: open control communication between interconnected
units.
3. Integration with Building Automation System: ASHRAE 135, BACnet IP and certified by
BACnet Testing Lab (BTL), including the following:
a. New VRF control system shall be provided with interface connection to existing
site Building Automation System. Extent of interface and exact points will need to
be coordinated with existing Building Automation System vendor.
b. Ethernet connection via RJ-45 connectors and port with transmission at 100 Mbps
or higher.
c. Integration devices shall be connected to local uninterruptible power supply unit(s)
to provide at least 5 minutes of battery backup operation after a power loss.
d. Integration shall include control, monitoring, and scheduling
4. Operator Interface:
a. Operators shall interface with system and unit controls through the following:
1) Operator interfaces integral to controllers.
2) Owner-furnished PC connected to central controller(s).
3) Web interface through web browser software.
4) Integration with Building Automation System.
b. Users shall be capable of interface with controllers for indoor units control to extent
privileges are enabled. Control features available to users shall include the
following:
1) On/off control.
2) Temperature set-point adjustment.
B. VRF HVAC System Operator Software for PC:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 16 of 24
1. Software offered by VRF HVAC system manufacturer shall provide system operators with
ability to monitor and control VRF HVAC system(s) from a single dedicated Owner-
furnished PC.
2. Software shall provide operator with a graphic user interface to allow monitoring and
control of multiple central controllers from a single device location through point-and-click
mouse exchange.
3. Plan views shall show building plans with location of indoor units and identification
superimposed on plans.
4. Controls operation mode of indoor units as individual units, by selected groups of indoor
units, or as collection of all indoor units. Operation modes available through central
controller shall match those operation modes of controllers for indoor units.
5. Schedules operation of indoor units as individual units, by selected groups of indoor
units, or as collection of all indoor units. Schedules daily, weekly, and annual events.
6. Changes operating set points of indoor units as individual units, by selected groups of
indoor units, or as collection of all indoor units.
7. Optimized start feature to start indoor units before scheduled time to reach temperature
set-point at scheduled time based on operating history.
8. Night setback feature to operate indoor units at energy-conserving heating and cooling
temperature set-points during unoccupied periods.
9. Supports Imperial and Metric Temperature Units: Fahrenheit and Celsius.
10. Displays service notifications and error codes.
11. Monitors and displays up to 3000 item error history and 10,000 item operation history for
regular reporting and further archiving.
12. Monitors and displays cumulative operating time of indoor units.
13. Able to disable and enable operation of individual controllers for indoor units.
14. Information displayed on individual controllers shall also be available for display.
15. Information displayed for outdoor units, including refrigerant high and low pressures
percent capacity.
C. Central Controllers:
1. Centralized control for all indoor and outdoor units from a single central controller
location.
a. Include multiple interconnected controllers as required.
2. Controls operation mode of indoor units as individual units, by selected groups of indoor
units, or as collection of all indoor units. Operation modes available through central
controller shall match those operation modes of controllers for indoor units.
3. Schedule operation of indoor units as individual units, by selected groups of indoor units,
or as collection of all indoor units.
a. Sets schedule for daily, weekly, and annual events.
b. Schedule options available through central controller shall at least include the
schedule options of controllers for indoor units.
4. Changes operating set points of indoor units as individual units, by selected groups of
indoor units, or as collection of all indoor units.
5. Optimized start feature to start indoor units before scheduled time to reach temperature
set-point at scheduled time based on operating history.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 17 of 24
6. Night setback feature to operate indoor units at energy-conserving heating and cooling
temperature set-points during unoccupied periods.
7. Service diagnostics tool.
8. Able to disable and enable operation of individual controllers for indoor units.
9. Information displayed on individual controllers shall also be available for display through
central controller.
10. Information displayed for outdoor units, including refrigerant high and low pressures
percent capacity.
11. Multiple RJ-45 ports for direct connection to a local PC and an Ethernet network switch.
12. Operator interface through a backlit, high-resolution color display touch panel and web
accessible through standard web browser software.
D. Wired Controllers for Indoor Units:
1. Single controller capable of controlling multiple indoor units as group.
2. Auto Timeout Touch Screen LCD: Timeout duration shall be adjustable.
3. Temperature Units: Fahrenheit and Celsius.
4. On/Off: Turns indoor unit on or off.
5. Hold: Hold operation settings until hold is released.
6. Operation Mode: Cool, Heat, Auto, Dehumidification, Fan Only, and Setback.
7. Temperature Display: 1-degree increments.
8. Temperature Set-Point: Separate set points for Cooling, Heating, and Setback.
Adjustable in 1-degree increments between.
9. Fan Speed Setting: Select between available options furnished with the unit.
10. Airflow Direction Setting: If applicable to unit, select between available options furnished
with the unit.
11. Seven-day programmable operating schedule with up to five events per day. Operations
shall include On/Off, Operation Mode, and Temperature Set-Point.
12. Auto Off Timer: Operates unit for an adjustable time duration and then turns unit off.
13. Occupancy detection.
14. Service Notification Display: "Filter".
15. Service Run Tests: Limit use by service personnel to troubleshoot operation.
16. Error Code Notification Display: Used by service personnel to troubleshoot abnormal
operation and equipment failure.
17. User and Service Passwords: Capable of preventing adjustments by unauthorized users.
18. Setting stored in nonvolatile memory to ensure that settings are not lost if power is lost.
Battery backup for date and time only.
19. Low-voltage power required for controller shall be powered through non-polar
connections to indoor unit.
2.10 SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL
A. Refrigerant:
1. As required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer for system to comply with performance
2. ASHRAE 34, Class A1 refrigerant classification.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 18 of 24
3. R-410a.
B. Oil:
1. As required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer and to comply with performance
2.11 SYSTEM REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping" for system piping
requirements.
B. Refrigerant Tubing Kits:
1. Furnished by VRF HVAC system manufacturer.
2. Factory-rolled and -bundled, soft-copper tubing with tubing termination fittings at each
end.
3. Standard one-piece length for connecting to indoor units.
4. Pre-insulated with flexible elastomeric insulation of thickness to comply with governing
energy code and sufficient to eliminate condensation.
C. Divided-Flow Specialty Fittings: Where required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer for proper
system operation, VRF HVAC system manufacturer shall furnish specialty fittings with
identification and instructions for proper installation by Installer.
D. Refrigerant Isolation Ball Valves:
1. Description: Uni-body full port design, rated for maximum system temperature and
pressure, and factory tested under pressure to ensure tight shutoff. Designed for valve
operation without removing seal cap.
2. Seals: Compatible with system refrigerant and oil. Seal service life of at least 20 years.
3. Valve Connections: Flare or sweat depending on size.
2.12 METAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Copper Tube Hangers:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated
components.
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of galvanized or copper-
coated steel.
B. Plastic Pipe Hangers:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, galvanized-steel, factory-fabricated
components.
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of galvanized steel.
2.13 PIPING AND TUBING INSULATION
A. Refrigerant Tubing Insulation and Jacket Requirements:
1. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation:
a. Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials, complying with ASTM C534,
Type I for tubular materials.
b. Indoors: 1 inch thick.
c. Outdoors: 1 inch thick.
2. Field-Applied Jacket:
a. Concealed: None required.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 19 of 24
b. Indoors, Exposed to View: PVC, 20 mils thick.

c. Outdoors, Exposed to View: Aluminum, smooth, 0.020 inch thick.
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect factory-assembled equipment.
B. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports for historical record. Submit reports only if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine products before installation. Reject products that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for piping and tubing to verify actual locations of connections before
equipment installation.
D. Examine roughing-in for ductwork to verify actual locations of connections before equipment
installation.
E. Examine roughing-in for wiring and conduit to verify actual locations of connections before
equipment installation.
F. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and outdoor pads for suitable conditions where equipment will be
installed.
G. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work.
H. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Clearance:
1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
2. Maintain clearances required by governing code.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF INDOOR UNITS
A. Install units to be level and plumb while providing a neat and finished appearance.
B. Unless otherwise required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer, support ceiling-mounted units
from structure above using threaded rods; minimum rod size of 3/8 inch.
C. Adjust supports of exposed and recessed units to draw units tight to adjoining surfaces.
D. Protect finished surfaces of ceilings, floors, and walls that come in direct contact with units.
Refinish or replaced damaged areas after units are installed.
E. In rooms with ceilings, conceal piping and tubing, controls, and electrical power serving units
above ceilings.
F. In rooms without ceiling, arrange piping and tubing, controls, and electrical power serving units
to provide a neat and finished appearance.
G. Provide lateral bracing if needed to limit movement of suspended units to not more than 0.25
inch.
H. For floor- and wall-mounted units that are exposed, conceal piping and tubing, controls, and
electrical power serving units within walls.
I. Attachment: Install hardware for proper attachment to supported equipment.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 20 of 24
3.04 INSTALLATION OF OUTDOOR UNITS

A. Install units to be level and plumb while providing a neat and finished appearance.
B. Install outdoor units on support structures indicated on Drawings.
C. Pad-Mounted Installations: Install outdoor units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases.
Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Attachment: Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
2. Grouting: Place grout under equipment supports and make bearing surface smooth.
3.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING INSTALLATION
and tubing systems. Install piping and tubing as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install piping and tubing in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
C. Install piping and tubing at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping and tubing above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
E. Install piping and tubing to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping and tubing at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping and tubing free of sags.
I. Install piping and tubing to allow application of insulation.
J. Install groups of pipes and tubing parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation
with service access between insulated piping and tubing.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Refrigerant Tubing Kits:
1. Unroll and straighten tubing to suit installation. Deviations in straightness of exposed
tubing shall be unnoticeable to observer.
2. Support tubing using hangers and supports indicated at intervals not to exceed 5 feet.
Minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. Prepare tubing ends and make mating connections to provide a pressure tight and leak-
free installation.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 and governing codes.
C. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
D. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints and fittings.
E. Install refrigerant piping and tubing in protective conduit where installed belowground.
F. Install refrigerant piping and tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to
mechanical damage.
G. Unless otherwise required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer, slope refrigerant piping and
tubing as follows:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 21 of 24
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping and tubing with a uniform slope downward
away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
H. When brazing, remove or protect components that could be damaged by heat.
I. Before installation, clean piping, tubing, and fittings to cleanliness level required by VRF HVAC
system manufacturer.
J. Joint Construction:
1. Ream ends of tubes and remove burrs.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of tube and fittings before
assembly.
3. Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.
a. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper fittings with copper
tubing.
b. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND TUBING INSULATION
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Installation to
maintain a continuous vapor barrier.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
C. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are unavailable, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
D. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
E. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
3.08 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and in applicable Division 26 Sections.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 22 of 24
3.09 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage VRF HVAC system manufacturer's service representative
to advise and assist installers; witness testing; and observe and inspect components,
assemblies, and equipment installations, including controls and connections.
A. Engage a VRF HVAC system manufacturer's service representative to perform system(s)
startup service.
1. Complete startup service of each separate system.
2. Complete system startup service according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Startup checks shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Check control communications of equipment and each operating component in
system(s).
2. Check each indoor unit's response to demand for cooling and heating.
3. Check each indoor unit's response to changes in airflow settings.
4. Check each indoor unit, HRCU, and outdoor unit for proper condensate removal.
C. Installer shall accompany manufacturer's service representative during startup service and
provide manufacturer's service representative with requested documentation and technical
support during startup service.
1. Installer shall correct deficiencies found during startup service for reverification.
D. System Operation Report:
1. After completion of startup service, manufacturer shall issue a report for each separate
system.
2. Report shall include complete documentation describing each startup check, the result,
and any corrective action required.
3. Manufacturer shall electronically record not less than two hours of continuous operation
of each system and submit with report for historical reference.
a. All available system operating parameters shall be included in the information
submitted.
E. Witness:
1. Invite Commissioning Agent to witness startup service procedures.
2. Provide written notice not less than 10 business days before start of startup service.
3.12 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust equipment and components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. Adjust initial airflow settings and discharge
airflow patterns.
C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges according to VRF HVAC system
manufacturer's written instructions, and as indicated.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Protect products from moisture and water damage. Remove and replace products that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 23 of 24
B. Protect equipment from physical damage. Replace equipment with physical damage that cannot
be repaired to new condition. Observable surface imperfections shall be grounds for removal
and replacement.
C. Protect equipment from electrical damage. Replace equipment suffering electrical damage.
D. Cover and seal openings of equipment to keep inside of equipment clean. Do not remove
covers until finish work is complete.
3.14 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include
software support for two years.
B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and
program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial
Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for
using software.
1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access the system and
to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 24 of 24

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.
B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an
overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Alpha Wire Company.
2. Cerro Wire LLC.
3. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
4. Okonite Company (The).
5. Southwire Company.
C. Standards:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and use.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's
"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for
stranded conductors.
E. Conductor Insulation:
1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.
2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material,
type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. 3M Electrical Products.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. Ideal Industries, Inc.
4. ILSCO.
5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
6. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set
screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.
D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.
1. Material: Bronze.
2. Type: One hole with standard barrels.
3. Termination: Compression.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and No. 12 AWG; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger. Conductors smaller than No. 12 AWG are not be permitted.
3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single
conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-
2, single conductors in raceway.
E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un-spliced
conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.06 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration
Firestopping."
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:
a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct
connection according to the single-line diagram.
b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:
1) A low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Calibrated torque wrench.
3) Thermographic survey.
c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.
d. Inspect for correct identification.
e. Inspect cable jacket and condition.
f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors.
Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated
cable for a one-minute duration.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.

h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.
3. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but before Final Acceptance,
perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box
and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies
determined during the scan.
a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or
to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
4. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch
11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:
1. Procedures used.
2. Results that comply with requirements.
3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special
applications:
1. Foundation steel electrodes.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by NETA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.
2. ERICO International Corporation.
3. Harger Lightning & Grounding.
4. ILSCO.
6. SIEMENS Industry, Inc.; Energy Management Division.
2.03 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise
required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8
inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section,
with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply
with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
2.04 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-
plated or silicon bronze bolts.
E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.
F. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron.
G. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.
H. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.
I. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.
J. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw.
K. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud lengths,
capable of single and double conductor connections.
L. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw.
M. Straps: Solid copper, cast-bronze clamp. Rated for 600 A.
N. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal one-piece clamp.
O. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial.
P. Water Pipe Clamps:
1. Mechanical type, two pieces with zinc-plated bolts.
a. Material: Die-cast zinc alloy.
b. Listed for direct burial.
2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector rated for direct burial.
2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6
AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG
minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and
elsewhere as indicated.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above
finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top
of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.02 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE
A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the
ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.
3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96
when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground
directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service
grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode
conductor, and install in conduit.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a
minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.
1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of
foundation.
2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts.
Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to
grounding electrode external to concrete.
E. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized.
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact are galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make
contact points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical

clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and
mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical
connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground
rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and
key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their
depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that
may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
D. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System: 5 ohms.
G. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
1. Steel slotted support systems.
2. Conduit and cable support devices.
3. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints.
4. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners,
mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and
hanger rods.
5. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.
1. Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation
requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.
A. Shop Drawings For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support systems.
Anchorage of any electrical equipment directly to concrete foundations will need to be provided
by the contractor for review by the architect, electrical engineer, and structural engineer after bid
and prior to construction.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
1. The term "withstand" means "the supported equipment and systems will remain in place
without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
supported equipment and systems will be fully operational after the seismic event."
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame Rating: Class 1.
2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.
2.02 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-
diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

b. ERICO International Corporation.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
d. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.
2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
3. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel.
4. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches.
5. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
6. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for
types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes,
and bars; black and galvanized.
D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to the following:
1) Hilti, Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to the following:
1) B-line, an Eaton business.
2) Hilti, Inc.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS
Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for
attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.03 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of
supported equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and
supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:
1. NECA 1.
2. NECA 101
3. NECA 105.
B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and
Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or
other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without
exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
E. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-
inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended
ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC
may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will
be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static
design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200
lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless
otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or
greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than
4 inches thick.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-
69.
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for
reinforcing bars.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.04 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge
of the base.
B. Use 4500-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and
placement requirements are specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.05 PAINTING
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Metal conduits and fittings.
2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.
3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Metal Conduit:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
b. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
c. Wheatland Tube Company.
2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.
3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
5. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
6. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
7. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
B. Metal Fittings:
a. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
b. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
2. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
3. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
4. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.
5. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: compression.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
6. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for
environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
C. Joint Compound for IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having
jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect
threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Nonmetallic Conduit:
a. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
b. CANTEX INC.
c. Lamson & Sessions.
2. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
3. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise
indicated.
4. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.
B. Nonmetallic Fittings:
a. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
b. CANTEX INC.
c. Lamson & Sessions.
2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.
3. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
4. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.
2.03 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
1. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business.
2. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
3. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.
5. RACO; Hubbell.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and
marked for the maximum allowable weight.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
G. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
H. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 Type 4 with continuous-
hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.
3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
J. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1 Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and
removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: GRC or IMC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Above Ground: GRC or IMC.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC , concrete encased. All bends greater
than 30 degrees shall be either PVC-coated GRC or 2-lap wrapped with an approved with
an approved tape (coating or wrapping shall be a minimum 20 mil thickness).
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Above ground: NEMA 250, Type 4.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations
include the following:
a. Loading dock.
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
c. Mechanical rooms.
d. Gymnasiums.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
2. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
E. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for
hangers and supports.
B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on
Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply
with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of
floors.
C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment.
D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.
E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control
wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in
direction.
I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to
NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and
size involved.
J. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install
conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure
raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
5. Where necessary, conduits located in concrete slabs shall not exceed ¾ inch and shall be
spaced no closer than eight inches on center except at panel and junction boxes where
they shall be spread as widely as possible. Provide for special framing when required
where conduits enter a panel board. Where conduits larger than ¾ inch are to be placed
in a concrete slab, the structural engineer shall be notified for review and approval.
6. Conduits located in a concrete slab shall be rigid galvanized steel coated with PVC or 2-
lap wrapped with an approved tape (coating or wrapping shall be a minimum 20 mil
thickness).
M. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed
compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
N. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to
protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
O. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
P. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
Q. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
R. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
S. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less
than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap
underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
T. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
U. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible
conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
V. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually
indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box
W. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members
or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal
diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches
of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with
normal compaction as specified in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving."
4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at
building entrances through floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the
coupling.
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits
penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of
60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding
bushings on terminations at equipment.
5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification
6. Underground Trace Wires: Install per owner requirements.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from
1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of
other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.
D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line.
3.05 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 260548.16
SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
5. Adhesive anchor bolts.
1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used
electrical supports and installation requirements.
1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type
and size of seismic-restraint component used.
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by OSHPD.
requirements.
A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other
systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. Electrical
components include:
1. Control and monitoring panels.
2. Luminaires.
3. Panelboards.
4. Switchboards.
5. Transformers.
B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality-control reports.
conduct the testing indicated and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
more stringent.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: As indicated in the Structural Notes on drawings.
2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: As indicated in
the Structural Notes on drawings.
3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): As indicated in the
Structural Notes on drawings.
4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: As indicated in the
Structural Notes on drawings.
A. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels
other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension,
compression, and torsion forces.
A. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized or ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables. End
connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for
restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
A. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
B. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to
C. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
D. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements
and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of
attachment devices used.
E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene,
with a flat washer face.
following:
2. Hilti, Inc.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
2.06 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS
following:
1. Hilti, Inc.
B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane
methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide
anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for
exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested
according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps
approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or OSHPD or an agency
B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to
receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic forces.
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits.
3.03 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment
and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in
Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:
1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between
anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member
of ICC-ES or OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing
required submittals for component.
D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

F. Drilled-in Anchors:
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered
during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications
conduit, and gas lines.
design strength.
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets
in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench.
applications.
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways
where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different
structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is anchored to a
different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to
restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least
seven days' advance notice.
Architect.
C. Seismic controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs.
2. Labels.
3. Signs.
4. Cable ties.
5. Paint for identification.
6. Fasteners for labels and signs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Comply with NFPA 70E and Section 26 0573.19 "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" requirements for
arc-flash warning labels.
F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used
by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.02 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS
A. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below
for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities
having jurisdiction permit.
2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
d. Neutral: White.
3. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green.
B. Warning Label Colors:
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

C. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT
OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
D. Equipment Identification Labels:
1. Black letters on a white field.
2.03 SIGNS
A. Baked-Enamel Signs:
a. Carlton Industries, LP.
b. Champion America.
c. emedco.
d. Marking Services, Inc.
2. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
3. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
4. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches.
B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:
a. Brady Corporation.
b. Champion America.
c. emedco.
2. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396-
inch galvanized-steel backing, punched and drilled for fasteners, and with colors, legend,
and size required for application.
3. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
4. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches.
C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:
a. Brady Corporation.
b. Carlton Industries, LP.
c. emedco.
2. Engraved legend.
3. Thickness:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick.

b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick.
c. Engraved legend with white letters on a dark gray background.
d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets in corners for
mounting.
e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
2.04 CABLE TIES
1. HellermannTyton.
2. Ideal Industries, Inc.
3. Marking Services, Inc.
4. Panduit Corp.
B. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and
Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.
C. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,
self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
4. Color: Black.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or
interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean
substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by
manufacturer of identification product.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with
requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent
designations throughout Project.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation
and maintenance manual.
E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance
of electrical systems and connected items.
G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections.
H. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for
power transfer.
I. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing
from the floor.
J. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and
accessibility.
K. Underground Line Warning Tape:
1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly
above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where
width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall.
2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.
L. Baked-Enamel Signs:
1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the
location and substrate.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on
minimum 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use signs minimum 2
inches high.
M. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-
inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
N. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-
inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
O. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below:
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to
provide view of identifying devices.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points,
and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.
C. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction
and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring system
legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1. "EMERGENCY POWER."
2. "POWER."
3. "UPS."
D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction
boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl tape to identify the phase.
1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot
maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
E. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes,
manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive labels with the conductor or cable designation,
origin, and destination.
F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.
G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Marker tape that is uniform and consistent
with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
H. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,
communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.
I. Concealed Raceways and Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Apply floor marking
tape to the following finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that
is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in
the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
J. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded
conductors.
K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-
enamel warning signs.
1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment,
including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power-transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
L. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels.
M. Equipment Identification Labels:
1. Indoor Equipment: Baked-enamel signs.
2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign.
3. Equipment to Be Labeled:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard

manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a engraved, laminated
acrylic or melamine label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Switchgear.
e. Switchboards.
f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
g. Substations.
h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
i. Motor-control centers.
j. Enclosed switches.
k. Enclosed circuit breakers.
l. Enclosed controllers.
m. Variable-speed controllers.
n. Push-button stations.
o. Power-transfer equipment.
p. Contactors.
q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
r. Battery-inverter units.
s. Battery racks.
t. Power-generating units.
u. Monitoring and control equipment.
v. UPS equipment.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 260800
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
and systems to be commissioned is specified in Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING
is defined in Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIRMENTS.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
1.03 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the Facility electrical systems, related
subsystems and related equipment. This Section supplements the general requirements
specified in Section 019113 General Commissioning Requirements.
B. Refer to Section 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for more details
Team members.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
B. The Facility electrical systems commissioning will include the systems listed in Section 019113
General Commissioning Requirements.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. The commissioning process requires review of selected Submittals that pertain to the systems to
be commissioned. The Commissioning Agent will provide a list of submittals that will be reviewed
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
by the Commissioning Agent. This list will be reviewed and approved by the CNS prior to
forwarding to the Contractor. Refer to Section 013323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
and SAMPLES for further details.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Commissioning of electrical systems will require inspection of individual elements of the electrical
systems construction throughout the construction period. The Contractor shall coordinate with
the Commissioning Agent in accordance with Section 019113 and the Commissioning plan to
schedule HVAC systems inspections as required to support the Commissioning Process.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
details.
scheduled in coordination with the CNS Resident Engineer after submission and approval of
formal training plans. Refer to Section 019100 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
and Division 26 Sections for additional Contractor training requirements.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 10
SECTION 260923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Time switches.
2. Photoelectric switches.
3. Standalone daylight-harvesting dimming controls.
4. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.
5. Switchbox-mounted occupancy sensors.
6. High-bay occupancy sensors.
7. Lighting contactors.
8. Emergency shunt relays.
1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, non-networkable wall-switch
occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show installation details for the following:
a. Occupancy sensors.
b. Vacancy sensors.
2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and elevations, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Structural members to which equipment will be attached.
3. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Luminaires.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Control modules.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 10
B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranties.

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in operation
2. Program Software Backup: On USB media. Provide names, versions, and website
addresses for locations of installed software.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control
devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Faulty operation of lighting control software.
b. Faulty operation of lighting control devices.
2. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TIME SWITCHES
1. Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. Intermatic, Inc.
3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying
with UL 917.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and
application.
2. Contact Configuration: SPST.
3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac.
4. Programs: Eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule
that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.
5. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a
program.
6. Astronomic Time: All channels.
7. Automatic daylight savings time changeover.
8. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.
2.02 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 10
2. Intermatic, Inc.
B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA inductive, to operate
connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A, and
compatible with ballasts and LED lamps.
intended location and application.
2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of the photocell to prevent fixed
light sources from causing turn-off.
3. Time Delay: Fifteen-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor.
5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or
stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky
exposure.
6. Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.
2.03 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING DIMMING CONTROLS
2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.
4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
5. WattStopper; a Legrand® Group brand.
B. Description: Sensing daylight and electrical lighting levels, the system adjusts the indoor
electrical lighting levels. As daylight increases, the lights are dimmed.
1. Lighting control set point is based on two lighting conditions:
a. When no daylight is present (target level).
b. When significant daylight is present.
2. System programming is done with two hand-held, remote-control tools.
a. Initial setup tool.
b. Tool for occupants to adjust the target levels by increasing the set point up to 25
percent, or by minimizing the electric lighting level.
C. Ceiling-Mounted Dimming Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate power
pack, to detect changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:
2. Sensor Output: 0- to 10-V dc to operate luminaires. Sensor is powered by controller unit.
3. Light-Level Sensor Set-Point Adjustment Range: 20 to 60 fc.
E. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A LED load at 120- and 277-V ac and for 1 hp at 120-
V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.
1. LED status lights to indicate load status.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 10
2. Plenum rated.
2.04 INDOOR OCCUPANCYAND VACANCY SENSORS
5. Square D.
B. General Requirements for Sensors:
1. Wall Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.
2. Dual technology.
3. Separate power pack.
4. Hardwired connection to switch.
6. Operation:
a. Occupancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area
is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights
off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
b. Vacancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, lights are manually turned on and
sensor turns lights off when the room is unoccupied; with a time delay for turning
lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
c. Combination Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, sensor shall be programmed to
turn lights on when coverage area is occupied and turn them off when unoccupied,
or to turn off lights that have been manually turned on; with a time delay for turning
lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
7. Sensor Output: Sensor is powered from the power pack.
8. Power: Line voltage.
9. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A LED load at 120- and 277-V ac and for 1 hp at
120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.
10. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical
enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
11. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal
operation of sensor.
12. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.
13. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected
lighting level is present.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 10
C. Dual-Technology Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR
and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that
control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a
human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of
average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical
manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area
of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.
4. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180-
degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area as defined in the drawings when
mounted48 inches above finished floor.
2.05 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS
1. Bryant Electric.
B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor with manual on-off
switch, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox using hardwired connection.
2. Occupancy Sensor Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage
area is occupied, and turn lights off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights
off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
3. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.
4. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA LED load at 120 V, 1200-VA LED load at 277 V, and
800-W incandescent.
C. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS1:
1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a
minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.
2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic.
3. Switch Type: SP.
4. Capable of controlling load in three-way application.
5. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage.
6. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc.
The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set
point of the sensor.
7. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.
8. Concealed, "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 10
9. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of

the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.
10. Color: Color as selected by architect.
11. Faceplate: Color matched to switch.
2.06 HIGH-BAY OCCUPANCY SENSORS
B. Description: Solid-state unit. The unit is designed to operate with the lamp and ballasts
indicated.
2. Operation: Turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and to half-power when
unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights to half-power that is adjustable over a
minimum range of 1 to 16 minutes.
3. Continuous Lamp Monitoring: When lamps are dimmed continuously for 24 hours,
automatically turn lamps on to full power for 15 minutes for every 24 hours of continuous
dimming.
4. Power: Line voltage.
5. Operating Ambient Conditions: 32 to 149 deg F.
6. Mounting: Threaded pipe.
7. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.
8. Detector Technology: PIR.
9. Power and dimming control from the luminaire ballast that has been modified to include
the dimming capacitor and MyzerPORT option.
C. Detector Coverage: User selectable by interchangeable PIR lenses, suitable for mounting
heights from 12 to 50 feet.
D. Accessories: Obtain manufacturer's installation and maintenance kit with laser alignment tool for
sensor positioning and power port connectors.
2.07 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.
2. ASCO: a brand of Vertiv.
3. Eaton.
4. General Electric Company.
5. Square D.
B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination-type lighting contactors
with nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served,
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or
less THD of normal load current).

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 10
2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the
point of installation.
3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.
4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type
specified for the enclosure.
C. Interface with DDC System for HVAC: Provide hardware interface to enable the DDC system for
HVAC to monitor and control lighting contactors.
1. Monitoring: On-off status,.
2. Control: On-off operation,.
2.08 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY
1. Lighting Control and Design.
B. Description: NC, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or
automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924.
1. Coil Rating: 120 or 277 V to match circuit voltage.
2.09 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG.
Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not
smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than
No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
B. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be
installed.
3.02 SENSOR INSTALLATION
B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke
detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.
C. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.03 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 10
3.04 WIRING INSTALLATION

B. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited
conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless
E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each
sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and
perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
equipment.
D. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual
occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy
hours for this purpose.
1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set
time delay to suit Owner's operations.
2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's
operations.
3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.
A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 10
B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and
using software.
1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access the system and
to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION
adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 10

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 260950
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS TESTING
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall retain the services of an independent testing firm deemed by the Owner as
qualified to perform International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) testing. Testing services
shall be as described in this specification and shall be paid for and coordinated by the Contractor.
B. NETA testing procedures and requirements for tested values shall be in accordance with the
most current edition of the NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications.
C. Any deficiencies or failures discovered during the NETA testing procedures shall be promptly
corrected by the Contractor to ensure timely completion of the project and to minimize the time
required for the independent testing firm to complete their work.
2.1 TEST REPORTS
A. Intermediate Test Reports
1. Intermediate test reports shall be issued by the independent testing firm immediately
following each site visit. Intermediate test reports shall identify the general results of all field
testing and field observations, and shall specifically identify any deficiencies, problems, or
failures noted during the site visit.
2. Intermediate test reports shall be issued/distributed to the electrical subcontractor, the
general contractor, the electrical engineer, and to the Owner. The intent of this direct
communication and/or notification to multiple parties is to ensure the ‘independent’ function of
the independent testing firm and to prevent such information from being delayed or filtered by
processing it through the electrical subcontractor and/or the general contractor.
B. Final Test Report
1. Six copies of the final test report shall be issued by the independent testing firm following
successful completion all required electrical systems testing. The final test report shall be
typed, bound, and indexed, and shall include a cover page that identifies the project name,
project location, and project number. The final test report shall include a separate section for
each area of required testing (tests as summarized below).
a. Grounding Systems
b. Ground Fault Protection Systems
c. Circuit Breakers (Over 100 Amps)
d. Transformers (Dry Type)
e. Transformers (Liquid Filled)
f. Low Voltage Feeders (up to 600 Volts) Serving Loads of 100 Amps or Greater
g. Medium Voltage Feeders (5 kV thru 35 kV)
3.1 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding Systems
1. The following grounding system testing shall be conducted on two separate occasions, once
prior to initializing electrical power for construction activities, and once when all electrical
systems have been finalized.
2. Perform fall-of-potential testing of the main grounding electrode or grounding system in
accordance with IEEE Standard No. 81. If suitable locations for test rods are not available, a
low resistance dead earth or reference ground shall be utilized.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS TESTING 26 0950 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
3. Perform point-to-point testing to determine the resistance (bonding) between the main
grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived
neutral points.
4. Measure system neutral-to-ground insulation resistance with the neutral disconnect link
temporarily removed (replace neutral disconnect link after testing). This testing shall be
performed at the origination point of all separately derived systems.
B. Ground Fault Protection Systems
1. Perform pickup tests utilizing primary injection. Verify that the relay does not operate at 90%
of the pickup setting. Verify pickup is less than 125% of setting or 1200 amps (whichever is
less).
2. On summation type systems utilizing phase and neutral current sensors verify correct
polarities by applying current to each phase-neutral current transformer pair).
3. Measure time delay of the relay at 150% of pickup or greater by injecting current into the
sensor. Total trip time shall be electronically monitored.
4. Verify that the reduced control voltage tripping capability is 55% of rated voltage for systems
with external control power (reference UL-1053).
5. Test zone interlock systems by simultaneous sensor current injection and monitoring of zone
blocking function.
C. Circuit Breakers (Over 100 Amps)
1. Test requirements apply to adjustable molded case, insulated case, and metal frame circuit
breakers.
2. Measure contact resistance by millivolt drop method at rated current or by digital low
resistance ohmmeter method.
3. Test insulation resistance from pole-to-pole and from pole-to-ground with breaker closed and
across open contacts of each phase.
4. Adjust trip settings in accordance with coordination study.
5. Measure instantaneous pickup current by primary current injection.
6. Measure long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
7. Measure short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
8. Verify trip unit reset operation.
D.D. Transformers (Dry Type)
1. Test insulation resistance winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground and calculate the
polarization index.
2. Test turns ratio between windings for all tap positions. Verify that winding polarities match
the transformer nameplate.
3. Measure resistance of each high voltage winding in each no-load tap-changer position. Also
measure resistance of each low voltage winding in each load tap-changer position (when
applicable).
E. Transformers (Liquid Filled)
1. Test insulation resistance winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground and calculate the
polarization index.
2. Test turns ratio between windings for all tap positions. Verify that winding polarities match
the transformer nameplate.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
3. Measure resistance of each high voltage winding in each no-load tap-changer position. Also
measure resistance of each low voltage winding in each load tap-changer position (when
applicable).
4. Test dielectric absorption from winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground for ten minutes and
calculate the polarization index.
5. Sample and test insulating oil in accordance with ASTM D-923.
a. Dielectric Strength (ASTM D-877 or D-1816)
b. Acid Neutralization Number (ASTM D-974)
c. Interfacial Tension (ASTM D-971 or D-2285)
d. Color (ASTM D-1500)
e. Visual Condition (ASTM D-1524)
f. Moisture Content (ASTM D-1533)
g. Power Factor: (ASTM D-924)
6. Sample insulating liquid in accordance with ASTM D-3613 and perform dissolved gas
analysis (DGA) in accordance with ASTM D-3612 or ANSI/IEEE C-57.104.
7. Measure the percentage of oxygen in the nitrogen gas blanket (if applicable).
F. Low Voltage Feeders (up to 600 Volts) Serving Loads of 100 Amps or Greater
1. Conduct megohm (Megger) testing of shield continuity resistance utilizing a megohmmeter.
2. Test insulation resistance phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase for one minute.
3. Test voltages shall be as recommended by the feeder manufacturer (or by NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification).
G.G. Medium Voltage Feeders (5 kV thru 35 kV)
1. Conduct megohm (Megger) testing of shield continuity resistance utilizing a megohmmeter.
2. Test insulation resistance phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase for one minute.
3. Test voltages shall be as recommended by the feeder manufacturer (or by NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification).
4. Conduct high-potential (Hi-Pot) testing per NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Test
voltage shall be applied for a period of fifteen minutes.
5. When utilizing the dc test method the voltage decrement shall be tested by reducing the
applied test voltage to zero and measuring the voltage decay during the test interval.
6. Apply grounds for a time period adequate to drain all insulation stored electrical charge.
7. Measure and record ambient temperature and relative humidity during test procedure.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 10
SECTION 261219
PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pad-mounted, liquid-filled, medium-voltage distribution transformers, with
primary and secondary bushings within or without air-terminal enclosures.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. BIL: Basic Impulse Insulation Level.
B. Bushing: An insulating structure including a central conductor, or providing a central passage for
a conductor, with provision for mounting on a barrier, conducting or otherwise, for the purpose
of insulating the conductor from the barrier and conducting current from one side of the barrier
to the other.
C. Bushing Elbow: An insulated device used to connect insulated conductors to separable
insulated connectors on dead-front, pad-mounted transformers and to provide a fully insulated
connection. This is also called an "elbow connector."
D. Bushing Insert: That component of a separable insulated connector that is inserted into a
bushing well to complete a dead-front, load break or nonload break, separable insulated
connector (bushing).
E. Bushing Well: A component of a separable insulated connector, either permanently welded or
clamped to an enclosure wall or barrier, having a cavity that receives a replaceable component
(bushing insert) to complete the separable insulated connector (bushing).
F. Elbow Connector: See "bushing elbow" above.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For pad-mounted, liquid-filled, medium-voltage transformers.
1. Include plans and elevations showing major components and features.
a. Include a plan view and cross section of equipment base, showing clearances,
required workspace, and locations of penetrations for grounding and conduits.
2. Include details of equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
3. Include single-line diagram.
4. Include list of materials.
5. Include nameplate data.
6. Manufacturer's published time-current curves of the transformer high-voltage fuses, with
transformer damage curve, inrush curve, and thru fault current indicated.
PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 261219 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 10

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformer and accessories to include in emergency,
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Comply with IEEE C2.
C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.00.
A. Seismic Performance: The transformers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
1. The term "withstand" means "the transformer will remain in place without separation of
any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the transformer will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
2. Component Importance Factor: As defined by the Structural Engineer.
3. Component Amplification Factor: As defined by the Structural Engineer.
4. Component Response Modification Factor: As defined by the Structural Engineer.
B. Windings Material: Copper.
C. Surge Arresters: Comply with IEEE C62.11, Distribution Class; metal-oxide-varistor type, fully
shielded, separable-elbow type, suitable for plugging into the inserts provided in the high-
voltage section of the transformer. Connected in each phase of incoming circuit and ahead of
any disconnecting device.
D. Winding Connections: The connection of windings and terminal markings shall comply with
IEEE C57.12.70.
E. Efficiency: Comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart K.
F. Insulation: Transformer kVA rating shall be as follows: The average winding temperature rise
above a 30 deg C ambient temperature shall not exceed 65 deg C and 80 deg C hottest-spot
temperature rise at rated kVA when tested according to IEEE C57.12.90, using combination of
connections and taps that give the highest average winding temperature rise.
G. Tap Changer: External handle, for de-energized operation.
H. Tank: Sealed, with welded-on cover.
I. Enclosure Integrity: Comply with IEEE C57.12.28 for pad-mounted enclosures that contain
energized electrical equipment in excess of 600 V that may be exposed to the public.
J. Mounting: An integral skid mounting frame, suitable to allow skidding or rolling of transformer in
any direction, and with provision for anchoring frame to pad.
K. Insulating Liquids:
1. Less-Flammable Liquids:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 10
a. Biodegradable and Nontoxic Dielectric: Listed and labeled by an NRTL as

complying with NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C
when tested according to ASTM D92.
L. Sound level shall comply with NEMA TR 1 requirements.
M. Corrosion Protection:
1. Transformer coating system shall be factory applied, complying with requirements of
IEEE C57.12.28, in manufacturer's standard color green.
2.03 THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMERS
1. ABB (Power Grids Division).
3. Eaton.
B. Description:
application.
2. Comply with IEEE C57.12.26.
C. Compartment Construction:
1. Double-Compartment Construction: Individual compartments for high- and low-voltage
sections, formed by steel isolating barriers that extend full height and depth of
compartments, with hinged, lift-off doors and three-point latching, with a stop in the open
position and provision for padlocking.
D. Primary Fusing: Designed and rated to provide thermal protection of transformer by sensing
overcurrent and high liquid temperature.
1. 150-kV BIL current-limiting fuses, conforming to requirements of IEEE C37.47.
2. Interrupting Rating: 50,000 rms A symmetrical at system voltage.
3. Fuse Assembly: Bayonet-type, liquid-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with liquid-
immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. Bayonet fuse shall sense both high
currents and high oil temperature to provide thermal protection to the
transformer. Connect current-limiting fuses ahead of radial-feed load-break switch.
4. Provide bayonet fuse assembly with an oil retention valve and an external drip shield
inside the housing to eliminate or minimize oil spills. Valve shall close when fuse holder is
removed and an external drip shield is installed.
5. Provide a conspicuously displayed warning adjacent to bayonet fuse(s), cautioning
against removing or inserting fuses unless transformer has been de-energized and tank
pressure has been released.
E. High-Voltage Section: Dead-front design.
1. To connect primary cable, use separable insulated connectors; coordinated with and
complying with requirements of Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables." Bushings
shall be one-piece units, with ampere and BIL ratings the same as connectors.
2. Bushing inserts and feed-through inserts:
a. Conform to the requirements of IEEE 386.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 10
b. Rated at 200 A, with voltage class matching connectors. Provide a parking stand
near each bushing well. Parking stands shall be equipped with insulated standoff
bushings for parking of energized load-break elbow connectors on parking stands.
c. Provide insulated protective caps for insulating and sealing out moisture from
unused bushing inserts and insulated standoff bushings.
3. Bushing wells configured for loop-feed application.
4. Access to liquid-immersed fuses.
5. Dead-front surge arresters.
6. Tap-changer operator.
7. Ground pad.
F. Low-Voltage Section:
1. Bushings with spade terminals drilled for terminating the number of conductors indicated
on the Drawings, and the lugs that comply with requirements of Section 260519 "Low-
Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
G. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Power Rating (kVA): 300.
2. Voltage Ratings: 12,470 V - 208Y/120 V.
3. Taps: Comply with IEEE C57.12.26 requirements.
4. Transformer BIL (kV): Comply with IEEE C57.12.26 requirements.
5. Minimum Tested Impedance (Percent at 85 deg C): 2.87.
6. Comply with FM Global Class No. 3990.
7. Comply with UL listing requirements for combination classification and listing for
transformer and less-flammable insulating liquid.
H. Transformer Accessories:
1. Drain and filter connection.
2. Filling and top filter press connections.
3. Pressure-vacuum gauge.
4. Dial-type analog thermometer with alarm contacts.
5. Magnetic liquid level indicator with high and low alarm contacts.
6. Automatically resetting pressure-relief device. Device flow shall be as recommended by
manufacturer.
7. Stainless-steel ground connection pads.
8. Machine-engraved nameplate, made of anodized aluminum or stainless steel.
2.04 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with requirements for labels and signs specified in Section 260553 "Identification for
1. High-Voltage Warning Label: Provide self-adhesive warning signs on outside of high-
voltage compartment door(s). Sign legend shall be "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed
in two lines of nominal 2-inch-high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters
on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a white
background.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 10
2. Arc Flash Warning Label: Provide self-adhesive warning signs on outside of high-voltage
compartment door(s), warning of potential electrical arc flash hazards and appropriate
personal protective equipment required.
A. Provide manufacturer's certificate that the transformer design tests comply with
IEEE C57.12.90.
1. Perform the following factory-certified routine tests on each transformer for this Project:
a. Resistance.
b. Turns ratio, polarity, and phase relation.
c. Transformer no-load losses and excitation current at 100 percent of ratings.
d. Transformer impedance voltage and load loss.
e. Operation of all devices.
f. Lightning impulse.
g. Low frequency.
h. Leak.
i. Transformer no-load losses and excitation current at 110 percent of ratings.
j. Insulation power factor.
k. Applied potential, except that this test is not required for single-phase transformers
or for three-phase Y-Y-connected transformers.
l. Induced potential.
m. Resistance measurements of all windings on rated voltage connection and at tap
extreme connections.
n. Ratios on rated voltage connection and at tap extreme connections.
o. Polarity and phase relation on rated voltage connection.
p. No-load loss at rated voltage on rated voltage connection.
q. Exciting current at rated voltage on rated voltage connection.
r. Impedance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine pad-mounted, liquid-filled, medium-voltage transformers upon delivery.
1. Upon delivery of transformers and prior to unloading, inspect equipment for any damage
that may have occurred during shipment or storage.
2. Verify that tie rods and chains are undamaged and tight, and that all blocking and bracing
is tight. Verify that there is no evidence of load shifting in transit, and that readings from
transportation shock recorders, if equipped, are within manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Verify that there is no indication of external damage and no dents or scratches in doors
and sill, tank walls, radiators and fins, or termination provisions.
4. Verify that there is no evidence of insulating-liquid leakage on transformer surfaces, at
weld seams, on high- or low-voltage bushing parts, and at transformer base.
5. Verify that there is positive pressure or vacuum on tank. Check pressure gauge; it is
required to read other than zero.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 10
6. Compare transformers and accessories received with bill of materials to verify that
shipment is complete. Verify that transformers and accessories conform with
manufacturer's quotation and shop drawings. If shipment is incomplete or does not
comply with Project requirements, notify manufacturer in writing immediately.
7. Verify presence of polychlorinated biphenyl content labeling.
8. Unload transformers carefully, observing all packing label warnings and handling
instructions.
9. Open termination compartment doors and inspect components for damage or displaced
parts, loose or broken connections, cracked or chipped insulators, bent mounting flanges,
dirt or foreign material, and water or moisture.
B. Handling:
1. Handle transformers carefully, in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, to
avoid damage to enclosure, termination compartments, base, frame, tank, and internal
components. Do not subject transformers to impact, jolting, jarring, or rough handling.
2. Protect transformer termination compartments against entrance of dust, rain, and snow.
3. Transport transformers upright, to avoid internal stresses on core and coil mounting
assembly and to prevent trapping air in windings. Do not tilt or tip transformers.
4. Verify that transformer weights are within rated capacity of handling equipment.
5. Use only manufacturer-recommended points for lifting, jacking, and pulling. Use all lifting
lugs when lifting transformers.
6. Use jacks only at corners of tank base plate.
7. Use nylon straps of same length to balance and distribute weight when handling
transformers with a crane.
8. Use spreaders or a lifting beam to obtain a vertical lift and to protect transformer from
straps bearing against enclosure. Lifting cable pull angles may not be greater than 15
degrees from vertical.
9. Exercise care not to damage tank base structure when handling transformer using skids
or rollers. Use skids to distribute stresses over tank base when using rollers under large
transformers.
C. Storage:
1. Store transformers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Transformers may be stored outdoors. If possible, store transformers at final installation
locations on concrete pads. If dry concrete surfaces are unavailable, use pallets of
adequate strength to protect transformers from direct contact with ground. Ensure
transformer is level.
3. Ensure that transformer storage location is clean and protected from severe conditions.
Protect transformers from dirt, water, contamination, and physical damage. Do not store
transformers in presence of corrosive or explosive gases. Protect transformers from
weather when stored for more than three months.
4. Store transformers with compartment doors closed.
5. Regularly inspect transformers while in storage and maintain documentation of storage
conditions, noting any discrepancies or adverse conditions. Verify that an effective
pressure seal is maintained using pressure gauges. Visually check for insulating-liquid
leaks and rust spots.
D. Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for pad-mounted, liquid-
filled, medium-voltage transformers and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 10
E. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:

1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements.
2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer, and no feeders will
cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.
F. Examine concrete bases for suitable conditions for transformer installation.
G. Pre-Installation Checks:
1. Verify removal of any shipping bracing after placement.
2. Remove a sample of insulating liquid according to ASTM D923. Insulating-liquid values
shall comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.4. Sample shall be tested for the following:
a. Dielectric Breakdown Voltage: ASTM D877 or ASTM D1816.
b. Acid Neutralization Number: ASTM D974.
c. Interfacial Tension: ASTM D971.
d. Color: ASTM D1500.
e. Visual Condition: ASTM D1524.
f. Power Factor or Dissipation Factor: ASTM D924.
H. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Section 260526
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance
shall be 5 ohms at transformer location.
I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install transformers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for
equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Transformer shall be installed level and plumb and shall tilt less than 1.5 degrees while
energized.
C. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in
Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" and Section 260548.16
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written
instructions and IEEE C2.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
1. For counterpoise, use tinned bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG, buried not
less than 30 inches below grade interconnecting the grounding electrodes. Bond surge
arrester and neutrals directly to transformer enclosure and then to grounding electrode
system with bare copper conductors, sized as shown. Keep lead lengths as short as
practicable, with no kinks or sharp bends.
2. Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression
connector.
3. Terminate all grounding and bonding conductors on a common equipment grounding
terminal on transformer enclosure.
4. Complete transformer tank grounding and lightning arrester connections prior to making
any other electrical connections.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 10
B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
1. Maintain air clearances between energized live parts and between live parts and ground
for exposed connections in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
2. Bundle associated phase, neutral, and equipment grounding conductors together within
transformer enclosure. Arrange conductors such that there is not excessive strain that
could cause loose connections. Allow adequate slack for expansion and contraction of
conductors.
C. Terminate medium-voltage cables in incoming section of transformers according to
Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables."
3.04 SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Comply with installation requirements for labels and signs specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Install warning signs as required to comply with 29 CFR 1910.269.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
C. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. General Field-Testing Requirements:
a. Comply with provisions of NFPA 70B Ch. "Testing and Test Methods."
b. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
c. After installing transformer but before primary is energized, verify that grounding
system at the transformer is tested at specified value or less.
d. After installing transformer and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
e. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1) Verify equipment nameplate data complies with Contract Documents.
2) Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following two methods:
a) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter to compare bolted connection
resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values
that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
b) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's
published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels shall
be according to manufacturer's published data. In absence of
manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.12.
f. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
g. Prepare test and inspection reports. Record as-left set points of all adjustable
devices.
2. Medium-Voltage Surge Arrester Field Tests:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 10
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
2) Verify arresters are clean.
3) Verify that ground lead on each device is individually attached to a ground
bus or ground electrode.
b. Electrical Test:
1) Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase terminal-to-
ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the
absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS,
Table 100.1. Replace units that fail to comply with recommended minimum
insulation resistance listed in that table.
2) Perform a watts-loss test. Evaluate watts-loss values by comparison with
similar units and test equipment manufacturer's published data.
3. Liquid-Filled Transformer Field Tests:
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1) Test dew point of tank gases if applicable.
2) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
3) Verify bushings are clean.
4) Verify that alarm, control, and trip settings on temperature and level
indicators are set and operate within manufacturer's recommended settings.
5) Verify that liquid level in tanks is within manufacturer's published tolerances.
6) Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by
manufacturer.
7) Verify presence of transformer surge arresters and that their ratings are as
specified.
8) Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.
b. Electrical Tests:
1) Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-
ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the
absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS,
Table 100.5. Calculate polarization index; the value of the index shall not be
less than 1.0.
2) Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all windings according to
test equipment manufacturer's published data. Maximum winding insulation
power-factor/dissipation-factor values shall be according to manufacturer's
published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply
with NETA ATS, Table 100.3.
3) Measure core insulation resistance at 500-V dc if the core is insulated and
the core ground strap is removable. Core insulation-resistance values shall
not be less than 1 megohm at 500-V dc.
4) Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral,
after energization and prior to loading.
5) Remove a sample of insulating liquid according to ASTM D923, and perform
dissolved-gas analysis according to IEEE C57.104 or ASTM D3612.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 10
3.06 FOLLOW-UP SERVICE

A. Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: After Substantial Completion, if requested by Owner, but not
more than six months after Final Acceptance, perform the following voltage monitoring:
1. During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by Owner, perform seven days of
three-phase voltage recording at the outgoing section of each transformer. Use
voltmeters with calibration traceable to the National Institute of Science and Technology
standards and with a chart speed of not less than 1 inch per hour. Voltage unbalance
greater than 1 percent between phases, or deviation of any phase voltage from the
nominal value by more than plus or minus 5 percent during test period, is unacceptable.
2. Corrective Action: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective action,
as appropriate:
a. Adjust transformer taps.
b. Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility.
3. Retests: Repeat monitoring, after corrective action is performed, until satisfactory results
are obtained.
4. Report:
a. Prepare a written report covering monitoring performed and corrective action
taken.
B. Infrared Inspection: Perform survey during periods of maximum possible loading. Remove all
necessary covers prior to inspection.
1. After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform
infrared inspection of transformer's electrical power connections.
2. Instrument: Inspect distribution systems with imaging equipment capable of detecting a
minimum temperature difference of 1 deg C at 30 deg C.
3. Record of Infrared Inspection: Prepare a certified report that identifies testing technician
and equipment used, and lists results as follows:
a. Description of equipment to be tested.
b. Discrepancies.
c. Temperature difference between area of concern and reference area.
d. Probable cause of temperature difference.
e. Areas inspected. Identify inaccessible and unobservable areas and equipment.
f. Identify load conditions at time of inspection.
g. Provide photographs and thermograms of deficient area.
4. Act on inspection results according to recommendations of NETA ATS, Table 100.18.
Correct possible and probable deficiencies as soon as Owner's operations permit. Retest
until deficiencies are corrected.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
adjust, operate, and maintain systems.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 262213
LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution, dry-type transformers with a nominal primary and secondary rating
of 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.
and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.
2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances,
installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
connection.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments
to structure and to supported equipment.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.
A. Inspection: On receipt, inspect for and note any shipping damage to packaging and transformer.
1. If manufacturer packaging is removed for inspection, and transformer will be stored after
inspection, re-package transformer using original or new packaging materials that provide
protection equivalent to manufacturer's packaging.
B. Storage: Store in a warm, dry, and temperature-stable location in original shipping packaging.
C. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within
the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not
energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of
temperature and humidity.
D. Handling: Follow manufacturer's instructions for lifting and transporting transformers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
following:
LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 262213 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
1. Acme Electric Corporation.

2. Eaton.
4. Hammond Power Solutions Inc.
5. Powersmiths International Corp.
7. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.
A. Seismic Performance: Transformers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
1. The term "withstand" means "the transformer will remain in place without separation of any
parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the transformer will be fully
2.03 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1. Comply with 10 CFR 431 (DOE 2016) efficiency levels.
2. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL.
D. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color-code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints that
are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are easily
identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.
2.04 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in
Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.
1. One leg per phase.
2. Core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10 percent above the nominal
tap voltage.
3. Grounded to enclosure.
D. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1. Coil Material: Copper.
2. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
3. Terminal Connections: Welded.
E. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin
encapsulated.
F. Enclosure: Ventilated.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal out
moisture and air.
2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.
3. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation.
4. Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
a. Finish Color: Gray weather-resistant enamel.
G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps
below normal full capacity.
H. Insulation Class, Smaller Than 30 kVA: 180 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system
with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
I. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system
with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
J. Grounding: Provide ground-bar kit or a ground bar installed on the inside of the transformer
enclosure.
K. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels when factory tested according to
IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:
1. 9.00 kVA and Less: 40 dBA.
2. 9.01 to 30.00 kVA: 45 dBA.
3. 30.01 to 50.00 kVA: 45 dBA for K-factors of 1, 4, and 9.
7. 500.01 to 700.00: 62 dBA for K-factors of 1, 4, and 9.
8. 700.01 to 1000.00: 64 dBA for K-factors of 1, 4, and 9.
2.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-acrylic or melamine plastic signs for each distribution
transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are
specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.
1. Resistance measurements of all windings at rated voltage connections and at all tap
connections.
2. Ratio tests at rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.
3. Phase relation and polarity tests at rated voltage connections.
4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at rated voltage connections.
5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at rated voltage
connections.
6. Applied and induced tensile tests.
7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage.
8. Insulation-Resistance Tests:
a. High-voltage to ground.
b. Low-voltage to ground.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
c. High-voltage to low-voltage.
9. Temperature tests.
B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct prototype sound-level tests on production-line products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for
each transformer.
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at
location of transformer.
E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers for
NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.
F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports.
Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface.
B. Construct concrete bases according to Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete"
and anchor floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and
requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified with concrete.
C. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce
noise generation.
E. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate
sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.
C. Small (Up to 167-kVA Single-Phase or 500-kVA Three-Phase) Dry-Type Transformer Field Tests:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection.

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been
removed.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by manufacturer.
f. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.
g. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as specified.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Measure resistance at each winding, tap, and bolted connection.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground.
Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of
manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Calculate
polarization index: the value of the index shall not be less than 1.0.
c. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions. Test results shall not deviate by more
than one-half percent from either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio. If test
fails, replace the transformer.
d. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral, after
energization and prior to loading.
D. Large (Larger Than 167-kVA Single Phase or 500-kVA Three Phase) Dry-Type Transformer Field
Tests:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been
removed.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by manufacturer.
f. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.
g. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as specified.
a. Measure resistance at each winding, tap, and bolted connection.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground.
Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of
manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Calculate
polarization index: the value of the index shall not be less than 1.0.
c. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all windings.
d. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions. Test results shall not deviate by more
than one-half percent from either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio. If test
fails, replace the transformer.
e. Perform an excitation-current test on each phase.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
f. Perform an applied voltage test on all high- and low-voltage windings to ground. See
IEEE C57.12.91, Sections 10.2 and 10.9.
g. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral, after
energization and prior to loading.
E. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
F. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of
transformer connections.
1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at four months and the other at
11 months after Substantial Completion.
3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning
observations after remedial action.
G. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than
nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 10
SECTION 262413
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
2. Surge protection devices.
3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
4. Identification.
B. Related Requirements
1. Section 260573.19 "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" for arc-flash analysis and arc-flash label
requirements.
A. Product Data: For each switchboard, overcurrent protective device, surge protection device,
ground-fault protector, accessory, and component.
1. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances
and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment
features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.
6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
7. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency,
1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Specification Sections, include the following:
a. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.
b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
c. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective
device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include
selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 10

1. Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type but no fewer than two of each size and type.
2. Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but
no fewer than two of each size and type.
3. Fuses and Fusible Devices for Fused Circuit Breakers: Equal to 10 percent of quantity
installed for each size and type but no fewer than three of each size and type.
4. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type
but no fewer than three of each size and type.
5. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each
size and type but no fewer than three of each size and type.
6. Indicating Lights: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type but no
less than one of each size and type.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained
in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.
A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and install temporary
electric heating (250 W per section) as needed to prevent condensation.
C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NECA 400.
A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures
to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.
B. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC
system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 122 deg F.
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
C. Unusual Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
D. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 10
1. Notify Owner no fewer than fourteen (14) days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with
concrete.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace switchboard enclosures,
buswork, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and factory installed interconnection wiring
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's agrees to repair or replace surge protection devices that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation. Shake-table testing shall comply with ICC-
ES AC156.
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
2.02 SWITCHBOARDS
following:
1. Eaton.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards
including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 10
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
E. Comply with NEMA PB 2.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
G. Comply with UL 891.
H. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:
1. Main Devices: Panel mounted.
2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.
3. Sections front and rear aligned.
I. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand
seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
assembled components or on calculation. Shake-table testing shall comply with ICC-
ES AC156.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit
will be fully operational after the seismic event."
J. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.
K. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish
over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
L. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.
M. Service Entrance Rating: Switchboards intended for use as service entrance equipment shall
contain from one to six service disconnecting means with overcurrent protection, a neutral bus
with disconnecting link, a grounding electrode conductor terminal, and a main bonding jumper.
N. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.
O. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank
compartments.
P. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide phase bus arrangement A, B, C from front to back, top to bottom, and left to right
when viewed from the front of the switchboard.
2. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity.
3. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity with Hard-
drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity circuit-breaker line connections.
4. Copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
5. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as
through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors.
Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuit-
breaker position.
6. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with
mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors.
7. Main-Phase Buses and Equipment-Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of
switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 10
8. Disconnect Links:
a. Isolate neutral bus from incoming neutral conductors.
b. Bond neutral bus to equipment-ground bus for switchboards utilized as service
equipment or separately derived systems.
9. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,
equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus
extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.
Q. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and
appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.
2.03 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
following:
1. Eaton.
3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division.
B. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 1.
C. Features and Accessories:
1. Integral disconnect switch.
2. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor
components.
3. Indicator light display for protection status.
4. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,
for remote monitoring of protection status.
5. Surge counter.
D. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase
shall not be less than 200 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the
ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, three-phase,
four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:
1. Line to Neutral: 700 V for 208Y/120 V.
2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 208Y/120 V.
3. Line to Line: 1000 V for 208Y/120 V.
F. SCCR: Equal or exceed 200 kA.
G. Nominal Rating: 20 kA.
2.04 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting
for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,
field-adjustable trip setting.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 10
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-
replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long and short time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared t response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style
fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse
compartment door.
6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
7. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault
8. MCCB Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID)
lighting circuits.
d. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without
intentional time delay.
e. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall
be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
B. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
C. Fuses are specified in Section 262813 "Fuses."
2.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one
or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NECA 400.
1. Lift or move panelboards with spreader bars and manufacturer-supplied lifting straps
following manufacturer's instructions.
2. Use rollers, slings, or other manufacturer-approved methods if lifting straps are not
furnished.
3. Protect from moisture, dust, dirt, and debris during storage and installation.
4. Install temporary heating during storage per manufacturer's instructions.
B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or
physically damaged.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 10
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work or that affect the performance
of the equipment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NECA 400.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply
with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
1. Install conduits entering underneath the switchboard, entering under the vertical section
where the conductors will terminate. Install with couplings flush with the concrete base.
Extend 2 inches above concrete base after switchboard is anchored in place.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.
6. Anchor switchboard to building structure at the top of the switchboard if required or
recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, straps and brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 0548.16 "Seismic
Controls for Electrical Systems."
E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for
switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures.
Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount
on front of switchboards.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.
G. Install overcurrent protective devices, surge protection devices, and instrumentation.
1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
H. Install spare-fuse cabinet.
I. Comply with NECA 1.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Bond conduits entering underneath the switchboard to the equipment ground bus with a bonding
conductor sized per NFPA 70.
B. Support and secure conductors within the switchboard according to NFPA 70.
C. Extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at
intervals in vertical run.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs
complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 10
B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter
and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Acceptance Testing:
a. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit. Open control and metering circuits within the switchboard,
and remove neutral connection to surge protection and other electronic devices prior
to insulation test. Reconnect after test.
b. Test continuity of each circuit.
2. Test ground-fault protection of equipment for service equipment per NFPA 70.
3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
4. Correct malfunctioning units on-site where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
5. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections, and prepare reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front
panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
6. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573.16 "Coordination
Studies."
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 10
3.08 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent
protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-
based trip, monitoring, and communication units.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 10
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 10
SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
3. Load centers.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.
D. HID: High-intensity discharge.
E. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
F. VPR: Voltage protection rating.
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.
1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and
components indicated.
2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.
2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes,
equipment features, and ratings.
3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection,
knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.
4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
protective devices and auxiliary components.
7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
8. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 10

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Specification
Sections, include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and GFEP Types: Two spares for each panelboard.
3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,
but no fewer than three of each size and type.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC
system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 122 deg F.
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven (7) days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 10
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELBOARDS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards
including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Enclosures: Flush and Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2. Height: 84 inches maximum.
3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box
dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall
have no exposed hardware.
4. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged
trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.
5. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating
with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.
G. Incoming Mains:
1. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main
breaker.
H. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
a. Plating shall run entire length of bus.
b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.
2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective devices
shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.
3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance
applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in gutter.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 10
I. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating.
3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required,
for larger conductors.
4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in the
panelboard.
5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar for
each pole in the panelboard.
6. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
J. NRTL Label: Panelboards or load centers shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority
having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting and
overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards or load centers shall have meter enclosures, wiring,
connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company for exact
requirements.
K. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler
plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: Ten percent, but no less than 6 poles.
L. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current
available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity.
1. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated 240 V or less shall have short-circuit
ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical.
2. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and less than 600 V
shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms
symmetrical.
A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2.03 POWER PANELBOARDS
following:
1. Eaton.
2. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D. Mains: As specified in the drawings.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 10
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-
on circuit breakers or Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires
mechanical release for removal.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-
on circuit breakers or Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires
mechanical release for removal.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
following:
1. Eaton.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C. Mains: As specified in the drawings.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
E. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with
tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door shall
permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and bus
shall remain concealed.
2.05 LOAD CENTERS
following:
1. Eaton.
B. Load Centers: Comply with UL 67.
C. Mains: As specified in the drawings.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
E. Doors: Concealed hinges secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
F. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses.
2.06 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
following:
1. Eaton.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 10
B. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:
a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.
b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,
field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:
a. RMS sensing.
b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip.
c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays.
d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data.
e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and
magnitude of fault that caused the trip.
f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer.
g. Field-Adjustable Settings:
1) Instantaneous trip.
2) Long- and short-time pickup levels.
3) Long and short time adjustments.
4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
6. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole
configuration.
8. Subfeed Circuit Breakers: Vertically mounted.
9. MCCB Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status.
c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings.
d. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
e. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and HID lighting circuits.
f. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
g. Rating Plugs: Three-pole breakers with ampere ratings greater than 150 amperes
shall have interchangeable rating plugs or electronic adjustable trip units.
h. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing with a single handle.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 10
i. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in

on or off position.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
1. Fuses and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 28 13
"Fuses."
2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories:
a. Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.
b. Mechanical cover interlock with a manual interlock override, to prevent the opening
of the cover when the switch is in the on position. The interlock shall prevent the
switch from being turned on with the cover open. The operating handle shall have
lock-off means with provisions for three padlocks.
2.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases,
and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.
B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC
rating.
C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent
protective cover.
1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it from all
other circuits.
D. Circuit Directory: Computer-generated circuit directory mounted inside panelboard door with
transparent plastic protective cover.
1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it from all
other circuits.
2.08 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device
test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that
equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified in
NFPA 70.
B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.
C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have
been subjected to water saturation.
D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 10
B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.
D. Equipment Mounting:
1. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.
2. Comply with requirements for seismic control devices specified in Section 260548.16
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
F. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic
G. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
H. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
I. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
J. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 5/8 inch in depth. Orient steel
slotted supports vertically.
K. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque wrench
or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.
L. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to
ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars,
and connections to separate ground bars.
M. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
N. Stub one 3/4-inch empty conduit for every three, single pole spare circuit breakers or spaces from
panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future.
Where floor is accessible, stub one 3/4-inch empty conduit for every three single, pole spare
circuit breakers or spaces into raised floor space.
O. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
P. Mount spare fuse cabinet in accessible location.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs
complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations.
Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory
inside panelboard door.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate
complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for
E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 10

A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air circuit
breakers stated in NETA ATS, Paragraph 7.6 Circuit Breakers. Perform optional tests.
Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front
panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results, with comparisons of the two scans. Include notation
of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.05 ADJUSTING
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573.16 "Coordination
Studies."
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to maintain
temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 10
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
1. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A.
2. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A.
3. Wall plates.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D. SPD: Surge protective device.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
C. RoHS compliant.
D. Comply with NEMA WD 1.
E. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under
the following conditions:
1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.
2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section.
F. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment:
1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations.
2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
G. Device Color:
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Essential Electrical System: Red.
3. SPD Devices: Blue.
H. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
I. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source
from single manufacturer.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
2.02 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A

A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
following:
a. Eaton (Arrow Hart).
b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
2. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two
pole, three wire, and self-grounding.
3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.
4. Type: Non-feed through.
5. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
2.03 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A
A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
following:
2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
B. Two-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
following:
2. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
C. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
following:
2. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
D. Four-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
following:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6

2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
2.04 WALL PLATES
A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices.
B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-
resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside
of boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70, Article 300,
without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the left.
F. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
G. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
3.02 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not
required.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or
engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or
tags inside outlet boxes.
A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-
display indicators of measurement.
C. Tests for Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 262813
FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:
a. Panelboards.
b. Switchboards.
c. Enclosed controllers.
d. Enclosed switches.
2. Spare-fuse cabinets.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include
the following for each fuse type indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to
accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.
a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,
local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.
b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment
calculations are based.
2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, and ratings.
3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves
(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit in
electronic format suitable for use in coordination software and in PDF format.
5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.
6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Specification Sections include the following:
1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.
2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves
(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse used on the
Project. Submit in electronic format suitable for use in coordination software and in PDF
format.
FUSES 262813 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than
three of each size and type.
A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more
than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
following:
1. Bussmann, an Eaton business.
2. Edison; a brand of Bussmann by Eaton.
3. Littelfuse, Inc.
4. Mersen USA.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source
from single manufacturer.
2.02 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings
consistent with circuit voltages.
1. Type RK-1: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.
2. Type RK-5: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.
3. Type J: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.
4. Type L: 600-V, 601- to 6000-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size
and with system short-circuit current levels.
2.03 SPARE-FUSE CABINET
A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-
coded cam lock and pull.
1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity
minimum.
2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch-high letters on exterior of door.
4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse
manufacturer.
FUSES 262813 - 2
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically
damaged.
B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance, such as rejection features.
C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and
with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to
fuse ratings.
3.02 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Cartridge Fuses:
1. Service Entrance: Class L, time delay Class RK1, fast acting Class RK1, time delay
Class J, fast acting Class T, fast acting.
2. Feeders: Class J, time delay.
3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.
4. Large Motor Branch (601-4000 A): Class L, time delay.
5. Power Electronics Circuits: Class J, high speed.
6. Other Branch Circuits: Class J, time delay.
7. Control Transformer Circuits: Class CC, time delay, control transformer duty.
8. Provide open-fuse indicator fuses or fuse covers with open fuse indication.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing
fuse.
B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s) in location shown on the Drawings or as indicated in the field by
Owner.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door
of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.
FUSES 262813 - 3
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
FUSES 262813 - 4
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 10
SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
4. Enclosures.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
5. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Specification Sections, include the following:
a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and
circuit breakers.
b. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 10
1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than
three of each size and type.
2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 0 deg F and not exceeding 120 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that
1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective
devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed
switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces
and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.
2.03 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
following:
1. Eaton.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty:
1. Single throw.
2. Three pole.
3. 600-V ac.
4. 1200 A and smaller.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 10
5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate

specified fuses.
6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in
closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled
for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.
4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.04 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
following:
1. Eaton.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled
for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.
4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.05 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
following:
1. Eaton.
B. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material. Current carrying
components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area.
C. Circuit breakers shall have a toggle operating mechanism with common tripping of all poles, which
provides quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit-breaker handle shall be over center,
be trip free, and reside in a tripped position between on and off to provide local trip indication.
Circuit-breaker escutcheon shall be clearly marked on and off in addition to providing international

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 10
I/O markings. Equip circuit breaker with a push-to-trip button, located on the face of the circuit
breaker to mechanically operate the circuit-breaker tripping mechanism for maintenance and
testing purposes.
D. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable voltage
systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit breaker.
Circuit breakers shall be 100 percent rated.
E. MCCBs shall be equipped with a device for locking in the isolated position.
F. Lugs shall be suitable for 167 deg F rated wire.
G. Standard: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
H. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for low-level overloads
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for
circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
I. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-
adjustable trip setting.
J. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following
field-adjustable settings:
1. Instantaneous trip.
2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I-squared t response.
K. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with
Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
L. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting
loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.
4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with
mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings,
push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence
current transformer/sensor.
5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
2.06 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply
with environmental conditions at installed location.
B. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be finished with gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited
on cleaned, phosphatized steel (NEMA 250 Type 1) or gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited
on cleaned, phosphatized galvannealed steel (NEMA 250 Types 3R, 12).
C. Operating Mechanism: The circuit-breaker operating handle shall be externally operable with the
operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not the cover. The cover interlock
mechanism shall have an externally operated override. The override shall not permanently
disable the interlock mechanism, which shall return to the locked position once the override is
released. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter
the enclosure in order to override the interlock.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance
with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions
as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
3.03 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the
following environmental ratings.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment
served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances
for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 0548.16 "Seismic
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
E. Install fuses in fusible devices.
F. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
C. Tests and Inspections for Switches:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 10

b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
c. Verify that the unit is clean.
d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation.
e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings.
f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity.
g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two
following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar
bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated
torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or
NETA ATS Table 100.12.
a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published
data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS
Table 100.12.
h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as described in the
Specifications and shown on the Drawings.
i. Verify correct phase barrier installation.
j. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding surfaces.
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance
ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches
by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder. Drop values shall
not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's
published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles
or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage
in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's
published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of
insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended
in manufacturer's published data.
d. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each
other by more than 15 percent.
e. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault Protection
Systems, Low-Voltage."
D. Tests and Inspections for Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 10
a. Verify that equipment nameplate data are as described in the Specifications and
shown on the Drawings.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
d. Verify that the unit is clean.
e. Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two
following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar
bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated
torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or
NETA ATS Table 100.12.
a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published
data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS
Table 100.12.
g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and chutes in unsealed units.
h. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings in accordance with the
coordination study.
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance
ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches
by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground with circuit breaker closed, and across each open pole. Apply
voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of
manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate
values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as
recommended in manufacturer's published data.
c. Perform a contact/pole resistance test. Drop values shall not exceed the high level
of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not
available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by
more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
d. Perform insulation resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.
Applied potential shall be 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V
rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid state components,
follow manufacturer's recommendation. Insulation resistance values shall be no less
than two megohms.
e. Determine the following by primary current injection:
1) Long-time pickup and delay. Pickup values shall be as specified. Trip
characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current
characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 10
2) Short-time pickup and delay. Short-time pickup values shall be as specified.

Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current
characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.
3) Ground-fault pickup and time delay. Ground-fault pickup values shall be as
specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-
current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.
4) Instantaneous pickup. Instantaneous pickup values shall be as specified and
within manufacturer's published tolerances.
f. Test functionality of the trip unit by means of primary current injection. Pickup values
and trip characteristics shall be as specified and within manufacturer's published
tolerances.
g. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils in accordance
with manufacturer's published data. Minimum pickup voltage of the shunt trip and
close coils shall be as indicated by manufacturer.
h. Verify correct operation of auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators; zone
interlocking; electrical close and trip operation; trip-free, anti-pump function; and trip
unit battery condition. Reset all trip logs and indicators. Investigate units that do not
function as designed.
i. Verify operation of charging mechanism. Investigate units that do not function as
designed.
4. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit
breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable
scanner.
enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide
calibration record for device.
E. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
1. Test procedures used.
2. Include identification of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker tested and describe test
results.
3. List deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.07 ADJUSTING
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 26 0573.16 "Coordination
Studies."

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 10

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 10

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 12
SECTION 262923
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes separately enclosed, preassembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less,
for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).
B. CPT: Control power transformer.
C. DDC: Direct digital control.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. LED: Light-emitting diode.
F. NC: Normally closed.
G. NO: Normally open.
H. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
I. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.
J. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
K. VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.
A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated.
1. Include dimensions and finishes for VFCs.
B. Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated.
1. Include mounting and attachment details.
connection.
A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Required working clearances and required area above and around VFCs.
2. Show VFC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements.
3. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.
4. Indicate field measurements.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 12
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for each VFC, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
1. Certificate of compliance.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based,
and their installation requirements.
D. Product Certificates: For each VFC from manufacturer.
E. Harmonic Analysis Report: Provide Project-specific calculations and manufacturer's statement
of compliance with IEEE 519.
F. Source quality-control reports.
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency, operation, and
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"
include the following:
a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic
circuit breaker and motor-circuit protector trip settings.
b. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.
c. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming
microprocessor control modules.
d. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and
status and alarm points.
e. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been
installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor
nameplate, full-load currents.
f. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after
motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for
motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.
1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than three of each size and type.
2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but
no fewer than two of each size and type.
3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.
4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller
installed.
5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor
installed.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 12

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
testing.
A. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside controllers and install temporary electric heating, with at
least 250 W per controller.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs,
including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
following:
1. ABB Low Voltage HVAC Drives.
2. Danfoss Inc.
A. General Requirements for VFCs:
1. VFCs and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
2. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C.
B. Application: variable torque.
C. VFC Description: Variable-frequency motor controller, consisting of power converter that
employs pulse-width-modulated inverter, factory built and tested in an enclosure, with integral
disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL
as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of
one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.
1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors, as defined
by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed
Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors
Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both."
2. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1,
Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors."
3. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL
D. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection
used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.
E. Output Rating: Three phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout
voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage.
F. Unit Operating Requirements:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 12
1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFC input voltage rating.
2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 3 percent.
3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating.
4. Minimum Efficiency: 97 percent at 60 Hz, full load.
5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or speed
condition.
6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65 kA.
7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 32 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
8. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).
9. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet.
10. Vibration Withstand: Comply with NEMA ICS 61800-2.
11. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8
times the base load current for three seconds.
12. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz.
13. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent.
14. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz.
15. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.
G. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 16 bit, isolated from all power circuits.
H. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1
speed range.
1. Signal: Electrical.
I. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.
4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.
5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.
J. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:
1. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of the VFC, complying with
UL 1449 SPD, Type 1 or Type 2.
2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to
a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.
3. Under- and overvoltage trips.
4. Inverter overcurrent trips.
5. VFC and Motor-Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal
protection system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for
providing VFC overtemperature and motor-overload alarm and trip; settings selectable
via the keypad.
6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands.
7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.
8. Loss-of-phase protection.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 12
9. Reverse-phase protection.
10. Short-circuit protection.
11. Motor-overtemperature fault.
K. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an
interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time
between restart attempts.
L. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption
until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and
engaged.
M. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFC into rotating loads spinning in either
direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive,
motor, or load.
N. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the
minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.
O. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on
output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow
speeds.
P. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: UL 489, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker
NEMA KS 1, fusible switch with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.
1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFC input current rating.
2. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating or
VFC input current rating, whichever is larger.
3. Auxiliary Contacts: NO or NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open.
4. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with circuit-breaker handle.
5. NC alarm contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.
A. Seismic Performance: VFCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7. The designated VFCs shall be tested and certified by an NRTL as
meeting the ICC-ES AC 156 test procedure requirements.
when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2.04 CONTROLS AND INDICATION
A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:
1. Power on.
2. Run.
3. Overvoltage.
4. Line fault.
5. Overcurrent.
6. External fault.
B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and
plain-English-language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying,
operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.
1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND,
OFF, and AUTO modes.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 12
2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and
password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view,
operate, and service.
a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at
VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote
source.
C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:
1. Real-time clock with current time and date.
2. Running log of total power versus time.
3. Total run time.
4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.
D. Indicating Devices: Digital display and additional readout devices as required, mounted flush in
VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including, but not limited to:
1. Output frequency (Hz).
2. Motor speed (rpm).
3. Motor status (running, stop, fault).
4. Motor current (amperes).
5. Motor torque (percent).
6. Fault or alarming status (code).
7. PID feedback signal (percent).
8. DC-link voltage (V dc).
9. Set point frequency (Hz).
10. Motor output voltage (V ac).
E. Control Signal Interfaces:
1. Electric Input Signal Interface:
a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: 0- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc.
b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.
2. Pneumatic Input Signal Interface: 3 to 15 psig.
3. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input
signals from the DDC system for HVAC or other control systems:
a. 0- to 10-V dc.
b. 4- to 20-mA dc.
c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
4. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal(s) (0- to
10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc), which can be configured for any of the following:
a. Output frequency (Hz).
b. Output current (load).
c. DC-link voltage (V dc).
d. Motor torque (percent).
e. Motor speed (rpm).

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 12
f. Set point frequency (Hz).

5. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay outputs
(120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:
a. Motor running.
b. Set point speed reached.
c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent).
d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached.
F. PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in response
to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or
temperature regulation.
1. Number of Loops: One.
G. Interface with DDC System for HVAC: Factory-installed hardware and software shall interface
with DDC system for HVAC to monitor, control, display, and record data for use in processing
reports. VFC settings shall be retained within VFC's nonvolatile memory.
1. Hardwired Points:
a. Monitoring: On-off status.
b. Control: On-off operation.
2. Communication Interface: Comply with ASHRAE 135. Communication shall interface with
DDC system for HVAC to remotely control and monitor lighting from a DDC system for
HVAC operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at
lighting panel shall be available through the DDC system for HVAC.
2.05 OPTIONAL FEATURES
A. Multiple-Motor Capability: VFC suitable for variable-speed service to multiple motors. Overload
protection shuts down VFC and motors served by it, and generates fault indications when
overload protection activates.
1. Configure to allow two or more motors to operate simultaneously at the same speed;
separate overload relay for each controlled motor.
2. Configure to allow two motors to operate separately; operator selectable via local or
remote switch or contact closures; single overload relay for both motors; separate output
magnetic contactors for each motor.
3. Configure to allow two motors to operate simultaneously and in a lead/lag mode, with one
motor operated at variable speed via the power converter and the other at constant
speed via the bypass controller; separate overload relay for each controlled motor.
B. Damper control circuit with end-of-travel feedback capability.
C. Sleep Function: Senses a minimal deviation of a feedback signal and stops the motor. On an
increase in speed-command signal deviation, VFC resumes normal operation.
D. Motor Preheat Function: Preheats motor when idle to prevent moisture accumulation in the
motor.
E. Firefighter's Override (Smoke Purge) Input: On a remote contact closure from the firefighter's
control station or smoke-control fan controller, this password-protected input:
1. Overrides all other local and external inputs (analog/digital, serial communication, and all
keypad commands).
2. Forces VFC to operate motor, without any other run or speed command, at a field-
adjustable, preset speed.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 12
3. Forces VFC to transfer to bypass mode and operate motor at full speed.
4. Causes display of override mode on the VFC display.
5. Reset VFC to normal operation on removal of override signal automatically.
F. Remote Indicating Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.
G. Remote digital operator kit.
H. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of
connecting a printer and a notebook computer.
2.06 ENCLOSURES
A. VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R or Type 4X.
3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
Type 12.
B. Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFC as
"Plenum Rated."
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in
NEMA 250, Type 4, Type 4X, and Type 12 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned
interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.
B. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to
direct and extended sun exposure.
A. Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2.
1. Test each VFC while connected to a motor that is comparable to that for which the VFC
is rated.
2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features
specified.
B. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B. Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before
VFC installation.
D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 12
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating
handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by
bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For
controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers
and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFC.
E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in
Section 262813 "Fuses."
F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven
equipment.
G. Comply with NECA 1.
3.03 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Comply
with requirements in Section 262726 “Wiring Devices.”
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where applicable.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices
that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.
2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for
safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature
cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate.
3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control
sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover
instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
B. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 12
D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and
adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
2. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor supply,
feeder, and control circuits.
4. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated
voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s).
5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
6. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed
Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
E. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and
describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
observations made after remedial action.
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event
recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to
Substantial Completion.
B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay
pickup and trip ranges.
C. Adjust the trip settings of instantaneous-only circuit breakers and thermal-magnetic circuit
breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to 6 times the motor
nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-
down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until
motors start without tripping. Do not exceed 8 times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for
NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow
starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings.
D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers.
E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573.16 "Coordination
Studies."
F. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.
B. Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial
Completion.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 11 of 12
3.09 DEMONSTRATION
adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 12 of 12

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 264113
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes lightning protection system for ordinary structures.
B. Vendors Detailed Shop Drawings:
1. Include layouts of the lightning protection system, with details of the components to be
used in the installation.
2. Include raceway locations needed for the installation of conductors.
3. Details of air terminals, ground rods, ground rings, conductor supports, splices, and
terminations, including concealment requirements.
4. Include roof attachment details, coordinated with roof installation.
5. Calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of metal bodies.
A. Coordination Drawings: Lightning protection system Shop Drawings, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Lightning protection cabling attachments to roofing systems and accessories.
2. Lightning protection strike termination device attachment to roofing systems, coordinated
with the roofing system manufacturer.
3. Lightning protection system components penetrating roofing and moisture protection
systems and system components, coordinated with the roofing system manufacturer.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of roof adhesive for attaching the roof-mounted air terminal
assemblies, approved by the roofing-material manufacturer.
D. Field quality-control reports.
A. Maintenance Data: For lightning protection system to include in maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include
the following:
a. Dimensioned site plan showing dimensioned route of the ground loop conductor and
the ground rod locations. Comply with requirements of Section 017839 "Project
Record Documents."
b. A system testing and inspection record, listing the results of inspections and ground
resistance tests, as recommended by NFPA 780, Annex D.
B. Completion Certificate:
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 264113 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
1. UL Master Label Certificate.

A. Installer Qualifications: UL-listed installer, category OWAY or LPI Master Installer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
following:
1. Advanced Lightning Technology, Ltd.
3. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc.
4. National Lightning Protection.
5. nVent (ERICO).
6. Preferred Lightning Protection.
7. Robbins Lightning, Inc.
8. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.
A. NFPA Lightning Protection Standard: Comply with NFPA 780 requirements for Class I buildings.
B. Lightning Protection Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled by a qualified
testing agency as complying with UL 96, and marked for intended location and application.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Air Terminals:
1. Copper unless otherwise indicated.
2. 5/8-inch diameter by 24 inches long.
3. Pointed tip.
4. Threaded base support.
B. Class 1 Main Conductors:
1. Stranded Copper: 57,400 circular mils in diameter.
C. Secondary Conductors:
1. Stranded Copper: 26,240 circular mils in diameter.
D. Ground Loop Conductor: Stranded copper.
E. Ground Rods:
1. Material: Copper-clad steel.
2. Diameter: 3/4 inch.
3. Rods shall be not less than 120 inches long.
F. Conductor Splices and Connectors: Compression fittings that are installed with hydraulically
operated tools, or exothermic welds, approved for use with the class type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to NFPA 780.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid bends less
than 90 degrees and 8 inches in radius and narrow loops.
C. Conceal conductors within normal view from exterior locations at grade within 200 feet of building.
Comply with requirements for concealed systems in NFPA 780.
1. Roof penetrations required for down conductors and connections to structural-steel
framework shall be made using listed through-roof fitting and connector assemblies with
solid rods and appropriate roof flashings. Use materials approved by the roofing
manufacturer for the purpose. Conform to the methods and materials required at roofing
penetrations of the lightning protection components to ensure compatibility with the roofing
specifications and warranty.
2. Install conduit where necessary to comply with conductor concealment requirements.
3. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with adhesive manufacturer's
written instructions.
D. Ground Ring Electrode: The conductor shall be not less than the main-size lightning conductor.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Aboveground concealed connections, and connections in earth or concrete, shall be done by
exothermic welds or by high-compression fittings listed for the purpose.
B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3.03 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the
presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.
B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration or corrosion
of conductors.
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections:
1. Perform inspections as required to obtain a UL Master Label for system.
B. Prepare test and inspection reports and certificates.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 10
SECTION 265119
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following types of LED luminaires:
1. Cylinder.
2. Downlight.
3. Highbay, linear.
4. Highbay, nonlinear.
5. Linear industrial.
6. Lowbay.
7. Recessed, linear.
8. Strip light.
9. Surface mount, linear.
10. Surface mount, nonlinear.
11. Suspended, linear.
12. Suspended, nonlinear.
1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time
switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and
contactors.
2. Section 260926 "Lighting Control Panelboards" for panelboards used for lighting control.
3. Section 260933 "Central Dimming Controls" or Section 260936 "Modular Dimming
Controls" for architectural dimming systems and for fluorescent dimming controls with
dimming ballasts specified in interior lighting Sections.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.
E. LED: Light-emitting diode.
F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.
2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 10
3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.

4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.
5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.
B. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
1. Lamps: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
3. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's
laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
C. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color
consistency among luminaires.
D. Mockups: For interior luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and control
connections.
1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations.
2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering
before shipping.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that
B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according toASCE/SEI 7 Refer to structural specifications for seismic zone requirements.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 10
B. Ambient Temperature: 41 to 104 deg F.
1. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent.
C. Altitude: Sea level to 3000 feet.
2.02 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
B. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels
where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles
when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.
c. CCT and CRI.
C. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.
D. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated
class and division of hazard by an NRTL.
E. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for
indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
F. California Title 24 compliant.
2.03 CYLINDER.
A. Lamp:
1. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.
2. Internal driver.
B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Components are
designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling
accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
C. With integral mounting provisions.
D. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
2. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 10
2.04 DOWNLIGHT.
A. Lamp:
2. Internal driver.
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
C. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
3. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.
2.05 HIGHBAY, LINEAR.
A. Lamp:
2. Internal driver.
C. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
2.06 HIGHBAY, NONLINEAR.
A. Lamp:
2. Internal driver.
C. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
2.07 LINEAR INDUSTRIAL.
A. Lamp:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 10

2. Internal driver.
C. With integral mounting provisions.
D. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
2.08 LOWBAY
A. Lamp:
2. Internal driver.
C. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
2.09 RECESSED, LINEAR.
A. Lamp:
2. Internal driver.
C. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
3. NEMA LE 4.
2.10 STRIP LIGHT.
A. Lamp:
2. Internal driver.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 10
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping of luminaire without use of tools.
Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components
from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
C. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
2.11 SURFACE MOUNT, LINEAR.
A. Lamp:
2. Internal driver.
C. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
2.12 SURFACE MOUNT, NONLINEAR
A. Lamp:
2. Internal driver.
C. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
2.13 SUSPENDED, LINEAR
A. Lamp:
2. Internal driver.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 10
C. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
2.14 SUSPENDED, NONLINEAR
A. Lamp:
2. Internal driver.
C. Standards:
1. RoHS compliant.
2.15 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.
3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Steel:
1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel.

2. ASTM A568/A568M for sheet steel.
C. Stainless Steel:
1. Manufacturer's standard grade.

2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/240M.
D. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.
E. Aluminum: ASTM B209.
2.16 METAL FINISHES
A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 10
2.17 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT
channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as luminaire.
C. Wires: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical
connections before luminaire installation.
3.02 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When
construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new
lamps.
3.03 INSTALLATION
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.
3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.
4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100
percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 10
E. Flush-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secured to outlet box.

2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around
circumference of luminaire.
3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.
F. Wall-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Attached to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to wall structural members.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.
G. Suspended Luminaires:
1. Ceiling Mount:
a. Two 5/32-inch- diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to 10 feet in length.

b. Four-point pendant mount with 5/32-inch- diameter aircraft cable supports
adjustable to 10 feet in length.
c. Hook mount.
2. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
3. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with
approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire
oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.
4. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and wire
support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each
end.
5. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods
to building structure.
H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to any required outlet box.

2. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and
building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
I. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables" for wiring connections.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 10
1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied
conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose.
Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.
1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are
defective.
2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 265213
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Emergency lighting units.
2. Exit signs.
3. Luminaire supports.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered
supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.
D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.
E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting
support.
2. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions.
3. Battery and charger for light units.
4. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency,
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Luminaire-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency lighting units.
Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265213 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6

A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's
laboratory that is accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for
Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
before shipping.
1.09 WARRANTY
1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace
components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Emergency Power Unit Batteries: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year and prorated warranty for the
remaining four years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
according to . Refer to structural specifications for seismic zone requirements.
1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any
parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully
operational during and after the seismic event."
2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to
comply with UL 924.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.
E. Comply with UL 1598 for fluorescent luminaires.
F. Lamp Base: Comply with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
G. Bulb Shape: Complying with ANSI C79.1.
H. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory
mounted within luminaire body and compatible with ballast.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate luminaire continuously at a lumen output as indicated in
the drawings upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter
unit and switched circuit to luminaire ballast.
2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to
80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery
when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on
charger.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
3. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire or
entering ceiling space.
a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operability.
b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer
relay.
6. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates
coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit
triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of
either proper or failed emergency response.
7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required
test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an
integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.
2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units.
2.04 EXIT SIGNS
A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance,
and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each luminaire; 20,000 hours of rated lamp
life.
2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Internal emergency power unit.
4. Master/Remote Sign Configurations:
a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and
provide additional capacity in LED power supply for power connection to remote
unit.
b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except
omit power supply, battery, and test features. Arrange to receive full power
requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit as
a unified system.
C. Self-Luminous Signs:
1. Powered by tritium gas, with universal bracket for flush-ceiling, wall, or end mounting.
Signs shall be guaranteed by manufacturer to maintain the minimum brightness
requirements in UL 924 for 10 years.
2. Use strontium oxide aluminate compound to store ambient light and release the stored
energy when the light is removed. Include universal bracket for flush-ceiling, wall, or end
mounting.
2.05 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access:
1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions.
2. Designed to permit relamping without use of tools.
3. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling
C. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Tempered Fresnel glass Prismatic glass Diffuse glass Clear glass Prismatic acrylic or
Clear, UV-stabilized acrylic.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
3. Acrylic: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other
changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Housings:
1. Extruded aluminum housing and heat sink.
2. Clear anodized finish.
E. Conduit: Flexible metallic conduit, minimum 3/4 inch in diameter.
2.06 METAL FINISHES
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.07 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
B. Support Wires: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where emergency lighting
luminaires will be installed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
D. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit.

3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of
ceiling or wall.
percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent
of luminaire weight.
E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Attached to structural members in walls.
2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.
F. Suspended Luminaire Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with
approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire
oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.
3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and wire
support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each
end.
4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods
to building structure.
G. Ceiling Grid Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to any required outlet box.
2. Secure emergency power unit using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations,
spaced near corners of emergency power unit.
3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and
building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
A. Perform startup service:
1. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour
discharge test.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 265619
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp
technology.
2. Luminaire supports.
3. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.
1. Section 265613 "Lighting Poles and Standards" for poles and standards used to support
exterior lighting equipment.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
B. CRI: Color rendering index.
C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.
E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire.
1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.
3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaire.
4. Lamps, include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.
5. Wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal wiring.
6. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachment is suitable
for components involved.
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.
2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
connection.
C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
2. Provide a list of all photoelectric relay types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes.
1. Lamps: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Glass, Acrylic, and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: One for every 100 of
each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers'
laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
C. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color
consistency among luminaires.
D. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by
manufacturer.
prior to shipping.
A. Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with luminaire
installation.
B. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by Architect prior to the start of luminaire
installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components.
b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: 2 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any
parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2.02 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of
hazard by an NRTL.
C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.
D. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.
E. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.
F. CRI of minimum 70. CCT of 3000 K.
G. L70 lamp life of 50,000 hours.
H. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
I. Internal driver.
J. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use.
K. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum. Form and support to prevent warping
and sagging.
C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or
replacing lenses.
D. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Acrylic Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and
other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
E. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion
lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
G. Housings:
1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in
use.
2. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Labels shall be
located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing
angles when lamps are in place.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage and coating.
c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.04 FINISHES
A. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, to remove dirt, oil,
grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish
surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated
steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8.
2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of
primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.
2.05 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit
C. Examine walls, roofs, and canopy ceilings and overhang ceilings for suitable conditions where
luminaires will be installed.
3.02 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When
construction is substantially complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install
new lamps.
B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the
application and approved by manufacturer.
D. Fasten luminaire to structural support.
E. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.
2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.
3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface.
percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
1. Attached to structural members in walls.

G. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.
H. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.
I. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.
J. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.
K. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables" and Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring
connections and wiring methods.
3.04 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar
metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In
concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied
with a 50 percent overlap.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.
1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
C. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 270526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Grounding conductors.
2. Grounding connectors.
3. Grounding busbars.
4. Grounding rods.
5. Grounding labeling.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. TBC: Telecommunications bonding conductor.
B. SBB: Secondary bonding busbar.
C. PBB: Primary bonding busbar.
D. Service Provider: The operator of a service that provides telecommunications transmission
delivered over access provider facilities.
A. As-Built Data: Plans showing as-built locations of grounding and bonding infrastructure,
including the following:
1. Ground rods.
2. Ground and roof rings.
3. TBC, PBB, SBBs, and routing of their bonding conductors.
B. Qualification Data: For installation supervisor, and field inspector.
1.06 TBCSBBQUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of ITS
Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at
Project site.
2. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as a designer RCDD to perform the on-site
inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
C. Comply with TIA-607-C.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
2.02 CONDUCTORS
2. Panduit Corp.
3. TE Connectivity Ltd.
B. Comply with UL 486A-486B.
C. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation,
insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83.
1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19-
strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire.
2. Cable Tray Equipment Grounding Wire: No. 6 AWG.
D. Cable Tray Grounding Jumper:
1. Not smaller than No. 6 AWG and not longer than 12 inches. If jumper is a wire, it shall
have a crimped grounding lug with two holes and long barrel for two crimps. If jumper is a
flexible braid, it shall have a one-hole ferrule. Attach with grounding screw or connector
provided by cable tray manufacturer.
E. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4 inch in
diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
2.03 CONNECTORS
following:
1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.
2. Chatsworth Products, Inc.
4. Panduit Corp.
B. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70
for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply
with UL 486A-486B.
C. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor
when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.
1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.
D. Signal Reference Grid Connectors: Combination of compression wire connectors, access floor
grounding clamps, bronze U-bolt grounding clamps, and copper split-bolt connectors, designed
for the purpose.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
E. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression or exothermic-type,

mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch centers for a
two-bolt connection to the busbar.
F. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.04 GROUNDING BUSBARS
3. Panduit Corp.
B. PBB: Predrilled, wall-mounted, rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in
cross section, and a minimum of 23 inches in length. The busbar shall be NRTL listed for use as
TMGB and shall comply with TIA-607-C.
1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.
2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide a 4-inch clearance to access the rear
of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel.
3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in
600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.
C. SBB: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section,
and a minimum of 13.5 inches in length. The busbar shall be for wall mounting, shall be NRTL
listed as complying with UL 467, and shall comply with TIA-607-C.
1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.
2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch clearance to access
the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel.
3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in
600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.
2.05 GROUND RODS
following:
2. TE Connectivity Ltd.
B. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter.
2.06 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements for identification products in Section 270553 "Identification for
Communications Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with
requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance
of grounding and bonding of the electrical system.
B. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of TBC connection.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
D. Proceed with connection of the TBC only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance,
and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that
each element is connected to at least two others.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
C. Comply with TIA-607-C.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
1. The bonding conductors between the SBB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings
shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG.
2. The bonding conductors between the TMGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings
shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2 AWG minimum.
C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
D. Conductor Support:
1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches.
E. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:
1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point,
and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the
diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees.
2. Install without splices.
3. Support at not more than 36-inch intervals.
4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch PVC conduit until conduit enters a
telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a
plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise
indicated.
a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond
the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with
requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems," and
bond both ends of the conduit to a SBB.
3.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. The TBC between the TMGB and the ac service equipment ground shall not be smaller than
No. 3/0 AWG.
3.05 GROUNDING BUSBARS
A. Indicate locations of grounding busbars on Drawings. Install busbars horizontally, on insulated
spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 12 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
B. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of
doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.
3.06 CONNECTIONS
A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in
that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG.
B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars.
C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions and as follows:
1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector.
2. Pretwist the conductor.
3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.
D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor.
E. Interconnections: Interconnect all SBBs with the PBB with the telecommunications backbone
conductor. If more than one PBB is installed, interconnect PBBs using the grounding equalizer
conductor. The telecommunications backbone conductor and grounding equalizer conductor
size shall not be less than 2 kcmils/linear foot of conductor length, up to a maximum size of
No. 3/0 AWG unless otherwise indicated.
F. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of
enclosures to the telecommunications bonding and grounding system. Install vertically mounted
rack grounding busbar unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with the busbar. Bond
the equipment grounding busbar to the SBB No. 2 AWG bonding conductors.
G. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within
the room or space, bond each SBB and TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame.
H. Electrical Power Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications
equipment is located in the same room or space, bond each SBB to the ground bar of the
panelboard.
I. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the SBB in communications rooms and
spaces. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2 when grounding shielded balanced twisted-
pair cables.
J. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or
rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding
conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a
supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.
K. Access Floors: Bond all metal parts of access floors to the SBB.
L. Equipment Room Signal Reference Grid: Provide a low-impedance path between
telecommunications cabinets, equipment racks, and the reference grid, using No. 6 AWG
bonding conductors.
1. Install the conductors in grid pattern on 4-foot centers, allowing bonding of one pedestal
from each access floor tile.
2. Bond the SBB of the equipment room to the reference grid at two or more locations.
3. Bond all conduits and piping entering the equipment room to the SBB at the perimeter of
the room.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
1. Label PBBs) with "fs-PBB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the
space containing the PBB.
2. Label SBB(s) with "fs-SBB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the
space containing the SBB.
3. Label the TBC and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point:
"WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE
OR DISCONNECT!"
1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth ground-resistance tester,
taking two-point bonding measurements in each telecommunications equipment room
containing a TMGB and a SBB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM.
Conduct tests with the facility in operation.
a. Measure the resistance between the busbar and the nearest available grounding
electrode. The maximum acceptable value of this bonding resistance is 100
milliohms.
3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-scale of not
more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus
2.0 percent.
a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system
electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to the
TMGBSBB. Maximum acceptable ac current level is 1 A.
D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the TBC exceeds 5 ohms, notify
Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 12
SECTION 270528
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Metal conduits and fittings.
2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.
3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings.
4. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
5. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters.
6. Metallic surface pathways.
7. Nonmetallic surface pathways.
8. Tele-power poles.
9. Hooks.
11. Polymer-concrete handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
12. Fiberglass handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D. RTRC: Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.
A. Product data for the following:
1. Surface pathways
2. Wireways and fittings.
3. Tele-power poles.
5. Underground handholes and boxes.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details. Shop drawings shall also show pathway routing and coordination with
structural members, HVAC and plumbing items, and architectural features.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Description: Metal raceway of circular cross section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 12
1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.

2. Republic Conduit.
4. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
5. Wheatland Tube Company.
C. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory,
and marked for intended location and application.
2. Comply with TIA-569-D.
D. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
E. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.
F. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
G. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated GRC.
1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
H. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and
NFPA 70.
2. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel or die cast.
b. Type: Set screw or compression.
3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for
environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities
having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and
protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Description: Nonmetallic raceway of circular section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings.
1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
2. Carlon; a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation.
3. Dura-Line.
4. RACO; Hubbell.
C. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location
and application.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 12

D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
E. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.
F. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14.
G. Fittings: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
H. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.
2.03 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS
A. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway with a circular cross section, approved
for riser installation unless otherwise indicated.
following:
2. Dura-Line.
3. Maxcell.
C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and
application.
D. Comply with TIA-569-D.
2.04 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Description: Sheet metal trough of rectangular cross section fabricated to required size and
shape, without holes or knockouts, and with hinged or removable covers.
3. MonoSystems, Inc.
C. General Requirements for Metal Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:
1. Comply with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized
according to NFPA 70.
2. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.
F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.05 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without
holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with
captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have
stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 12

1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc.
C. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location
and application.
D. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down
straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
E. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.
2.06 SURFACE METAL PATHWAYS
A. Description: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers, complying with UL 5.
following:
1. Panduit Corp.
2. Wiremold / Legrand.
C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.
D. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and
application.
E. Comply with TIA-569-D.
2.07 SURFACE NONMETALLIC PATHWAYS:
A. Description: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid
PVC.
following:
1. Panduit Corp.
C. Finish: Texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
D. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.
E. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and
application.
F. Comply with TIA-569-D.
2.08 TELE-POWER POLES:
A. Description: Prefabricated, finished metal pole with prewired power and communications
outlets.
2. Panduit Corp.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 12
C. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked-enamel finish.
D. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,
mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as required for
complete system.
E. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and
application.
F. Comply with TIA-569-D.
2.09 HOOKS
A. Description: Prefabricated sheet metal cable supports for telecommunications cable.
following:
2. Caddy.
3. Panduit Corp.
C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and
application.
D. Comply with TIA-569-D.
E. Galvanized steel.
F. J shape.
A. Description: Enclosures for communications.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:
2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for use in wet locations.
3. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
4. Device Box Dimensions: 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep.
5. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
E. Metal Floor Boxes:
1. Material: sheet metal.
2. Shape: Rectangular.
3. Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
F. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round or rectangular.
1. Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 12
G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures:
a. Material: Plastic Fiberglass.
b. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
J. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.11 FIBERGLASS HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Description: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of polymer
concrete reinforced concrete.
1. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions.
2. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.
3. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
C. General Requirements for Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes:
1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.
2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an
NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.
3. Comply with TIA-569-D and SCTE 77.
D. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with integral closed bottom unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load
rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
F. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
G. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS".
H. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for
secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
I. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and
pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 12
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance
with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.
1. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing
agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by
manufacturer.
2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying
with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PATHWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: IMC EMT RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC Type EPC-80-PVC, direct buried.
4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT RNC identified for such use.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: IMC. Pathway locations include the
following:
a. Loading dock.
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
c. Mechanical rooms.
d. Gymnasiums
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.
6. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental
Air: Plenum-type, communications-cable pathway EMT.
7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT.
8. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or
Communications Cable: EMT.
9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic
units in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size for copper and aluminum cables, and 1 inch for
optical-fiber cables.
D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type
of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing
conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in
thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. EMT: Use set-screw or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 12
E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.
G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the following standards for installation requirements except where requirements on
Drawings or in this Section are stricter:
1. NECA 1.
2. NECA/BICSI 568.
3. TIA-569-D.
4. NECA 101
5. NECA 102.
6. NECA 105.
7. NECA 111.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.
C. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping
materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
D. Comply with requirements in Section 270529 "Hangers and Supports for Communications
Systems" for hangers and supports.
E. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications
Pathways and Cabling" for sleeves and sleeve seals for communications.
F. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.
G. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.
H. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
I. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within
12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.
J. Conceal rigid conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install
conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
L. Pathways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.
2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings. Comply with requirements for expansion joints specified in this article.
3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
M. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 9 of 12
N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
O. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive
compound prior to assembly.
P. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.
Q. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure, to assure a continuous ground path.
R. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll
cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.
S. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
Secure pull wire, so it cannot fall into conduit. Cap pathways designated as spare alongside
pathways in use.
T. Surface Pathways:
1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated
on Drawings.
2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.
3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section.
Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue
are not acceptable support methods.
U. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and
nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
1. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway
unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes
or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these
requirements.
V. Install pathway-sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway-
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
W. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals, so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
pathways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
X. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.
Y. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.
Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT that is located where environmental

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 10 of 12
temperature change may exceed 100 deg F, and that has straight-run length that
exceeds 100 feet.
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each
of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
Z. Hooks:
1. Size to allow a minimum of 25 percent future capacity without exceeding design capacity
limits.
2. Shall be supported by dedicated support wires. Do not use ceiling grid support wire or
support rods.
3. Hook spacing shall allow no more than 6 inches of slack. The lowest point of the cables
shall be no less than 6 inches adjacent to ceilings, mechanical ductwork and fittings,
luminaires, power conduits, power and telecommunications outlets, and other electrical
and communications equipment.
4. Space hooks no more than 5 feet o.c.
5. Provide a hook at each change in direction.
AA. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually
indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box
BB. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
CC. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls, so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
DD. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
EE. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
FF. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
GG. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.03 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways
and Cabling."

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 11 of 12
3.04 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 12 of 12

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 270529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Steel slotted support systems for communication raceways.
2. Conduit and cable support devices.
3. Support for conductors in vertical conduit.
4. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints.
5. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners,
mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and
hanger rods.
6. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.
1. Section 270548 "Seismic Controls for Communications Systems" for products and
installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
1. The term "withstand" means "the supported equipment and systems will remain in place
without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
system will be fully operational after the seismic event."
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
1. Flame Rating: Class 1.
2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.
2.02 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-
diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface.
following:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270529 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4

b. ERICO International Corporation.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
d. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.
2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
3. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel.
4. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches.
5. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
6. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
7. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel clamps, hangers, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded
body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored communications conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces
as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable
iron.
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
of the following:
1) Hilti, Inc.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel for use in hardened
portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
of the following:
1) B-line, an Eaton business.
2) Hilti, Inc.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS
Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for
attached structural element.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.03 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes
and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and
supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:
1. NECA 1.
2. NECA/BICSI 568.
3. TIA-569-D.
4. NECA 101
5. NECA 105.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping
materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
C. Comply with requirements for pathways specified in Section 270528 "Pathways for
D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in
diameter.
E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or
other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future
without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT IMC and RMC
may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength
200 lb.
C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
communications items and their supports to building structural elements by the following
methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Use approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion
anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchor fasteners.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated-driven threaded studs, provided with lock

washers and nuts, may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or
greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than
4 inches thick.
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with
MSS SP-69.
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for
reinforcing bars.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated
metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor communications materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.04 PAINTING
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123
"Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 270536
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Ladder cable tray.
2. Wire-mesh cable tray.
3. Cable tray accessories.
4. Warning signs.
1. Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" for cable trays and accessories
serving electrical systems.
A. Product Data: For each type of cable tray.
1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.
1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and
sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate
components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate
connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.
2. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray
and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:
a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
b. Clearances for access above and to sides of cable trays.
c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to Structural drawings
1. The term "withstand" means "the cable trays will remain in place without separation of
any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes in cable tray installed outdoors.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS
A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended
location, application, and grounding.
1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer.
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270536 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
B. Structural Performance: See articles for individual cable tray types for specific values for the
following parameters:
1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the
indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to
NEMA VE 1.
2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray.
3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities.
2.03 LADDER CABLE TRAY
1. Chatsworth Products.
B. Description:
1. Configuration: Two longitudinal side rails with transverse rungs swaged or welded to side
rails, complying with NEMA VE 1.
2. Width: indicated on Drawings.
3. Straight Section Lengths: 10 feet, except where shorter lengths are required to facilitate
tray assembly.
4. Rung Spacing: 9 inches o.c.
5. Minimum Cable-Bearing Surface for Rungs: 7/8-inch width with radius edges.
6. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails.
7. Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load, with
a safety factor of 1.5, plus a 200-lb concentrated load, when tested according to
NEMA VE 1.
8. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts.
9. Splice-Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated
loading capacity of cable tray.
C. Materials and Finishes:
1. Steel:
a. Straight Section and Fitting Side Rails and Rungs: Steel complies with the
minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A1008/A1008M, Grade 33, Type 2.
b. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A1011/A1011M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1.
c. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of
ASTM A510/A510M, Grade 1008.
d. Finish: Powder-coat enamel paint.
1) Powder-Coat Enamel: Cable tray manufacturer's recommended primer and
corrosion-inhibiting treatment, with factory-applied powder-coat paint.
2) Epoxy-Resin Prime Coat: Cold-curing epoxy primer, MPI# 101.
3) Epoxy-Resin Topcoat: Epoxy, cold-cured gloss, MPI# 77.
4) Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F1136.
2.04 WIRE-MESH CABLE TRAY
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Chatsworth Products.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
B. Description:
1. Configuration: Galvanized- steel wire mesh, complying with NEMA VE 1.
2. Width: indicated on Drawings.
3. Straight Section Lengths: 10 feet, except where shorter lengths are required to facilitate
tray assembly.
4. Structural Performance: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load, with a safety
factor of 1.5, plus a 200-lb concentrated load, when tested according to NEMA VE 1.
5. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts.
6. Splice-Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated
loading capacity of cable tray.
C. Materials and Finishes:
1. Steel:
a. Straight Sections and Fittings: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical
properties of ASTM A1008/A1008M, Grade 33, Type 2.
b. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A1011/A1011M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1.
c. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of
ASTM A510/A510M, Grade 1008.
d. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, complying with ASTM A123/A123M,
Class B2.
1) Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B633.
e. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, complying with ASTM A653/A653M,
G90.
1) Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B633 Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F1136.
f. Finish: Electrogalvanized after fabrication, complying with ASTM B633.
1) Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B633.
g. .
2.05 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and
finishes as cable tray.
B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray.
C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
2.06 WARNING SIGNS
A. Comply with requirements for identification in Section 270553 "Identification for
B. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- high, black letters on yellow background with legend "Warning! Not To Be
Used as Walkway, Ladder, or Support for Ladders or Personnel."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION
A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2.
B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems,
barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses,
cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
C. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are
accessible for inspection and adjustment.
D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.
E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square neck-carriage bolts and locknuts.
F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints, based on
Structural drawings.
G. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200
lb. Comply with requirements in Section 270529 "Hangers and Supports for Communications
Systems."
H. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide
clearances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the
load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.
I. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished
by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by
application.
J. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
K. Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric
loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.
L. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one cable tray
splice between supports.
M. Support center support hangers trapeze hangers for wire-basket trays with 3/8-inch- diameter
rods.
N. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment.
Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment
enclosure.
O. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray
runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps
according to applicable standard.
P. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings.
Q. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings.
R. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Section 078413
"Penetration Firestopping."
S. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of
fire and smoke barriers.
T. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables.
U. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and
data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.
V. Install permanent covers, if used, after installing cable. Install cover clamps according to
NEMA VE 2.
W. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps.
X. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation.
3.02 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING
A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with
requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems."

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
B. Cable trays shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with
listed bonding jumpers.
C. When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely
remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing
splice-to-grounding bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials
recommended by cable tray manufacturer.
D. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized
according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors."
3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected.
B. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to
equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables
independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and
enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches.
C. Tie MI cables down every 36 inches where required to provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 72
inches elsewhere.
D. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable trays.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the
connections are completed.
B. Connect pathways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1.
1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in
cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may
cause or have caused damage.
2. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the
cable tray.
3. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of tray ventilation.
4. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical
continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque
in suspect areas.
5. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers.
6. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace
with specified hardware.
7. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that
all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for
continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed cable trays and cables.
1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against
falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk
of damage is over.
2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable
tray manufacturer.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 270544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Sleeve-seal fittings.
4. Grout.
5. Silicone sealants.
1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-
resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without
penetrating items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves:
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain
ends.
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel
sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with
tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet.
2. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side
larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more
sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
2.03 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in
concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.
the following:
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND 270544 - 1

CABLING
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
a. HOLDRITE.
2.04 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated
walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.05 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below.
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces that are not fire rated.
B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit
Floors and Walls:
1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly
between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;
protect material while curing.
2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway
or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different
clearance.
4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are
used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush
with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above
finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
assemblies.
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-
type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

CABLING
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves
to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing
sleeve-seal system.
3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway
entries into building.
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or
cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical
sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts
against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

CABLING
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4

CABLING
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 270548.16
SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
5. Adhesive anchor bolts.
1. Section 270528.29 "Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems" for commonly
used supports and installation requirements.
type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by OSHPD an agency acceptable
requirements.
A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with
other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.
Communications components include:
1. Uninterruptible power supplies.
2. Racks.
3. Frames.
4. Cabinets.
5. Cable tray.
6. Conduits.
B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
conduct the testing indicated and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270548.16 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
more stringent.
D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis. They shall
bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval, showing maximum
seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on
calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing
are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) that support seismic-
restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: As indicated in the Structural notes on drawings.
2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: As indicated in
the Structural notes on drawings.
3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): As indicated in
the Structural notes on drawings.
4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: As indicated in the
Structural notes on drawings.
A. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels
other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in
tension, compression, and torsion forces.
A. Restraint Cables: ASTM A603 galvanized or ASTM A492 stainless-steel cables. End
connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for
restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
A. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
B. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to
C. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
D. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and
size of attachment devices used.
E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6

following:
2. Hilti, Inc.
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488.
2.06 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS
following:
1. Hilti, Inc.
B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane
methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.
Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless
steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as
tested according to ASTM E488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations
before installation.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps
approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES OSHPD an agency
B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings
to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic
forces.
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits.
3.03 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and
formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service
member of ICC-ES or OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
providing required submittals for component.
D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
F. Drilled-in Anchors:
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
design strength.
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench.
applications.
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways
where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different
structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is anchored to a
different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.
Architect.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6

C. Seismic controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 271100
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Backboards.
3. Power strips.
1. Section 270536 "Cable Trays for Communications Systems" for cable trays and
accessories.
2. Section 271313 "Communications Copper Backbone Cabling" for copper data cabling
associated with system panels and devices.
3. Section 271323 "Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling" for optical-fiber data
cabling associated with system panels and devices.
4. Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for copper data cabling
5. Section 271523 "Communications Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling" for coaxial data
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Access Provider: An operator that provides a circuit path or facility between the service provider
and user. An access provider can also be a service provider.
B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. RCDD: Registered communications distribution designer.
D. Service Provider: The operator of a telecommunications transmission service delivered through
access provider facilities.
E. SBB: Secondary bonding bus bar.
F. PBB: Primary bonding bus bar.
and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
connection.
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 271100 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 4
2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable
connections.
3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing
standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field
inspector.
B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, from manufacturer.
assembled components or on calculation.
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Base certification on the maximum
number of components capable of being mounted in each rack type. Identify components
on which certification is based.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under direct supervision of
RCDD.
2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under direct supervision of Installer 2,
Copper or Fiber, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed
at Project site.
3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
2.02 BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches.
B. Backboard Paint: Light-colored fire-retardant paint.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
shall be listed and labeled for intended location and use.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 4
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, Type FD, ferrous alloy, with
gasketed cover.
E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast
aluminum with gasketed cover.
H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep.
J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R with continuous-hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic Fiberglass.
K. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.04 POWER STRIPS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 271116 "Communications Racks, Frames, and
Enclosures."
B. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363.
2. Rack mounting, with detachable flanges.
3. Housing: Metal.
4. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
5. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground.
6. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: When protection is lost, circuit opens and cannot be
reset.
7. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ENTRANCE FACILITIES
A. Contact telecommunications service provider and arrange for installation of demarcation point,
protected entrance terminals, and a housing when so directed by service provider.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for
materials and installation requirements for underground buried pathways.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 4
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Comply with BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual" for layout of
communications equipment spaces.
C. Comply with BICSI's "Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual" for
installation of equipment in communications equipment spaces.
D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
E. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment in tracks and in room.
Coordinate service entrance configuration with service provider.
1. Meet jointly with systems providers, equipment suppliers, and Owner to exchange
information and agree on details of equipment configurations and installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants.
3. Adjust configurations and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch
panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize configurations and space
requirements of communications equipment.
4. Adjust configurations and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects,
and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, and related systems that
share space in equipment room.
F. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications
equipment requiring electrical power to operate.
G. Backboards:
1. Install from 6 inches to 8 feet, 6 inches above finished floor. If plywood is fire rated,
ensure that fire-rating stamp is visible after installation.
2. Paint all sides of backboard with two coats of paint, leaving fire rating stamp visible.
3. Comply with requirements for backboard installation in BICSI's "Information Technology
Systems Installation Methods Manual" and TIA-569-D.
3.03 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
3.04 FIRESTOPPING
B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI's "Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual,"
"Firestopping Practices" Ch.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 271116
COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. 19-inch equipment racks.
2. 19-inch freestanding equipment cabinets.
3. Power strips.
4. Grounding.
5. Labeling.
1. Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications Equipment" for TMGBs
and TGBs.
2. Section 270536 "Cable Trays for Communications Systems" for cable trays and cable
tray accessories.
3. Section 271313 "Communications Copper Backbone Cabling" for copper data cabling
4. Section 271323 "Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling" for optical-fiber data
5. Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for copper data cabling
6. Section 271523 "Communications Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling" for optical-fiber data
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Access Provider: An operator that provides a circuit path or facility between the service provider
and user. An access provider can also be a service provider.
B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. LAN: Local area network.
D. RCDD: Registered communications distribution designer.
E. Service Provider: The operator of a telecommunications transmission service delivered through
access provider facilities.
F. SBB: Secondary bonding bus bar.
G. PBB: Primary bonding bus bar.
and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, certifications,
standards compliance, and furnished specialties and accessories.
COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES 271116 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6
B. Shop Drawings: For communications racks, frames, and enclosures. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
connection.
2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable
connections.
3. Grounding: Indicate location of TGB and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators
and wall-mounting brackets.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field
inspector.
B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, from manufacturer.
assembled components or on calculation.
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Base certification on the maximum
number of components capable of being mounted in each rack type. Identify components
on which certification is based.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under direct supervision of
RCDD.
2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under direct supervision of Installer 2,
Copper or Fiber, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed
at Project site.
3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform on-site inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
B. UL listed.
C. RoHS compliant.
D. Compliant with requirements of the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard.
2.02 BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements
for plywood backing panels specified in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
2.03 19-INCH EQUIPMENT RACKS

A. Description: Two- and four- post racks with threaded rails designed for mounting
telecommunications equipment. Width is compatible with EIA/ECIA 310-E, 19-inch equipment
mounting with an opening of 17.72-inches between rails.
C. General Requirements:
1. Frames: Modular units designed for telecommunications terminal support and
coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.
2. Material: Steel or Aluminum
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.
4. Color: Black.
D. Floor-Mounted Racks:
1. Overall Height: 84 inches.
2. Overall Depth: 36 inches or as indicated on Drawings.
3. Two-Post Load Rating: 400 lb.
4. Four-Post Load Rating: 2000 lb.
5. Number of Rack Units per Rack: 45.
6. Threads: 10-32.
7. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs,
grounding lug.
8. Base shall have a minimum of four mounting holes for permanent attachment to floor.
9. Top shall have provisions for attaching to cable tray or ceiling.
10. Self-leveling.
11. Equipment Access: Integral swing.
E. Cable Management:
1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers.
2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.
3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers.
4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a
minimum height of two rack units each.
5. Equipment Access: Integral swing.
2.04 19-INCH EQUIPMENT CABINETS
A. Description: Manufacturer-assembled four-post frame enclosed by side and top panels and front
and rear doors, designed for mounting telecommunications equipment. Width is compatible with
EIA/ECIA 310-E, 19-inch equipment mounting with an opening of 17.72 inches between rails.
C. General Cabinet Requirements:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6
1. Modular units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with
dimensions of units to be supported.
2. Material: Steel or Aluminum.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.
4. Color: Black.
D. Modular Freestanding Cabinets:
1. Overall Height: 84 inches.
2. Overall Depth: 36 inches or as indicated on Drawings.
3. Load Rating: 3000 lb.
4. Number of Rack Units: 45.
a. Numbering: rack units, on interior of rack.
5. Threads: 10-32.
6. Removable and lockable side and top panels.
7. Hinged and lockable front and rear doors.
8. Adjustable feet for leveling.
9. Screened ventilation openings in roof and rear door.
10. Cable access provisions in roof and base.
11. All cabinets keyed alike.
E. Cable Management:
1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers.
2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.
3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers.
4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at top of each relay rack, with a minimum
height of two rack units each.
2.05 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications
Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.
following:
3. Panduit Corp.
C. Rack and Cabinet TGBs: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting conductors
ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying
with TIA-606-B. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.
1. Cabinet-Mounted TGB: Terminal block, with stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for
attachment to cabinet.
2. Rack-Mounted Horizontal TGB: Designed for mounting in 19- or 23-inch equipment
racks. Include a copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining rack, and stainless-
steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack.
3. Rack-Mounted Vertical TGB: 72 or 36 inches long, with stainless-steel or copper-plated
hardware for attachment to rack.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
2.06 LABELING
A. Comply with TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,
laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout of communications equipment spaces.
C. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM for installation of communications equipment spaces.
D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
E. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment in racks and room. Coordinate
service entrance configuration with service provider.
1. Meet jointly with system providers, equipment suppliers, and Owner to exchange
information and agree on details of equipment configurations and installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants.
3. Adjust configurations and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch
panels in equipment spaces to accommodate and optimize configuration and space
requirements of telecommunications equipment.
4. Adjust configurations and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects,
and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, and related systems that
share space in equipment room.
F. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications
equipment requiring electrical power to operate.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Comply with NECA/BICSI 607.
B. Install grounding according to BICSI ITSIMM, "Bonding, Grounding (Earthing) and Electrical
Protection" Ch.
C. Locate TGB to minimize length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall, allowing at least 2 inches
of clearance behind TGB. Connect TGB with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode
conductor from TGB to suitable electrical building ground. Connect rack TGB to near TGB or
the TMGB.
1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to patch panel, and bond patch panel to TGB or TMGB.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Coordinate system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with
requirements in Section 270553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For
fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.
C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA-606-B for Class 3 level
of administration.
D. Labels shall be machine printed. Type shall be 1/4 inch in height.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 8
SECTION 271313
COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. High-count Category 5e twisted pair cable.
2. Twisted pair cable hardware, including plugs, jacks, patch panels, and cross-connects.
3. Grounding provisions for twisted pair cable.
4. Cabling identification.
5. Source quality control requirements for twisted pair cable.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
C. F/FTP: Overall foil screened cable with foil screened twisted pair.
D. FTP: Shielded twisted pair.
E. F/UTP: Overall foil screened cable with unscreened twisted pair.
F. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
G. Jack: Also commonly called an "outlet," it is the fixed, female connector.
H. LAN: Local area network.
I. Plug: Also commonly called a "connector," it is the removable, male telecommunications
connector.
J. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
K. Screen: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a pair or group of conductors.
L. S/FTP: Overall braid screened cable with foil screened twisted pair.
M. Shield: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a pair or group of conductors.
N. S/UTP: Overall braid screened cable with unscreened twisted pairs.
O. UTP: Unscreened (unshielded) twisted pair.
1.04 COPPER BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Copper backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications
equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications
cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main
cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-
backbone cross-connection.
B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at
entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.
COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE CABLING 271313 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 8
B. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and stamped by on staff RCDD.

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and
format selected by Owner.
2. Cabling administration Drawings and printouts.
3. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:
a. Telecommunications rooms plans and elevations.
b. Telecommunications pathways.
c. Telecommunications system access points.
d. Telecommunications grounding system
e. Cross-connects.
f. Patch panels.
4. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations
and physical relationship between the installed components.
A. Qualification Data: For RCDD, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
B. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.
1. Connecting Blocks: One of each type.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, cabling administration Drawings,
and field testing program development by an RCDD.
2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Technician,
who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.
3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD.
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's
telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in
TIA-568-C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-D.
D. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-B.
2.02 GENERAL CABLE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with
the applicable standard and NFPA 70 for the following types:
1. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR in metallic conduit installed according to
NFPA 70, Article 300.22, "Wiring in Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces."
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
C. RoHS compliant.
2.03 HIGH-COUNT CATEGORY 5e TWISTED PAIR CABLE
A. Description: 25-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, certified to meet transmission characteristics
of Category 5e cable at frequencies up to 100 MHz.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Siemon.
C. Standard: Comply with ICEA S-90-661, NEMA WC 63.1, and TIA-568-C.2 for Category 5e
cables.
D. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded balanced twisted pairs (UTP).
E. Cable Rating: Riser.
2.04 TWISTED PAIR CABLE HARDWARE
A. Description: Hardware designed to connect and terminate twisted pair copper communications
cable.
following:
1. Siemon Co. (The).
C. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware:
1. Twisted pair cable hardware shall meet the performance requirements of specific media
type installed.
2. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or
tools.
3. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 8
4. Source Limitations: Obtain twisted pair cable hardware from same manufacturer as
twisted pair cable, from single source.
D. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 5e 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks
for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare, integral with connector
bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
E. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and
permit interconnection between cables.
1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.
2. Construction: 16-gauge steel and mountable on 19-inch equipment racks.
3. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair twisted pair cable indicated.
F. Plugs and Plug Assemblies:
1. Male; eight position (8P8C); color-coded modular telecommunications connector
designed for termination of a single four-pair 100-ohm unshielded or shielded twisted pair
cable.
2. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2.
3. Marked to indicate transmission performance.
G. Jacks and Jack Assemblies:
1. Female; eight position; modular; fixed telecommunications connector designed for
termination of a single four-pair 100-ohm unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable.
2. Designed to snap-in to a patch panel or faceplate.
H. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in lengths specified by Owner; terminated with an
eight-position modular plug at each end.
1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure
Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against
snagging.
2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.
I. Legend:
1. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.
2. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.
2.05 CABLING IDENTIFICATION
2.06 GROUNDING
B. Comply with TIA-607-C.
A. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA-568-C.1.
B. Factory test cables according to TIA-568-C.2.
C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by
communications service provider.
3.02 WIRING METHODS
A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays. Retain first subparagraph below if
retaining option in "Wiring Method" Paragraph above.
1. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 270528
"Pathways for Communications Systems."
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal
points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.
Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. Install cables parallel with or at right angles
to sides and back of enclosure.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, cabinets, and racks specified in
Section 271100 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings."
B. Comply with Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems."
C. Comply with Section 270529 "Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems."
D. Comply with Section 270536 "Cable Trays for Communications Systems."
E. Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF COPPER BACKBONE CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA/BICSI 568.
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, and TIA-568-C.2.
2. Comply with BICSI's "Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual
(ITSIMM)," Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable Termination Practices"
Section.
3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
4. Do not untwist twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to
maintain cable geometry.
5. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
6. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30
inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames,
and terminals.
7. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, prevent straining connections, and prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
8. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5,
"Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable Termination Practices" Section Use lacing
bars and distribution spools.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 8
9. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation, and replace it with new cable.
10. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used for heating.
11. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of
cable.
12. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems,"
"Pulling and Installing Cable" Section. Monitor cable pull tensions.
C. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces
with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or
other potentially damaging items.
D. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
E. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with recommendations from BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods
Manual" and TIA-569-D for separating unshielded copper communication cable from
potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways, power lines,
and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as
follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5
kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.
6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5
inches.
3.05 FIRESTOPPING

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 8
C. Comply with "Firestopping Systems" Article in BISCI's "Telecommunications Distribution

Methods Manual."
3.06 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to the "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" chapter in
BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual."
B. Comply with TIA-607-B and NECA/BICSI-607.
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall, allowing
at least a 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar to suitable
electrical building ground, using a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than a No. 6 AWG
equipment grounding conductor.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with
requirements for identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications
Systems."
1. Administration Class: 3.
2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards,
connections, covers, and labels.
B. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA-606-B for Class 3 level
of administration.
C. Comply with requirements in Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for
cable and asset management software.
D. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List
incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with
rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules
for Project.
E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point
labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone
pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions,
horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and
pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.
F. Cable and Wire Identification:
1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a
cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the
device if wire color is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within
panel or cabinet.
3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at
intervals not exceeding 15 feet.
4. Label each terminal strip, and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify
each cable or wiring group, extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-
mounted device, with the name and number of a particular device.
b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 8
5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label
each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and -connecting hardware.
Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling,
use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
G. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type, with a printing area and font color that
contrast with cable jacket color but still comply with TIA-606-B requirements for the following:
1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.
A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
1. Visually inspect jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling
terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for
pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA-568-C.1.
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment
and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
3. Test cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity
between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables
after termination but not cross-connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2.
Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test
Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified
in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters
that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test
configuration.
C. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a
summary report that is formatted similarly to Table 10.1 in BICSI's "Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual," or shall be transferred from the instrument to the computer,
saved as text files, printed, and submitted.
D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.
E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 8
SECTION 271323
COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. 9/125 micrometer single-mode, indoor-outdoor optical fiber cable (OS2).
2. 9/125 micrometer single-mode, inside plant optical fiber cable (OS2).
3. Optical fiber cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.
4. Cabling identification products.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
C. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
1.04 OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Optical fiber backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications
equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications
cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main
cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-
backbone cross-connection.
B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at
entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.
B. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and stamped by RCDD.
2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the
cabling and asset identification system of the software.
3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following:
d. Telecommunications grounding system.
e. Cross-connects.
f. Patch panels.
COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 271323 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 8
g. Patch cords.
5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and
physical relationship between the installed components.
A. Maintenance Data: For optical fiber cable, splices, and connectors to include in maintenance
manuals.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings,
3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.
1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical
fiber flashlight or optical loss test set.
2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify
the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss value
of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.
1.11 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-D.
D. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-C.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 8
2.02 9/125 MICROMETER, SINGLE-MODE, INDOOR-OUTDOOR OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (OS2)

A. Description: Single mode, 9/125-micrometer, fibers, tight buffer tube, optical fiber cable.
1. Corning Cable Systems.
C. Standards:
1. Comply with TIA-492CAAB for detailed specifications.
2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications.
3. Comply with ICEA S-104-696 for mechanical properties.
D. Maximum Attenuation: 0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm; 0.5 dB/km at 1550 nm.
E. Jacket:
1. Jacket Color: Yellow.
2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-D.
3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to
exceed 40 inches.
F. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with
UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:
1. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666.
2.03 9/125 MICROMETER SINGLE-MODE, INSIDE PLANT OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (OS2)
A. Description: Single mode, 9/125-micrometer, fibers, stranded tight buffer tube, optical fiber
cable.
C. Standards:
1. Comply with TIA-492CAAB for detailed specifications.
E. Jacket:
1. Jacket Color: Yellow.
exceed 40 inches.
F. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with
1. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666.
2.04 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE
following:
1. Belden CDT Networking Division.
2. Commscope, Inc.
3. Berk-Tek Leviton; a Nexans/Leviton alliance.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 8

B. Standards:
1. Comply with Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard (FOCIS) specifications of
the TIA-604 series.
2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3.
C. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable
connectors.
1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field,
plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.
D. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables for 50% of all connected fiber ports. Half of those
shall be in 36 inch lengths, and half shall be in 72 inch lengths.
E. Connector Type: Type LC complying with TIA-604-10-B, connectors.
1. Male;modular telecommunications connector designed for termination of a single optical
fiber cable.
2. Insertion loss not more than 0.25 dB.
1. Female; quick-connect, simplex and duplex; fixed telecommunications connector
designed for termination of a single optical fiber cable.
2.05 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 27 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications
B. Comply with TIA-607-B.
2.06 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
B. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-B and TIA-568-C.3.
C. Factory test pre-terminated optical fiber cable assemblies according to TIA-526-14-B and TIA-
568-C.3.
D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by
communications service provider.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 8
3.02 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets,
desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.
1. Comply with requirements for pathways specified in Section 270528 "Pathways for
B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal
Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools in a fiber housing with a minimum of 4RU
enclosure.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 301, and NECA/BICSI 568.
B. General Requirements for Optical Fiber Cabling Installation:
1. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.3.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3. Terminate all cables; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations
only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
and terminals.
5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent
bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
6. Bundle, lace, and train cable to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, "Cabling
Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.
during installation and replace it with new cable.
9. In the communications equipment room, provide a 10-foot- long service loop on each end
of cable.
10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull
tensions.
11. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.
C. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces
with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or
other potentially damaging items.
D. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:
1. Install plenum-rated cable only.
2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 8
3. Coil cable 6 feet long not less than 12 inches in diameter below each feed point.
E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
3.04 FIRESTOPPING
C. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to BICSI ITSIMM, "Grounding (Earthing), Bonding, and Electrical
Protection" Chapter.
B. Comply with TIA-607-C and NECA/BICSI-607.
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing
at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a
minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable
electrical building ground.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG
3.06 IDENTIFICATION
Systems."
1. Administration Class: Class 3.
of administration.
C. Comply with requirements in Section 271523 "Communications Optical Fiber Horizontal
Cabling" for cable and asset management software.
D. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List
for Project.
E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point
labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone
F. Cable and Wire Identification:
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at
device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within
panel or cabinet.
4. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 8
each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.
G. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that
contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA 606-B, for the
following:
1. Flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.
D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
E. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visually inspect optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect
cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-
coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA-
568-C.1.
3. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:
Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer
for channel or link test configuration.
b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or
1300 nm in one direction according to TIA-526-14-B, Method B, One
Reference Jumper.
2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB.
Attenuation test results shall be less than those calculated according to
equation in TIA-568-C.1.
F. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a
summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the
instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
G. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
H. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
I. Prepare test and inspection reports.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 8

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 8
SECTION 271513
COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Category 6a twisted pair cable.
3. Grounding provisions for twisted pair cable.
4. Source quality control requirements for twisted pair cable.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
C. FTP: Shielded twisted pair.
D. F/FTP: Overall foil screened cable with foil screened twisted pair.
E. F/UTP: Overall foil screened cable with unscreened twisted pair.
F. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
G. LAN: Local area network.
H. Jack: Also commonly called an "outlet," it is the fixed, female connector.
I. Plug: Also commonly called a "connector," it is the removable, male telecommunications
connector.
J. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
K. Screen: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a pair or group of conductors.
L. Shield: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a pair or group of conductors.
M. S/FTP: Overall braid screened cable with foil screened twisted pair.
N. S/UTP: Overall braid screened cable with unscreened twisted pairs.
O. UTP: Unscreened (unshielded) twisted pair.
1.04 COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal cable cabling system shall provide interconnections between Distributor A, Distributor
B, or Distributor C, and the equipment outlet, otherwise known as "Cabling Subsystem 1," in the
telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of horizontal cables,
intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers
used for horizontal-to-horizontal cross-connection.
1. TIA-568-C.1 requires that a minimum of two equipment outlets be installed for each work
area.
2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point
between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications equipment outlet.
3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271513 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 8
B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the
equipment outlets to the station equipment.
C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length
does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or in the
horizontal cross-connect.
B. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and stamped by RCDD.
4. Wiring diagrams and installation details of telecommunications equipment, to show
location and layout of telecommunications equipment, including the following:
e. Typical telecommunications details.
A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On USB media or compact disk, complete with data files.
1. Connecting Blocks: One of each type.
2. Faceplates: One of each type.
3. Jacks: Ten of each type.
4. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type.
5. Plugs: Ten of each type.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, cabling administration Drawings,

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 8

1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.
1.12 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in
B. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-D.
C. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-C.
2.02 GENERAL CABLE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with
the applicable standard and NFPA 70 for the following types:
1. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with UL 1685 or Type CMP in
listed cable routing assembly.
2. Communications, Non-plenum: Type CMP in metallic conduit installed according to
NFPA 70, Article 300.22, "Wiring in Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces."
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
C. RoHS compliant.
2.03 CATEGORY 6a TWISTED PAIR CABLE
A. Description: Four-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, with internal spline, certified to meet
transmission characteristics of Category 6a cable at frequencies of minimum 500MHz.
1. Siemon.
C. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6a cables.
D. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper.
E. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP).
F. Cable Rating: Plenum.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 8
2.04 TWISTED PAIR CABLE HARDWARE

A. Description: Hardware designed to connect and terminate twisted pair copper communications
cable.
1. Siemon Co. (The).
C. General Requirements for Twisted Pair Cable Hardware:
1. Comply with the performance requirements of Category 6a .
2. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or
tools.
3. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain twisted pair cable hardware from same manufacturer as twisted pair
cable, from single source.
1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.
E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each
jack location for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1. Features:
a. Universal T568A and T568B wiring labels.
b. Labeling areas adjacent to conductors.
c. 48 ports, 2RU.
2. Construction: 16-gauge steel and mountable on 19-inch equipment racks.
3. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair cable indicated.
F. Patch Cords: Provide factory-made, four-pair cables in 8 foot lengths; terminated with an eight-
position modular plug at each end. The quantity provided shall match all the connections in the
TR and a minimum of (2) per faceplate throughout the building.
1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots ensure performance. Patch cords
shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.
G. Plugs and Plug Assemblies:
1. Male; eight position; modular telecommunications connector designed for termination of a
single four-pair, 100-ohm, unshielded twisted pair cable.
H. Jacks and Jack Assemblies:
1. Female; eight position; modular; fixed telecommunications connector designed for
termination of a single four-pair, 100-ohm, unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable.
2. Designed to snap-in to a faceplate.
I. Faceplate:
1. Vertical single gang faceplates designed to mount to single gang wall boxes.
2. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, for use in food
service or wet areas.
3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of twisted pair, optical fiber,
and coaxial work area cords.
J. Legend:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 8
1. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.06 GROUNDING
A. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WIRING METHODS
A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays, except within consoles, cabinets,
desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables, except in unfinished spaces.
1. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 270528
"Pathways for Communications Systems."
possible.
Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. Install conductors parallel with or at right
angles to sides and back of enclosure.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, cabinets, and racks specified in
Section 271100 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings."
B. Comply with Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems."
C. Comply with Section 270529 "Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems."
3.03 INSTALLATION OF TWISTED-PAIR HORIZONTAL CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA/BICSI 568.
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, and TIA-568-C.2.
2. Comply with BICSI's "Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual
(ITSIMM), Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable Termination Practices"
Section.
3. Install IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
4. Do not untwist twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to
maintain cable geometry.
5. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
6. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to equipment
outlets:

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 8
a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or

for direct connection to workstation equipment.
b. Locate consolidation points for twisted-pair cables at least 49 feet from
communications equipment room.
and terminals.
8. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, prevent straining connections, and prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI Information
Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling
Systems," "Cable Termination Practices" Section. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.
during installation, and replace it with new cable.
12. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of
cable.
13. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Methods
Manual, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Pulling and Installing Cable"
Section. Monitor cable pull tensions.
C. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
D. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with recommendations from BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods
Manual" and TIA-569-D for separating unshielded copper communication cable from
potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways, power lines,
and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as
follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 8
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5

kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.
6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5
inches.
3.04 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."
C. Comply with "Firestopping Systems" Article in BISCI's "Telecommunications Distribution
Methods Manual."
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to the "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" chapter in
BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual."
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall, allowing
at least a 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar to suitable
electrical building ground, using a minimum No. 1 AWG grounding electrode conductor.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than a No. 6 AWG
3.06 IDENTIFICATION
Systems."
of administration.
C. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List
for Project.
D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point
labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, terminal
hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions,
grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.
E. Cable and Wire Identification:
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the
device if wire color is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within
panel or cabinet.
4. Label each terminal strip, and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 8 of 8
a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify

each cable or wiring group, extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-
mounted device, with the name and number of a particular device.
b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and -connecting hardware.
F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type, with a printing area and font color that
contrast with cable jacket color but still comply with TIA-606-B requirements for the following:
1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.
A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
1. Visually inspect jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling
terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for
pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA-568-C.1.
3. Test twisted pair cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and
polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test
cables after termination but not cross-connection.
Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test
Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified
in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters
that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test
configuration.
summary report that is formatted similarly to Table 10.1 in BICSI's "Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual," or shall be transferred from the instrument to the computer,
saved as text files, printed, and submitted.
D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports stamped and certified by an RCDD.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 271523
COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. 850 nanometer laser-optimized 50/125 micrometer multimode optical fiber cable (OM3).
2. Optical fiber cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.
3. Grounding.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
C. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
B. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and stamped by on staff RCDD.
4. Wiring diagrams and installation details of telecommunications equipment, to show
location and layout of telecommunications equipment, including the following:
e. Typical telecommunications details.
A. Qualification Data: For RCDD, , installation supervisor, and field inspector.
A. Maintenance Data: For optical fiber cable, splices, and connectors to include in maintenance
manuals.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings,
COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLING 271523 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 6

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD.
1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical
fiber flashlight or optical loss test set.
2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify
the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss value
of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.
1.10 COORDINATION
telecommunications equipment and service suppliers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in
B. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-D.
C. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-B.
2.02 850 NANOMETER LASER-OPTIMIZED, 50/125 MICROMETER, MULTIMODE OPTICAL
FIBER CABLE (OM3)
A. Description: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable.
C. Standards:
3. Comply with TIA-492AAAC for detailed specifications.
E. Minimum Overfilled Modal Bandwidth-length Product: 1500 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at
1300 nm.
F. Minimum Effective Modal Bandwidth-length Product: 2000 MHz-km at 850 nm.
G. Jacket:
1. Jacket Color: Aqua.
exceed 40 inches.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 6
H. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with
1. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.
2.03 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
B. Standards:
1. Comply with Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard (FOCIS) specifications of
the TIA-604 series.
2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3.
C. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable
connectors.
1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field,
plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.
D. Patch Cords: Factory-made, single-fiber cables in 96-inch lengths for every connection in the
TR and a minimum of (2) per faceplate throughout the building.
E. Connector Type: Type LC complying with TIA-604-10-B, connectors.
1. Male; color-coded modular telecommunications connector designed for termination of a
single optical fiber cable.
1. Female; quick-connect, simplex and duplex; fixed telecommunications connector
designed for termination of a single optical fiber cable.
H. Faceplate:
1. Two -port, vertical single-gang faceplates designed to mount to single-gang wall boxes.
2. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 262726 "Wiring
Devices."
3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of twisted pair, optical fiber,
and coaxial work area cords.
2.04 GROUNDING

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 6

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
B. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-B and TIA-568-C.3.
C. Factory test preterminated optical fiber cable assemblies according to TIA-526-14-B and TIA-
568-C.3.
D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WIRING METHODS
A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets,
desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces, in attics, and in gypsum board
partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables except
in unfinished spaces.
1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
2. Comply with requirements for pathways specified in Section 270528 "Pathways for
possible.
Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
3.02 FIRESTOPPING
C. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.
3.03 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to BICSI ITSIMM, "Grounding (Earthing), Bonding, and Electrical
Protection" Chapter.
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing
at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a
minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable
electrical building ground.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
Systems."
of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 6
C. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List
for Project.
D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point
labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, horizontal
E. Cable and Wire Identification:
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at
device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within
panel or cabinet.
4. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.
F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that
contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA 606-B, for the
following:
1. Flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Visually inspect optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect
cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-
coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA-
568-C.1.
3. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:
Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer
for channel or link test configuration.
b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
1) Horizontal and Multimode Horizontal Link Measurements: Test at 850 or
1300 nm in one direction according to TIA-526-14-B, Method B, One
Reference Jumper.
2) Attenuation test results for horizontal links shall be less than 2.0 dB.
Attenuation test results shall be less than those calculated according to
equation in TIA-568-C.1.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 6
summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the
instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. 27 5116
Page 1 of 6
Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF) 10.21.2020 Revision 1
SECTION 27 5116
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
A. Public Address Paging System
B. Input and control devices
C. Uninterrupted Power System
D. Commissioning and training
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Telecom IT
B. Structured Cabling System
C. Electrical Systems
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and install all equipment, accessories and materials in accordance with these
Specifications and the Contract Drawings to provide a complete Paging System. The
components shall include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Ceiling Mounted Speaker Assemblies
2. Amplifier and Digital Signal Processing
3. Network Input Devices
4. Uninterrupted Power System
5. Associated wiring and material
B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit and back boxes. Coordinate
exact requirements with the Paging Contractor and refer to the Paging Drawings for additional
information.
C. Project summary:
Volume II: Complete Public Address System for Building X12150 including PA cabinet, UPS
and speakers. Speaker zones 1 and 2.
D. PAGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1. Provide paging coverage for occupied areas, conference rooms and support areas.
2. Provide two (2) network connections to Paging System via (2) incoming fiber optic cable
converters and (2) VoIP Gateways .
3. Provide one (1) Digital Signal Processor and one (1) Amplifier.
4. Provide equipment cabinet for Paging System equipment in Telco. IT Room 106.
5. Provide Uninterrupted Power System in Electrical Room 115 with electrical output
extended to Telecom. IT Room 106 for Paging System.
6. Provide Testing and Commissioning for the Paging System.
E. All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the manufacturer to
function as a complete system and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's complete
service notes and drawings detailing all interconnections.
F. The Paging Contractor shall be an authorized distributor of the equipment supplied with
full manufacturer's warranty privileges.
G. The Paging Contractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that they maintain a
fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service or
the systems. The Contractor shall maintain at their facility the necessary spare parts in the
proper proportion as recommended by the manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment
being supplied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 275116 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. 27 5116
Page 2 of 6
A. The intent is to establish a standard of quality, function and features. It is the responsibility
of the Paging Contractor to insure that the proposed product meets or exceeds every standard
set forth in this Specification.
2.2 The functions and features specified are vital to the operation of this facility; therefore,
inclusion in the list of alternate manufacturers does not release the Paging Contractor from
compliance with the requirements of this Specification. Alternate manufacturers shall
identify functional differences with submission of bids.
2.3 PAGING SYSTEM DEVICES AND INSTALLATION
A. Ceiling Mounted Paging Speakers:
1. Provide ceiling speaker, minimum 6 ½” speaker, back box and ceiling rail support-
bridge suitable for 2’ x 2’ or 2’ x 4’ ceiling tile placement as indicated on drawings.
2. Ceiling baffle shall be white.
3. Unit shall be UL listed.
4. Power rating: 20 watts RMS.
5. Frequency response: 60 Hz – 16 kHz.
6. Connectivity: 70 volt transformer with power taps (1.25w, 2.5w, 5w, 10w & 20w).
Tap setting or volume control shall be accessible outside of speaker back box.
7. Unit shall have seismic support tie points. Provide minimum of one #12 wire from
seismic tie point to structure.
8. Basis for design: Quam-Nichols System 19.
9. Approved Manufacturer: Quam-Nichols, Atlas Sound.
B. Wall Mounted Paging Speakers:
1. Provide wall mounted paging horns molded from high-impact, acrylic-styrene-
acrylonitrile (ASA) as indicated on drawings.
2. Coverage pattern: 60-degree horizontal and 40-degree vertical.
3. Unit shall be UL listed.
4. Power rating: 30 watts RMS.
5. Frequency response: 400 Hz – 6,500 Hz.
6. Connectivity: 70 volt transformer with power taps (1.25w, 2.5w, 5w, 10w & 20w).
7. Basis for design: Electro-Voice PA430T.
8. Approved Manufacturers: Electro-Voice, Atlas Sound.
C. Paging Amplifier:
1. Provide one (1) audio power amplifier rack mounted in the Paging System cabinet.
2. Power rating: 1250 watts RMS.Frequency response: 30 Hz – 16 kHz.
3. Units shall be 19” rack mountable.
4. Connectivity: 70 volt output.
5. Basis for design: Crown-Harmon DCi 2-1250N.
6. Approved Manufacture: Crown-Harmon.
D. Digital Signal Processor:
1. Provide one (1) Digital Signal Processor rack mounted in the Paging System cabinet.
2. Units shall be 19” rack mountable.
3. Connectivity: 8-inputs / 8-outputs.
4. Basis for design: Peavey MX16a.
5. Approved Manufacture: Peavey.
E. Fiber Optic Media Converters:
1. Provide (2) single-mode fiber optic cable to 100base-T Ethernet adapters.
2. Provide 19” mounting shelf to mount adapters in the Paging System cabinet.
3. Connectivity: Duplex SC single-mode fiber to 8-pin copper Ethernet.
4. Provide (2) duplex single mode fiber optic patch cords, 5-meter length with duplex
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. 27 5116
Page 3 of 6
SC connectors. Route patch cords to incoming fiber optic cable termination unit in 1
¼” inner duct to protect patch cords.
5. Basis for design: Transition-Networks E-100BTX-FX-05(HT) series.
6. Approved Manufacturers: TRENDnet, Transition-Networks, Perle.
F. VoIP Gateways:
1. Provide (2) analog voice over IP gateways.
2. Provide 19” mounting shelf to mount gateways in the Paging System cabinet.
3. Connectivity: input 8-pin Ethernet to output FXS,FXO RF-11 connector.
4. Provide (2) category 6 copper patch cords, 1-meter length. Basis for design: MultiTech
MVP-130.
5. Approved Manufacturer: MultiTech, Valcom.
G. Uninterrupted Power System:
1. Provide 3000va Uninterrupted Power System (UPS) to be located in Electrical Room 115.
a. Provide LTI 1030 Floor Mount UPS
b. 120vac / single phase input with 120vac / single phase output.
c. Digital display panel.
2. Provide Battery Rack System to be located in Electrical Room 115.
a. Sized to provide (24) hours of runtime for UPS @ 70% load.
b. Provide (10) C & D TEL12 180F batteries to provide 120vdc to UPS.
3. Output 120vac of the UPS to be extended to the Paging System cabinet located in
the Telecom IT Room 106.
4. Provide maintenance bypass switch (make before break switch) in the electrical
room between UPS output and normal 120vac power.
5. Provide disconnect switch between batteries and UPS in the electrical room.
6. Provide load bank junction box from battery output to power terminal blocks for up to a
4/0 awg cable to portable load bank and battery. Load bank provided by others.
7. Provide # 6awg insulated green grounding conductor from UPS to local electrical
service grounding buss bar.
8. Approved Manufacturers: LTI, Liebert, Emerson.
H. Equipment Cabinet and Miscellaneous Material
1. Provide 48” high x 32” deep by 24” wide free standing steel black cabinet configured with:
a. Top panel fan – (1) 10” fan, 550 CFM, 115vac.
b. Solid side panels.
c. Leveling feet.
d. Front / rear vented doors – lockable.
e. Mounting rails: (1) set of 19” adjustable mounting rails.
2. Provide horizontal power strip – 120vac with (8) receptacles.
3. Provide #6awg insulated green grounding conductor from PA equipment cabinet to
local Primary Bonding Bus Bar (PBB).
4. Basis for design: Great Lakes GL-480ES-2432.
5. Approved Manufacturers: Great Lakes, Hubbell.
I. Wiring and material:
1. All paging speaker wiring shall be #12-2 plenum rated wire.
2. All paging speaker wiring shall be supported with “J” hooks.
3. Approved Manufacturer: Belden, West-Penn.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install system in accordance with NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. Install
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. 27 5116
Page 4 of 6
equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Contractor shall provide all IP and/or MAC address information to owner to facilitate
owner programming to enable paging system on network.
B. Wiring Methods
1. Utilize approved cable wiring methods. Utilize UL listed plenum cable in
environmental air spaces including plenum ceilings. Conceal wiring except in
unfinished spaces. Provide dedicated “J” Hook cable support system for cabling.
C. Impedance and Level Matching
1. Carefully match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal
interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.
D. Control Circuit Wiring
1. Install control circuits in accordance with NFPA 70 and as indicated. Provide number
of conductors as recommended by system manufacturer to provide control functions
indicated or specified.
2. The Contractor shall mount a main distribution frame behind the Integrated
Communications Systems console. All wires shall be laid down on terminal punch
blocks and identified by the actual room location it serves. All the communications
points shall be wired into this main distribution frame, laid down in sequence, and
identified by which line it is on and the point position it serves.
3. All housings shall be located as specified and shown on Drawings.
4. Install complete system in strict accordance with approved manufacturer's drawings
and instructions.
5. The Contractor shall provide necessary transient voltage surge protection on the AC
power feed, all station lines leaving or entering the building, and all central office
trunks. Such protection devices shall be as recommended by the equipment supplier
and referenced to earth ground. Indicate type of device and device locations on Record
Drawings.
E. Wiring within Enclosures
1. Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to
terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars.
2. Provide physical isolation from each other for speaker-microphone, line-level,
speaker-level, and power wiring. Run in separate raceways. Where exposed or in same
enclosure, provide 12 inch minimum separation between conductors to
speaker-microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Provide
physical separation as recommended by equipment manufacturer for other Integrated
Communications Systems conductors.
F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations
1. Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered terminal punch blocks in junction,
pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures.
G. Identification of Conductors and Cables
1. Use color coding of conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate
wires and cables so all media are identified in coordination with system wiring
diagrams.
H. Repairs
1. Wherever walls, ceilings, floors, or other building finishes are cut for installation,
repair, restore, and refinish to original appearance.
A. Inspection
1. Make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labeled, and
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. 27 5116
Page 5 of 6
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Provide a list of final tap settings
of paging speaker line matching transformers.
B. Qualifications
1. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer’s authorized representative who is trained
and approved for installation of units required for this project.
a. Personnel certified by NICET as Audio Systems Level II Technician.
2. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified agency, with the experience and capability
to conduct testing indicated.
a. Testing Agency’s Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NICET as Level III
to supervise on-site testing.
C. Testing
1. Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely re-test work affected by such
deficiencies at Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system
meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards. Verify that the
system is ready for commissioning.
3.3 COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall perform tests that include originating program and page messages at
inputs and verifying proper routing and volume levels and that system is free from noise and
distortion.
1. Signal-to Noise Ratio Test: Measure signal-to-noise ratio of complete system at normal
gain settings as follows:
a. Connect a signal generator using a 1000 Hz signal. Measure signal-to-noise ratio.
b. Repeat test for each zone.
c. Minimum acceptable ratio is 75 dB.
2. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power.
a. Feed signals at frequencies of 50, 200, 400, 1000, 3000, 8000 and 12,000 Hz in to
each input. For each frequency, measure distortion in the paging amplifier outputs.
Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is 3 percent total harmonics.
3.4 TRAINING:
A. Provide a minimum of 4 hours training for up to (4) individuals, how to setup, program,
configure and contact tech support for the Paging System.
3.5 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS:
A. When requested by the Architect within one year from the date of formal written acceptance
by the Owner, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting matching
transformer taps, and adjusting controls to suit actual occupied conditions.
3.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall include installation and wiring diagrams and instructions for
installation, operation and maintenance, to be suitable for inclusion in the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
B. Submittals shall include reproducible floor plans (1/16” scale, minimum) showing
device locations and required conduit and wiring connections.
C. Submittals shall include descriptive literature for all system components, size and type
of recommended conduit and wiring, bill of materials, and sequence of system
operation.
3.7 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Upon completion of the project, the Owner shall be furnished by the Contractor reproducible
drawings indicating the actual installation of the system as constructed showing wiring fill,
wire tag numbers, junction boxes and connection of devices.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Index No. 27 5116
Page 6 of 6
3.8 SERVICE, MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall provide a two year warranty of the installed systems against defects
in material and workmanship. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to
the Owner during normal working hours. The warranty period shall begin on the date of
formal written acceptance by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall, at the Owner's request, make available a service contract
offering continuing factory authorized service of these systems after the initial
warranty period.
END OF SECTION 27 5116
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 1 of 12
SECTION 284621.11
ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Fire-alarm control unit.
2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.
3. System smoke detectors.
4. Heat detectors.
5. Notification appliances.
6. Magnetic door holders.
7. Remote annunciator.
8. Addressable interface device.
9. Network communications.
1. Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for cables and conductors
for fire-alarm systems.
A. General Submittal Requirements:
1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to
Architect.
2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.
b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum.
c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.
1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the
"Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor
sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory
and field wiring.
4. Detail assembly and support requirements.
ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 284621.11 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 2 of 12

5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.
6. Include battery-size calculations.
7. Include input/output matrix.
8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested
as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.
9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.
10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and
humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,
drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.
a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes,
detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.
b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm.
c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
12.
13. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in
addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and
design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector,
ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the
device.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of
detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals
and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.
3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components,
from manufacturer.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Sample warranty.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include
the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
chapter in NFPA 72.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 3 of 12

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion
Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the
"Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment.
d. Riser diagram.
e. Record copy of site-specific software.
f. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and
Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:
1) Equipment tested.
2) Frequency of testing of installed components.
3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.
4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.
g. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
h. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each
annunciator unit.
2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of
units required for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II
technician.
C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized
testing laboratory).
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and
components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service
Agreement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Source Limitations for a Notifier Fire-Alarm System consisting of a Notifier Model NFS2-640 fire
alarm panel and Components: Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components
provided have been tested as, will operate as, and a system.
B. Noncoded, UL-certified or FM Global-placarded addressable system, with multiplexed signal
transmission and horn/strobe evacuation.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 4 of 12

C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.
D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected Notifier Model NFS2-640 fire
alarm panel.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
2.02 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. The project consists of installing a new, digital addressable fire detection and notification system
for the new building. The Fire alarm system shall be a Notifier Model NFS2-640 fire alarm panel.
The fire alarm control panel shall communicate with the site fire alarm network. The fire alarm
communications shall be processed through a Cisco IE-3000-4TC Ethernet switch, the is provided
by the fire alarm contractor. which serves as the remote alarm receiving station.
B. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1. Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Smoke detectors.
4. Duct smoke detectors.
5. Carbon monoxide detectors.
6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
C. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit.
3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
6. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
7. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
8. Record events in the system memory.
D. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch.
2. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.
E. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module,
or remote annunciator.
4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.
5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit.
6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.
7. Break in standby battery circuitry.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 5 of 12

8. Failure of battery charging.
9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.
F. System Supervisory Signal Actions:
1. Initiate notification appliances.
2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit.
3. After a time delay of 120 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote
alarm receiving station.
A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
2.04 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. Notifier Model NFS2-640 fire alarm panel
B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:
1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic
modules, complying with UL 864.
2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication
zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification
appliance by building communication zone.
3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical
Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.
C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands.
D. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:
1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B.
2. Pathway Survivability: Level 1.
E. Notification-Appliance Circuit:
1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72.
2. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the
same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.
F. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke-
barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.
G. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable
smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change
those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 6 of 12

changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-
adjustment schedule changes in system memory.
H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and
trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
I. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, and supervisory signals shall
be powered by 24-V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-
supply module rating.
J. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
2.05 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38.
1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to
communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
2.06 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Detectors shall be four-wire type.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a
twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
connection to building wiring.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore
them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on
status.
7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type,
individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm
condition[ and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit].
a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection
units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.
b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection
units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm
control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.
c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 7 of 12

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
C. Ionization Smoke Detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the
supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.
4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific
duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
2.07 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS
A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire-alarm system.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.
2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell.
3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts.
4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply problems, or
internal faults.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 8 of 12

5. Comply with UL 2075.
6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire-alarm system.
8. Test button simulates an alarm condition.
2.08 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.
B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature or a rate of rise.
1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed
temperature.
1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2.09 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal
circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for
system connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting
assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system
connections.
B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464.
C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal
white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in
minimum 1-inch high letters on the lens.
1. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
2. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
3. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
4. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white.
2.10 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with
matching doorplate.
1. Electromagnets: Require no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.
2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3. Rating: 120-V ac.
B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
2.11 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. General:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 9 of 12

1. Include address-setting means on the module.
2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type.
3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.
B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices
for wired applications with normally open contacts.
C. Control Module:
1. Operate notification devices.
2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.
2.12 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
A. Provide network communications for fire-alarm system according to fire-alarm manufacturer's
written requirements.
B. Provide network communications pathway per manufacturer's written requirements and
requirements in NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.
C. Provide integration gateway using BACnet or Modbus or other for connection to building
automation system.
D. Data transmission shall include the following:
1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.
2. Address of the supervisory signal.
3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.
4. Loss of ac supply.
5. Loss of power.
6. Low battery.
7. Abnormal test signal.
8. Communication bus failure.
E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.
F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with
requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."
B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before
making changes or connections.
C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor.
1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 270548.16
"Seismic Controls for Communications Systems."
D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished
floor.
1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 270548.16
"Seismic Controls for Communications Systems."
E. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 10 of 12

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit
doorway.
2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.
3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches
above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: Comply with NFPA 72.
G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends.
H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector,
sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch (Post Indicator Valves, Gate Valves, etc.)
that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.
I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and
horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a
grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.
J. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6
inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.
K. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
3.02 PATHWAYS
A. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.
B. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke
partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and
devices to fire-alarm system.
1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before
making connections.
B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and
systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an
addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system
being controlled.
1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.
2. Magnetically held-open doors.
3. Electronically locked doors and access gates.
4. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
5. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems."
B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 11 of 12

3.05 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground
wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.
B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.
A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation
that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the
"Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter.
b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of
the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the
"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2
requirements in ANSI S1.4.
4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of
Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72
and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing
and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
C. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or
replaced devices and appliances.
D. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,
quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
G. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system
complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for
initial tests and inspections.
A. Comply with UL 864.
B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include
C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00

Page 12 of 12

using software.
1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to
upgrade computer equipment if necessary.
3.08 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 7
SECTION 31 2300
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Removal of surface soils and rough grading the site.
B. Excavation.
C. Backfill.
D. Finish grading.

A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils
B. ASTM C136/C136M - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
C. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort
D. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort
E. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System)
F. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
G. ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of
Soils
H. TxDOT TEX-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density
Relationship of Base Materials, using 5.5 lb rammer and 12-inch drop.
I. Note: Equivalent TxDOT tests may be used for specified ASTM tests with prior approval.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: sample of each type of fill; submit each material sample in three 5-gallon air-tight
containers to testing laboratory.
B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source and material samples. Source
to be approved prior to use.
C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Soil classification, liquid limit, plastic limit, plasticity index,
grain size analysis, and compaction characteristics for proposed and actual materials used,
including manufactured fill.
D. Compaction Density Test Reports.

A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.
B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where designated.
1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing.
2. Prevent contamination.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 31 2300 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 7
3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL MATERIALS

A. General fill may consist of subsoil excavated onsite or imported borrow.
1. For imported borrow, plasticity index shall be in the range of 10 to 18 as determined by
ASTM D 4318.
2. No vegetative matter or debris.
3. No rocks larger than half of the lift thickness.
B. Structural Embankment Fill:
1. Plasticity index shall be in the range of 10 to 18 as determined by ASTM D 4318.
2. No vegetative matter or debris.
3. No rocks larger than 2 inches.
C. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site; friable loam, imported borrow; local borrow. Well graded
and free of roots or rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign
matter. Topsoil or soil mixture shall meet requirements of TxDOT Item 160.

A. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze
samples for compliance before delivery to site.
B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.
C. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
B. Verify the absence of standing or ponding water.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities.
C. Locate, identify, and protect from damage above- and below-grade utilities to remain.
D. Confirm location and elevation of any newly installed or relocated utilities.
E. Provide temporary means and methods to remove all standing or ponding water from areas
prior to grading.
F. Protect site features to remain, including but not limited to bench marks, survey control
points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs, from damage by grading
equipment and vehicular traffic.
G. Protect trees to remain.
H. Protect features to remain as a portion of final landscaping.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 7
3.03 ROUGH GRADING

A. Remove the upper 4-5” of topsoil/surface soils from areas to be further excavated.
B. Remove any wet subsoil and drying or otherwise process to obtain optimum moisture content
prior to use as fill.
C. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.
D. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench slopes greater than 4:1 to key fill material to slope for
firm bearing.
E. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill.
F. Remove and replace soils deemed unsuitable by classification and which are excessively
moist due to lack surface water control.
G. Proof roll exposed design subgrade using a 25 ton pneumatic tire roller, maintaining a
minimum tire pressure of 75 psi. Proof rolling operation shall be observed by Testing
Laboratory. Any soft or unconsolidated zones or areas detected by proof rolling operations
shall be undercut as directed by the Engineer or the Testing Laboratory. Undercut subgrade
shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 12 inches and compacted to a minimum of 95
percent maximum density at a moisture content within 2% of optimum. After the undercut
subgrade has been scarified and compacted, the undercut shall be backfilled with general fill
to the design subgrade elevation in 8” lifts, compacted to 95% of maximum dry density with
moisture within 2% of optimum. The final subgrade shall be reviewed by the Engineer or the
Testing Laboratory.
3.04 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate to accommodate construction operations and to lines and grades indicated on the
drawings.
B. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area
until notified to resume work.
C. Excavate to provide adequate work space and clearance for concrete forms. Do not
undercut excavation face for extended footings.
D. Steep slope and trench excavations shall conform with OHSA standards for shoring and
safety protection.
E. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
F. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.
G. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rocks.
H. Provide temporary means and methods, as required, to remove all water from excavations.
Remove and replace soils deemed suitable by classification and which are excessively moist
due to lack of dewatering or surface water control.
I. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site.
J. Coordinate with facility for disposal of any and all excess material. Do not dispose of excess
material in any stream or watercourse. Do not dump excess material on public property. Do
not dispose of excess material on private property unless authorized by Owner.
3.05 FILLING
A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using suitable materials.
B. All select backfill, backfill and fill required for structures and trenches and required to provide
the finished grades shown and as described herein shall be furnished, placed and compacted
by the Contractor.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 7
C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.
D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet,
frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.
F. Slope grade away from building minimum 1 percent, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual
grade changes. Blend slope to transition at grade changes.
G. Correct areas that are over-excavated.
H. All fill material shall be placed in horizontal loose lifts not exceeding eight inches (8") in
thickness and shall be mixed and spread in a manner assuring uniform lift thickness after
placing.
J. Backfill in close proximity to structures shall be mechanically compacted, using platform type
tampers. Compaction by rolling will be permitted provided the desired compaction is
obtained and damage to the structure is prevented. Compaction by inundation with water will
not be permitted. All materials shall be deposited as specified herein and as shown on the
drawings.
J. The Contractor shall provide equipment capable of adding measured amounts of water to the
material to bring it to a condition within the range of the required moisture content. The
Contractor shall provide equipment capable of discing, aerating, and mixing the soil to insure
reasonable uniformity of moisture content throughout the material and to reduce the moisture
content of the material by air drying if necessary. If the subgrade material must be moisture
conditioned before compaction, the material shall be sufficiently mixed or worked on the
subgrade to insure a uniform moisture content throughout the lift of material to be compacted.
Materials at moisture content in excess of the specified limit shall be dried by aeration or
stockpiled for drying.
K. No material shall be placed when free water is standing on the surface of the area where the
material is to be placed. No compaction of material will be permitted with free water on any
portion of the material to be compacted. No material shall be placed or compacted in a
frozen condition or on top of frozen material. Any material containing organic materials or
other unacceptable material previously described shall be removed and replaced with
acceptable material prior to compaction.
L. Each lift of compacted material shall be compacted by the designated number of coverages
of all portions of the surface of each lift by a smooth drum vibratory roller for granular material
having a static weight not less than 5,500 pounds, a sheepsfoot roller for cohesive material
exerting a pressure of 250 psi on the surface of the feet, or equivalent equipment, prior to
commencement of the work. One coverage is defined as the condition obtained when all
portions of the surface of the backfill material have been subjected to the direct contact of the
compactor. The compactor shall be operated at a forward speed not exceeding 40 feet per
minute.
M. Compaction shall be performed with equipment suitable for the type of material being placed.
The contractor shall select equipment which is capable of providing the minimum density
required by these Specifications. The gross weight of compacting equipment shall not exceed
7,000 pounds within a distance of ten feet (10') from the wall of any existing structure or
completed structure under this contract. Equipment shall be provided that is capable of
compacting in restricted areas next to structures and around piping. The effectiveness of the
equipment selected by the Contractor shall be tested at the commencement of compacted
material work by construction of a small section of material within the area where material is
to be placed. If tests on this section of backfill show that the specified compaction is not
obtained, the Contractor shall increase the amount of coverages, decrease the lift
thicknesses or obtain a different type of compactor.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 7
N. Particular care shall be taken to compact structure backfill which will be beneath pipes, roads,
or other surface construction or structures. Wherever a trench passes through backfill
beneath pavement or structure, the backfill shall be placed and compacted to an elevation
twelve inches (12") above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated. Compacted
areas, in each case, shall be adequate to support the item to be constructed or placed
thereon.
O. The compaction requirements specified are predicated on the use of normal materials and
compaction equipment. In order to establish criteria for the placement of a controlled fill so
that it will have compressibility and strength characteristics compatible with the proposed
structural loadings, a series of laboratory compaction and/or compressive strength tests will
be performed on the samples of materials submitted by the Contractor. From the results of
the laboratory tests, the final values of the required percent compaction, the allowable
compaction moisture content range, and the maximum permissible lift thickness will be
established for the fill material and construction equipment proposed.
P. If the tests indicate unsatisfactory compaction or moisture content, the Contractor shall
provide the additional compaction necessary to obtain the specified requirement at no
additional cost to the Owner until the specified requirement is obtained. This work shall
include complete removal of unacceptable (as determined by the Testing Laboratory) fill
areas and replacement and recompaction until acceptable fill is provided.
Q. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
R. Maintain temporary means and methods, as required, to remove all water while fill is being
placed as required, or until directed by the Engineer. Remove and replace soils deemed
unsuitable by classification and which are excessively moist due to lack of dewatering or
surface water control.
3.05 BUILDING PAD PREPARATION
A. Remove topsoil and excavate the upper 24” of existing soil beneath the building foundation
area. Extend excavation 2 feet minimum on each side of structure or footing unless otherwise
B. Scarify the exposed surface at the bottom of the excavation to a depth of 12”. Moisture
condition and compact the subgrade to 95% of maximum dry density with moisture content
within 2% of optimum as determined by ASTM D698.
C. Replace 24” of existing soils, moisture conditioning and compacting in 8-inch loose lifts to
meet 95% of maximum dry density with moisture content ranging from -2% to +4% of
optimum as determined by ASTM D698.
D. Place additional structural embankment fill in 8” loose lifts, compacting to at least 95% of
maximum dry density with moisture content within 2% of optimum by ASTM D698, to within
6” of the elevation of the bottom of the building slab.
E. The uppermost 6 inches of material within the building pad should consist of flexible base
course material meeting TxDOT Item 247 Class 2, Grade 2. This layer should be compacted
to a minimum effort of 98% and moisture content within 2% of optimum as determined by
ASTM D1557.
F. A vapor barrier consisting of 15 mil plastic should be placed between the completed pad and
the concrete slab on grade.
3.05 PAVEMENT AREA PREPARATION
A. Beneath pavements, remove surface soil/vegetation and excavate to the required subgrade
elevation.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 7
B. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 12”. Recompact and moisture condition to achieve 95% of
maximum dry density and moisture within -2 to +4% of optimum per ASTM D-698.
C. Refill over-excavated areas with properly compacted general fill material in 8” lifts, compacted
to 95% of maximum dry density with moisture within 2% of optimum.
D. The surface of the subgrade for street excavations shall be finished to the lines and grades
as established, and be in conformity with the typical sections shown on the plans. Any
deviation in excess of one-half inch in cross section, and in a length of sixteen feet, measured
longitudinally, shall be corrected by loosening, adding, or removing material, reshaping and
compacting by sprinkling and rolling.
E. The surface of the completed roadway subgrade shall be graded to ensure positive drainage
away from the structure. Low areas in the subgrade are not allowed, regardless of the
grading of the pavement surfacing.
F. Grading of the prepared subgrade shall be observed and confirmed by the testing agency
prior to placement of paving materials.
3.06 FINISH GRADING

A. Before Finish Grading:
1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected.
2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted.
B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1-1/2 inch in size. Remove soil
contaminated with petroleum products.
C. Keep source and stockpile areas drained during the period of topsoil removal and leave them
in a neat condition when removal is complete.
D. Before placing topsoil, cultivate the area to a depth of 4 in. Spread the topsoil on excavated
areas to a uniform loose cover at a minimum thickness of 4 in. or at the thickness specified in
the plans.
E. Where required, place topsoil in areas indicated on drawings. Water and roll the topsoil with a
light roller or other suitable equipment. If the topsoil settles below the established grade after
the application of water and light rolling, additional topsoil shall be added and sprinkled with
water and rolled as directed by the Engineer.
G. Place topsoil during dry weather.
H. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.
I. Near plants, buildings, and curbs spread topsoil manually to prevent damage.
J. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of
subgrade.
K. Lightly compact placed topsoil.
L. Maintain stability of topsoil during inclement weather. Replace topsoil in areas where surface
water has eroded thickness below specifications.
M. Finished grade as presented on plans is finished grade of all required materials. Prepare site
as required to ensure that thicknesses of topsoil and sod are accounted for.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 0.10 foot (1-3/16 inches) from required elevation.
B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 0.04 foot (1/2 inch).
C. In any case, positive drainage shall be maintained and directed away from any structures and
as indicated on the plans.

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 7
3.08 REPAIR AND RESTORATION

A. Existing Facilities, Utilities, and Site Features to Remain: If damaged due to this work, repair
or replace to original condition.
B. Trees to Remain: If damaged due to this work, trim broken branches and repair bark
wounds; if root damage has occurred, obtain instructions from Engineer as to remedy.
C. Other Existing Vegetation to Remain: If damaged due to this work, replace with topsoil and
sod and/or vegetation of equivalent species and size.

A. Perform compaction density testing in accordance with the Geotechnical Report.
1. Subgrade density
1 test per 2,500 sf under pavement or structure
1 test per 10,000 sf other areas
2. Fill material and Flexible Base Density
1 test per 2,500 sf per each lift under pavement or structure
1 test per 10,000 sf per each lift in other areas
3. Utility Trench Density
1 test per 25 linear feet of trench under pavement or structure
1 test per 50 linear feet in other areas
3.10 CLEANING
A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil and/or other debris in accordance with project
requirements.
B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.
END OF SECTION

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V12150-F-0001 000 00
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
SPC V12150-F-0001 000 00

UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 1 of 7
SECTION 32 1600
SITE PAVEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Subgrade Preparation Beneath Pavement
B. Flexible Base
C. Recycled Asphalt Pavement
D. Portland Cement Concrete Driveways and Dumpster Pads
E. Miscellaneous Site Concrete (Curbs, Sidewalks, and Riprap)

A. Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, unless
otherwise shown or specified.
1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort
2. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort
3. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System)
4. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place
by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
5. Texas Department of Transportation 2014, Standard Specification for Construction and
Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges.
5. TxDOT TEX-236-F: Determining Asphalt Content from Asphalt Paving Mixtures by the
Ignition Method
6. TxDOT TEX-418-A: Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
7. TxDOT TEX-448A: Flexural Strength of Concrete Using Simple. Beam Third-Point
Loading

A. Testing Services
1. General: Testing of materials and of compaction requirements for compliance with
technical requirements of the Specifications shall be the duty of a testing laboratory as
provided for by the specifications for this Project.
2. Testing Services: The testing laboratory shall:
a. Test the Contractor's proposed materials in the laboratory and field for
compliance with the Specifications.
b. Perform field density tests to assure that the specified compaction of surface and
base course materials has been obtained.
c. Report all test results to the Engineer and the Contractor.
d. Perform concrete testing in accordance with the Project specifications.
3. Authority and Duties of Testing Laboratory:
a. Technicians representing the testing laboratory shall inspect the materials in the
field and perform compaction tests, and shall report their findings to the Engineer
and the Contractor. When the materials furnished or work performed by the
SITE PAVEMENT 32 1600 - 1
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 2 of 7
Contractor fails to fulfill Specifications requirements, the technician will direct the
attention of the Engineer and the Contractor to such failure.
b. The technician shall not act as foreman or perform other duties for the
Contractor. Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any
defective work or materials shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such
defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate the Engineer for final acceptance.
Technicians are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any
requirements of the Specifications, nor to approve or accept any portion of the
Work.
4. Responsibilities and Duties of Contractor: The use of testing services shall in no way
relieves the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full
compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. To facilitate testing services, the
Contractor shall:
a. Secure and deliver to the Testing Laboratory, representative samples of the
materials he proposes to use and which are required to be tested.
b. Furnish such casual labor as is necessary to obtain and handle samples at the
project or at other sources of material.
c. Advise the testing laboratory and Engineer sufficiently in advance of operations
(24 hrs. minimum) to allow for completion of quality tests and for the assignment
of personnel
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Compliance with these specifications for the following:
1. Flexible Base
2. Recycled Asphalt
3. Concrete
4. Reinforcement
B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source.
C. Laboratory Test Reports and mix designs for asphaltic concrete and portland cement
concrete.
D. All paving and base course materials shall be tested and approved prior to delivery to the
site. Samples of materials proposed for use as pavement and base course should be
submitted by the Contractor to the Testing Laboratory for testing. Samples of materials shall
be submitted at least 14 days in advance of its use.

A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.
B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where designated.
1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing.
2. Prevent contamination.
3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Flexible Base
1. Base material shall be crushed or uncrushed as necessary to meet the requirements
hereinafter specified, and shall consist of durable stone or gravel, crushed and/or
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 3 of 7
screened to the required particle size, with or without other approved fine sized materials.
The material shall be from approved sources.
2. The material shall be well graded and when properly tested shall meet the requirements
of Texas Department of Transportation Specifications for Type A or B, Grade 1 or 2
Flexible Base.
B. Asphalt Millings
1. Asphalt millings shall be well-graded with maximum particle size of 1”
2. Recycled asphalt may not contain recycled shingles.
3. Asphalt binder content per Tex-236-F (1 per lot) 4-9%
4. Foreign materials such as vegetation, waste, or debris, will not be allowed.
C. Concrete and concrete materials shall conform to the provisions of the TxDOT Standard
Specifications Item 360, "Concrete Pavement", unless otherwise stated in this specification.
1. Coarse aggregate will conform to the gradation requirements of Aggregate Grade No. 2
2. Fine aggregates will conform to the gradation requirements of Aggregate Grade No. 1.
3. Portland Cement shall be Type II.
4. No flyash shall be used.
5. Concrete curbs may be Class A or P
6. Concrete paving or dumpster pads to be Class P.
7. Concrete riprap, pipe collars, and sidewalks may be Class A or P.
8. Test in accordance with TxDOT TEX448-A or -418-A
D. Dowel bars shall be round smooth steel conforming to ASTM A 36, Grade 60. Coat dowels
with an approved de-bonding material.
E. Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to ASTM A 615 Grade 60, deformed bars. All reinforcing
steel shall be new billet steel.
F. Wire fabric reinforcement shall be cold-drawn from rods hot-rolled from open hearth, basic
oxygen, or electric furnace billeted. Wire shall conform to the requirements of the Standard
Specifications for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM A82 or A496.
Wire fabric, when used as reinforcement, shall conform to ASTM A185 or A497.

A. Where materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples
for compliance before delivery to site.
B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.
C. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The drives and parking areas shall be constructed to the lines, and typical section shown on
the drawings.
B. Verify all survey bench marks and intended elevations for the work are as indicated prior to
performing final grading for pavements.
3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Preparation of the subgrade including compaction shall be completed for the full width of the
roadways and parking areas, or as shown on plans.
1. The subgrade shall be scarified to a depth of 12”, moisture-conditioned, and
recompacted to at least 95 percent (95%) of maximum density and within 2% of
optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 4 of 7
2. Subgrade shall be sloped away from the structure at the same slope of the surface
pavement, with a minimum slope of 1%. See also Item 31 2300.
B. No materials shall be placed on subgrades which are muddy or have water thereon.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION OF MILLED ASPHALT ROADWAY

A. General
1. The roadways and parking areas shall be constructed to the lines, grades, and typical
section shown on the Drawings.
2. Conform to all applicable requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation
Standard Specifications.
B. Flexible Base Course
1. Equipment:
a. All equipment necessary to properly perform and complete the work shall be on
the project prior to beginning the work, shall be subject to the review of the
Engineer, and shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition at all times.
b. Motor graders shall be self-propelled, shall have tandem or four-wheel drive,
shall have a blade length of not less than 12 feet, shall have a wheel base length
(the distance between front and rear axles) of not less than 16 feet, and shall be
tight and in good operating condition and reviewed by the Engineer.
c. Compaction equipment shall be of sufficient weight and adequately loaded to
accomplish the required compaction.
d. Water distributors shall be equipped with positive and rapidly working cut-off
valves, approved spray bars equipped with bituminous nozzles and a power
pump that will insure distribution of water in a uniform and controllable rate of
application. Spray bars shall be so constructed that the effective length may be
quickly and easily altered.
e. All equipment shall meet these specifications and be reviewed by the Engineer.
Equipment may be eliminated or substituted only upon review of the Engineer.
f. Nothing in this section shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for
producing finished work of the quality specified.
2. Construction Methods:
a. General:
It is the intent of this specification to obtain a complete course, or courses, of
Flexible Base of uniform moisture and density, with a closely-knit surface free
from laminations, cracks, ridges, or loose material, and to the surface
requirements hereinafter specified.
b. Placing of Flexible Base Material:
The Flexible Base material shall be placed on the approved subgrade in courses
not to exceed six inches (6") compacted depth. It shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor that the required amount of material be delivered and uniformly
spread and shaped. All material shall be moved from the place where it is
dumped by cutting into windrows. After the material has been cut into windrows,
it shall be sprinkled, spread, shaped, and rolled in proper sequence to prevent
segregation, and as necessary for required compaction.
c. Compaction and Finishing:
Flexible Base shall be compacted to an apparent dry density of not less than 95
percent of the maximum dry density, and a moisture content ranging from -2 to
+2 percent of optimum as determined in accordance with ASTM D-698. Tests for
density will be made within 24 hours after compaction operations are completed.
If the material fails to meet the density specified, it shall be reworked as
necessary to meet the density required. Just prior to the placing of any
succeeding course of Flexible Base, surfacing on any previously completed
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 5 of 7
course, the density and moisture of the top three inches (3") of Flexible Base
shall be checked and if tests show the density to be more than 2 percent below
the specified minimum, or the moisture content to be more than 2 percent above
or below the optimum, the course shall be reworked as necessary to obtain the
specified compaction and moisture content.
d. Finishing:
The surface upon completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical
sections and to the established lines and grades. Any deviation in excess of 1/4
inch in cross-section and in length of 16 feet measured longitudinally, shall be
corrected. All irregularities, depressions, or weak spots which develop shall be
corrected. No ponding areas will be allowed.
C. Recycled Asphalt Surface Course
1. Asphalt millings shall be spread evenly at a uniform thickness on the prepared base.
Use approved rolling equipment complying with TxDOT Item 210, Rolling to compact
each layer. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center,
overlapping on successive trips by at least 1/2 the width of the roller. Do not allow the
loose depth of any layer to exceed 8 inches. Compact each layer until there is no
evidence of further consolidation. Maintain a level layer to ensure uniform compaction.
If the required stability or finish is lost for any reason, recompact and refinish the
subgrade at no additional expense to the Owner.
3.04 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK AND PAVING

A. General
1. Unless otherwise noted in these Specifications, construction methods used to place all
Portland Cement Concrete Paving are specified by TxDOT Standard Specifications
Item 360, "Concrete Pavement".
B. Inspection
1. Verify subgrade is ready to support paving and imposed loads.
2. Verify gradients and elevations of subgrade are correct.
C. Preparation
1. Moisten subgrade to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
2. Notify Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.
3. All forms for concrete work shall be inspected and checked by the Project
Representative to insure their compliance with established lines and grades before any
concrete is poured. The Contractor shall notify the appropriate department at least four
hours prior to pouring of any concrete to have forms checked. No concrete is to be
poured until the Project Representative accepts the forms, foundation conditions,
amount, size, and location of reinforcement.
D. Forming
1. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, and profile.
2. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging
concrete.
3. Place joint fillers vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to form work during
concrete placement.
E. Reinforcement
1. Reinforcing steel shall be grade 60 and shall be placed as shown on the plans. All
concrete shall be continuously reinforced as shown on the plans.
F. Formed Joints
1. Transverse and longitudinal joints shall be constructed in accordance with the details
on the plans and Texas Department of Transportation Specifications.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 6 of 7
2. Joints shall be filled in accordance with the construction drawings.

G. Placing Concrete
1. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts and formed joints are not disturbed
during concrete placement.
2. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break
or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
3. Shrinkage Crack Control: Concrete shall be below the allowable temperature as
determined by the Contractor by using ACI 305 chart (modified). The rate of
evaporation of water from the concrete shall not exceed 0.15 pounds per
square foot per hour. For air temperature, relative humidity and wind speeds other
than what is listed, the next highest temperature shown, next lowest relative humidity,
and next highest wind velocity interval shall be used to determine acceptable concrete
temperature. Contractor is to inform the concrete supplier of the temperature
requirements prior to delivery to the project. The concrete temperature limit shall not be
exceeded at least until fifteen minutes after surface finishing. Appropriate curing
methods shall be used to prevent shrinkage cracks in conjunction with these concrete
temperature requirements.
4. Concrete shall not be poured when wind or weather conditions are such that dirt, sand,
or debris enters the concrete. No concrete will be placed when wind speeds exceed 25
miles per hour.
5. The concrete shall be protected to maintain temperatures of not less than 50°F for 5
days after placement. If aggregate and water are heated, they shall not be heated
above 175°F. Concrete shall not be placed when ambient temperature is less than
40°F.
6. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to anticipate as nearly as possible
changes in weather conditions which would affect the placement and protection of the
concrete and to be prepared to protect freshly placed concrete when sudden changes
in the weather make such protection necessary.
H. Finishing
1. All concrete pavement shall be finished in accordance with Texas Department of
Transportation Item 360.
2. Saw joints to ½” deep by 5/8” wide or as shown on the plans as soon as sawing can be
accomplished without damage to the pavement regardless of time of day or weather
conditions. Use a chalk line, string line, or other approved method to provide a true joint
alignment. Provide enough saws to match the paving production rate to ensure sawing
completion at the earliest possible time to avoid uncontrolled cracking. Promptly restore
membrane curing damaged by sawing.
3. Seal all joints - Remove all foreign material from the joint reservoir and clean the joint
by sand blasting, high pressure air or other approved methods. Do not place sealant in
a wet or damp joint. Do not place sealant when the concrete pavement is below 55 ̊F or
above 90 ̊F. Apply primer when required by the sealant manufacturer. Remove and
replace sealant when placed flush with or above the pavement surface.
4. Light broom finish is required on all walkways.
I. Curing
1. The Contractor shall select one of the methods of curing stated in TxDOT Standard
Specifications, Item 360, Paragraph 360.11, "Curing".
2. If the Contractor elects to use Membrane Curing, the curing compound must be
reviewed by the Engineer.
J. Recordkeeping
1. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air
temperature, and test samples taken.
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
Page 7 of 7
K. Protection
1. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying excessive hot or
cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Test finished surface of asphaltic pavement for smoothness, using a 10-foot straight edge
applied parallel to and at right angles to centerline of areas, at intervals as directed by the
Engineer. Surface course must not deviate by more than ¼ inch in 10 feet.
B. Finished grade shall meet plan elevations within ½ inch.
C. In any case, positive drainage shall be maintained and directed away from any structures and
as indicated on the plans. No bird baths will be allowed; flood test may be required by
Engineer to demonstrate compliance.
D. Paths designated as accessible routes shall meet all ADA requirements for longitudinal and
cross slope. Maximum cross slope of path or slope in any direction at landings and parking
areas shall be 2%. Maximum longitudinal slope in direction of travel shall be 5% unless
provided with hand rails.
3.06 REPAIR AND RESTORATION

A. Pavement failing required material or placement testing shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor’s own expense.
B. Cracking, spalling, or otherwise defective concrete shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor’s own expense.

A. Subgrade (Paving Areas)
a. In place moisture and density by ASTM D2922 – 1 test per 150 sy.
B. Base Material
a. In place moisture and density by ASTM D2922 – 1 test per 150 sy.
C. Recycled Asphalt
a. Prepare test section for development of rolling requirements to achieve maximum
asphalt density.
D. Concrete
a. Compressive Strength by TEX-418-A – 4 cylinders per 100cy or production day, 2
tested at 7 days and 2 at 28 days. If average of 7-day cylinders meets the design
strength, testing of the remaining cylinders is not required.
b. Slump by TEX-415-A – Maximum 4” for formed paving and 1” for slip formed paving.
c. Entrained Air by TEX-416A or -414A, Minimum 3% / Maximum 7%
d. Temperature at Placement – Maximum 90 degrees F.
END OF SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
SPC V700000-0013 000 00
UNCLASSIFIED

2020-11-19 Project Manual SPC V700000-0013 000 00 Part1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2020-11-19 Project Manual SPC V700000-0013 000 00 Part1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Index No.

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

Issued for Construction - June 22, 2020

KNIT Project Number: 190193

Project Manager | Architect: John Sawdon Signature:______________________________

This document has been reviewed and confirmed

Index No. TOC

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

Index No. TOC

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPREESION

Index No. TOC

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

22 47 16 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

Index No. TOC

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

27 11 00 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 4

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

SUSTAINABILITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01 3563 - 1

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

9. Energy Star: Program administered by the US Environmental Protection Agency that

SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01 3563 - 2

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

18. HCFC - Hydrochlorofluorocarbon: HCFCs are generally less environmentally detrimental to

SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01 3563 - 3

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01 3563 - 4

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

35. Waste Management Plan: See Construction Waste Management

1.4 LEED ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS

SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01 3563 - 5

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

1.5 PROJECT COORDINATION

1. Provide coordination associated with LEED required Certification.

1. Provide LEED program meetings, Pre-construction and progress meetings, associated

SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01 3563 - 6

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01 3563 - 7

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

2.2 LOW EMITTING MATERIALS

1. IEQ Credit: Indoor Environmental Quality; Low Emitting Materials:

SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01 3563 - 8

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01 3563 - 9

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

4. Composite wood evaluation. Composite wood, as defined by the

1. Sustainable Sites Prerequisite: Construction Activity Pollution Prevention:

SUSTAINABLITY CERTIFICATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01 3563 - 10

Flexible Project Support Facility (FPSF)

1. Materials and Resources Credit: Construction and Demolition Waste Management